<SHeHIVE 


“O:AMVUOT ayy 


108: ANGELES 


& 


OF CALIFORy, 
OxNa 


wk 


pls MELEE, 


a 


SOF CALFORY, 
1 καὶ 


USHIAINN ape 


XTLBRARYOe 


aT 


404) JO 


% 


OF CAL FOR 


S 


if ae: 
i) STHONYSOL 


QE LIBRARY c 


naval a 


pst05; ἈΝΘΕΙ͂ ΕΓ 


«αἵ τ 


OF-CALI ΓΟ» 
“YOANWuara> 


“USHININI-IAS 


ΔΙΌΣ AG ofl nea 


AREUIBRAR 
SS 
Asan) 


ὙΠ" 


2 


ων 
AANA 
LOSANEELE 


RS 


“ASHAINN ADS? 


AMEUNIVERS 
AWEUNIVER 


τ: υ 
ὦ 


a 


255 


“senna 


888 
ofthe, 
ΠΑ ΔΩ 


well 


lx 


% 


δ᾽" 


WAIN) -40 


g 


»» 


plOS-ANCELES. 


TASHIAINA 


Sy 


Ας 


oO 


we 
NY-SO] 8 


VER 


us > 


AELIBRARY Oe 


we 


Ἔν 


ὡς 


Ὥ 010). 20 
OF CALI POR 


y 


32... f oe 


ὃς 


ON dae 


105 


ΝΟΣ ΝΕ % 


δ All Of 
Jon ims’ 


cAMEUNIVERS 75 


ΠΟ ΒΊΛΙΝΙ: ΠΝ 


a 


ARELIBRARY Ὅς, 


* 


ee 


WaQaTTY): 10° 
OF: Gls 


“SS 


AMEUNIVE 


he 


> == 


gAELIBRARY.O¢ 


aN 
Saanrst 


S 


Gan “ὦ 


LOS'ANCELES, 


δὰ 


gn 
oO 


fs 


+ 


S 


44ers 


aQELIBRARY. 


Δ 


00an 


RARYZ 
‘Gf 
(we = 


AA ΨΕΙΣ BRE 


IBRARY@, 


an 


“ΠΝ }:0 0} 


> 


MISUININD IA 


. 


= 
= 
ie 
Zomaowysor 


A 
= 
ἘΞ 
ἔν 
Si 


0 


ΠΛΙΝΠ 1 
OS:ANCELER 


AUW uaa 


Ἣ OWS Vue So 


SUEUNIVERS/7y 


‘eraonysors™ 
<MEUNIVERS 


δ 


ἍΝ ΟΝ 


ὃς, _<QElIBRARYOs 
HO4IT¥)-40 
OF-CALIFORy, 


10 
R, 


AELIBRARY: 


S 
WaOsITVD 


gELIBRARY.G, 


ANGELES» 


0 


ΝΜ 


“Ayoanvy-40 
_AOF-CAUIFORY, 


— eee ee 
Ϊ 


sp LOSANGELES: 


ἀξ 


SHIAINDAWS 
Φ ΟΝ ΑΝΟΠΕΡ 


SS 


USUIAIND ΤΣ 


Z 
ΝΣ 


ZOANAGTAS 


δι 


τιν 


4. 0F-CALIFO 
OANVUAI 


XE LIBRARY.G, 


S-ANGELES » 


0 
ASHANTI 


Haoans0~ 
-LOF-CALIFORY, 


E-LIBRARY. 


wy 


ss ΟΣ ANGELES 


USNININN 


WHOANVI-AY 
OF-CALI ORY, 


VERS» 


<AMEUNI 
STIIINY-SO1 


Ὑ AAV HAITI 


SMEUNIVERS/7, 


=, 


S7g9NV-SOVS 
“ SMEUNIVERS 


QELIBRARY.O¢ 
10 


N 


d0411V9 


A XE-LIBRARY., 


LOS-ANCELES 
wy 


ASHIAINDA 


A 


4010}. 
OF-CALIFORy, 


xs 


«ὦ 
712. ΝΥ 30] 


OMY Ὁ 


ζ, 


-LOS-ANCELEs; 


AUSM3NINNIYS 
QyslOSANCELER 


OF CALIFORy, 
ANvuarTaS® 


0 


4 


SWEUNIVERS2y, 


Ey 


STONV-SOV® 
AEUNIVERS 


By 


STHWONVSOV 


SELIBRARY.Qe 


NS 


LIBRARY 


τ 


AN 
ΩΝ IT¥2-40 


sAE-LIBRARYG 


LOS-ANGELES» 
US4NNLARS 


“HsOAIWI-I0 


% 
Ὥ 


OF CALIFORS 


ENG 
5 
= 


Z 
5 
= 


OF CALIFORY, 


<UISMIAIN 


ΟΕ 


OF-CALIFORY 


s 
& 
= 
—_, 


LOSANCELES.» 


ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS 
FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 


From H. Humeurey, D.D., Presi-| From the Rt. Rev. Bishop M‘IL- 
dent of Amherst College, at Am- vaINe, President of Kenyon Col- 
herst, Mass. lege, at Gambier, Ohio. 


1 am very happy to see that you have L anticipate the greatest benefits to our 
undertaken to furnish uniform editions | schools and colleges from the admirable 
of the Latin classics for the use of our | edition of the classics which you are now 
grammar schools and higher seminaries | nydlishing, under the superintendence 
of learning. Professor Anthon deserves | and illustrated by the copious and learn- 
and will receive the thanks of the public | ed notes of Professor Anthon. What 
Sor the labour which he has so judicious- your accomplished editor has aimed at 
ly and successfully bestowed upon Sal- ἴῃ his Horace, Cesur, and other volumes 
lust, Cesar, and Cicero. The explan-| of the series, few can have been much 
atory notes or commentaries are more co- | connected with classical institutions in 
prous and comprehensive than those of | this country without learning to be pre- 
any other edition I have seen, and much cisely the one needful thing to their stu- 
better adapted to the wants of young stu-| dents. The object ix most satisfactorily 
dents. Among the most valuable of'| attained. The needed books we have, 
these notes are those which divert atten- | so fur as your series has yet been pub- 
tion to the beautiful uses of the moods lished ; and as to what are yet to come, 
and tenses, and explain the delicate | we have learned from what we have, if I 
shades of meaning and peculiar beauties may use the words of one of your authors, 
that depend upon them, which our lan-| quera summa virtute sumutoque in- 
guage often expresses imperfectly and| genio expectanda sunt, expectare. 
with difficulty, and which young learn- Wishing you the most abundant encour- | 
ers rarely regard. The explanations of | agement in your important enterprise, I 
the force and meaning of the particles | remain your obedient servant, 


are also very useful. ; Cuas. P. M'ILVAINE. 
The historical, geographical, and oth- 


er indexes are also highly valuable, fur- ae 


nishing the student, as they do, with fe- From Wirtiam A. Durer, LL.D., 
licttous illustrations of the text,and much Presidentiom@olambia College, in 


general information. the Gity of New vork. 
The text seems to be settled with much Ὁ : 


care and ability. The editions adopted From the manner in which this under- 
as the basis or referred to as authority | taking has been so far executed, as well 
are those in the highest repute among | as from the established character and 
scholars. The typographical execution | reputation of Professor Anthon as a 
ws very fine, and this is a high merit. | scholar, his experience as an instructer, 
The wretched reprints of foreign editions | and the accuracy and judgment previous- 
of the classics, got up in cheap offices, | ly evinced by him as an editor and com- 
on wretched paper, with incompetent | mentator, I can entertain no doubt of the 
proof-readers and no editors, to which, | success of the enterprise, so far as his 
until within a very few years, our stu- | editorial labours and your own skill and 
dents have been universally condemned, | experience as publishers aré concerned ; 
have, by taking them young, been as \ and I trust that, from the increasing 
successful inmaking them uncertain and | value of classical studies in the estima- 
inaccurate scholars as if that had been | tion of the public, this judicious and spir- 
one of the main objects of the publishers. | ited effort to facilitate and promote so im- 
School books of all kinds, instead of be- | portant a branch of education will be 
ing the worst (as they often are), should | duly appreciated and liberally rewarded. 
be the most carefully printed books we | I remain, gentlemen, 


have. _ Your obedient servant, 
H. Humparey. W.A. Duer. 


St See SS SS ee Se eS ΘΟ, 


ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. 


From the Rev. B. P. AyDELOTT, 
President of the Woodward Col- 
lege, at Cincinnati, Ohio. 


From some personal acquaintance, but 


much more from general reputation, I 


formed a very high opinion of Professor 
Anthon’s abilities to prepare a full series 
of Latin and Greek Classics for the 
use of schools, colleges, g:c. Accord- 
ingly, as soon as I could obtain the va- 
rious authors edited by him, I procured 
them, and, upon a careful examination, 
was so impressed with their superior 
character, as to introduce them as fast 
as possible into the different departments 
of the institution under my charge. 

The various Delphin editions are very 
good, so far as ancient geography, mythol- 
ogy, usages, §c., are concerned ; but in 
respect to critical remarks and grammat- 
ical illustrations they are of little worth ; 
they were, in general, however, the best 
we had. 

But besides being abundantly full and 
clear in everything archeological, Pro- 
fessor Anthon has done more, in the 
editions of the classical authors prepared 
by him, to unfold the grammatical struc- 
ture, and thus throw light upon the mean- 
ing and spirit of the original, than any 
other commentator whom 1 have consult- 
ed. It is a striking, and, I think, de- 
cisive, proof of their superiority, that the 
students show in their recitations that 
they have read his notes and profit- 
ed by them, which they never seemed to 
me to have done when using other edi- 
tions. 

Some time ago I commenced a careful 
collation of the Greek Grammar of the 
same author with those of Butmann, Val- 
py, &c., making full notes as I went 
along, with the design of preparing a re- 
view of it at the request of the editor of 
an extensively circulated periodical, and 
such was my conviction of its peculiar 

fitness for the use of schools, that I have 
since recommended no other to our pu- 
ils. 

I would add that the neatness and 
taste with which Professor Anthon’s 
classics are got up (though they are far 
cheaper than the Delphin editions) ought 
to form no small recommendation of 
them. Our students purchase, study, 
and preserve them with manifest pleas- 
ure ; and whatever has these effects wpon 
the pupil, will certainly do much to pro- 
mote the cause of sound and thorough 


Letters of Recommendation—continued. 


classical learning, Anthon to any which I have seen. 
B. P. AYDELOTT. A. CHURCH. 


From the Rev. J. 5, Tomiinson, 
D.D., President of Augusta Col- 
lege, Kentucky. 


I take this opportunity to acknowledge 
the receipt (some time since) of four vol- 
umes of the Classical Series of Profes- 
sor Anthon of New-York ; and, after 
a careful examination of them, I can 
truly say that I am more than pleased ; 
7 am delighted with them. The avowed 
object of the publication, that of furnish- 
ing accurate and uniform editions of all 
the classical authors used in colleges and 
schools, is one that, in my judgment, has 
long been a desideratum im literature, 
and I am gratified to find is about to be 
accomplished, especially by one so entire- 
ly equal to the task as Professor An- 
thon has shown himself to be. 

The biographical sketches, commen- 
taries, and annotations with which the 
volumes are accompanied, while they re- 
flect great credit upon the erudition and 
research of the author, cannot fail to en- 
hance to the student, ina high degree, 
the attractions and value of classical 
reading. As an evidence of the estimate 
we place upon the series, we have hither- 
to used it as far as it was attainable, and 
shall, with great pleasure, avail ourselves 
of the opportunity now afforded to adopt 
the whole of it. Allow me to add, that 
the neat, tasteful, and, at the same time, 
substantial style of the mechanical exe- 
cution of the work, fully sustains the 
well-earned reputation, in that respect, of 
the enterprising establishment whence it 
emanates. Respectfully, 

Your obedient servant, , 
- 
7. 5. TomLinson. 


---- 


From Atonzo Cuurcn, D.D., Pres- 
ident of the University of Georgia. 


As far as time and a press of bust- 
ness would permit, I have examined 
these volumes, and am much pleased 
with them. They are, I think, well 
adapted to the wants of, particularly, 
young students, and will, 1 doubt not, 
furnish what has long been a desidera- 
tum in our preparatory schools, viz., 
cheap, yet correct editions of the common 
classics, accompanied with judicious 
English notes. I do not hesitate to 
say that, were I engaged in giving im- 
struction to youth from these authors, I 


should prefer the editions of Professor 


ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. 


From the Rev. M. Hopkins, D.D., 
ἡ President of Williams’ College, at 
Williamstown, Mass. 


Professor Anthon has unquestionably 
done much service to the cause of clas- 
sical learning in this country by his edi- 
tions of the Latin classics, given to the 
public with unusual accuracy and ele- 
gance from your press. His Sallust, 
Cesar, and Cicero cannot fail to find 
their way into very extensive use, and to 
render the entrance upon classical studies 
much more inviting and profitable. 

M. Hopxrns. 


From Witeur Fisk, D.D., Presi- 
dent of the Wesleyan University, 
at Middletown, Conn. 


1 am highly gratified to notice that 
you have commenced a series of the clas- 
sics under the editorial supervision of 
that accomplished scholar, Professor 
Anthon of Columbia College. No man 
in our country is better qualified for this 
office than Professor Anthon. ‘To show 
wm what estimation he is held in England 
as a classical scholar, it need only be 
known that an edition of his “ Horace” 
has been published in London, and the 
publishers informed me that the entire edi- 
tion had met with a ready sale ; showing 
that, notwithstanding the numerous edi- 
tions of this standard work by the first 
scholars in England, the credit of the 
work by our American scholar had car- 
tedr it successfully through the English 
market, and that, too, by virtue of its in- 
trinsic merit. Your editions of his Ce- 
sar, Cicero, and Sallust are now before 
me, and show that there is no falling off 
from the reputation of the edition of Hor- 
ace. The copious notes and commenta- 
ries cannot fail to shed a flood of light 
upon the mind of the young student, and 
will contribute much, I trust, to foster in 
the rising generation of scholars a taste 
for the ancient’ classics. 

Wivzbur Fisk. 


ee 


From Siras Torren, D.D., Presi- 
dent of Washington College. 


_ Thevolumes which I have examined I 
entirely approve, and think them better 
adapted to the purposes of classical in- 
struction than any edition of the same 
authors yet published in this country. 
The well-known ability of the learned 
editor admits no doubt of the excellence 
of the volumes yet to be nublished. 

S. Torren. 


Letters of Recommendation—continued. 


From the President and Faculty of 
Miami University, at Oxford, Ohio. 


These three volumes, enriched by a 
copious and valuable apparatus of crit- 
ical notes, and judiciously arranged his- 
torical, geographical, archeological, and 
legal matters, furnished by so ripe a 
scholar as Dr. Anthon, are specimens 
well calculated to recommend the series 
of which they are the commencement. 
They are well adapted to promote thor- 
ough classical learning, and are entitled 
to a high grade of popular favour. By 
order of the Faculty, 

R. H. Bisuop, President. 


From Rurus Bascock, Jr., D.D., 
late President of Waterville Col- 
lege, in Maine. 


1 have examined with considerable 
care, and with high and unmingled sat- 
isfaction, your recent edition of Profes- 
sor Anthon’s Latin Classics. The dis- 
tinguished editor of Horace has rightly 
judged, that in order to elevate the range 
and standard of scholarship in this coun- 
try, it is requisite to facilitate the thor- 
ough acquisition of those elementary 
text-books which are usually first put 
into the hands of pupils. By the beau- 
tuful volumes which you have now given 
to the public from his pen, more has been 
done to make the student thoroughly ac- 
quainted with those three prime authors, 
Cesar, Sallust, and Cicero, than by 
any other helps within mu knowledge. 
1 need not minutely specify the various 
points of excellence by which these books 
are distinguished. Their practical value 
will immediately be appreciated by teach- 
ers and learners. 

Allow me, gentlemen, to tender, 
through you, my hearty thanks to Pro- 


Sessor Anthon for the very valuable ser- 


vice he has performed in aid of the great 

cause of classical learning. May he 

continue his labours for the public good. 
Rurus Bascock, Jr. 


I> Highly complimentary letters 
have also been received from JERE- 
ΜΙΛῊ Day, D.D., President of Yale 
College ;_ from Jostan QuINcy, 
LL.D., President of Cambridge Col- 
lege ; and from several other distin- 
guished scholars, some of which will 
be published hereafter. 


ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. 


“The great problem in the art of 
teaching is, that the teacher should 
forget that he knows himself what he 
is teaching to others; should remem- 
ber that what is clear as day to him 
is all Cimmerian darkness to his pu- 
pil. This problem, long since proved, 
Professor Anthon has, in our opinion, 
been the first to put in practice ; and, 
in consequence, his are, we may well 
believe, THE BEST CLASSBOOKS EX- 
TANT.”—Knickerbocker Magazine. 


HAS ΤΗΣ “To relieve the youthful 
mind from this bootless burden we 
count no small praise. We hold it, 
indeed, to be among the noblest ends 
to which true learning can ever de- 
vote itself. Weare sure it never ap- 
pears more pleasing than in such con- 
descension ; and, what is still better, 
we know no labour more useful to 
the community. This meed of praise, 
whatever it be, belongs unquestiona- 
bly to no scholar on this side of the 
Atlantic, and to few on the other, 
more truly than to Professor An- 
thon.”—Church Quarterly Review. 


πῶς ‘“Tn all these points Profes- 
sor Anthon’s schoolbooks—if it be 
not a sin to call those schoolbooks 
which clever men might study to 
advantage—are surpassingly excel- 
lent and able; while exercising the 
most painfully critical research, he 
has not disdained the lucidus ordo ; 
he has remembered that he was wri- 
ting for the education of the young 
unpractised mind, not for the culti- 
vation of the ripe and ornate intellect ; 
and hence, while his English notes, 
whether critical or explanatory, are 
as copious and comprehensive as the 
most abstruse commentary, they are, 
at the same time, so simple and so 
luminous as to be within the scope 
of the earliest and feeblest reason. 
.... We have only to say in conclu- 
sion, that every school ought at once 
to adopt this series of works, which 
may, ¢n truth, be looked upon as in- 
troducing a new era into the educa- 
tion of our country, and as reflecting 
much honour on the talent of the 
learned professor by whom they were 
prepared.”—American Monthly Mag- 
azine. 


“They go beyond any of the ele- 
mentary works printed here, which 


vocate. 


Commendatory Notices—continued. 


is saying a great deal.”—Boston Ad-j through our country."—The New- 


“Mr. Anthon is essentially aid- 
ing the acquisition of the ancient 
tongues; and we trust that he will 
enjoy all the success which his val- 
uable labours so justly merit.”— 
Christian Intelligencer. 


... So correct in text, so elab- 
orate in commentaries, so vastly su- 
perior, in clearness, depth, and vari- 
ety of information, to any which have 
gone before, that no man, however 
thoroughly imbued with-classic lore, 
has any right to consider these admi- 
rable works beneath his notice, or 
suited only to the half-formed intel- 
lect of young beginners.” — Christian 
Advocate and Journal. 


“Teachers owe an incalculable 
debt of gratitude to this accomplish- 
ed and patriotic scholar, for the mas- 
terly and successful effort that he 
has made to put them in possession 
of the means of raising themselves 
and pupilsto a high standard of schol- 
arship. He has laid a sure founda- 
tion, on which, with ordinary labour, 
they may rear a superstructure that 
will throw its shadow across the At- 
lantic waves, and win for America the 
veneration of those who have hith- 
erto looked to us as moving sluggish- 
ly on in the paths of Grecian and Ro- 
man literature.”—Lamily Magazine. 


“Professor Anthon deserves the 
thanks of the country for the zeal with 
which he has undertaken, and the 
ability with which he has thus far ex- 
ecuted, his task.”—Rochester Repub- 
lican. 

“ This is a beautiful edition, with 
very valuable notes, by a hand every 
way competent. It forms a most 
valuable addition to the stock of 
useful classics published by the Har- 
pers.”—V. Y. American. 


“ Asa philologist and a classical 
scholar, Professor Anthon has no su- 
perior in the United States : and his 
schoolbooks are deservedly popular, 
both in England and in this country.” 
—N. Y. Times. 

‘On this side of the Atlantic at 
least, and to some extent beyond it, 
Professor Anthon is equally known 
as admirably qualified to edit and en- 
rich a version of the classics for our 
own times and the higher seminaries 
of learning now so thickly scattered 


Yorker. 


ANTHON’S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. 


“To all classes—the maturest 
scholar and the merest tyro, the man 
of elegant and easy learning and the 
laborious student—these admirable 
works will prove a most invaluable 
acquisition.”—Commercial Advertiser, 


“The profound scholar under 
whose supervision these excellent 
works are put forth to the world is 
as well known on the Continent of 
Europe as he is on our own shores ; 
and is, perhaps, the only son of Amer- 
ica who has ever attained that de- 
gree of fame for classical attainments 
which should constitute him an au- 
thority second, if second, only to the 
great names of English or of German 
criticism—the Heynes and Bruncks, 
the Elmsleys and the Porsons, and 
the Bentleys, who have devoted so 
much time and labour to minute in- 
vestigation and clear exposition of 
the great works of old.’—N. Y. 
Courier and Enquirer. 


....‘ The notes are all that notes 
can be; copious but not diffuse, 
learned but not pedantic, luminous, 
and replete with varied and most en- 
tertaining knowledge.” —WV. Y. Even- 
ing Star. 

.... “ The production of a learn- 
ed philologist, and one of the sound- 
est classical scholars of the age, and 
one who, to his learned researches, 
adds the qualification of a most suc- 
cessful practical teacher. No stu- 
dent can listen to him without admi- 
ration and advantage. .... To this 
high praise his editions of the clas- 
sics bear ample testimony ; and, judg- 
ing from the experience and opinions 
of educated men in our country, and 
particularly in Europe, we have no 
fear that their claims will not be ad- 
mitted and awarded to him when 
once clearly and thoroughly under- 
stood.”— Oneida Whig. 


“The series of classical school- 
books published under the superin- 
tendence of Professor Anthon has al- 
ready obtained a celebrity to which 
our own commendation would add 
little extension. These works all 
appear to be collated and edited with 
unusual care, and they are published 
in astyle of elegance too rarely char- 
acterizing our schoolbooks, in which 
it is important that the eye and the 
taste, as well as the understanding, 
should be allured.”—N. Y. Mirror. 


Commendatory Notices—continued. 


“There are few scholars in the 
civilized world, comparatively speak- 
ing, possessed of the critical acumen 
and deep insight into the minutic of 
the Greek language, which alone 
could enable them to produce the 
matter with which the pages of these 
admirable works are stored : there 
are still fewer who, possessing the 
requisite degree of knowledge, are at 
the same time gifted with the tact 
and skill in the science of education 
which are so eminently visible in 
their manner.”—N. Y. Express. 


“ The high character of Professor 
Anthon’s scholarship, and the uni- 
versal favour with which his books 
of elementary classics have been re- 
ceived, render any other notice than 
an announcement of their publica- 
tion unnecessary. The present vol- 
ume exhibits the same untiring re- 
search, and the same accurate learn- 
ing which have characterized all his 
labours.”—V. Y. Gazette. 


“There is a very prevalent and 
very mistaken idea current, that 
schoolbooks are, for the most part, 
mere compilations. Truly good 
schoolbooks are the most difficult 
things in the universe to produce, 
and these are such par eacellence.”— 
The Sun. 


“Professor Anthon is acknowl- 
edged by the best judges, not only in 
this country, but in Germany and 
England, to be one of the ripest clas- 
sical scholars of the age. And this 
series of books will be used in all our 
academies and colleges. The editor 
and the publishers will by this effort 
do a good service to American as 
well as ancient literature.”—Common 
School Assistant. 


“Professor Anthon’s classics are 
too well known to require any com- 
mendation. His editions of Sallust, 
Cesar, Cicero, Horace, &c., have 
gained him a reputation for deep eru- 
dition and correct criticism which 
has been by no means confined to 
this country.”—Providence (R. I.) 
Journal. 


> In addition to the above, numer- 
ous favourable notices of Anthon’s series 
have been recewed from the most respect- 
able sources, from some of which the pub- 
lishers may hereafter present brief ex- 
tracts. 


": 


Ἶ 
i] 
κι 
> 
iv 
δ᾽ 


, 
x 


Pw 


ee ee hr er ee ἊΝ Ν wand Minn pwede St ς - 
en ΩΝ ἔζων ae eee fete τ σον 


ἊΠ  Υ ΝΟ ΤΩΝ 


ΟΕ 


GREEK PROSODY AND METRE, 


FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES ; 


TOGETHER WITH 


LH CHORAL+S CANNING 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS OF AXSCHYLUS, AND THE 
AJAX AND GDIPUS TYRANNUS OF SOPHOCLES. 


TO WHICH ARE APPENDED 


REMARKS ON INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES. 


BY 


CHARLES ANTHON, LL.D., 


JAY PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK AND LATIN LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE, 
NEW-YORK, AND RECTOR OF THE GRAMMAR-SCHOOL, 


NEW-YORK: 


HARPER & BROTHERS, 82 CLIFF-STREET. 


1839. 


Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by 
CuHarLes ANTHON, 


in the Clerk’s Office of the Southern District of New-York. 


@ 1928 


LIBRARY 


uv vd 


το 


THE REV. JOSIAH W. GIBBS, 
PROFESSOR OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES IN YALE COLLEGE, 
ἜΧΗ ΤΟΝ Ww ORK 


is Enscrifed 


AS A MEMORIAL OF FRIENDSHIP, 
AND A TOKEN OF HIGH RESPECT FOR ONE WHO IS EQUALLY CON- 
SPICUOUS FOR HIS ATTAINMENTS IN ORIENTAL LITER- 


ATURE AND COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY, 


PREFACE. 


AN accurate acquaintance with the Prosody and Me- 
tres of the Greek Language is so necessary an accom- 
paniment of true scholarship, that any attempt to advo- 
cate its claims to the notice of the student would be en- 
tirely superfluous. It must be admitted, however, that, 
while all among us are very ready to acknowledge the 
importance of this branch of learning, only a small 
number, comparatively, have been induced to make it a 
subject of careful study ; and the result is, that, in mat- 
ters appertaining to Greek Prosody and Metre, many 
of those who ought to be better acquainted with these 
topics display oftentimes a very lamentable want of ac- 
curacy. What renders this the more provoking is, that 
they who come among us from transatlantic seminaries 
of learning, where metrical studies are much more care- 
fully pursued, frequently undertake to sit in judgment 
upon our violations of the laws of prosody and metre, 
when they themselves are at best but very poor repre- 
sentatives of the metrical knowledge which exists in 
their own countries. 

One great obstacle to the successful cultivation of 


vl PREFACE. 


prosodiacal studies among us has undoubtedly been the 
want of a proper treatise on the subject, which, without 
encumbering the student, in the commencement of his 
career, with any unusual burden, might, nevertheless, lay 
before him such a view of matters connected with the 
prosody and metres of the Greek tongue as would en- 
able him to pursue his investigations in this department 
with satisfaction and advantage. ‘The present treatise 
has been prepared with this view. Its object is to give 
all the necessary information appertaining to Greek 
prosody in a simple garb, and one which may invite 
rather than repel. The more intricate questions con- 
nected with the subject, and on which the ingenuity of 
European scholars loves to exercise itself, are here pur- 
posely omitted, and nothing is offered but what may 
prove immediately and permanently useful. 

The Choral Scanning is intended to initiate the young 
scholar into a department of metrical study, which, to 
the inexperienced, bears a very formidable name ; but is 
in reality, with the exception of a few knotty points that 
occasionally present themselves, a very pleasing branch 
of investigation, and a very inviting field for the inge- 
nuity of the student. Choral Scanning has hitherto 
been regarded by many among us as a mere piece of 
chance-work, with no certain rules to guide or inform 
us when we are correct. It is hoped that the aids af- 
forded in the present treatise on this part of the subject 
will tend to show that there is even here much of cer- 


tainty, and much that may lead to satisfactory results. 


PREFACE. Vil 


The introduction of remarks on Indo-Germanic Anal- 
ogies into a work on Greek Prosody may require some 
explanation. ‘The observations in question were intend- 
ed to accompany a Greek Grammar recently published, 
but were withheld from the fear of making that work too 
voluminous and expensive. ‘They are given here, at 
the end of the Prosody, partly because no other avenue 
may present itself for years by which they can be 
brought forward, and partly out of compliment to the 
distinguished philologist whose name graces the dedi- 
cation of this volume, and who has done more for com- 
parative philology than any American scholar. Had 
he undertaken to write on this subject, the remarks ap- 
pended to the present work would never have appeared. 

The Sanscrit Question, as it has been termed, has 
never obtained a fair hearing among us. On the part 
of its opponents all is mere idle assertion, and the spe- 
cious, but most erroneous and unscholarlike, theory of 
Dugald Stewart appears to them to have laid the con- 
troversy completely at rest. Many of our half-learned 
youth, too, have caught the infection; and believing, of 
course, that what is delivered on this subject with orac- 
ular gravity, sometimes even from a professor’s chair, 
must be the result of careful investigation, and in every 
point of view deserving of being followed, almost regard 
the term Sanscrit as a species of by-word and mockery. 
It is hoped that the observations appended to the pres- 
ent volume will make the matter in controversy more 


clearly understood, until some abler pen shall present 


Vill PREFACE. 


us with a complete and overpowering view of Indo- 
Germanic Analogies. It is mortifying, indeed, to think 
that any remarks at all should be now needed to prove 
that the Sanscrit is not a mere piece of patchwork from 
the Greek. Yet so it is. What in our own country 
is still regarded as a most ingenious and conclusive 
theory, would, on the continent of Europe, subject the 
individual, who might be bold enough to advocate it, to 


a direct imputation of lunacy. 


Columbia College, Aug. 20, 1838. 


PRAARPRAAWRAAAAAAATARAURAAUAAA VREAACLAAATUAAUCUACATOAA CUA TEAATDADNUWAA 


ΡΒ Ped. 


PLR O.S ΘΟ! 


RAAB WIAA ΛΔ ψψψυννσσυννννννν ννν τυνν τιν ν νιν DAN VEADA PEMA 


GREEK PROSODY. 


I. 


I. Prosopy (προσῳδία), in its common acceptation at the 
present day, treats of the quantity of syllables, or the time 
occupied in pronouncing them. 

II.. The ancient Greek grammarians, however, connected 
with the term a much more comprehensive meaning, and 
made it refer to everything by which the sound of a syllable 
was affected. Hence prosody, with them, included also the 
aecents and breathings." 

If]. Hence it is clear how the ancients came to speak 
of seven proper prosodies, for they included the threefold 
accent, the twofold breathing, and the twofold quantity.? 

IV. Τὸ these seven proper prosodies the ancients added 
what are called the affections of a word, or the znfluences 
upon it (πάθη), and denominated these dnproper prosodies.° 

V. The three improper prosodies were the apostrophe, 
hyphen, and hypodiastole.* 

VI. Hence prosody, in its strict acceptation, is tenfold,’ 
consisting of the seven proper and the three improper kinds. 
In the present treatise, however, we will confine ourselves 
merely to the consideration of Quantity and Metre. 


1. Bekker, Anecdot. Greac. 676, 16. Ὁρίζονται οὖν τὴν προσῳδίαν 
οὕτως, κ- τ. A. Compare Spitzner, Pros. Gr. § 1. 

2. Charoboscus, ap. Bekker, A. G. 703, 24. Ἰστέον ὅτι τριχῶς λέγ- 
εται ἡ προσῳδία, K. τ. A. 

3. Bekker, 683, 22. Χρὴ δὲ γινώσκειν ὅτι τὰ πάθη οὐκ εἰσὶ κυρίως 
προσῳδίαι, ἀλλὰ καταχρηστικῶς, κ. τ. A 

4. Bekker, l. c. 

5. Bekker, 674, 1. Προσῳδίαι εἰσὶ δέκα, ὀξεῖα, βαρεῖα, περισπω- 
μένη, μακρά, βραχεῖα, δασεῖα, ψιλή, ἀπόστροφος, ὑφὲν, καὶ ὑποδιαστολή. 


2 GENERAL RULE. 


II. 


I. Every syllable is either long or short; or, in other 
words, requires a longer or shorter time for its pronuncia- 
tion. 

II. To these two kinds of syllables a third is to be added, 
which is called the common or arbitrary. By this is meant 
a syllable which may be used as long or short; as, for ex- 
ample, a short vowel which may be short or long before a 
mute with a liquid, or a short final syllable which may be 
lengthened by crasis or otherwise.' 


1Π. 
GENERAL RULE. 


In Greek, the vowels ε and ὁ are short by nature, ἡ and 
® are long by nature, and a, t, v, are doubiful. 


1. When ἃ vowelis said to be short by nature, the mean- 
ing is, that it is short by its natural pronunciation, being 
equivalent merely to one short time. On the other hand, 
a vowel long by nature is long by its natural pronunciation, 
being equal to two short times. ‘Thus ἢ is equivalent to ee, 
and ὦ to 00. 

2. Hence it follows, that the short vowel ¢ has 7 for its 
corresponding long one; and the short vowel o, in like 
manner, has ὦ for its long. But in the case of a, 2, v, there 
is no distinct mark or letter by which the eye can tell at 
the instant whether these vowels are long or short, and 
hence they are called doubtful.’ 

1. It is evident, that, in proper metres, the syllable, in itself arbitrary, 
has always the definite quantity of a long or short. Compare the lan- 
guage of Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.c. ϑ, δ 1. “ Quum in numeris 
tempora omnia certa ac definita esse debeant, facile intelligitur, in nu- 
meris ipsis nihil usquam posse anceps esse; 1taque, 81 que inveniuntur 
ancipites syllaba, 1. 6., que breves sint, quum longe esse debeant, vel 
longa, quum debeant breves esse, eas, quod ad numerum attinet, pro tal- 
ibus numerari, quales debeant esse, etsi non sint tales.” 

2. The doubtful vowels were called by some of the ancient gramma- 


rians d/xpova, 1. e., double-timed ; by others ἀμφίβολα, i. e., indefinite. 
Compare Bekker, An. Gr. 800, 27. 


RULES FOR LONG VOWELS. 3 


3. It must be carefully borne in mind, however, that, by 
actual usage, every syllable in any particular case always 
has a definite quantity, either long or short ; and that, when 
we speak of doubtful syllables, we do not mean that they 
have anything doubtful in their nature, or wavering between 
long and short as regards the same word ; but only that they 
have no corresponding long or short marks by which the 
eye can detect their quantity at a glance. 


IV. 
RULES FOR LONG VOWELS. 
1. NATURE. 


I. Every syllable which has an ἢ or is long by nature ; 
as, ἡμέρα, ὥμός, ὅτε. 

II. Every diphthong, or double vowel, likewise makes a 
syllable naturally long ; as, αἴρω, αὔρα, τεῖχος, εὖρος, οἷκος, 
οὖδας, μητρυιά, ἀγορᾷ, &e. 

III. When two vowels are combined by contraction into 
one, the syllable becomes naturally long ; as, dw for ἀείδω ; 
ἄργός for ἀεργός ; τρος for ἱερός. 

IV. Every circumflexed vowel is long ; as, δρῶμα, πᾶσα, 
Kvioa, pupa. 

Eixceptions. 

1. Every final syllable, which is long by reason of a vowel 

or diphthong, can be made short if it stand in the thesis,’ 


and the next word begins with a vowel; and in the epic 
writers this shortening amounts almost to a constant rule ;* 


1. This will be again considered under the head of accent. 

2. The thesis is that part of the foot on which the stress of the voice 
does not fall, and is opposed to the arsis ; thus, in ἡμένη, the first syl- 
lable has the arsis, the remaining two are in the thesis. 

3. The principle on which this exception depends is easily explained. 
The ἡ in ἡμένη, for example, is equivalent to ee, and one of these epsi- 
lons being supposed to be elided before the initial vowel of the follow- 
ing word, the other epsilon remains, of course, short by nature. Tn other 
words, the final vowel of ἡμένη loses, as it were, a portion of its natural 
length, by the sinking of the voice and by the vowel immediately follow- 


4 EXCEPTIONS. 


as, ἡμένη ἐν βένθεσσιν (Hom. Il. 1, 358) ; ἄμφῶ ὁμῶς (Ib. 
3); deyOat ἄποινα (Ib. 57) ; κλῦθί ped ’Apyvpdroe’ (10. 
177), &c. 
2. On the contrary, the long vowel retains its natural 
measure when it falls in the arsis of the foot. The follow- 
ing Homeric verses contain examples of both kinds.! 


Ἡμετέρῷ évi οἴκῷ, ἐν “Apyei, τηλόθι πάτρης. (11. 1, 80.) 
Yiec, ὁ μὲν Κτεάτοῦ, ὁ δ᾽ ap’ Ἑὐρύτοῦ ᾿Ακτορίωνος. (Il. 2, 621.) 


3. Nevertheless, the epic, and, after their example, the 
elegiac poets, sometimes permit the long vowel or diph- 
thong to retain its quantity even in the thesis of the foot. 

4. A long vowel or diphthong, with a vowel following, is 
sometimes shortened in the middle of a word ; as, ἐμπαῖος, 
oloc, vidc, τοϊοῦτος, TovTovi,® Ke. 


ing it. So the w in ἄμφω is equivalent to two omicrons, one of which 
it loses before the following vowel, while the other remains short. In 
like manner, the diphthongs αι in deyOar, and ev in pev, are supposed 
each to lose a vowel. 

1. Here, after one of the vowels has been supposed to be elided, and 
a single short vowel remains, this latter, being in the arsis of the foot, 
receives the stress of the voice, and becomes long again. ‘Thus, in the 
foot ρῶ Evi, the syllable pw is in the arsis, and hence, though one of the 
omicrons composing the omega is supposed to be cut off before the i ini- 
tial vowel of ἐνὲ, and only a single omicron remains, that omicron is ney- 
ertheless lengthened by the stress of the voice falling upon it. On the 
other hand, in the foot oZkdé ἕν, the omega is in the. thesis, and hence, 
after this vowel has lost one of its component omicrons before the next 
word, there is no stress of the voice upon the other omicron, and there- 
fore it remains short. 

2. It is not correct to say that this mostly takes place only in words 
to which a digamma was originally prefixed. Passages frequently occur 
in which these lengthenings are found without the support of the digamma. 

3. Homer only shortens certain forms, of which ἐμπαΐος and οἵος are 
two instances. With the Attic dramatic poets, the shortening of the 
diphthong az is much more rare than that of ov, and occurs principally 
in the words detAaioc, yepaioc, kpvdaioc, and that, too, mostly in ana- 
pestic and dactylic metres. (Compare remarks under the head of Hia- 
tus in the iambic trimeter, page 67 of this volume.) The comic, later 
epic, and epigrammatic poets have proceeded the farthest in this short- 
ening of long syllables. Upon the whole, it must be remarked, that the 
shortening here referred to takes place most frequently in the diphthongs 
ot and ai, which the grammarians never regarded as a full long quantity 
in the thesis of the tone. Hence the ancients attribute to the article οἱ, 
ai, only 13 time. Bekker, An. Gr. 821, 29. Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 8. 


΄ 
POSITION. 5 


11. Pos1rion. 


I. A short or doubtful vowel before two consonants or a 
double letter (¢, ξ, Ψ) is almost always long; as, στέλλω, 
ὄμμα, ἄντάγω, τράπεζα, ἅμᾶξα, δῖψα. 

II. These two consonants may belong to the same word 
with the vowel; as, ἕσπερος, or one of them may belong 
to the same word, and the other to the succeeding word ; 
as, TOV ἀμόθεν ye, ϑεὰ ϑύγατξρ Διός, or both may be found 
at the beginning of the following word ; as, ἄνδρᾷ ϑνητὸν 
ἔοντα. 


Exceptions. 


1. A short vowel before a mute, followed by a liquid (A, 
μη ν, p), remains short, provided the mute and liquid belong 
to one and the same syllable." 

2. This rule, however, of a vowel before a mute and li- 
quid, is itself subject to the following limitations : 

I. Homer and the oldest Greek poets mostly avoid the 
shortening of syllables before a mute and liquid, and 
generally permit it only when the form, followed by p 
or A, could not otherwise be adapted to the verse. 
Hence Homer usually shortens the preceding syllable 
only before Bp, dp, 8p, Kp, πρ, TP, dP, XP, and before 
KA, TA, TA, XA. 

II. In scanning the dramatic writers, the following cases 
must be carefully noted. 

(a.) A short vowel before a soft mute (7, «, 7), or an 
aspirate (φ, x, 8) followed by a liquid, is much 
rather left short than lengthened by the Attic poets.? 

(3.) A short vowel before a middle mute (β, γ, 6), fol- 


1. The syllable, therefore, always remains long, 1. When the liquid 
stands before the mute; as, dépxw. 2. In compound words, whether 
the liquid precede or follow; as, écAau6dvw. 3. When a word ends 
with one of the two consonants, and the next begins with the other; as, 
Epic μεγάλη, λέγουσιν πάντες. 4. When the vowel is long by nature ; 
as, ἔπᾶθλον, μήνῦτρον. 


2. Porson, ad Eurip. Orest. ie Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 1109. 
2 


6 RULES FOR SHORT VOWELS. 


lowed by p, is short in the comic writers, but in 
tragedy is mostly long. 

(γ.) A short vowel before a middle mute, followed by 
any liquid except p, is almost always long. In 
Euripides such syllables are always long ; but in 
fEschylus, Sophocles, and Aristophanes, they are 
sometimes short." 

(δ) The tragic writers peered leave a vowel 
short before the two liquids pv.? 

III. As the epic writers, according to what has just been 
remarked (2, 1), employ this shortening chiefly when 
the word cannot in any other manner be adapted to 
the measure, this circumstance explains why some- 
times even two mutes, as ox, and the double consonant 
¢, neglect length by position, and leave the preceding 
vowel short ; as, for example, before Ζάκυνθος, Φέλεια, 
Σκάμανδρος, σκέπαρνον, ὅτε. 


MW, 
RULES FOR SHORT VOWELS. 


I. A vowel before another vowel or diphthong is, gener- 


ally speaking, short. Still, however, there are numerous 


exceptions to this rule, which will be mentioned in the 
course of the work. 

II. Every syllable which has an ¢ or 0 is short by nature, 
unless lengthened by position or crasis ; as, ἔπος, 


1. Porson, ad Eurip. Hec. 298. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Med. 288. 

2. This is opposed by some critics, and among the rest by Elmsley 
(ad Eurip. Bacch. 1132), but the rule is successfully defended by Por- 
son. 

3. To remove these shortenings, Knight (Proleg. ad Hom. 79) writes 
Δάκυνθος, Δέλεια, Κάμανδρος, &c., and refers, in support of this opin- 
ion, to the coins of Zancle (Messana) of the seventh century B.C., 
which give the name of the place in the old form, AANKAH. Thiersch 
(Gr. Gr. § 146, 8) thinks that this form for the name of Zancle may 
have arisen eS the defective orthography of ancient times. This, how- 
ever, is very unlikely ; and we may cite, in support of Knight’s epinion, 
the οὐχὶ μάραγδον of Asclepiades (Anthol. Pal. vol. 11, p. 501). 


LENGTHENING OF SHORT SYLLABLES. 7 


Exceptions. 


The Greek poets, especially the epic, often avail them- 
selves of the aid of the arsis in lengthening a short syllable. 
This takes place, I. At the end of words; II. In the begin- 
ning of them; II. In the middle of compounds. 


I. Lengthening of short syllables at the end of words. 


1. A short syllable at the end of a word is often length- 
ened in this manner, when the next word begins with a li- 
quid; as, κατᾶ λιπάρην (Il. 6, 64); δὲ μελίην (Il. 20, 
322) ; bdati νίζοντες (Il. 7, 425) ; ἀπὸ piov (Il. 14, 154). 

2. A short syllable at the end of a word is also sometimes 
lengthened in a similar manner, when the next word begins 
with the semivowel o; as, κατᾶ συφεοῖσιν (Od. 10, 238).' 

3. The Attics, in iambic trimeter verse, sometimes 
lengthen the short syllable before p; as, παρᾶ ῥείθροισι 
(Soph. Antig. 704). In the measures which approach 
nearer to the epic dialect, other syllables also occur length- 
ened? 


Il. Lengthening of short syllables in the beginning of words. 


Not only at the end, but also at the beginning of words, 
the epic language lengthens a short or doubtful vowel by 
the arsis, especially where two or more shorts follow. And 
here the following cases may be distinguished : 

1. It happens least frequently that a pure short is made 
long; as, Zépvpin (Od. 7, 119); ξπίτονος (Id. 12, 
423); dtec (Lb. 9, 425). 

2. The doubtful vowels a, ἐ, v, are far more frequently 


1. Such lengthening is observed the most rarely before mutes, and 
east of all before the aspirates ¢, y, 6. ‘The reason 15, that the aspi- 
rates never admit of being doubled in pronunciation, whereas the liquids 
easily are. 

2. Hermann, ad Soph. Antig. 1. c.—Id. El. Doctr. Metr. 45.—Mark- 
land, ad Eurip. Suppl. 94.—Elmsley, ad Eurip. Iph. in Taur. p. 199, 
Lips. ed. ; 


8 RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS. 


made long in the arsis of a tetrasyllable, or longer 
word ; as, for example, in such forms as ἀθάνατος, 
ἀκάματος, ἄνέφελος, anadAapoc, ἀπονέεσθαι, Grodiw- 
μαι, &c. The same usage occurs in many polysylla- 
bles, with ὁ and v; as, Διογενῆς, ΤΙρταμίδης, ᾿Ιταλία, 
ϑυγατέρα, VAakouwpot, &c. In proper names, as Pri- 
amides, Italia, &c., the Latin poets have followed the 
example of the Greeks. 


Ill. Lengthening of short syllables in the middle of verbs. 


1. The epic writers often lengthen by arsis in the middle 
of compound words ; namely, when the latter part begins 
with a liquid; as, διαμελεῖστί (Od. 9, 291); KaTavedwr 
(1b. 490) ; καταριγηλά (Ib. 14, 226)." 

2. The tragic writers have occasionally allowed them- 
selves lengthenings of this kind, especially in proper names; 
as, ᾿Ἱππομέδων, ἸΤαρθενοπαῖος 

3. The lengthening in the middle of the word before other 
than liquid letters is quite rare, and occurs mostly only in 
polysyllabic words ; as, Διζπετέος (Il. 16, 174) ; Δισφανέος 
(Anthol. Pal. 1, 502, Appollonid. 6, 2); ἀπσέρσειε (Il. 21, 
329). 


VI. 
RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS. 


I. The chief object of Greek prosody is to reduce to rule 
the quantity of the doubtful or arbitrary vowels, a, ἐς v. 

If. This is done in various ways, among which the po- 
sition of the accent affords some, though not very extensive 
aid, as may be seen by what follows. 


1. Spitzner recommends, that, in the case of short vowels, the con- 
sonant which follows be doubled ; as, éAAabov, ἄλληκτος (Gir. Pros. p. 
15). It is better, however, to write the consonant singly, and suppose 
it to be doubled in pronunciation. 

2. Compare Hermann, E/. Doctr. Metr. p. 28. 

3. In cases of this kind, many critics have recourse to the digamma. 
(Syitener, de Vers. Gr. Herovc. p. 86.) 


RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS. 9 


Use of accent in determining quantity. 


I. Every syllable marked with a circumflex is long by 
nature ; and, therefore, when this accent stands upon a 
doubtful vowel, it shows this vowel to be long; as, κλῦθι, 
πρᾶγμα. 

II. in like manner, when the acute accent stands upon 
the penult of a polysyllabic word, the final syllable is long ; 
as, ἅγιος, ayia, ἅγιον. So, also, παιδείᾳ, pyntopeta." 

1Π. On the other hand, when a doubtful vowel stands at 
the end of a word, and the penult has the circumflex, the 
final syllable is short; as, KAvOi, mpayya.? 

IV. The final syllable is also short when the acute is on 
the antepenult ; as, τύὐφθητὶ, Ἱζέρκυρᾶ 

V. In dissyllabic and polysyllabic words, when the final 
syllable is short and the penult has the acute accent, the 
penult also is short; as, κρίσις (ὃ), λύσις (Ὁ), πολλάκις (a).* 

VI. As, however, the length or shortness of a syllable 
can be obtained only imperfectly from the accent, it is ne- 
cessary to seek for general rules, which may coincide with 
the usage of the poets. These we will now proceed to 
give. 

I. 
Of the doubtful vowels in the end of words. 


I. Final a is short; as, τράπεζᾶ, iva, ἱππότα, τέτυφᾶ. 


1. A long vowel being ‘equal to two short ones, and the accent which 
stood on the antepenult of ἅγεος being shifted to the penult of ἁγέα, this 
penult becomes, in fact, the antepenult, beyond which the accent cannot 
be thrown back ; the final syllable being now equal to two vowels, and 
compelling, of course, the acute to be transferred to the v. 

2. In this case, when we resolve the word, the acute stands over the 
antepenult, and the circumflex is formed from the union of the acute of 
the antepenult with the grave of the penult ; as, wadAAov, μᾶλλον. Now 
if the last syllable were long here, the acute would fall upon the fourth 
syllable from the end, which is contrary to one of the laws of the acute 
accent. 

3. This follows from what has been said under note 1. 

4, For, if the penult were long in this case, it would require to be 
marked with the circumflex. 


10 EXCEPTIONS. 


Exceptions. t 

1. But @ pure is long ; as, ᾿Αθήναᾷ, φιλίᾷ, σικύᾷ, exe 
cept verbals in τρία ; as, ψαλτριᾶ, and derivatives from 
adjectives in ἧς ; as, ἀλήθεια ; and also ἱέρεια, κώδειᾶ, 
βασίλεια (a queen) ; but βασιλείᾳ (a kingdom), and Ba- 
σίλειᾷ (adj. fem. royal). 

2. The Doric a for 7 is long; as, φάμα, Αἰνείᾳ ; and 
also the Doric genitive in a from nominatives m ας 
and ης ; as, ᾿Αννίθαᾶς, a; ᾿Ατρείδης, a. 

3. Words ending in da and 6a have the a long; as, βα- 
σιλίνδα, Anda, Σιμαίθα, except ἄκανθα and ἠλιθᾶ., 
4. Words ending in pa not preceded by ἃ diphthong ; 
as, Kapa, πήρᾶ, χαρᾶ ; except GyKupa, γέφυρα, bAvpa, 
Képkupa, and the perfect middle of verbs in pw ; as, 

διέφθορᾶ, πέπορᾶ. 

5. Words ending in pa with a consonant preceding ; as, 


2 


ἄγρα, πέτρα, ἀκέστρα; except σφοδρᾶ, σκολοπένδρᾶ, 
Τανάγρᾶ. 

6. All feminine adjectives from masculines in ος ; as, 
δικαίᾳ ; except did, πότνιᾶ, id, and pid. 

7. Duals in a, as μουσᾶ, and vocatives from nouns in ac, 
as Aiveia,> or poetical vocatives of the third declen- 
sion, as Λαοδάμᾶ, ἸΤολυδάμᾶ. 

8. The accusative in ea, from the genitive (third declen- 
sion) in swe; as, Πηλέᾶ, from Πηλέως ; βασιλέᾷ, from 
βασιλέως ; but in Homeric Greek, Πηλέα, from 11η- 
λῆος ; βασιληᾶ, from βασιλῆος." 


1. The length of the final syllable in words ending in da and θα, ap- 
pears to be derived from their Doric origin. Loheck. ad Phryn. 438. 

2. For πεῖρᾶ, μεῖρᾶ, σφαϊρᾶ, &c., have the final syllable short. The 
word ἑταίρα retains the long a, as being formed from érapoc, ἑτάρα, érai- 
pa. Again, Αἴθρᾷ and Φαίδρα take the long quantity on account of the 
two consonants that intervene between the diphthong and final syllable. 

3. But the vocative in a from masculine nouns in ἧς is short. 

4. In Homer (11. 1, 265 ; Od. 12, 630) Θησέα is to be pronounced, 
by synizesis, Θησξᾶ. So also Τυδέα (Il. 7, 222), of which the Homeric 
genitive is Τυδέος. 

5. Even in Attic Greek the ἃ is sometimes shortened. Compare 
Porson, ad Eurip. Hec. 870. 


FINAL ἂν. Ta 


9. Nouns in eva, from verbs in evw ; as, προφητείᾷ, δου- 
Asia." i 
“II. Final αν is short ; as, ἄν, πάμπᾶν, Alay, μέλᾶν, ποίη- 
oay, ἔτυψᾶν. 
Exceptions. 

1. Masculines in av are long ; as, Τιτᾶν, παιᾶν. 

2. The neuter adjective πᾶν ; and hence the Attics ap- 
pear to have taken occasion to lengthen here and there 
the forms compounded with it; as, ἅπᾶν, ἐπίπᾶν, παρ- 
andy. But πάμπᾶν and πρόπᾶν are probably every- 
where decidedly short.’ 

3. Adverbs in ay ; as, λίᾶν, ἄγᾶν, πέρᾶν. On the con- 
trary, 6rav and ὁπόταν follow the quantity of the sim- 
ple av. 

4. Accusatives of the first declension, from a long nom- 
inative ; as, φιλίᾶν, from φιλία; Αἰνείαν, from Αἰνείας. 
But the accusative in av from a short nominative is 
short; as, ποτνίᾶν, from ποτνία ; τράπεζᾶν, from τρά- 
πεζὰ. 

5. The Doric genitive plural of the first declension in 
ἄν, as formed by contraction, is likewise always long ; 
as, μελιᾶν, νυμφᾶν, for μελιῶν, νυμφῶν. So, also, 
the Doric forms derived from those in 7, or produced 
by contraction ; as, ποιμᾶν, ἸΤοσειδᾶν, ᾿Αλκμᾶν. 

III. Final ap is short ; as, ovdp, νέκταρ, μάκᾶρ. 


Exceptions. 


1. Monosyllables in ap are long ; as, Kap, ap. 

2. The adverb γὰρ is properly short ; but before οὗ and 
similar words it very often occurs long in epic lan- 
guage, through the force of the following breathing.® 


.------- 


1. For more special rules concerning ¢&/a, La, ola, and aa, in Attic 
Greek, consult Maltby, Lex. Pros. cc. v. and vil.; of his Prosody, p 


ix. and lxv., ed. 2. 
2. Blomfield, ad isch. Pers. 42. Buttmann, Gr. Gr. § 62, n. 5. 


3. D’ Orville, Vann. Crit. p. 391, seq. 


12 


FINAL a¢. 


IV. Final ας is long; as, Αἰνείᾶς, πᾶς, ἱμᾶς, φιλίας, τύ- 
ψᾶς, ἡμᾶς. 


Exceptions. 


1. Words of the third declension not forming the geni- 


&c. 


tive in avtoc ; as, μέλᾶς, μέγᾶς, λαμπᾶς, σέλᾶς, κέρᾶς, 
ἄς. But τάλᾶς has the final syllable long. 


. The accusative plural of nouns and participles of the 


third declension ; as, Titadvac, τύπτοντας, Toimevac, 
φρένας, &e. (but βασιλέας, from βασιλέα). The accu- 
sative plural of the first declension, on the other hand, 
is always long. 


. Adverbs in ας are short; as, πέλας, ἀτρέμᾶς, ἀγκᾶς. 
. Ac is short in the second person of the different tenses 


which terminate therein; as, ἔτεγξᾶς, τέγξειᾶς, oldde, 
λέλοιπᾶς, πέφυκᾶς. 


. By ἃ license of the Doric dialect, forms in ac, other- 


wise long, are occasionally shortened, and that, too, 
even in accusatives plural of the first declension; as, 
Μοίρᾶς (Theocrit. 2,160); αὐτᾶς (Id. 3, 2); νὑμφᾶς 
(Id. 4, 29). 


Il. Of Final ι. 


. Final cis short; as, ἴφζ, ort, wéAt, τὐπτουσῖ, τίθημϊ, 


Exceptions. 


. But the abridged form xpi (for κρίθη) is long, together 


with the names of letters inz; as, 2, πὶ, &c. 


. The paragogic 1, added by the Attic comic poets and 


orators to certain pronouns and adverbs, is likewise 
long; as, οὑτοσί, νυνῖ, οὑτωσί, &c. So the similar ¢ 
in the words 607, ταυτί, devpt, &c. 


. Adverbs ending in 4, and formed from nouns, have the 


t either long or short, but more commonly short ; such 
as dpoyOi, ἀμαχητί, πανδημί, πανομιλί, ἀπονητί, ὅτε. 


ὃς 


FINAL SYLLABLES. 13 


But those which refer to nations have the ¢ always 
short; as, Σκυθιστὶ, ᾿Αργολιστὶ, Βαρθαριστί, &c.' 


Il. Final ἐν is short; as, τύπτουσῖν, Epiv, πάλϊν, πόλϊν, 
πρῖν, viv, opiv. 


Exceptions. 

1. Final ἐν, making Zvoc in the genitive, is long ; as, ῥηγ- 
piv, ἰκτῖν. 

2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ; 
as, δελφῖν (otherwise δελφίς), ἀκτῖν, ply, ἵν, Atv. 

3. The datives plural ἡμῖν and ὑμῖν, though in several in- 
stances Sophocles makes ἡμῖν and ὑμῖν, and the epic 
dialect has also ἄμμίν, ὕμμῖν. 


Ill. Final ἐς is short; as, dic, Tpi¢, πολῖς, τυραννὶς, ὅτο. 


Exceptions. 


1. Monosyllabic nouns, and those which have two ter- 
minations for the nominative ; as, ἔς, Ai¢, plc, Kic, deA- 
φῖς, ἀκτῖς. 

2. Dissyllables which make the penult of the genitive 
long ; as, ἀχῖς, Badbic, κληῖς, κνημῖς, κρηπῖς, ὄρνις, 
&e. 

3. Polysyllables with two short syllables before the last ; 
as, BaTpayic, καλαμῖς, κανονῖς, πλοκαμῖς, ῥαφανῖς, ὅτε. 
(but βασιλὶς, ixétic). 


παν τὰν 0. Wisse τῷ ee eee τσ 

1. Consult Blomfield, ad Asch. Prom. 216. According to this critic, 
the adverbs in question ought always to be written with a simple vowel 
in the termination. The MSS. fluctuate between ὁ and ec; as, ἀμογητί 
and αμογητεί, ἀνατί and ἀνατεί. On the other hand, Lobeck, ad Soph. 
Antig. 1213, maintains that the diphthong is admissible into the words 
derived from adjectives ; but in those from substantives he would make 
the formation conform strictly to the radical word. Spitzner, Pros. Gr. 

. 48. 
Ἢ 2. “Opvic, however, has the last syllable often short in tragedy, though 
always long in comedy (Porson, ad Eur. Hec. 204). In Homeric Greek 
the final syllable is long. Spitzner thinks that we must assume a double 
form, ὄρνις, ioc, iv, and also dpvioc, ἵν. The yet extant plural ὄρνεις 
favours this opinion. 
B 


14 FINAL SYLLABLES. 


4. Adjectives in ἐς, compounded from long forms, are 
likewise long in the final syllable ; as, ἁλικρηπῖς, Ba- 
θυκνημῖς, &e. 


Ill. Of Final v. 


I. Final v is short; as, ov, yovd, γλυκῦ, daxpv, Gord. 


Exceptions. 


1. The third person singular of the imperfect and second 
aorist of verbs in vue; as, £00, ἔφῦ ; also of the sec- 
ond person imperative in one of its forms; as, deckvv,! 
ὀμνῦ. 

2. The names of the letters wv, vd ; and fictitious words ; 
as, ὕ, ypv, το. 


II. Final vy is short ; as, σῦν, πολῦν, Bpadvy, ζευγνῦν. 


Exceptions. 


1. The accusative of nouns which have ὃς in the nom- 
inative ; as, ἰλῦν, ἰχθῦν, ἰσχῦν, ὀφρῦν, μῦν. 

2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ; 
as, Φόρκυν (otherwise Φόρκυς) ; or ὕνος in the geni- 
tive ; as, μόσσῦν. 

3. The first person singular imperfect and second aorist 
of verbs in vt ; as, ἔφῦν, Eddy, ἐδείκνῦν, ἐζεύγνῦν. 
4. Νῦν, when equivalent to nunc. Novy, the enclitic, 
though short in Homer (who uses also vv), is often long 

in tragedy, and always long in comedy.’ 


III. Final vp is long; as, πῦρ, μάρτῦρ. Yet, in the ob- 
lique cases, these make πῦρος, Tipu; μάρτῦρος, wapTvp.s 


1. The third person imperative, decxvi7o, follows the analogy of deck- 
νῦθι. 

2. Monk. ad Eurip. Alcest. 1096. Id. in Mus. Crit vol. 1., p. 79. 
An opposite doctrine is maintained, however, by Ellendt, Lex. Soph. 
vol. ii., p. 183. 

3. The Etym. Mag. 506, 20, considers substantives in vp as scarcely 
Greek, and admits only such as μάρτυρ, ψίθυρ, &c., but rejects forms 
like Képxvp, “IAAvo, to which Arcadius, de Acc. 19, 17, adds also Acyup. 


INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 15 


IV. Final υς is short; as, βαθῦς, κόὀρῦς, πῆχῦς, πρέσβῦς, 
| βαρῦς, ὀξῦς. 


Exceptions. 

1. Nouns in v¢, which have vog in the genitive ; as, ἀχ- 
Ave, ἰλῦς, ἰχθῦς, νηδῦς, ὀφρῦς, πληθὺς." 

2. Nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
tive ; as, Φόρκῦς. 

3. Monosyllables ; as, μῦς, ave. 

4. Terminations of verbs in vw; as, δείκνῦς (second per- 
son singular present), δεικνὺς (participle), ἐδείκνῦς, &e. 


Il. 
Of the doubtful vowels in the increment of nouns. 


I. A in the increment of nouns is generally short ; as, 
σῶμα, TOG ; κρέας, ἄτος ; νέκταρ, ἄρος ; μέλαν, ἄνος ; av- 
λαξ, ἄκος ; "Ἄραψ, ἄβος ; μάκαρ, ἄρος ; ἅλς, ἄλος ; τάλας, 
ἄνος, &c. 


Exceptions. 


1. All increments in avoc are long, except TaAdvoc, μέλᾶα- 
voc ; as, Τιτάν, ἄνος ; Πάν, mee ᾿Ανίαν, ἄνθος πα- 
ἐάν, ἄνος, &e. 

2. All increments in axoc, from nominatives in αξ pure, 
are long ; as, οἴαξ, ἄκος; ῥύαξ, ἄκος; φαίαξ, ἄκος ; 
φλύαξ, ἄκος, &c. 

3. A is long in the dative plural of nouns, &c., that have 
a long penult in the genitive singular ; as, γίγας, av- 
TOC, GOL; τύψας, αντος, Gor; πᾶς, avToc, dot. But 
those which are syncopated in the singular have the a 
short ; as, avdpdot, πατρᾶσι. 

4, Add the following examples of nouns which have ὦ in 
the increment long. 


3. But κλιτῦς, Eurip. Hippol. 227, and always so in tragedy. Also 
épxic. Monk, ad Eurip. l. ὁ. 


16 INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 


“κέρας, ἄἅἄτος, 1 ϑώραξ, ἄκος, | πόρπαξ, ἄκος, 


φρέαρ, ἄτος, | ἱέραξ, ἄκος,  κώδαξ, ἄκος, 
κράς, ἅτος, | κόρδαξ, ἄκος,  λάθραξ, ἄκος, 
ψάρ, ἄρος, | pas, ἄγος, | σύρφάξ, ἄκος, 
κάρ, ἄρος, | φέναξ, ἄκος, βλάξ, ἄκος. 


II. I is short in the increment of neuter nouns ; as, μέλι, 
troc.; and in masculines and feminines which have the 
genitive in voc, ἐδος, or ἐτος ; as, πόλις, tog ; ἔρις, ξοΐδος ; 
χάρις, ἵτος. 


Exceptions. 


1. The following, however, have a long penult: 

ἁψίς, idoc, | κνημίς, τδος, | σφραγίς, ἴδος, 
βαλθίς, ἴδος, | Kpyntic, ἴδος,  σχοινίς, ἴδος, 
καρίς, idoc, κρηνίς, ἴδος, | χειρίς, idoc, 
κηλίς, δος, | vebpic,  idoc, | χυτρίς; ἴόος; 
κληΐς, δος, | νησίς, δος, | ψηφίς, idoc. 


2. Add the following : 
βατραχίς, idoc, 


Kavovic, idoc, 
πλοκαμίς, δος, 
ῥαφανίς, idoc, 
σισαμίς, idoc, 


And other trisyllables which have the two prior syl- 
lables short, except βασιλίς, idoc, and ἱκετίς, idoc. 


III. 1 is long in the increment of masculine and feminine 
nouns which have two terminations in the nominative ; as, 
δελφίς or δελφίν, νος ; ἀκτίς or ἀκτίν, tvoc. 

IV. 115 also long in the increment of monosyllables ; as, 
Viv, Yivoc ; ic, ἵνός ; λίς, λιτός ; ϑρίψ, ϑρῖπός ; excepting, 
however, τίς, τίνος, and Δίς, Atéc. 

V. Lis also long in nouns in ἐς, ἔθος ; vy, ἵἴπος ; ιξ, ἴγος ; 
and εξ, ikoc ; as, ὄρνις, ἴθος ; τέττιξ, ἴγος ; μάστιξ, ἔγος, 


1. Maltby, Lex. Pros. ο. iv., p. lix., 2d ed. (Dissertation on the words 
κέρας, κρέας, and φρέαρ). 


INCREMENT OF VERBS. 1 


«κα ἰαεὶ ; φοίνιξ, tkoc. Homer, however, has Θρήϊκες al- 
ways short. 

VI. But cis generally short in nouns in ἐψ, t6o¢ ; and ἐξ, 
ἔχος ; as, χέρνιψ, ἴθος ; στίξ, ἴχος ; Opis, τρῖχός ; μάστιξ, 
iyoc, “a gum.” 

VIL. Y is short in the increment of monosyllables in ve, 
Voc ; as, δρῦς, δρῦός ; μῦς, μῦός. 

VIII. Υ is also short in the increment of neuters in v; 
as, δάκρυ, Voc. 

IX. Y is likewise short in the increment of masculines 
and feminines in ὃς and up; as, νέκυς, Voc; ἰλύς, iAvoc ; 
ἰχθύς, voc ; μάρτυρ, ὕρος ; and also in the neuter noun πῦρ, 
πῦρός. But dadvc, ddoc, and κωμύς, ὕθος, must be excepted. 

X. Y is generally short in the increment of nouns in vg 
and vy ; as, ὄνυξ, ὕχος ; Χάλυψ, ὕθος ; except δοίδυξ, ὕκος ; 
KOKKVE, ὕγος ; κήρυξ, ὕκος ; KHVE, ὕκος ; γύψ, ὕπος ; γρύψ, 
πος ; while Βέθρυξ has either ὕκος or vKoc. 

XI. Nouns of two terminations, in ὃς or vy, have v long 
in the increment; as, Φόρκυς or Φόρκυν, ὕνος. 


1Π. 
Of the doubtful vowels in the increment of verbs. 


I. The quantity of the penult in the present and imperfect 
remains the same through all the voices and moods ; as, 
κρίνω, ἔκρινον, κρῖνε, κρίνοιμι, κρίνω, κρίνειν, κρίνων, Kpl- 
νομαι, Expivouny, κρίνου, &c. 

II. Most tenses have the same quantity in the penult as 
those from which they are formed; as, ἔτῦπον, TUT@, ἐτῦ- 
THY, TUTHOoMaL, TETUTA, ETETUTELY, KC. 

Ill. Verbs in aw; ἔζω, and fw, increase short in the fu- 
ture ; as, ἁρπάζω, dow ; νομίζω, tow; κλύζω, Vow. 


1. Μάστιξ, tyoc, “a lash ;” but μαστίξ, tyoc, a species of gum. 

2. The poets, especially the epic, not unfrequently lengthen the forms 
of verbs in ζω by doubling the sibilant letter, and that not merely in the 
arsis, but also in the thesis. Thus, αἰχμὰς 0 αἰχμάσσουσι (Il. 4, 324) ; 
and ἑτοιμασσαίατ᾽ ᾿Αιήνῃ (Ib. 10, 571), &e. 

ὃ Be 


ad 


18 INCREMENT OF VERBS. 


IV. Verbs in aw, when aw is preceded by a vowel, and 
all verbs in paw, have the penult of the future long; as, 
ἐάω, GOW ; Opaw, Gow; dpaw, Gow.' 

V. Verbs in a, when preceded by a consonant other 
than p, have the penult of the future short; as, σπάω, dow ; 
γελάω, aow. 

VI. Verbs in oow shorten the penult of the future, drop- 
ping one of the sigmas; as, πλάσσω, dow ; ἱμάσσω, dow. 

VII. Liquid verbs, or those ending in Aw, pw, vw, po, 
shorten the penult of the future, but in the first aorist active 
invariably take, either a long vowel or a diphthong; as, 
ϑάλλω, ϑαλῶ, ἔϑηλα;; TEAAW, τελῶ, ETELAA; φαίνω, φανῶ, 
ἔφηνα ; δαρθύνω, δαρθυνῶ, ἐδάρθῦνα ; σπείρω, σπερῶ, εσ- 
παρκα ἶ 

VII. Verbs in cw, not proceeding from roots in ζω, in- 
crease long in the future ; as, κυλίω, low; Koviw, iow. But 
ἐσθίω has the « everywhere short.’ 

IX. Dissyllabic verbs in vw are for the most part long in 
the future and aorist; as, δύω, δῦσω, ἔδῦσα ; τρύω, τρῦσω, 
étpvoa. Except πτύω, πτύσω, ἔπτῦσα ; κύω, KVOW, ἔκῦσα ; 
βλύω, βλύσω, ἐβλύῦσα; and one or two others. 

X. Polysyllabic verbs in ὕω, on the other hand, are for the 
most part long in the penult of the future and aorist ; as, 
ἰσχύω, ἰσχῦσω, Loyioa ; δακρύω, δακρύσω, ἔδακρῦσα, Kc. 

ΧΙ. But polysyllables in ὕω are for the most part short ; 
aS, ἀνύω, ἀνὕσω ; ἀρύω, ἀρύσω ; ἀφύω, ἀφύσω, ke. 

XII. Verbs in vw, which have lengthened forms in vue, 


1. Except κεράω, dow ; and περάω, dow, in the transitive signification ; 
for περάω, “I pass over,” has the a long. Clarke, ad Il. 1, 67. 

2. The principle on which the change takes place is this: in the fu- 
ture the tone rests onthe last syllable, which is contracted, and hence 
the previous syllable is short. In the aorist, however, the augment in- 
creases the number of syllables, and the tone consequently changes and 
travels back towards the root. 

3. Compare Draco, de Metr. 22, 25; 67, 7.—Etym. Mag. 575, 31. 
The apparent contradiction among the ancients, it being elsewhere 
(Const. Lasc. 247, 20.—Theod. Gaz. 77) laid down, that, except in ἐσ- 
iw, « is short in these penults, is ascribed by Spitzner and others to 
corruptions in those passages. Gr. Pros. p. 87. 


INCREMENT OF VERBS. 19 


for the most part shorten the doubtful vowel ; as, δεικνύω, 
ἐδείκνῦον ; μιγνύω, éuiyvvov. The verbs dvw and ddw 
are not exceptions to this rule, since they do not furnish 
complete forms in vt, but only in the second aorist. 

XIII. Polysyllables in ve have the v everywhere short, 
except in the singular number of the present tense, active 
voice, and in the third person plural of the same tense and 
voice ; as, ζεύγνῦμι, Cevyvvor; but ζεύγνύμεν, ζεύγνῦτε, 
ζεύγνῦτον, Cevyvovat, Xe. 

XIV. On the other hand, dissyllables in vue have the v 
everywhere long; as, 0001, δῦναι, ἔδῦτε, το. 

XV. The penult of the second future and second aorist 
is always short ; as, dayO, AG00, κρυθῶ, λιπῶ, ἔδᾶμον, ἔλᾶ- 
Gov, éxpvborv, ἔλίπον. With the single exception of the 
verb πλήσσω, which, in the epic dialect, retains the long 
vowel in the penult ; as, ἐπλήγον, ἐπλήγην." 

XVI. The third persons plural in aoz, and the feminine 
participle in aoa, are always long ; as, λελοίπᾶσι, κεκρύφαᾶ- 
σι, ἱστᾶσι; τύὐψᾶσα, γράψᾶσα, &c? 

XVII. The augment, which, in verbs beginning with v 
or 4, consists merely in lengthening this vowel, makes, of 
course, the initial syllable of the historical tenses long ; as, 
ἱκετεύω, LKETEVOY, τκέτευσα. 

XVII. The doubtful vowel in the penult of the perfect 
active strictly follows the measure of the root in the pres- 

nt ; hence the middle syllable is short in most forms which 
have a in the present ; as, γράφω, yéypada ; but fluctuates 


1. Clarke, ad. Il. 3,31. The Attic tragedians retain this in the sim- 
ple form (Eurip. Orest. 487; Electr. 1148) ; but, on the contrary, shorten 
the compounds ; as, ἐκπλᾶγεῖσα (Med. 8), ἐκπλᾶγεντες (Rhes. 287). In 
like manner, besides ἐτμᾶγην in the passive, we have also ἐτμήγην and 
the like in later authors. So in Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1052, ἀποτμηγέντες. 

2. The old form of the third person plural ended in -v7t; the T was 
afterward changed into o and the v thrown out, the syllable, however, 
remaining long ; as, λελοίπᾶντι, λελοίπᾶνσι, λελοίπασι. So the primi- 
tive form of the feminine participle ended in -voa, having the previous 
vowel long, and this afterward dropped the ν, but retained the long quan- 
tity; as, τύψᾶνσα, τύψᾶσα. 


20 INCREMENT OF VERBS. 


in those with ὁ and v; as, τρίθω, τέτριφα ; but ῥίπτω, ἔῤ- 
plida ; and again, κύπτω, κέκῦφα ; but κρύπτω, κέκρύφα. 

XIX. The perfect miadle, with the exception of those 
which have a in the root and change it into ὁ (as, τρέφω, 
ἔτρᾶφον, τέτροφαλ, has usually a long vowel in the penult ; 
as, ἄγω (I break), aya; ἁνδάνω, édda; κράζω, κέκρᾶγα ; 
ῥιγέω, Eppiya; τρίζω, τέτρῖγα ; φρίσσω, πέφρτκα, &c. But 
πέφρᾶδα and some others are found short; and, in old forms, 
the first vowel was shortened by position, after rejecting 
the intermediate consonant; as, Bé6aa, yeyda, δειδία, πεφύα. 

XX. Perfects, with what is called the Attic reduplication, 
have usually, in polysyllabic verbs, a short vowel in the pe- 
nult ; as, ἀλέιφω, ἀληλῖφα ; ὀρύσσω, ὀρώρῦχα. Still, how- 
ever, in Ionic poets, forms of this kind are occasionally 
lengthened ; as, εἰλήλουθα, ὑπεμνήμῦκε (Il. 22, 491). 

ΧΧΙ. When ais inserted in the third person plural of 
the perfect or pluperfect, or of the optative, it is always 
short ; as, ὀρώρέχᾶτο, κεκλίαται, πειθοίᾶτο, &c. 

XXII. The reduplication before the root of verbs in μὲ is 
short; as, τίθημι, δίδωμι. 

XXIII. In verbs in μὲ the a is always short; as, ἵστᾶτον, 
ἵστᾶμεν, &c. Except in the third person plural in ὥσι, and 
in the masculine and feminine participles ; as, ἱστᾶσι, io- 
τᾶς, ἱστᾶσα. 


VII. 
Of the Doubtful Vowels in the Penultimate. 
I. Of a in the penuitimate. 


I. Penultimate @ is generally short before a vowel or 
diphthong, or a single consonant ; as, ὀγλᾶός, δᾶείς, κακός. 
JI. But penultimate ὦ is long in the following cases: 


DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE PENULT. 21 


Before a vowel. 


ΠΕΡΙ ΠῚ 
δαήρ, Avkaoy, 
ἐᾶων, Μαχάων, 
ἄήρ, and compounds, Ποσειδάων, and the like, 
Kpaac, πρᾶῦς, and derivatives, 
λαϊγξ, Adoc, and derivatives, 
Odic, vaoc, 
Adic, avans, 
Ναΐς, ψαός, 
Πτολεμᾶΐς, παός,, 
πολυκᾶῆς, "Aic. 


The adverb ἀεὶ has the a common,” while those of its 
compounds in which ἀεὶ stands complete have the a 
short ; as, ἄείρυτος, ἄείλαλος ; whereas in others it is 
long ; as, dévaoc, ἄϊθαλῆς.ὃ 

2. In the compounds of dw ; as, ἀκρᾶής, ζαήῆς. 

3. In the compounds of aig; as, πολυαϊξ. 

4. In verbs in ἄάω, when dw is preceded by an ε or by 
the letter p; as, €@@, περᾶω, Spdw, with their com- 
pounds and derivatives. Still, however, there are sev- 
eral exceptions ; as, κυκᾶω, τιμᾶω, EpvOptaw, μειδιᾶω, 
σιγᾶω, σιωπᾶω, &c., in which dw is not preceded by 
an € or p. 

5. In Homeric genitives in do and dwy; as "Αλτᾶο, Bo- 
ρέᾶο, μελισσᾶων, ἀδινᾶων. 


Before a consonant. 


1. Before y in 
aayne, δυσπρᾶγέω, 
ἔαγα (but ἐᾶγην)." σφραγίς, 


1. Φάος, “light,” has the first syllable short ; φάεα in the plural, in 
the sense of “eyes,” has the first syllable common. The shortness is 
also shown by the derivatives ; as, φἄεσφορίη, φἄείνω. 

2. Porson, Pref. ad Hee. 

3. Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 128. 

4. Consult remarks on the increment of verbs, page 20, number XIX, 
Edynv is the second aorist, and short, of course. 


22 DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE PENULT. 


vavayoc, σιγών, 
ξεναγός, ταγός, 
λοχαγός, TAYEW, 
φᾶγος, ͵ πέπραγα, and the like. 
2. Before ὃ in 
ὀπᾶδός ἄδω, “ to satiate,” 
σπαδιξ, GOOV. 
3. Before ὃ in 
TAGOW,? εὐγαθής, Dor. for εὐγηθῆς, 
ϑυρᾶθεν, ἔπρᾶθην. 
4. Before « in 
KVGKOY, Λᾶκων, 
ϑᾶκος," τριᾶκάς. 


5. Before ἃ in 


νεοθᾶλῆς, κόθαλος, 
δαλός, βαλός." 
And in κᾶλός, which is long in Homeric Greek, but al- 


ways short in Attic.’ 


6. Before μ in 


ἄμος (meus), ϑυμίαμα, 
ἄμναμος, ἀπκρόᾶδμα, 
δίθαμος, ϑέαμα, 
ἱπποθᾶμων, ὅρᾶμα, 


And all other words in pa derived from verbs in éw 
pure or paw. 
7. Before v in ἱκᾶνω and its compounds, this verb having 


1. The compounds of ἄγω, “I lead,” and ἄγω, “ I break,” are long, 
because derived from the perfect middle. 

2. The long quantity is derived from éada. So, also, αὐθᾶδης. 

3. For πελᾶθω. 

4. Hence ϑακέω and Yaxnua. Thus, Soph. O. T. 20, ἀγοραῖσι Saket. 

5. A proper name.—Adkwy, “a Laconan,” has the penult short. 
Theocr. Id. 5, 12. 

6. The ancients lay down the rule that dissyllabic oxytones in αλός 
are long by nature ; but only a few examples occur. 

7. Καλός is long in the Gnomic poets, according to the previous exam- 
ple of Hesiod, Op. 63; Th. 585. 


DOUBTFUL VOWELS ΙΝ THE PENULT. 23 


passed with the long quantity from the epic dialect to 
the tragedians. On the contrary, κιχᾶνω in Homer 
and the epic poets, but κεχᾶνω in the tragic writers. 
So φθᾶνω in Homeric Greek is long, but in Attic short." 

In dissyllables in avo¢; as, δᾶνος, ϑρᾶνος, πᾶνός, φᾶ- 
voc, Kpavoc, and compounds, δορύκρᾶνος, ἐπίκραᾶνον, 
Bovxpavoc. And in the following: 


γεᾶνις, πολνᾶνωρ, 
φασιᾶγνός, evavopia, 
ἑανός (subtilis)? Γερμᾶνός, 
ποιμᾶνωρ, Ἰουλιᾶνός, 
στυγᾶνωρ, Βιᾶνωρ, &c. 
φιλᾶνωρ, 

8. Before 7 in 
ἅπος, Πρίαπος, 
"Ανᾶπος, γνᾶπυ, same as 
Ἴαπυξ, olvant. 


9. Before p in 


Svupapye, τιᾶρα, 
καρίς, λᾶρός, 
βᾶρις, φᾶρος," 
ἄρά (preces),* ψᾶρος, 
κωτᾶρα, δαρόν, 
πάρᾶρος, ᾿ εὐμᾶρίς. 


10. Before cin κοπιᾶσω, ὁρᾶσω, δρᾶσω, and other futures 
from verbs in ἄω pure and paw. 


1. Epic poets not unfrequently shorten verbs in atv into ἄνω ; as, 
μελᾶνει, Hom. Il. 7, 64; oiddver, Ib. 9, 854  κυδᾶνει, Ib. 14, 73. 

2. But édvoc, “ vestis.” 

3. Yet Adpddvoc, Σίκᾶνος, Ἢριδᾶνός. Later poets, however, some- 
times shorten the long forms for the convenience of the verse; as, Ἰου- 
στιᾶνός, ᾽Οππιᾶνός. Jacobs, ad Anth. Pal. 396, 582, 955. 

4. ’Apa has three meanings: 1.a prayer; 2. an imprecation; 3. mis- 
fortune, evil, or ruin. When Homer employs it in the first of these sig- 
nifications, the penult of the word is always long. When he uses it in 
the second sense, the penult is common. When it occurs in his poems 
with the third meaning, the penult is short. Among the tragic writers, 
on the other hand, the penult is everywhere short. Maltby, ad verb. 

5. Φᾶρος has the penult common in tragedy (Monk, ad Eurip. Hippol. 
145.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 337, in notes). On the other hand, in 
Homer, the penult is always long. 


24 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 


In the third person plural in aoz, and the feminine parti- 
ciple in aoa; as, τέτυφᾶσι, ἵστᾶσι, Edo, τύψᾶσα. 

In the dative plural, third declension, where the penult of 
the genitive singular is long by position ; as, τύψαν- 
τος, τύψᾶσι. 

In all derivatives from verbs in aw pure and paw; as, 
ὅρᾶσις, πέρᾶσις, &e. 

11. Before 7 in all derivatives from verbs in aw pure and 
paw; as, ὁρᾶτός, ϑεᾶτός, περᾶτός, ἰᾶτρός, KpaTHp, ὅτε. 
So ἄκρᾶτος, “unmixed,” from ὦ and κεράω ; but ἄκρᾶ- 
τος, “ unrestrained,” from @ and κρᾶτος. In like man- 
ner distinguish between the compounds of ἀρᾶομαι and 
ἔρᾶμαι. Thus, πολυάραᾶτος, “much wished for,” but 
πολυήρᾶτος, ‘* much loved.” 

In names of nations and proper names; as, ᾿Ασιᾶτης, 
Σπαρτιᾶτης, Teyeatnc. And also in the feminines 
formed from them; as, ᾿Ασιᾶτις, Mideatic. Add like- 
wise names of rivers, mountains, and islands; as, Ev- 
φρᾶτης, Νιφᾶτης, Λευκᾶτης. But forms of this kind 
proceeding from short roots have the short vowel; as, 
Δαλμᾶτης, Ταλᾶτης, Σαρμᾶτης, &e. 

In those words which, coming from Ionic forms, received 
long a by Dorism, and passed thence into the Attic and 
also the common dialect; as, ἑκᾶτι. 

In the following words : 


arn; ἄπλᾶτος, 

? - Ζ - 
Αγνιᾶτης, δημιόπρᾶτα, 
ἀἄνᾶτος, ποινᾶτωρ, 
ἀνατί, πρᾶτός, 

ἅτῶ “τή 

ὕτω, pparnp, 
aaroc, φρᾶτωρ. 


12. Before χ in τρᾶχύς and its compounds. 
The forms ἰαχή and ἰαχεῖν have the penult common in 
Attic, but more frequently long than short.! 


1. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Heracl. 752. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 25 


Il. Of ¢ in the Penultimate. 


‘I. Penultimate ¢ is generally short before a vowel, or 
diphthong, or a single consonant ; as, 7evia, tov, πῖθος. 
II. But penultimate ¢ is long in the following cases: 


Before a vowel. 
1. In the following Homeric feminines, which, as the 
two columns indicate, have the penult long in Homer 
and the epic dialect, but short in Attic." 


Epic. Attic. 
aepyin, apyta. 
aOvyin, ἀθυμῖα. 
ἀπιστίη, ἀπιστῖα. 
ἀπαιδϊη, ἀπαιδῖα. 
arin, ἀτιμῖα. 
ἑστἴη, ἑστῖα. 
Kakoepyty, Kakoupyla. 
oppin, ὑρμῖα. 
μωρἴη, μωρία. 
Tpoedpin, προεόδρϊα. 
πανοπλίη, πανοπλία. 
προθυμἴη, προθυμῖα. 
τυρανγΐἴη, τυραννῖα. 
aidpin, aidpia. 


1. The true reason for this lengthening among the epic writers is to 
be found, according to Spitzner, in the easily possible protraction of the 
doubtful vowel in pronunciation, proofs of which are furnished also by 
other vowels ; as, δωτήρ and δώτειρα for δοτήρ and δότειρα. The epic 
poets would the more readily allow this protraction in pronunciation, as 
it enabled them, without difficulty, to adapt a variety of otherwise use- 
less forms to the heroic measure. And, on the other hand, it was natu- 
ral that the Attic poetry should use these forms short for the iambus, 
which was also, indeed, required for the common pronunciation. [{ this 
view of the subject be well founded, it will not be necessary, with Malt- 
by, to explain forms like ἀκομιστίη by contraction from ἀκομίστίεη, for 
which course no sufficient reason can be discovered in heroic verse. 
Neither is it of any avail to write eva for Za in this kind of words, as it 
contradicts the derivation, and is, indeed, correct in dvacdeiy and some 
others, but not in ἀτιμίη and the like. Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 118. 

2. Long in Solon, not found in Homer. Short in Aristophanes, Plug. 
1129, but long in the Nudes, 571. 

σ 


26 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 


2, ’Avia and καλῖα are long in both Homeric and Attic 
Greek,' the Homeric form being avin and καλίη. An- 
other term κονία (Hom. κονίη) has the penult common 
in Homeric Greek, but in the singular more frequently 
long, in the plural always short. Among the Attic 
writers, Aristophanes employs it in the lyric passages 
with a short penult, but in the dialogue with a long 
one. In the tragic writers it occurs thrice, and each 
time with the penult short.’ 

3. Generally speaking, in aixia, #vdtoc, and Atay, though 
Atay also occurs, especially in Attic. 

4. In proper names in ἐὼν which shorten the vowel in 
the genitive; as, ᾿λμφίων, Aodiwy, Πανδίων, gen. 
Πανδίονος. On the contrary, those remain short 
which take the long vowel in the genitive ; as, Bovxo- 
Aiwy, "Hetiwy, Οἰνοπίων, gen. Oivoriwvoc.? 

5. Comparatives in ἔων have the ¢ long in Attic, but short 
elsewhere ; as, γλυκίων, κακίων. 

6. Verbs in éw, not proceeding from roots in ζω, have the 
ec generally long; as, φθτζω, ypiw, Tplw, KvAiw, ἐξαλζω, 
χλίω, &c. But those which had originally a ¢ in the 
root are short; as, ἀτίω, μαστἴω, to which add éo0iw 
and diw, though not from such roots.* 


1. Καλιά stands once with the short penult in Pseudo-Phocyllides, 
v. 79. 

2. Maltby, ad verb—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 340, in notis. 

3. ’Opiwy, gen. -iwvoc, is of variable measure in Homer and the epic 
poets, but short in the tragedians; as, Eurip. Cycl. 273; Ion. 1153. 
And also in Callim. H. to Artem. 254. 

4, Κηκίω has the penult short in Homer, long in tragedy. (Od. 5,455; 
Soph. Philoct. 783.) With regard to the verb μηνΐω, it may be observed, 
that the penult of the present is common, but that of the future and first 
aorist long ; thus, μήντω or μηνΐω, future μηνίσω, first aorist ἐμηνῖσα. On 
the other hand, the second aorist is éu#viov, or, dropping the augment, 
unviov. In the second book of the Iliad, v. 769, we have μηνῖεν, but 
this appears to be the imperfect. Among the tragic writers, Sophocles 
employs the verb five times, but determines nothing respecting the quan- 
tity. In the Rhesus of Euripides, v. 494, we have μηνΐων, and in the 
Hippolytus, v 1141, waviw. It is safer, however, to lengthen it in the 
tragedians. Maltby, ad verb. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. ps | 


7. Dissyllabic oxytones in ἐός have for the most part a 
long penult ; as, κριός, τός, “ an arrow,” and “ poison ;” 
but toc, “ one,” and ἴον, “a violet,’ proparoxytones, 
have the z short. 


8. Lis also long in the following : 


wys, θρῖον, 
κίων, ' Ἰώ, ν 
πίων, Ὕπερτων. 
πρίων, 


Before a consonant. 
1. Before β in 


axpl67c, ἐρυστθη, 
tbc, ϑλίθω, 
στίθη, τρίθω, and compounds. 


But all derivatives from the second aorist of tpi6w and 
similar verbs are short; as, τρῖθος, διατρϊθή, περι- 
tpl6yc. ‘This remark holds good of mapayvyA and 
similar formations." 


2. Before y in 


πνῖγος, otyn, and derivatives, 
Tvtyw, and com- Epptya,” 
pounds, KéKplya, 
ῥῖγος, TéTplya. 
3. Before ὃ in 

κντδη, Lider, 
πιδαξ, δος, 
ϑριδαξ, Ἴδα, 
χελιδών, Διδώ, 
χλιδή." στδη. 


1. Porson, ad Eurip. Orest. 62.—Draco, de Mets. 74, 9. 

2. Compare remarks on verbs, number XIX. 

3. It may be regarded as a general rule, that ¢ is naturally long in di- 
minutives in a; as, Ypivak, κλιμαξ, σμιλαξ, &c. 

4. Long in Pseudo-Phocyllides, 200, but elsewhere short, χλζδη. 

5. Zidn, “a pomegranate,” has the penult long. Nicand. Ther. 72, 


28 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN 


4. Before ὃ in 
ἔριθος, 
τθύς, 
κριθῆ, 


5. Before « in 


φοινῖκη, 
φρίκη, 
κάϊκος, 
Tpavixoc, 


6. Before A in 
apytioc,! 
veoylAoc, 
γνεογϊλῆς, 
ὅμιλος, 
ἐλύς, 
ἕλη, 
πέδιλον, 


7. Before μ in 
Bpipo, 
θρίμη, 
ἴφθιμος, 
κλίμαξ," 
pio,” 


THE PENULT. 


βρίθω, and derivatives, 
Σιθῶν, 
ἄγλιθες. 


vikn, and derivatives, 
klkv¢, and compounds, 
μῖκρός, or 

σμικρός. 


σμιλαξ, 

σπῖλος 

ψιλός, 

χῖλός, and compounds, 


λιμός, and compounds, 
τιμή, and compounds, 
βουλιμιάω. 


8. Before v in verbs in ἔνω; as, KAivw, κρίνω, πῖνω͵ 


ὀρίνω, oivw, ὠδῖνω, το. 


Except τίνω and φθίνω, 


which are long in Homer, but short in Attic. 


870. But σἴδη, ‘a water-plant,” has the short penult. 


the diminutive of the former, oidvov, has the ἐ short (Arzstoph. Nub. 


881), and, in like manner, the adjective σζδόεις. 


ἍΤ: 


Nicand. Alex. 276. 


1. It may be laid down as a general rule, that ¢ is long in the termi- 


nation sA0¢, when the word is proparoxytone. 
κΑζίλις, and so, also, in the like neuter, πέδιλον. 


So in similar forms, as 
Draco de Metr. 76, 28. 


2. Yet σπῖλος is also found. Compare Lycophron, 188, 374. 
3. The ancients, as a general rule, give oxytone forms in λος as long ; 
as, χιίλός, ψιλός, ἕο. Draco de Metr. 35, 21: 101, 3: 163, 17. 


4. Compare page 27, note 3. 
5. Most oxytones in μος have the long penult. 


Draco de Metr. 63, 10. 


Th. 887. Yet 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 29 


In the following words : 


yvpivoc, χαλινός, and compounds, 
Eptvoc, ὀπωρῖνός, in Homer,' 
τριναξ, καμινώ, 

ϑριδακῖίνη, κύμῖνον, 

ἀξίνη, σέλινον, 

κλίνη, πύτϊνη, 

pivn, ᾿Αργνυροδῖνης, 

ῥῖνός, évoiva, 

χοιρῖνη, ὑσμίῖνη, 

Aiyiva, δωτῖνη 

Καμάρινα, Μίνως, 

καμῖνος, Ἔρινυς.3 


And most words in ἐνος, evn, ἐνον. But adjectives of 
time in ἐνός shorten the penult ; as, weonubpivoc; ex- 
cept d7@pivoc, mentioned above, and dpOpivdc.’ 


9. Before 7 in 


γριπεύς, Εὔριπος, 
ῥιπῆ, Evireve, 
ῥίπισμα, ἴπος, 
ἐνῖπω, σκίπων, 
ἐντπή, ῥῖτις, 
κνῖπός, παρθενοπῖπης. 
10. Before p in 
tong, Ἴρις, 
Νιρεύς, Ἶρυς. 


1. Consult the remark that immediately follows, respecting adjectives 


of time in ἐνος. 


2. Compare Blomfield, ad Aisch. Prom. v. 53. 


3. One example of the long penult in μεσημθρινός occurs in Callima- 
chus, L. P. 72. With regard to ὀπώρϊνος, it is to be observed, that μετο- 
πωρῖνόν occurs in Hesiod, Op. 415, and ὀπώρϊνον in the same poet, Op. 
674, while ὑπωρὶϊνούς is found in a fragment of Euripides, preserved by 
Athenezus, p. 465. Maltby gives no great weight to this last exception 
on account of its being a fragment, and on that account open on every 
side to corruption. ‘The verses in Hesiod he considers spurious, be- 
cause in Homer uniformly, and in the Hymn to Mercury, the penult of 
ὀπώρινος is long; and even in Hesiod himself, in the same poem, v. 677, 
the same syllable is lengthened. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 343, in notis. 

C2 


80 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 


11 Before o in 
Βρϊσεύς, ἴσος in Homer,’ 
Kvioa, ἐξαλίῖσας 3 
12. Before τ in nouns in ἔτη, ίτης, ίτις ; as, ᾿Αφροδῖτη, 
᾿Αμφιτρίτη, δωματῖτις, πολίτης, ὁπλίτης, πολῖτις, &e. 
Except, however, κρίτης and other derivatives from 
the perfect passive with a short penult.® 
In the following words : 


ἀκόνττον, σῖτος, with com- 
κλιτύς, pounds,* 
λιτός, Tiray, 
ἀμήνττος, Τρίτων, 
ἀδήρττος, φίτυς." 

13. Before φ in 
γρῖφος, σίφων, 
Σέρῖφος, Τίφυς, 
tpt, viow, but vipac. 
στῖφος, 


14. Before χ in ἔχώρ and τάρϊἴχος. 


Ill. Of v in the penultimate. 


I. Penultimate v is generally short before a vowel or diph- 
thong, or a single consonant; as, v6c, KEL, λῦγος. 


1. The penult of ico¢ is long with Homer, but short with the trage- 
dians. The first syllable in ἰσόθεος, however, is long in tragedy, on the 
same principle that the α is lengthened in ἀθάνατος, ἀκάματος, ἀπαρ- 
ἄμυθος, namely, in order to allow of such forms being introduced into 
the verse. Compare Blomfield, ad A’sch. Pers. 81 ; and Burney, ibid. 

2. From ἐξαλίνδω. Compare Elmsley, ad Eurip. Heracl. 404. The 
form ἐξαλίζω would make ἐξαλῖσας. 

3. On the same principle with κρἴτης, verbal adjectives in τὸς have 
the short penult as coming from the third person singular of perfects pas- 
sive with short penults in crac or ὑται ; thus, ἄκριτος, from @ and Kéxp/- 
ται; ἄλῦτος, from @ and λέλῦὕται, τε. 

4. “Aoiroc occurs in an epigram of Diogenes Laertius (Anthol. Pal. 
7, 118, 2), but this is a late innovation. 

5. So φιτεύω, φῖτυμα. On the contrary, φύτεύω, φὕτευμα. This dis- 
tinction was made by Brunck, ad Apoll. Rhod. 4, 807; Soph. Antig. 
645. The conflicting passages, as Eurip. Alcest. 306, 1147; Opp. 
ΟΝ 1, 4, are altered in the latest editions, partly with the consent of 

SS. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 31 


II. But penultimate v is long in the following cases : 


Before a vowel. 


1. In 
"Evvw, poor, 
Ovac, ἰγνῦη, 
μων, πῦος. 


2. With regard to verbs in ὕω, the safest rule is to re- 
gard the penult of the present and imperfect as com- 
mon.'! Some, however, occur more frequently with 
the long penult; as, ἰσχύω, δακρύω, Siw, iw, Avw.? 
Others, again, are oftener found with the penult short, 
of which the following is a list. 


Bpva, KUO), 
apvo, EAKVO), 
ἀρτῦω, ἐρὕω.᾽ 
ἀνύω, μεθύω, 
ἀφύω, πληθῦω, 
δεικνύω, κλύω. 


And so, likewise, all others besides κλύω and δεικνύω, 
which have also vue in the present. 


Before a consonant. 


1. Before β in Ὁβός. 


1. The question is ably discussed by Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 91, seq., 
and Maltby, Lex. Pros. c. vi., Ὁ. Ixiil., 2d ed. 

2. Still it must be borne in mind, that derivatives from the perfect 
passive have the v short; as, λῦσις, λῦτος, &c. With regard to the 
verbs quoted here as having the long penult, it may be observed, that 
Homer sometimes makes it ϑύω, though generally ¥iw. In Attic Greek 
Brunck considers the penult to be always long. Yet all the derivatives 
have short v except Vina; as, ϑύτήρ, Vicia, ϑύώδης, ϑύσιμος. So, 
again, Avw sometimes occurs in Homer, but Adw in Attic. Another 
verb, not cited above, κωλύω, has the penult long in tragedy, but some- 
times short in comedy. And yet the future is always kwAvow. Sand- 
ford, Gr. Pros. p. 346, in notis. 


32 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 


2. Before y in 


ὀλολῦγή, πῦυγῆ, 
ἀμαρῦγή," τρυγών, 
lvyn, KaTappvyw. 
3. Before ὃ in 
"Αβῦδος, Τυδεύς, 
Avdoc, ἐρικυδῆς, and other com- 
βοτρῦδόν, pounds of κῦδος. 
4. Before ϑ in 
βυθός, | πῦθω, “to putrefy ;” 
μῦθος, πυθὼ, “ corruption ;” 
ἔυθος, | πυθών. 
5. Before « in 
BpvKoc,” ponic, 
Bpvko, φῦκος, 
καρῦκη, épvKw, and so 
ἐρίμῦκος, KQTEPUKGKO), 
OvKN, TEDUKG, 
σῦκον, τέθυκα, &e. 
6. Before A in 
σκῦλον, σφονδῦλη, 
pvan, Αἰγῦλα, 
φῦλον, "Αξῦλος," 
πάμφῦυλος, σχενδῦλη, 
vAn, ovAn, 
χῦλός, σῦλον, 
στῦλος, ἄσῦλον, &c. 


7. Before μὶ in most verbals in va, from verbs in vw ; 


1. But μαρμαρὕγῆ is shortened. Od. 8, 265.—Apoll. Rhod. 3, 1397. 
—Id. A, 173. 

2. Κώρῦκος, the name of a town, is long in Dionys. Perieg. 855, but 
the mountain of the same name is short. Hom. H. in Apoll. 39.—Nonn. 
9, 287. 

3. But Ὕλη, the name of a town, is short in Jl. 7, 221, and long in 
Il. 2, 504. 

4. The name of a man, Il. 6, 12. On the contrary, ἄξῦλος, and all 
other forms from the noun ξύλον, are short, the noun ξύλον itself always 
having the short penult. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 33 


as, ϑῦμα, κῦμα, Adpa, ἀρτῦμα, phvopa, ἵδρῦμα, ὅτε. 
Except, however, ἔρῦμα, πλῦμα, pupa, “a river,” &c., 


which are invariably short. 


In ϑυμός, “ animus,” and its compounds, ἄθῦμος, ῥάθυ- 
μος, &c. But ϑῦμος, ‘ thymus,” has the penult short. 
In the first person present indicative active of all verbs 
in vue; as, δείκνυμι, ζεύγνῦμι, &c. But the v is short 
in the passive and middle of the same part; as, O&ik- 


νῦμαι, ζεύγνῦμαι. 


In the plural cases of the pronoun ov; as, ὑμεῖς, ὑμῶν, 


ὑμῖν, ὑμᾶς. 


In the following words : 


ἀμύμων, 
ἀτρῦμων, 
Αἰσύῦμη, 
poy, 
διῤῥῦμος, 
δρῦμός, 
κατάδρῦμα, 


κρῦμός, 
ψῦμος, 
ζύμη, 
κάττυῦμα, 
λύμη, 
ἐγκύμων, 
ἔλῦμα. 


8. Before v in the present of verbs in ὕγω ; as, εὐθῦνω, 
ὀτρῦνω, πλῦνω, &c.; but when they terminate in ἕω 


the v is short ; as, πλυνέω, &e. 
In the following words : 


TUYN, 
Δίκτῦνα, 
εὔθῦνος, 
κίνδυνος. ἢ 
ὄρκῦνος, 
βόθῦνος, 
ξυνός, 


ἄμῦνα, 
Kopovn,® 
TOPUYN, 
χελῦνη. 
αἰσχῦνη, 
μῦνη, 
Βιθυνόν. 


1. But ῥῦμα, “ draught,” “ protection.” 
2. But ’Axivdvvoc, as a proper name, is shortened. Anth. Pal. xi., 


429. 


Herm. Orph. Hymn. 10, 22. 


3. As a general rule, it may be said that trisyllables in vv7 have 


the long quantity. Yet there are exceptions. 


Draco himself, who 


gives the general rule, quotes κορύνη, ταμύνη, and τορύνη as shorten- 
ed in the epic and lengthened in the Attic writers. Κορύνη, however, 
already fluctuates in the epic ; thus, short in Homer, Il. 7, 143; Apoll. 


\ 


34 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 


9. Before 7 in λύπη, γρῦπος, τανῦπους, and in the ob- 
_lique cases of yi, ὕπος, and γρύψ, ὕπος. 

10. Before p in all verbs in ύρω ; as, φῦρω, σῦρω, ἀθῦρω, 
κῦρω, μῦρω, &c.; but when they terminate in ἕω the 
v is short; as, κὐρέω, WaPTUPEW, TOPPLPEW. 

In the following words : 


aykvpa,' τῦρός, “cheese” (but 
γέφῦρα, Tuvpoc, “ Tyre”), 
Kivopa, πάπῦρος, 
λάφῦρα, γῦρός, 
ὄλῦρα, ὀϊζυρός, 
Κέρκυρα, ἴσχῦρος, 
κολλῦρα, πίτυρον," 
σφῦρα; λέπῦρον, 
κῦρος, TAN opie,” 
ὀνόγῦρος, σῦριγξ, 
πυρός, “wheat” (but συρίζω, 
πῦρός, from πῦρ); χεριφυρῆς. 


11. Before σ it is almost always long; as, Δίονῦσος, 
χρῦσός, "Αμφρῦσος, Καμθῦσης, ἄς. Except verbals 
in ὕσις ; as, λῦσις, ἄνῦσις, Ke. 


Rhod. 2, 99, 115; Theocrit. Id. 7,9: 9, 29 ; and long in Theocrit. Id. 
25, 63; Nicand. Alex. 409; Leonid. Tarent. Epigr. 34, 3. Notwith- 
standing, however, that the long quantity in vyy predominates with the 
Attics, it is remarkable, as Draco observes, that Eupolis has always 
shortened τορύνη. But ὀδύνη, as sprung from a short root, is always 
short in the middle syllable, and so its derivatives ; as, ἐπώδῦνος, περι- 
ὠδῦνος, ἕο. Spitzner, Gr, Pros. p. 122. 

1. [he rule appears to be, that the proparoxytones in vpa of the fem- 
inine gender have the v long. On the other hand, paroxytones in vpa 
are mostly short ; as, πορφύρα (v), φιλύρα (v), &c. Except κολλύρα 
(0) mentioned above. 

2. Most dissyllables, however, in vpa have the penult short ; as, λῦρα, 
ϑῦρα, together with their derivatives ; as, Vipaioc, λῦρικός, το. 

3. Always long in Homer and the epic writers, but always short among 
the Attics. Maltby, ad verb. 

4. Neuters in vpov, derived from liquid verbs or other long roots, 
have the v long ; but those not so derived have the penult short ; as, 
aytpov, ἐνέχῦὕρον. 

5. We have πλήμμῦὕρις in Homer, Od. 9, 486, and so, also, Apoll. 
Rhod. 4, 1269. But Blomfield (Gloss. ad Choéph. 180) supposes both 
these passages to stand in need of correction, and Knight actually re- 
jects the former. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 348. Compare Spitzner, 
Gr. Pros. p. 123. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 35 


12. Before τ in derivatives in vtnp, υτῆς, and υτίς ; as, 
μηνῦτήρ, μηνυτής, πρεσθυτής, πρεσθῦτις.' 

In adjectives in voc, derived from long verbal roots in 
vw ; as, ἀδάκρυτος, πολυδάκρῦτος, ἁλίτρῦτος, ἄτρῦ- 
τος, &c. 

In trisyllables in vtoc, which lengthen the preceding 
syllable ; as, Βηρῦτός, γωρῦτός, Κωκῦτός, ὥς. But 
names derived from adjectives in ὃς have the short 
penult ; as, Αἴπῦτος, Evpitoc. 

In the following words : 


poTwp, OKUTEUC, 

PUT, βρῦτον, 

ῥῦτός, γωρῦτός, and sometimes 
OKUTOC, λύτωρ." 


13. Before φ in 


κῦφός, τῦφος, 
κῦφων, τύφω, 
στῦφος, σῦφαρ, 
στῦφω, κελῦφος. 


14. Before x in verbs in ὕχω ; as, βρῦχω, τρῦχω, and 
their compounds ; but v in βρὕὔχιος is short. 
In the following words : 
ψυχή, ἐμψῦχος, 
ψῦχος, καταψῦχω. 
But παραψὔχη, being derived from a second aorist, has 
its penult short.* 


1. Yet ϑύτηρ has the short penult. In like manner, nouns in urge, 
from adjectives in ὕς, εἴα, ὕ, are short; as, βραδύτής, ὀξύτης, ταχὕτης. 

2. This long penult in Adrwp is extremely doubtful. The verse quo- 
ted in support of it from the Anthology (Leonid. Alex. Ep. 29, 4.—An- 
ἐμοὶ. Pal. ix., 359) has now ῥῦτορα, which also stands in the Palatine 
MS. Hence λῦτήριος, besides the usual λύτήριος, will also admit of 
great doubt. Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 161. 

3. But dpytdoc, κόσσῦφος, &c., have the v short. 

4. Porson, ad Eurip. Orest. 62. On the same principle we have 
διατρθή with the short penult, although the verb is διατρίθω, because it 
is derived from the second aorist διέτρζθον. 


36 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 


VIIL. 
Of the Doubtful Vowels before the Penultimate. 


I. Of a before the penultimate. 


I. A before the penult is generally short; as, ἄεικής, 
ἄδολος, βασιλεύς. ; 
II. But α before the penult is long in the following cases: 


A privative. 
A privative, though naturally short, may be lengthened 
when three short syllables follow ; as, ἀθάνατος, ἄκά- 
ματος, ἀπόλεμος, &c." 


A before a vowel. 


1. in 
Gévaoc,” idouat, 
ἀέριος, χᾶϊος, 
αϊθαλῆς, δᾶϊος, 
αἴδιος, λᾶας, 
λογες, Adivoc, and other deriv- 
Ἴδονες, atives, 
ἄετος, aaatoc, 
ἀκρᾶαντος, ἄατος," 
βουγᾶΐίος, τιμᾶορος, 
βιᾶομαι, συνᾶορος, 
γρᾶἄοσόθης, aaync, 
δαϊκτήρ, ἀρχαικός, 
ἐλαᾶΐνος, πραῦνω. 


2. The verb ἀΐω has the acommon. On the other hand, 
aioow has the a long in Homer, while in Attic Greek 


1. Porson, ad Eurip. Med. 139. 

2. But a is short in those compounds of de¢ where the adverb stands 
complete ; as, ἄείρυτος, ἄείλαλος, ἄείμνηστος. 

3. According to Maltby there is no addro¢ with short penult ; but long 
antepenult, ‘“‘ zmnoxious.” 

4. According to the same eminent scholar, it is Gdro¢, “ noxious ;” 
but ἄζτος, or, by contraction, droc, “ imsatiabilis.” 

5. In Homer, Od. 11, 575, we have dayéc, but in Apollonius Rhodius 
3, 1251, ddyec. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. ot 


it is generally a dissyllable ; or else, when a trisylla- 
ble, has the a@ short.’ 


Before a consonant. 


1. Before y in 


σφραγίζω, ἐθδομᾶγέτης, 
ναυᾶγέω, evayopia, 
ναυάγιον, Θηθαγενήῆς, 
ἰθαγενής, κμραγέτης. 

2. Before ὃ in 
av0adia, as in ἀδολεσχία, 
αὐθᾶδης, δᾷδον, from daic, 
padzoc, Iker adoxoc, 
ἀδολέσχης, καρᾶδοκέω. 


3. Before 0 in ῥᾶθυμος. 
4. Before καὶ in 


διάκονος, Συρακόσιοι, 

λακέω," βλακικῶς, from βλάξ, 

ϑακπέω, -ἄκος, 

οἰακοστρόφος, τριἄκοντα, 

φενακίζω, διακόσιοι, 

ὠρᾶκιάω, τριακόσιοι,5 &e., 
ἀκούσιος. 


5. Before A in 


ἄλίζω, aiibac, 
ela ἀναλόω, 
ἄλεμος, ἀναλίσκω, 


1. In Euripides, Hec. 31, we have dioow where Pierson (ad Moer. p. 
301) would read dvaicow. But consult Porson, ad loc. 

2. The participle διαλακήσασα lengthens the third syllable in Anis- 
tophanes, ub. 409. The subjunctive λακήσῃς shortens the first in an- 
other comedy of the same author. Paz. 381. (Klmsley, ad Eurip. 
Med. 147.) 

3. So, also, in the compounds ; as, τρικοντάζυγος. (Theocrit. Id. 
13, 74.) In the hundreds, the only ones with long a@ are διακόσιοι and 
τριᾶκόσιοι, the others having the syllable short ; as, τεσσαρἄκόσιοι, πεν- 
τἄκόσιοι, &e. So, also, τεσσεράκοντα. (Hom. Il. 2, 524, 534.) The 
remaining tens have ἢ ; as, πεντήκοντα, ἑξήκοντα, ial Baten authors, 
however, said also τριἄκοντα, according to the analogy of other numer- 
als. Jacobs, ad Anth. Pal. 617, 705, 806.—Spiizner, Gr. Pros. p. 67. 

D 


38 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 


κοᾶλεμος, σκιμαλίζω, 
aAoovvn, Στυμφαλίδες. 
6. Before μ in 
auae,' ᾿Αμισός, 
άμητος, ᾿Απᾶμεια, 
ἀμητὸς, φιλοναμάτος. 
7. Before ν in 
κρᾶνιον, κατᾶνομαι, 
Titavioc, κρεᾶνόμος, 
νεᾶνίας, Avooavioc, 
εὐᾶνεμος, συνθρᾶνόω, 
evavopia, TALGVLKOC, 
ἀγορᾶνόμος, παιᾶνίζω. 


8. Before 7 in δρἄπέτης, vareia, ἄπύω. 
9. Before p in 


ἀράομαι, Homeric,’ | pavapéo, 
ἄρητήρ, ' ἄριστον, 
καρίων, ἄριστάω, 
Λᾶρισσα, δαρεικός, 
κᾶραθος, ϑεᾶριον, 
ἀμᾶρακος, λαρινός. 
10. Before o in 
᾽Ασωπος, Κασάνδρα, 
ἐπαρᾶσιμος, *Aatooc,® 
εὐκρασία, πᾶσασθοαι, “possidere,”* 
κορᾶσιον, Πασιφάη. 


1. According to Maltby, ἀμάω, in the active voice, and the nouns 
derived from this verb, such as ἀμητήρ, ἀμητής, and ἀμητός, have the a 
long in Homer and Hesiod. On the other hand, ἀμάομαι in the middle 
voice, and the compound forms ἐπαμήσατο, καταμήσατο, as well as the 
form διάμησε" ἴῃ the active, have the a short. In later epic writers it is 
common, 

2. But in Attic ἄράομαι, contr. ἀρῶμαι. 

3. So ᾿Ασιάδης, with the long initial vowel. We have also “Aozoc, 
“ Asian,” with the long vowel, and dovoc, “ slimy,” with the a short. 
The long quantity, however, in the former, and in other words of the 
kind, cannot be determined with perfect certainty, since the length may 
be occasioned by the arsis. Hermann, H. H. in Apoll. 250. 

4. But πᾶσασθαι, “vesci,” has the first syllable short. Blomfield, 
Gloss. ad Alsch. Agam. 1380. Σ 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 99. 


11. Before τ in 


Πισᾶτιδας, διδυμᾶτοκος, 
μιδεᾶτιδος, ϑάτερον, 


And in words compounded of Adac, “ a stone ;” as, λᾶ- 
τομία, λᾶτομοι, λᾶτύπος, το. 

12. Before @ in σειραφόρος. 

13. Before y in 


τρᾶχουρος, ῥυᾶχετος, 
payia, ayétac, Doric for 
ἀκρᾶχολος, ἠχέτης, ὅτε. 


II. Of ι before the Penultimate. 


I. I before the penult is generally short; as, Tptapoc, 
ἐπϊειμένος, ἵκομαι, ὅτε. 
II. But ¢ before the penult is long in the following cases : 


Before a vowel. 


In 
ijui, &e.," tatpoc,* 
χλιαίνω, τάομαι, 
τὐζω Ἰαπετός, 
τωχμός, χΙόνεος, 
παλίῖωξις, Kado, 
Πίερος, χιάζω, 


1. Maltby, in his remarks οη ἀφίημι, says that, in Homer, the antepe- 
nult of this word, and of others ending in ἔημι, is doubtful, or, rather, 
more frequently short. Among the dramatic poets, on the other hand, 
it is always long. On the word συνίημι he afterward adds that, among 
the Attics, the participle of the active, ie‘c, has its penult more frequent- 
ly short than long, and, moreover, that the compound ξυνέημι is found 
three or four times with the ¢ short, and μεθίημι once. 

2. The first syllable, however, is sometimes short, as in Aristophanes, 
Eccles. 64.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 352. 

3. Ἰύζω has the first syllable always long in Homer ; but in Sophocles, 
Trach. 789, it occurs short. This latter word, however, has been sus- 
pected by critics. So the form ζυγή has the first short in Sophocles, but 
long in Nicander. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 352. 

4. The first syllable in the derivatives of ἰάομαι is generally long ; but 
Euripides (Hippol. 295) and Aristophanes (Plut. 406) have it short in 
ἰατρός, and the Anthology in ἰητήρ. 


40 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 


Πτερία, πιαίνω, 
Πτεριός Φρθιῶτις, 
Πιερίδες, ἐνθρίουσθαι, 
βραχίονος, aviao),' 


3 


And in the compounds of foc, “ an arrow ;” ἃ5,Τόβολος, 
toyéatpa. But those from Zor, “a violet,” have it short ; 
as, Τοειδῆς, ἸΤοστέφανος. 


Before a consonant. 


1. Before β in KAtbavoc, κρίθανος, and κιθωτός. 
2. Before y almost always ; as in plyow, &c. 
3. Before ὃ in 


τδίω, πιδῆεις, 
πιδύω, δικαστηρίδιον, 
πιδύτης, σφραγΐἴδιον. 

4. Before ϑ in 
tive, διθύραμθος, 
τθύω, ὀρνίθειος, from 
Τιθωνός, ὄρνις, ἴθος. 

5. Before « in 
VIKGO), Σικελία, 
φοινῖκεος, φρικάλεος, 
μυρίκινος, φρικώδης, 
Likavia, Ἴκαρος. 

6. Before A in 
theoc, χίλεύω, 
tAvoete, χίλιοι, 
ἐλαδόν, Σ χἰλιάς, 
ἐλασμός, Ἴλιον, 
ὁμιλαδόν, Ἰλιάς, 
ὁμτλέω, Ἰλισσός, 
καταττλάω, Σιληνός, 


1. The verb dvidw generally lengthens the second syllable among the 
epic writers, as also in Sophocles, Antig. 319. ‘The second syllable in 
ἀνιαρός is shortened by Euripides and Aristophanes, and lengthened by 
Sophocles, Antig. 316. But the third syllable is everywhere long. 
Porson, ad Eurip. Phoen. 1334. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 41 


πιλέω, Μίλητος, 
πιλίδιον, ἔλιίγγος, 
σμίλευμα," ᾿Ιλιόνευς. 
7 Before μ in 

Bpiuaw, βλιμάζω, 
μείρω, ἱμάτιον, 
μιίμέομαι, πιμέλη, 
μίμημα, τίμιος ἢ 
μίμηλός, Ἱμέρα, 
φιμώδης, λιμηρός, 
δρίμυλος, Σιμαιθα. 


8. Before ν in verbs in ἐνεω, and their derivatives ; as, 
Klvew, Kivnut, &e. 
In the following: 


γίνομαι, ἀκροθίνια, 
γινώσκω, πρινίδιον, 

ih δίνησις, καταρϊνάω, 
δινήεις, πινύσκω, 
ἐρῖνεος, oivowa.,” 
iviov, deAgivioc, 
*Ivayoc, Τρινακρία, 
ἐλινύω," ἀποτῖνομαι. 


9. Before 7 in 


Εὐριπίδης, ῥιπίζω, 
*Piratoy, ϑριπόβρωτος, 
ἠνίπαπε, ϑριπήδεστος, 
τπόω, λιπαρέω, 
διϊπετῆς, 


_ And in λιπαρής, “ persevering ;” but λίπαρός, “ fat,” 
has the first syllable short.® 


1. Following the quantity of σμίλη. 

2. And all other derivatives from τιμῆ. 

3. Yet κἴνάθισμα in Auschylus, Prom. ν. 124. 

4. Consult Blomfield, ad Prom. v. 53. 

5. Livouat, “1 injure,” but σῖνος, “injury.” Nicand. Ther. 1, 653. 
—ZEsch. Agam. 563. Hence also σῖνις, “a robber.” Callim. H. ad 
Apoll. 95. 

6. Following the quantity of Εὔριπος. Compare Barnes, Eurip. Vit. 
4, and the authorities there cited. 

7. Following the quantity of ἐντπή. 

8. Compare Markland, ad Eurip. Iph. Aul. 304. Blomfield, ad 

D2 


42 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 


10. Before p almost always ; as, Σεμῖραμις, &e. 
11. Before o in 


κονίσαλος, στσύμόριον, 
μῖσέω, Τισιφόνη, 
Σίσυφος," χαρίσιος, 
φθισήνωρ, ᾿Αφροδίΐσιος, 


And in compounds and derivatives from ἐσος ; as, ἐσάν- 
ὄρος, τσόθεος." 
12. Before τ in 


iréa,® Tpltwvic, 
σττεύω, φιτύω,." 
Τίτυρος, φίτυμα. 


13. Before @ in διφάω, διφήτωρ, στφωνίζω. 
14. Before χ in 


κἴχωρα, OUTED, 
κἴχώρεον, ταριχεύω. 


Ill. Of v before the penultimate. 


I. Y before the penult is generally short; as, ’Aorvoyn, 
ἀργῦρεος, ἄς. 
II. But υ before the penult is long in the following cases: 


Before a vowel. 
In 
᾿Εννάλιος, μϑελός, 
κυάνεος,β μῦουρος, 


Asch. Prom. v. 529. On the other hand, λίπος, ““ fat,” though con- 
sidered as long by some grammarians, is probably always short. 

1. The measure Σίσυφος, formerly in Theognis, v. 522, has been al- 
tered by Jortin, Dissert. vi., p. 229, and Porson, Advers. p. 313. The 
Modena MS., collated by Bekker, verifies the proposed change. 

2. Consult note 1, page 30. 

3. Hence, also, iréivoc, Theocrit. Id. 16, 79. But “Irwv, Il. 2, 696, 
and ᾿Ιτωνίς, a surname of Minerva, Apoll. Rhod. 1, 551, fluctuate. 

4, Consult note 5, page 30. 

5. But the first syllable is sometimes short in Attic Greek. Com- 
pare Blomfield, ad Aisch. Pers. 83. 

6. Long in Homer, short in the tragic writers. isch. Agam. '75.— 
Soph. Trach. 783.—Eurip. Hippol. 255. 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 43 


μϑοδόχος, πλατῦάζω, 
πῦνελος,' νετός, 
πυετίη, βρενθῦομαι. 


Before a consonant. 
1. Before β in ἡμιτῦθιον. 
2. Before y in 


poyarén, | Avyaioc, 
ϑρυγανάω, φρύγανον. 


3. Before ὃ in μῦδαλέος, μυδαίνω, and in the compounds 
and derivatives of κῦδος ; as, κυδάλιμος, κύδιμος, ὅτε. 
4. Before ϑ in épvOpidw, ἐρυθιάω, and παραμῦθέομαι, 
with other compounds of μῦθος. 
5. Before « in ἐρυκακέω, and other compounds of épvKw. 
In the following : 
μῦκάομαι, καρῦυκοποιῶ, 
PUKLOELC, KNPUKEVO, 


And other derivatives from κῆρυξ, vKoc. 
6. Before A in 


ϑύλακος.ἢ συλάω, 
κογχῦλιον, συλεύω, 
Παμφυλία, viAaioc, 
σκῦλομαι, φύλοπις, 
σκῦλεύω, μϑλιάω. 


7. Before μ in 


ὑμέτερος, λῦύμεων, 
κυμαίνω, μῦμόω, 
λυμαίνω, πεπνυμένος, 


And in compounds and derivatives from voc; as, 
ϑυμώδης, ϑυμήρης, ϑυμόομαι, Ke. 


1. Long in Homer, short in Attic. Aristoph. Pax. 843.—Anth. Pal. 
vii., 166, 3. 
2. In Homer, Π. 5, 749, μῦκον is the second aorist. 


3. But ϑυλάκιον seems to have the first syllable sometimes short. 
Maltby, ad verb. 


SS 


44 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 


8. Before 7 in 


Av rEo, τρὕπανον, 
τρυπάω, κυπόω. 


9. Before p in 


yvpow, μινῦρομαι," 
κΥυρόω, μῦριος, 
φυράω, μῦριοι, 
κύριος, Mvpaiva, 
κῦρομαι, πῦραμίς, 
ἀκῦρωτος, πῦριμος, 
κινῦρομαι, πλημμῦρία, 
ὀδῦρομαι, πλημμῦρέω, 
καρτῦρομαι, Κυρήνη. 


10. Before σ is generally long ; as in φύσάω, and some 
compounds of λύω ; as, Avairovoc, λυσιμελής, ὅτε. 
In the following : 


χρύσιος, ες τρῦσίθιος, 
appvaiacroc, τρυσάνωρ, 
ϑαλῦσια, Μῦσιος. 


11. Before τ in 


ἀτρῦτώνη, φύυτάω, but φῦὔτεύω, 
9- ΄ - - 

ἀντέω, πυτιναῖος, 
φυτάλιος, πυτίνη, 

φυταλία, τρυτάνη. 


12. Before ᾧ in 


εἰλυφάζω, ἐξζυφαίνω, 
τυφόομαι, κεκρύφαλον, 
τυφομανής, τὐφήρης. 


18. Before χ in βρῦχάομαι, σμὕῦχομαι. 


1. And yet μινῦρός, from which it comes, has the v short. In like 
manner, we have κινῦρομαι, from κινῦρός. Blomfield, Gloss. ad Aisch. 
Ag. 15. ; 

2. The first syllable is long in Apollon. Rhod. 1, 500; Calm H. ad 
Dion. 206 ; but short in Callim. H. ad Apoll. 72,93. In like manner, 
we have in Nonnus, Dionys. 5, 216, κῦρήνης, and, 516, κὔρήνη. 


PID PPL PP PP POPOL OP PD LPP PLS PP PPP PE PPLP DP LP PPL LPP LL PDL PLE OP PP PP PP PP CPL GOE OR 


PART Ud. 


We ΙΓ Ee 


\ 


POLO LE DOLL POPE PP LPL PP PPL OL LP POLL LPP LL AA POLO LOLS OD OD POPOL EF OP LO IOP IPD, 


ἴδ, οι χϑεν μον 
345 a A 


ME T RE. 


I. Merre, in its general sense, means an arrangement 
of syllables and feet in verse, according to éertain rules ; 
and, inthis sense, it applies not only to an entire verse, but 
to a part of a verse, or any number of verses. 

II. But a metre, in a specific sense, means a combination 
of two feet, and sometimes one foot only. 

Ill. There are nine principal metres: 1. Tambic. 2. 
Trochaic. 3. Anapestic. 4. Dactylic. 5. Choriambic. 
6. Antispastic. 7. Ionic ἃ Majore. 8. Ionic ἃ Minore. 
9. Peonic. 

IV. These names are derived from the feet which pre- 
vail in them. Each species of verse would seem originally 
to have been composed of those feet solely from which it 
derives it name ; and other feet, equal in time, were not ad- 
mitted until afterward, and then only under certain restric- 
tions. 
© V. It must be carefully noted, that two feet make a metre 
in the iambic, trochaic, and anapestic measures, but that 
one foot constitutes a metre in all the rest. 

VI. When a verse consists of one metre, it is called mo- 
nometer; when it has two metres, dimeter ; three metres, 
trimeter ; four metres, tetrameter ; five metres, pentameter , 
six metres, hewameter ; seven metres, heptameter, &c. 

VII. From what has just been remarked, it follows that, 
in iambic, trochaic, and anapzstic verse, a monometer con- 
sists of two feet; a dimeter of four; a trimeter of sax, &c.; 
whereas, in all the other kinds of verse, a monometer con- 
sists of one foot, a dimeter of two, a trimeter of three, &c. 


48 METRE, 


VIII. Verses are also denominated Acatalectic, Catalec- 
tic, Brachycatalectic, and Hypercatalectic. 

IX. An acatalectic verse is one that is complete in all its 
parts, and comes to a full termination; as the following, 
which is iambic trimeter acatalectic :' 

roses Len eee iia ase | 

X. A caialectic? verse is one that wants a syllable at the 
end to complete the measure ; as the following, which is 
iambic trimeter catalectic : 

a alee ak EASE τοῦς, 

XI. A brachycatalectic® verse is one that wants two syl- 
lables at the end to complete the measure ; as the follow- 
ing, which is iambic trimeter brachycatalectic : 

sian Pa a eae 

XII. A hypercatalectic* verse is one that has a syllable at 
the end beyond the complete measure ; as the following, 
which is iambic trimeter hypercatalectic : 

ἐπ ὙΠ ΡΟΣ ἃ 

XIU. There is also what is called an Acephalous® verse, 
when a syllable is wanting at the beginning; as the fol- 
lowing, which is acephalous iambic trimeter : 

a EAT ec ed er 

XIV. Verses are also denominated Asynartete (dovvap- 

τήτοι), when different measures are conjoined into one line 


1. Acatalectic, from ἀκαταληκτικὸς (ἀ and καταλήγω), i. e., not hav- 
ing an abrupt termination. Compare Hephestion, c. 4, p. 24, ed. Gais- 
ford. ᾿Ακατάληκτα καλεῖται μέτρα, ὅσα τὸν τελευταῖον πόδα ὁλόκληρον 
ἔχει. : 

2. Hephestion, 1.c. Καταληκτικὰ δὲ, ὅσα μεμειωμένον ἔχει τὸν τε- 
λευταῖον πόδα. The term is derived from καταλήγω, and denotes verses 
that stop before they reach their full ending. 

3. Hephestion, 1. c. Βραχυκαταληκτὰ δὲ καλεῖται, ὅσα ἀπὸ διπο- 
δίας ἐπὶ τέλους ὅλῳ ποδὶ μεμείωται. 

4. Hephestion, |. c. Ὕπερκαταληκτὰ δὲ, boa πρὸς τῷ τελείῳ προ- 
σέλαθε μέρος ποδός. Some call it Hyperacatalectic, ὑπερακαταληκτός, 
i. e., going beyond acatalectic. 

5. Acephalous, from a and κεφαλὴ, i. e., wanting a head. 


OF FEET. 49 


| 
at the pleasure of the poet; and they are so called because 
the union between the two measures is comparatively 
slight, the hiatus and doubtful syllable being admitted; as 
in Horace, Epode 13. 
Fervidiora mero* | arcana promorat loco. 
Levare duris pectora* | sollicitudinibus. 


OF FRET. 
I. A foot in metre is composed of two or more syllables, 
and is either simple or compound. 
II. Of the simple feet, four are of two, and eight of three 
syllables. The compound feet are sixteen in number, each 
of four syllables. 


Simple Feet. 


Pyrrhichius = ς ϑεός. 
Spondzus ἘΠ᾿] ᾿ ψυχή. 
Tambus a τι ed. 
Trocheus ieee σῶμα. 
Tribrachys ΣΕ a πόλεμος. 
Molossus a ake εὐχωλή. 
Dactylus Tg ΠΟΙ 

. Anapzstus pet ed βασιλεύς. 
Bacchius a τὸ ἀνάσσει. 
Antibacchius -πτὸ μάντευμα. 
Amphibrachys i a ϑάλασσα. 
Amphimacer, or Cretic — ~ — δεσπότης. 


Compound Feet. 


Choriambus ar ts hate σωφροσύνη. 
Antispastus Soe: ἁμάρτημα. 
~ Tonicus ἃ majore ae Hee 3 κοσμήτορα. 
‘Jonicus ἃ minore Sia a πλεονέκτης. 

- Peon primus τι ie ἀστρόλογος. 
“*  secundus Ae ἀνάξιος. 


50 OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET. 


Peon tertius Ἀπ ἐπ ππὶ πὰ ἀνάδημα. 
τὸ “  quartus ΣΝ ST ϑεογενῆς. 
~ Epitritus primus eae ἁμαρτωλῆ. 
*  secundus a ἀνδροφόντης. 
- “  tertius ce ae εὐρυσθενης. 
“νος  quartus ΤΟΣ Πα λωβητῆρα. 
~ Proceleusmaticus a ποτ πολέμιος. 
~ Ῥιβρομπάθιβ ᾿ς συνδουλεύσω. 
Diiambus MAT andreas: 
Ditrocheus nap δε δυστύχημα. 


Ill. Το these add the Dochmius, which consists of an 
antispast and a long syllable (~ — — ~ —); so that a simple 
dochiniac is the same as an antispastic monometer hyper- 
catalectic: Jé@r ἢ Védar.' 

IV. The conjunction of two feet is termed a dipodia or 
syzyzy. Most usually, however, the combination of two 
dissyllabic feet is called a dipodia, and that of two trisylla- 
bic, or a dissyllabic and trisyllabic, a syzygy. ‘The con- 
junction of two feet is often likewise termed a base. 


OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET. 


I. By isochronous feet are meant those which are inter- 
changeable in metre. 

II. In order to ascertain what feet are thus interchange- 
able, recourse must be had to the arsis and thesis. 

Ill. That part’of a foot which receives the Ictus, the 
stress of the voice, or beat of the time, is called arsis or el- 
evation. ‘The rest of the foot is termed thesis, or depres- 
Sion. 

IV. The natural place of the arsis is the long syllable 
of the foot, and hence, in the iambus, it falls on the second 
syllable, in the trochee on the first, while the spondee and 
tribrach leave its place alike uncertain. 


1. Etym. Mag. p. 285, 25, 5. v. Δοχμιακὸς. Seidler, de Vers. 
Dochm. p. 402, seq. 


a 


ISOCHRONOUS FEET. δ. 


V. The fundamental foot of a verse, however, determines 
the arsis for the other feet; and hence the spondee, in iam- 
bic and anapestic verse, has the arsis on the second sylla- 
ble, but in trochaic and dactylic on the first. 

VI. So, again, the tribrach, when it stands for the iam- 
bus, is to be pronounced ~ ~ ~, when it stands for the tro- 
chee “~~, 

VII. Now the ancients considered those feet only as iso- 
chronous which were capable of being divided into parts 
that were equal in time; so that a long syllable should have 
either a correspondent long syllable, or two short ones.’ 

VII. The following scheme will exemplify this more 
clearly, the place of the arsis being denoted as above (VI.) 
by the acute accent. 


Jambus Nee Trochee - ~|~ 
ΠΣ ΤΟ 1 - pribraca: <7 |) = 
Dactyl cast Anapest ~~ | — 
Spondee.— | — Spondee —|— 


IX. By this we perceive that the iambus and trochee are 
each interchangeable with the tribrach ; and that the dac- 
tyl, spondee, and anapzst are interchangeable with each 
other. 

X. In like manner it will appear that the iambus and 
trochee are not interchangeable, and that an iambus never 
admits a trochee into iambic verse, nor a trochee an iam- 
bus into trochaic verse. ‘Thus, 


é 

lambus® ͵]-ἢ 
7 

Trochee — | ~ 


The long syllable of the iambus has neither a corre- 
spondent long syllable in the trochee, nor two short ones. 
And the case is the same with the long syllable of the tro- 
chee. Hence the two feet are not interchangeable or iso- 
chronous.” 


1. Dawes, Miscellanea Critica, p. 62.—p. 103, ed. Kidd. 
2. For this reason the scholiast on He hestion (p. 76, ed Gaisf.) calls 


δῷ IAMBIC VERSE. 


XI. Again, it may be shown, in the same way, that the 
spondee and amphibrach are also not interchangeable. 
Thus, 


Spondee ὑπὸ a 
Amphibrach ~ — | ~ 


ῳ ἰ eee NS 


Here, in whatsoever way the amphibrach be divided, 
each division contains either more or less than the corre- 
spondent part of the spondee. Hence the two feet are not 
isochronous. And, for the same reason, the amphibrach is 
not isochronous with the dactyl or anapest.' 


OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 
I. Of Iambic Verse. 


I. Iambic verse derives its name from the foot which 
prevails in it, namely, the iambus. 

II. At first the iambus was the only foot allowed to enter 
into this measure ; but, by degrees, an intermixture of other 
feet was permitted, under certain restrictions. 

III. When a verse consists entirely of iambi, it is called 
a pure iambic verse ; when other feet are introduced and 
intermingled with the iambus, it is denominated a mixed 
lambic. 

IV. The reason why other feet besides the iambus were 
allowed to enter appears to have been, not only to lessen 


the iambic and trochaic measures ἀντιπαθοῦντα μέτρα, and 'Tricha (de 
Metris, p. 9, ed. Herm.) remarks, ἀντιπαθὴς καὶ οἷον ὑπεναντίος τῷ 
idubw ὁ tpoxaioc. Compare the language of Dawes (Misc. Crit. p. 103, 
ed. Kidd.) ‘“ Mihi persuasum est illos duntaxat pedes a veteribus tan- 
quam ἰσοχρόνους habert solitos, qui in singulas itidem partes temporibus 
aquales secari possent, ita scilicet ut singulis longis vel singulae itidem 
longa, vel certe bine breves responderent . . . . Percipis jam ra- 
tionem decantati illius, 6 τροχαῖος ἀντιπαθεῖ τῷ iduby, sive ob quam in 
versu trochaico iambus, in iambico vicissim trocheus nusquam locum 
habeat.” 

1. Compare Dawes,l.c. ‘ Hine etiam ratio elucescit, cur amphibra- 
chym spondao, adeoque dactylo et anapesto, pariter ἀντιπαθεῖν videre 
sit; sive cur pes iste in versu neque anapestico, neque trochaico, nec de- 
nique tambico conspiciatur.” 


IAMBIC VERSE. BG? 


the difficulty of composing, but in order to remove the mo- 
notonous and unpleasing effect of a succession of iambi: 
and also, as in the case of the tragic trimeter, to impart 
more dignity and elevation to the style." 

V. Iambic measure admits of being constructed in all 
varieties of length, from the monometer acatalectic to the 
tetrameter hypercatalectic. ‘The scales accompanying each 
metre will show the isochronous feet allowed to enter, and 
the places to which they are severally restricted. 


1. Monometer Acatalectic, or Base. 
Scale. 


In this measure the iambus is allowed to enter, of course, 
into both places ; but the tribrach, spondee, dactyl, and an- 
apeest only into the first. ‘The following are examples of 
this species of verse : 

i@ | τἄλᾶς. 
μῦμφᾶν | ἔχῶν. 


ἔπξσ᾽ E | πἔσεν. 


2. Monometer Hypercatalectic. 
φιλῶν | στξἕνᾶξ || εἰ. 
τμὲρος | Exel || με. 


1. Compare remarks under the iambic trimeter. The old iambic 
writers, Archilochus, Solon, Simonides, seldom availed themselves of 
these licenses; the tragic writers much more frequently. Porson, 


Suppl. ad Pref. ad Hee. p. = 


54 IAMBIC VERSE. 


3. Dimeter Acatalectic. 
Scale. 


a8 wiih ἘΠῚ 


- 
wo 


Sie  5-ς wee 


Examples. 
ὅμοϊ [ὅν wo || TE TOT | ἴαῖς. || 
yaorpis | ὃ τοῖσ || ἵν ἔντ | Epotc. || 
Ey@ | δὲ πλδκᾶ || μὸν ava | δξτοϊς. || 


I. Insystems of iambic dimeter acatalectics the dactyl is 
not often employed, the feet most commonly used being the 
tribrach, spondee, and anapest. 

II. Systems of pure dimeters are not found in the tragic 
writers, but systems of dimeters very frequently occur in 
the lyric and comic poets, into which more or less of license 


is introduced.! 
III. The comic poets, for example, in dimeter iambics, 


with the exception of the catalectic dipodia, admit ana- 
pests into every place, but more frequently into the first 
and third than into the second and fourth. With them the 
tribrach also occasionally enters into the fourth place. 


Thus : 
ποῦ τὸ | σκῦρδδον || pot τὸ | χθξἔσϊνον. || (Arist. Ran. 1018.) 
ποῦ plot | τὄδι || τίς τοῦτ᾽ | EAGBE. || (Id. Ibid. 1010.) 

IV. Strictly speaking, indeed, there is no difference in 
this measure between the second and fourth feet, since a 
system or set of dimeter iambics is nothing more than one 
long verse, divided, for convenience of arrangement, into 
portions, each containing four feet.’ 


1. Gaisford, ad Hephest. p. 243. 
2. Elmsley’s Review of Porson’s Hecuba. (Edinb. Rev. No. 87, 
Nov. 1811.) 


IAMBIC VERSE. 55 


V. It must be borne in mind, accordingly, that the final 
syllable in dimeter iambics, as well as in dimeter trochaics 
and anapestics, is not common, but that the verses run on 
by synapheia until the system is concluded by a catalectic 
line. ‘The following, from Aristophanes, will serve to il- 
lustrate this point more clearly εἰ 


τὶς THY | κεφαλῆν || ἀπεἔδη | δὄκεν || 
τῆς pat | vido; || TO TPUGA | tor || 

TO πὲρῦ | oivor || τεθνῆκ | ἔμοτ' || 

ποῦ τὸ | oxopoddr || μοῖ τὸ | yOEoivGr || 
τὶς τῆς | EAddc || πᾶρξτρ | ἄγεν || 

τἕῶς | δ ἄβελτ || ἐρῶ | TEpot. || 

KEXT | VOTE || Mappa | κῦθοι, || 

MEAq | τῖδατ || κἄθην | το.--- IP 


Here the last syllables in the first, second, fourth, and 
fifth lines, are respectively lengthened by position, through 
the influence of the synapheia, and the last line of the sys- 
tem is a dimeter catalectic. 

4. Dimeter Catalectic. 
ἄλᾶστ | ὅρος || τἴς οἵζ | ve. Ι 
5. Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 
τεκνῶν | ἕμῶν || PvAGE. | I 
6. Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 
yovat | κῦς ἄντ || tot | στἄθξεντ || ες. 
1. Elmsley, |. c—Brunck, ad Arist. Ran. 984.—Dawes, Misc. Crit. 


p- 58, ed Gaisf—Dunbar, Gr. Pros. p. 43. 
2. Ran. 984, seq. 


56 IAMBIC VERSE. 


7. Trimeter Acatalectic, or Senarius. 


Seale. 


Proper Names. 


I. This is also called the tragic trimeter, from its em- 
ployment by the Greek tragic writers, and, being the most 
important of the Greek metres, will require the most ex- 
tended consideration. 

II. The laws of the scale, for which we are indebted to 
the learning and sagacity of Porson,’ are as follows : 


1. The iambus may enter into any place. 

2. The tribrach into any place except the last. 

3. The spondee into the uneven places (first, third, and 
fifth). 

4. The dactyl into the first and third places. 

5. The anapest only into the first. But 

6. In the case of a proper name, an anapest may enter 
into any place except the last, provided always that 
the anapest be entirely contained within the proper 
name, so that its two short syllables may be enclosed 
between two longs in the same word. 


II. The following lines will serve to illustrate these 
laws : 


1. Pure Iambic Trimeters. 


6 πᾶ | OF κλεῖν || ὅς Οἱ | δίποῦς || κἄλοῦ | μένος. |] 
madAat | κῦὔνηγ || ἕτοῦντ | a Kat || μετροῦμ | Evdr. || 


1. Suppl. Pref. ad Hec. p. xix. 


IAMBIC TRIMETER. 57 


2. Tribrachs in the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth 
places. 
πότερα | δ᾽ ἕν oF || κοῖς ἢ ᾽ν | Gypoic || 6 Aa | Toc. || 
φθινοῦ | σᾶ δ᾽ ayé || λαῖς Bod | νόμοις || τῦκοξ | oF τέ. || 
πῶς οὖν | τῦθ᾽ od || τὸς 6 σῦφ | ὅς οὔκ || HvdG | TOdE ; || 
μῆτρος | ζύγὴν || at, κατ | πᾶτερᾶ || κἄτᾶ | κτᾶνεϊῖν. | 
τί yap | κἄκῶν || ἄπεστ | ἵ; τὸν || naTEpa | πᾶτῆρ. || 


3. Spondees in the first, third, and fifth places. 

Gone | orévay || μοῖς Kat | γδοῖς || πλοῦτιζ  ἔταϊ. || 

4. Dactyls in the first and third places. 
μῆτ᾽ Gps | τὸν αὖ || τοῖς γῆν | ἄντ || ἕναϊ | τἴνᾶ. || 
ἄνδρος | y’aptor || ov βᾶσϊ | λξῶς || τ᾽ ὅλῶ | λὅτος. 
5. Anapest in the first place. 
Ἱξρῆς: | ἔγῶ || μὲν Ζῆν | ὅς" οἵ || δὲ τ᾽ ἢ | θξῶν. | 
6. Anapest of proper names in the second, third, fourth, and 
ΜΗΔ places. 

ἣν I | φίγξνεϊ || av ὦ | vouas || ἔς Ev | δόμοϊς. || (ph. 
A. 416.) 

tétap | τὸν Int || ὄμξδοντ᾽ | ἅπεστ || εἴλξν | πᾶτῆρ. | 
(Ged. Col. 1317.) 

padtor | & Φοτῦ || ὦ Tet | péotay, || tap’ ov | tic av. || 
(Ed. T. 285.) 

ἔμοϊ | μὲν ov || δεῖς pd | Od¢ Avr || tyovq | φιλῶν. || (Ar- 
tig. 11.) 

IV. The last syllable in each verse appears to be indif- 
ferently short or long; and even where one line ends with 
a short vowel, a vowel is often found in the beginning of 
the next; as in the following instances from the Cidipus 
Tyrannus : 

τίνας 760’ ἕδρας τάσδε μοι ϑοάζετε, Ἐν 
ἱκτηρίοις κλάδοισιν ἐξεστεμμένοι ; pre es 


58 IAMBIC TRIMETER.— 


a ᾽γω δικαιῶν μὴ παρ᾽ ἀγγέλων, τέκνα, 6.7 
ἄλλων ἀκούειν, αὐτὸς ὧδ᾽ ἐλήλυθα. hye 
V. Sometimes, however, one verse, with its final vowel 
elided, passes by scansion into the next, but only when a 
long syllable precedes ;' as, 


σοὶ φασὶν αὐτὸν ἐς λόγους ἐλθεῖν μολόντ᾽ 
αἰτεῖν, ἀπελθεῖν τ᾽ ἀσφαλῶς τῆς δεῦρ᾽ ὁδοῦ. 
(Cid. Col. 1164, 5.) 

VI. The admissibility of the tribrach into an iambic line 
arises from the circumstance of its being an isochronous 
foot ; its exclusion from the last place in the trimeter turns 
upon a principle of rhythm; since a tragic trimeter, with 
such a concluding cadence, would be anything else but grave 
and dignified. 

VIL. The introduction of the spondee into an iambic line 
was owing to the wish of imparting to the verse a greater 
degree of weight and dignity,’ as well as of interrupting the 
monotonous cadence which a succession of iambi would 
have produced. 

VII. The admission of the spondee opened the door, of 
course, for the other feet that were isochronous with it, and 
in this way the dactyl and anapest were each allowed to 
come in. 

IX. The reason why the iambus was retained in the 
even places appears to have been this: that, by placing the 
spondee first and making the iambus to follow, greater em- 
phasis was given to the corresponding syllable of each 
metre? on which the ictus and pause took place, than 


1. Porson, ad Med. 510.—Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 23, seq. 
—Tate, Introd. p. 3. 

2. Horat. Ep. ad Pis. 255. 

3. By metre is here meant a dipodia or conjunction of two feet, of 
which there are three in the trimeter. In reciting iambic verses it was 
usual to make a slight pause at the termination of every second foot, 
with an emphasis on its final syllable. Thus, Terentianus Maurus (de 
Metr. 2193, seg., Ὁ. 101, ed Lennep.), speaking of the trimeter, says, 


“* Sed ter feritur : hinc trimetrus dicitur, 
Scandendo binos quod pedes conjungimus.” 


IAMBIC TRIMETER 59 


would have been the case had two long syllables stood to- 
gether. 

X. With regard to the use of the tribrach in the tragic 
trimeter, the following particulars must be noted: 1. That, 
though admissible into all places of the verse except the 
last, yet it is very rarely found in the fifth place. 2. That 
the second syllable of a tribrach (as of a dactyl) must not 
be a monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse, or the 
last syllable of a word. 3. That the preposition ἐς must 
not form the second syllable of a tribrach.' 

XI. On the use of the dactyl in this same measure the 
following must be noted: 1. ‘The dactyl, though admissible 
into both the first and third places, is more common in the 
third than the first place of the verse. 2. A dactylis whol- 
ly inadmissible into the fifth place.? 3. The first syllable 
of a dactyl in the third place should be either the last of a 
word, or a monosyllable, except in the case of proper 
names.’ 4. The second syllable of a dactyl in either 
place should not be either a monosyllable incapable of be- 
ginning a verse (as dv, yap, δὲ, μὲν, τὲ, &c.), or the last 
syllable of a wordt 5. ‘The preposition ἐς must not be the — 
second syllable of a dactyl in either place. 

XII. On the use of the initial anapest in the tragic trim- 
eter, observe as follows: ‘The anapest admissible into 


And again, v. 251, seq. 


“ Secundo cambum nos necesse est reddere, 
Qui sedis hujus jura semper obtinet, 
Scandendo et illic ponere assuetam moram, 
Quam pollicis sonore, vel plausu pedis, 
Discriminare, gui docent artem, solent.” 


The cesural pause, however, in the tragic trimeter, was the control- 
ling melody, and the marking of the metres was always made in sub- 
servience to this. Compare the remarks of Dawes, Mise. Crit. p. 361, 
ed. Kidd. 

1. Sandford’s Greek Prosody, p. 280, seq. 

2. Porson, Pref. ad Hec. 

3. Dunbar, Gr. Pros. p. 51. 

4, This canon is occasionally violated by the tragic poets, especially 
in the first place of the verse. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Bacch. 285. 


60 IAMBIC TRIMETER. 


the first place is generally included in the same word. 
The only exceptions are where the line begins either with 
an article, or with a preposition followed immediately by 
its case; as in Philoct.754, Tov ἴσον χρόνον. Eur. Orest. 
888, "Ent τῷδε δ᾽ ἠγόρευον. Iph. A. 502, ILap’ épot.' 

XII. The anapest in proper names is allowed, in order 

to bring into the tragic trimeter certain names of persons 
that would otherwise be unable to enter.? And, in order to 
soften down this license, it is probable that proper names 
so introduced were pronounced with a hurried utterance, 
so as to carry only ~ — to the ear. 
XIV. A few instances occur where the proper name be- 
gins with an anapest ; as, Μενέλαος, Πριάμου, &c. Elm- 
sley considers all such cases as corrupt, but Porson’s judg- 
ment seems to lean the other way.* 

XV. With regard to the use of resolved or trisyllabic 
feet, it is to be observed, 1. That more than two should 
not be admitted into the same verse. 2. That trisyllabic 
feet should not concur.’ 

XVI. Enclitics, when so used, and other words incapa- 
ble of beginning a sentence, are incapable of beginning a 
senarian.’ 

XVII. The verb ἐστὶ or ἐστὶν is very rarely found in 
the beginning of a senarian, except it is the beginning of a 


1. Monk, ad Soph. Electr. 4. (Mus. Crit. vol. i., p. 63.) 

2. Elmsley, in Ed. Rev., Nov., 1811. 

3. Tate, Introd., p. 36, seg. Dr. Clarke is entitled to the merit of 
having discovered this principle. Long proper names are, from their 
very nature, liable to be rapidly spoken, and thus ᾿Αντιγόνη, Νουπτό- 
λεμος, ᾿Ιφιγένεια, &c., might be easily slurred into something like Av7’- 
youn, Νουπτ’λεμος, Ἰφ᾽ γένεια, &c. The ear, of course, would find no 
cause of offence, and the eye take no cognizance of the matter. (Clarke, 
ad Il. ἃ, 811.—Tate, 1. c.) 

4. Elmsley, in Ed. Rev. 1. c.—Porson, Suppl. Pref. ad Hee. 

5. Class. Journ. No. 64, p. 309. 

6. This rule is sometimes violated by the tragic poets. Consult Sand- 
ford, Gr. Pros. p. 282, seq. in nots. 

7. Elmsley, ad Soph. Aj. 985. (Mus. Crit. vol. i., p. 367.) Id. ad 
Soph. did. T. 1084. 


IAMBIC TRIMETER. 61 


sentence also, or some pause, at least, in the sense has 
preceded.' 

XVIII. Some Doric forms are retained in the tragic dia- 
lect ; thus, always, ᾿Αθάνα, δαρός, ἔκατι, κυναγός, ποδα- 
γός, λοχαγός, ξεναγός, ὀπαδός. ‘To these, mentioned by 
Porson,’ may be added the following, as given by Monk :° 
ἄραρε, ϑᾶκος, and compounds, γάπονος, γαπετῆς, γάπεδον, 
γάμορος, γάποτος, γάτομος, κάρανον, and its compounds. 

XIX. Forms of Ionic (epic) Greek are also found in the 
tragic dialect ; as, ξεῖνος, μοῦνος, κεῖνος, πολλός," &e. 

XX. The augment is never omitted by the tragic writers 
except in the case of χρήν for ἔχρην. As to ἄνωγα, this 
preterit has no augment in Attic, although the pluperfect 
has. (2d. Col. 1598.) In like manner, the tragic writers 
do not prefix the augment to καθεζόμην, καθήμην, καθεῦδον, 
though the comic writers sometimes give it. A double 
augment is occasionally allowed in tragedy, as in ἠνεσχό- 
μὴν (ἀνεσχόμην being likewise found).’ 


Of the Cesura in the Tragic Trimeter.® 


I. One of the greatest beauties in a tragic trimeter is the 
cesura. 

II. The tragic trimeter has two principal cesuras, one 
on the penthemimeris, or fifth half foot ; as, 


κίνδυνος ἔσχε | δορὶ πεσεῖν “Ελληνικῷ, 


and the other on the hephthemimeris, or seventh half foot ; 
as, 
Πολλῶν λόγων εὑρὴμαθ᾽ | ὥστε μὴ ϑανεῖν. 
1Π. A line is esteemed deficient in harmony, and not 
perfect, which is without the cesura. Many lines have 


. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Heracl. 386. 

. Porson, ad Eurip. Orest. 26. 

. Ad Eur. Hippol. 1093. 

. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 286, seq. 

. Porson, Suppl. ad Pref. ad Hec. p. xvi. 

. Porson, Suppl. ad Pref. ad Hec. p. xxiv. 
F 


ook ὃ) ὃν 


62 IAMBIC TRIMETER. 


both; but the penthemimeral is more frequent than the 
hephthemimeral in the proportion of four to one. 

IV. The cesura is allowed to fall on a monosyllable, ei- 
ther with or without the elision, as well as on the last syl- 
lable of a word. Thus, 

καὶ νῦν τί τοῦτ᾽ ad | φασὶ πανδήμῳ πόλει. 
καὶ τεύξεται τοῦδ᾽ | οὐδ᾽ ἀδώρητος φίλων. 

᾿Αλλ’ ὃν πόλις στυγεῖ, σὺ | τιμήσεις τάφῳ. 
Ὄταν γὰρ εὖ φρονῆς, τόθ᾽ | ἠγήσει σὺ νῷν. 


V. A verse, however, is not faulty which has what Por- 
son terms the quasi-cesura; that is, when after the third 
foot there is an elision of a short vowel, either in the same 
word or in such a word as de, με, σε, ye, TE, attached to 
it ;' thus, 

ἹΚεντεῖτε, μὴ φείδεσθ᾽, | ἐγὼ ᾽τέκον Πάριν. 
Τυναιξὶ παρθένοις τ’ | ἀπόθλεπτος μέτα. 


VI. A verse sometimes occurs without either cesura or 
quasi-cesura ; but the third and fourth feet are never com- 
prehended in the same word.’ 

VII. There are two minor divisions of the verse, name- 
ly, one which divides the second, and one which divides 
the fifth foot ; thus, 


1. Elmsley ingeniously defends verses of this formation by a hypoth- 
esis that the vowel causing the elision might be treated as appertaining 
to the preceding word, and be so pronounced as to produce a kind of 
hephthemimeral cesura. Elms. ad Aj. 1100. (Mus. Crit. vol. i., p. 
A477.) Tate, Introd. p. 6. 

2. Ifthe third and fourth feet were comprehended in one and the 
same word, ἃ most inelegant and inharmonious division of the line into 
three equal parts would unnecessarily be the result. As in the following : 


ἢ κάρτ᾽ dp’ dv | παρεσκόπεις | χρησμῶν ἐμῶν. 
Compare the remark of Victorinus (p. 2525), ‘ pessimus autem versus, 
qui singula verba in dipodus habet, 

“ Presentium | divinitas | calestiwm.” 
Hermann seeks to limit this rule of Porson’s by making the regulation 


not absolute in its nature, but only highly approved of by the tragic wri- 
ters. Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 71, ed. Glasg. 


IAMBIC TRIMETER. 63 
1. Τὸ ποῖον | ἕν γὰρ πόλλ᾽ ἂν ἐξεύροι μαθεῖν. 
2. ᾿Αρχὴν βραχεῖαν εἰ λάβοιμεν | ἐλπίδος. 
The former of these divisions, though not necessary, is 


agreeable ; the latter constitutes what is called the Cretic 
termination,' and leads to the consideration of the 


Porsonian Pause. 


I. When the iambic trimeter has, after a word of more 
than one syllable, the cretic termination (— ~ -- either 
included in one word ; as 


Κρύπτοντα χεῖρα καὶ πρόσωπον EuTaAty ; 
or consistingsof — ~ and a syllable ; as, 
Κῆδος δὲ τοὐμὸν Kat σὸν οὐκέτ᾽ EoTi δῆ. 
Xaip’, οὐ γὰρ ἡμῖν ἐστι τοῦτο Got YE μῆν. 
or of a monosyllable and ~ —; as, 
Καλῶς μὲν εἷπας, ϑύγατερ, ἀλλὰ τῷ καλῷ. 
then the fifth foot must be an iambus.® 
II. Hence the following lines are faulty in metre : 
ἤλτλας ὁ χαλκέοισι νώτοις οὐρανόν (Eurip. Ton. 1) ; 
Τὸ μὴ μάταιον δ᾽ ἐκ μετώπων σωφρόνων (“Ζ:5εἰ. Suppl. 
206) ; 


and are to be corrected as follows :* 


1. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 290. 

2. The cretic is only another name for the amphimacer. 

3. This is Porson’s celebrated canon for the pause in tragic trimeters, 
given in the Supplement to his Preface to the Hecuba. Elmsley (Ed- 
inb. Rev. No. 37) gives the same rule in other words, but not so clearly. 
“ The first syllable of the fifth foot must be short, if it ends a word of 
two or more syllables.” The reason why the tragic poets observed this 
rule respecting the fifth foot of a senarius is sought to be explained as 
follows by Hermann: ‘“ Causa autem quare ista vocabulorum divisio 
displicere debet, hac est. Quoniam in fine cujusque versus, ubi, exhaus- 
tis jam propemodum pulmonibus, lenior pronunciationis decursus desid- 
eralur, asperiora omnia, quo difficillus pronunciantur, eo magis etiam 
aures ledunt: propterea sedulo evitatur ula vocabulorum conditio, que 
ultumum versus ordinem longiore mora a precedente disjungit, eaque re 
decursum numerorum impedit ac retardat.” 
oe Porson, Suppl. ad Pref. ad Hec. p. xxxvi.—Elmsley, Edinb. Rev. 

ο, 37, 


64 IAMBIC TRIMETER. 


"AtAac ὁ νώτοις χαλκέοισιν οὐρανόν. 
TO μὴ μάταιον δ᾽ ἐκ μετώποσωφρόνων. 

III. But when the second syllable of the fifth foot is a 
monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse, such as ay, 
av, yap, δὲ, μὲν, οὖν, together with all enclitics, used as 
such, then the fifth foot may be a spondee ;' as, 

Σὺ δ᾽ ἦμιν ἡ μισοῦσα, μισεῖς μὲν λόγω. 
Σπεύδωμεν, ἐγκονῶμεν" ἡγοῦ [ol γέρον. 

IV. The particle ἄν is of most frequent occurrence in 
this position; with respect to which, it must be observed 
that it is in this case invariably subjoined to its verb, which 
always suffers elision ; as in the following line :* 


Hi μοι λέγοις τὴν ὄψιν, εἴπόιμ᾽ ἂν τότε. 


V. The fifth foot must also be an iambus, although the 
cretic termination comes after a monosyllable, when that 
monosyllable is incapable of beginning a verse. Hence 
the following line is wrong: 


Τίνας λόγους ἐροῦσιν, ἐν yap τῷ μαθεῖν (Aid. Col. 115) ; 


and we should read, with Elmsley, —év δὲ τῷ μαθεῖν ὃ 
VI. Nor should ἐστ᾽, by elision for ἐστὲ, form the first 
syllable of the fifth foot.* 
VII. Thus it appears that there are only three cases in 
which the fifth foot may be ἃ spondee. 
1. (By far the most frequent) when both syllables of the 
fifth foot are contained in the same word. 


1. Porson, ibid. p. xxxi. The words in the text, “used as such,” 
refer to the circumstance of the pronouns cov, μοι, we, oe, &c., being 
sometimes emphatic. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 291. 

2. Porson, ibid. Ὁ. xxxii.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 292. 

3. Elmsley, Edinb. Rev. No. 37. This extension of the Porsonian 
canon, though proceeding from Elmsley, has not met with the universal 
acquiescence of scholars. Compare Matthie, ad Eurip. Pheniss. 403 
(414), and Scholefield, ad Pors. Eurip. p. 308. (Pheniss. 414.) 

4, Elmsley, ad Eurip. Bacch. 246. “ His exceptis, nullum senarium 
apud tragicos existere puto, gui, in initio quinti pedis, ἔστ᾽ vel ἐστ’ ha- 
beat.” 


IAMBIC TRIMETER. 65 


2. When the first syllable of the fifth foot is a monosyl- 
lable capable of beginning a verse, and not disjoined 
from the following syllable by any pause in the sense. 

3. When the second syllable of the fifth foot is a mono- 
syllable incapable of beginning a verse.' 


Of Elision and Apheresis in the Iambic Trimeter. 


I. In the iambic trimeter the short vowels ¢, 0, and the 
doubtful a, ¢, are elided when the next word begins with a 
vowel. 

II. But the o of πρό is not elided, nor the ¢ of περί ; in 
other words, the Attics never place πρό or περί before a 
word beginning with a vowel.’ In compounds πρό is con- 
tracted with ε or 0, as προὐκείμεθα, προὗπτος, &c. 

Ill. The ¢ of the dative plural, third declension, is never 
elided by the Attic poets, that of the dative singular very 
rarely. 

IV. The elision of ε before the particle ἂν is very rare. 
There are ten instances in Attic poetry similar to ἔγραψ᾽ ἄν, 
for ἔγραψα ἄν, for one similar to ἔγραψ᾽ ἄν, for ἔγραψε avs 


1. Elmsley, Edinb. Rev. No. 37. Some apparent exceptions to the 
Porsonian canon are not real exceptions: thus, where οὐδείς and μηδείς, 
so given, ought, in Attic orthography, to be written οὐδ᾽ εἷς, and μηδ᾽ 
εἷς ; and where, in the plays of Sophocles, ἡμῖν, ὑμῖν, are exhibited as 
spondees, with the last syllable long, whereas that poet employed these 
pronouns thus, ἦμεν ὕμιν, with the last syllable short. Porson, Suppl. 
Pref. p. xxxv.—Elmsley, |. ec —Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 293, in nots. 

2. Compare Porson, ad Eurip. Med. 284. “ Tragici nunquam in 
senarios, trochaicos, aut, puto, anapestos legitimos, περὶ admittunt ante 
vocalem, sive in eadem, sive in diversis vocibus. Imo ne in melica qui- 
dem verbum vel substantivum hujusmodi compositionis intrare sinunt ; 
raro admodum adjectivum vel adverbium.” 

3. “ Elmsley,” observes Sandford, ‘denies the legitimacy of the elis- 
ion in any instance ; Porson, in the preface to the Hecuba, inclines to 
be more lenient. ‘There are, unquestionably, instances of this elision in 
Attic verse which all the ingenuity of Elmsley has failed to remove ; 
but from its extreme rarity it is inadmissible in modern composition.” 
Gr. Pros. p. 297, in notis. 

4. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Med. 416. Blomfield, however, limits this 
canon of Elmsley’s to those cases where confusion might otherwise 
arise ; viz., where first aorists and perfects are employed. “ Neque 
hanc elisionem poetis Atticis displicuisse credo, preterquam wn tis vocibus, 


66 IAMBIC TRIMETER. 


V. The long vowels 7, ὦ, and the doubtful v, are never 
elided. 

VI. A diphthong cannot be elided before a short or doubt- 
ful vowel. 

VII. The diphthongs of the nominative plural of nouns 
are never elided either in Attic or Homeric Greek. 

VIII. The diphthong αὐ is never elided by the tragic 
writers in the first or third persons of verbs, nor in the in- 
finitive.’ 

IX. The elision of 0, even in the words μοὶ, σοὶ, τοὶ, is 
totally denied by some scholars,” and allowed by others only 
in the case of οἴμοι before w.5 

X. The short vowel is sometimes, in Astic Greek, cut 
off by apheresis from the beginning of a word, after a long 
vowel or diphthong in the close of the preceding word.* 

XI. The instances in which the initial ὦ appears to be 
so cut off, are, according to Elmsley, better referred to cra- 
sis. Hence, in his opinion, such forms as μὴ ᾿μαθεῖ and 
μὴ ᾿ποτίσασθαι, ought to be pronounced μάμαθεϊ and μάπο- 
τίσασθαι. 


Of Crasis and Synizesis. 


I. The article, followed by a short, always coalesces into 


ubi confusio inde orirt posset, i. 6.5) in aoristis primis et perfectis.” 
Blomf. ad Aisch. Choéph. 841. 

1. Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 190, where an examination and correction 
of the different passages that militate against this canon may be seen. 
On the same side is Elmsley, ad Eurip. Iph. Taur. 678. (Mus. Crit. 
vol. ii., p. 292.) Hermann, however, seems inclined not to make the rule 
so absolute a one, in his remarks on Soph. Philoct. 1060. «“ Non ubique 
equidem elisionem diphthongi defendam, sed hic eam nolim sine librorum 
auctoritate removert. Nam minus suaviter ad aures accedit λειφθήσομαι 
cum ictu in ultima ante cesuram,” &c. 

2. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Med. 56. ‘“ Sed hodie inter omnes fere eru- 
ditos convenit, dativum μοὶ elisionem pati non posse, licet cum quibus- 
dam vocibus per crasin coalescere possit.” 

3. Blomfield, Remarks on Matthae, G. Εἰ. p. xxxvii., third edition. 
Incorporated into the fifth edition by Kenrick, p. 87. Compare Soph. 
Aj. 587.—Koen. ad Greg. Corinth. p. 171. 

4. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 299, in notis. 

5. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Heracl. 460. 


IAMBIC TRIMETER. 67 


long @; as, ὁ ἀνήρ into ‘dvip; τοῦ ἀνδρὸς into τἀνδρὸς, 
and the like.’ 

II. Kai never makes a crasis with ev, except in com- 
pounds ; and never with ἀεὶ. 

Ill. In words joined by crasis, as κάτι, Kav, κἂν (for καὶ 
ἔτι, καὶ ἐν, καὶ ἂν), and the like, ¢ should not be subscribed 
except where καὶ forms a crasis with a diphthong contain- 
ing an iota; as, kata for καὶ eita; but Kame for καὶ ἐπί, &e. 

IV. Μή οὐ and 7 ov always coalesce into one syllable 
with the Attics; thus, τὸ μὴ ob τόδ᾽ ἄγγος (Trach. 622), 
is to be pronounced τὸ μόν 700’ ἄγγος, ὅτε. 

V. Both in tragic and comic versification, a very frequent 
synizesis occurs in the words ἢ) εἰδέναι, and μὴ εἰδέναι ; in 
ἐπεί ov, in ἐγώ ov, and in the concurrence of ὦ ον, and ὦ εἰ. 

VI. The tragic writers make the genitive singular and 
plural of the third declension in ἕως, ewy either monosyl- 
labic or dissyllabic, as suits the verse. 


Of Hiatus in the Iambic Trimeter? &c. 

I. Hiatus of any kind is not admitted by the tragic wri- 
ters into their iambic and trochaic measures. But observe 
that, 

IJ. When a vowel in the end of a word, after another 
vowel or diphthong, is elided, a collision takes place be- 
tween the preceding vowel or diphthong and the vowel or 
diphthong at the beginning of the next word; thus, 


Πασῶν ἀναίδει᾽ eb δ᾽ ἐποίησας μολῶν, 
Τεκμήρι᾽ ἀνθρώποισιν ὥπασας σαφῆ. 

III. The hiatus after τί and ὁτι is admitted in comedy ; 
as, τί av, Arist. Thesm, 852; τί dv, Plut. 464; ὅτι dy- 
θέσεται, Av. 84; ὅτι ob, Ach. 516, &e. 

IV. In exclamations and the use of interjections, the 


1. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 481, ed. Kidd.—Matthie G. G.§ 54. The 
Ionians and Dorians, on the contrary, contracted o’vyp, τὠνδρός, &e. 


2. Sandford’s Gr. Pros. p. 308. 


68 IAMBIC TRIMETER. 


tragic writers sometimes allow a long vowel or diphthong 
to stand before a vowel; thus, 

᾿τοτοῖ, Λύκει᾽ "Ἀπολλον' of ἐγὼ, ἐγώ. (Asch. Ag. 1228.) 
Ὦ οὗτος Αἴας, δεύτερον σε προσκολῶ. (Soph. Aj. 89.) 


V. Interjections, such as φεῦ, φεῦ, &c., often occur extra 
metrum, and sometimes other words, especially in passages 
of emotion; thus, 


Τάλαινα: οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλη: φαιδρὰ γ᾽ οὖν an’ ὀμμάτων." 


VI. The diphthongs αὐ and οὐ are occasionally shorten- 
ed by the Attic poets before a vowel in the middle of a 
word ;° as, 


Παλαϊόν τε ϑησαύρισμα Διονύσου τόδε. (Eurip. Electr. 
500.) 
Kaw’ ἂν τοϊαύτῃ χειρὶ τιμωρεῖν ϑέλοι. (Aid. T. 140.) 


Of the Comic and Satyric Trimeter.* 
I. The comic iambic trimeter admits an anapest into the 
first five places of the verse ; as, 
Karaba | κἄταθᾶ || καταθα | κἄτᾶἄθα | κἄτἄθη | σομαι. || 
( Vesp. 979.) 
II. It also admits a dactyl into the fifth place ; thus, 


Πυθοίμ | 20’ ἂν || τὸν xpqop | ov ἡ || μῶν Ort | νοεῖ. |] 
(Plut. 55.) 


ΠῚ. It allows of lines without czsura; and, though some- 
what rarely, such also as divide the line by the dipodia of 


scansion ; thus, 


1. Compare the language of Blomfield, ad loc.“ Notanda est ultima 
syllaba του ἐγὼ i hatu porrecta. Hoc ut recte fiat, hiatus in τοίην ca- 


dere debet.” 
2. Cid. Col. 318. Compare Trach. 1087.—Electr. 1159, &c. 


3. Compare page 4, note 3. 
4. Gaisford, ad Hephast. p. 242.—Tate, Introd. p. 9.—Hermann, 


Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 80, ed. Glasg- 


ba 


IAMBIC TRIMETER. 69 


᾿Απολῶ TOY ἄνθρωπον κάκιστα τουτονί. (Plut. 68.) 
Σπονδὰς φέρεις | τῶν ἀμπέλων | τετμημένων ; (Ach. 188.) 


IV. It violates the rule respecting the Porsonian pause , 
thus, 
Δοῦλον γενέσθαι παραφρονοῦντος | δεσπότου. (Plut. 2.) 
Κακῶς ἔπραττον καὶ πένης ἦν" | Oida τοι. (Ib. 29.) 
Δέχου τὸν ἄνδρα καὶ τὸν ὄρνιν | τοῦ ϑεοῦ. (Ld. 63.) 


V. It permits also the concurrence of resolved feet, yet 
not so that an anapest should come after a dactyl or tribrach. 

VI. The iambic trimeter of the satyric drama appears, in 
its structure, to occupy a middle place between the nicety 
of the tragic laws and the extreme license of comedy ; as 
far, indeed, as we are able to form any opinion concerning 
it from the scanty remains that have come down to our 
times." 

VU. The anapest is found, as in the case of the comic 
trimeter, in the first five places of the verse; the pause is 
in like manner neglected, and trisyllabic or resolved feet 
are of frequent occurrence.” 


We will now return to the most important of the remain- 


ing iambic measures. 


8. Trimeter Catalectic. 
ἔχῶν | Ew’ wo || TE vavo | ἵπδμπ || ὅν avp | av. I 
9. Trimeter Brachycatalectic. 
ζύγεντ | & raid || Orot | ov ἃ || dovay. | Ι 


10. Scazon, or Choliambus. 


ὥς οἵ | μὲν ἃ || yet Bod | πᾶλῷ || karH | ρῶντο. [} 


1. The only satyric drama that has reached us is the Cyclops of Eu- 
ripides. 

2. Gaisford (ad Hephest. p. 242) inclines to exclude the anapest from 
the third place in the satyric trimeter, but without sufficient authority. 
On the occurrence of trisyllabic feet, consult Casaubon, de Sat. Poes. p. 
222. 


70 IAMBIC TETRAMETER. 


I. This measure is nothing more than the iambic trimeter 
acatalectic, with a spondee instead of an iambus for the 
sixth foot. Hence its name of scazon (σκάζων, “ limping”) 
or choliambus (χωλίαμθος, “ lame iambus”). 

Il. The fifth foot is generally an iambus, since the line 
would otherwise be too heavy if both the fifth and sixth 
feet were spondees ; though instances of this kind occur 
even in Theocritus ; as, 


6 μου | σοποι || ὃς ἐν | θάδ᾽ “Ἵππ || ὥναξ | κεῖται || 
εἰ μὲν | πονη || ρὸς μὴ | ποτέρχ || εὖ τῷ | τύμύῳ. || 


III. This species of verse is also called the Hipponactic 
trimeter, from the virulent poet Hipponax, who invented 
it, and after whose example it was employed for purposes 
of railing and sarcasm. ‘The writers who used it construct- 
ed it generally in the neatest and most exact manner, rare- 
ly employing resolutions, and entirely avoiding the anapest, 
except that Babrius has sometimes taken it into the first 
place. The tragic writers abstained altogether from this 
measure, nor did the comic poets use it, unless, perhaps, 
with allusion to the iambic writers, as Eupolis in the Bapte 
(ap. Prisctan, p. 1328). 


11. Tetrameter Catalectic. 
εἴ prot | yévot || τὸ map | θἕνος || κἄλῆ | TE Kat || Teper | va. [} 


I. This measure was much used by the comic poets, but 
not at all by the tragic writers. It may be considered as 
two dimeters, the first complete, the second wanting one 
syllable.’ 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 94, ed. Glasg. 

2. The iambic tetrameter catalectic is used also in English ; as in the 
song called ‘“‘ Miss Bailey,” viz., “‘A captain bold from Halifax,” &c. 
It forms also the prevalent measure of the modern Greek poetry, or, in 
other words, it is their heroic verse. (Consult Fauriel, Chants popu- 
laires de la Gréce Moderne, vol. 1., p. cxix., Disc. Prélim.) The follow- 
ing lines will illustrate this, the pronunciation being regulated entirely 
by accent : 


IAMBIC TETRAMETER. 71 


II. This measure is the most harmonious of iambic 
verses, and those lines are the most pleasing which have 
the cesura at the end of the fourth foot or second metre ; as, 


el μοι γένοιτο παρθένος, | καλή τε Kal τέρεινα. 


. But the comic writers often neglect this cesura. 
Ill. The following is the metrical scale : 


__|| Proper Name. 


IV. This scale is based upon the remarks of Porson and 
Elmsley,' and the authority of the latter has been followed 
in admitting the anapest into the fourth place, a license 
which Porson restricts to the case of a proper name. The 
only license of the kind will occur, then, in the seventh 
foot. 

V. In the resolved or trisyllabic feet one restriction ob- 
tains ; that the concurrence of the feet —- ~ ~ ΟΥ̓́. ~ ~ and 
~ ~ — in that order never takes place; a rule which, even 
in the freer construction of the trimeter, is always strictly 
observed from its essential necessity. 

VI. All the trisyllabic feet which are admissible into the 
comic iambics are employed with much greater moderation 
in the catalectic tetrameters than in the common trimeters.” 

VII. The comic poets admit anapests more willingly and 
frequently into the first, third, and fifth places, than into the 
second, fourth, and sixth of the tetrameter.® 


Πουλάκι, ποῦθεν ἔρχεσαι ; πουλί pov, ποῦ πηγαίνεις 5 
Πουλάκι, ᾽πές μας τίποτε, κἀνὲν καλὸν μαντάτον. 


1. Porson, Suppl. ad Pref. ad Hec. p. xxxix.—Elmsley, Edinb. Rev. 
No. 357. Elmsley is for the admission (though very rarely) of an ana- 
pest of a common word in the fourth place, which opinion we have fol- 
lowed in the scale. 

2. Elmsley, Ed. Rev. No. 37. 

3. Lhd. 


72 IAMBIC TETRAMETER. 


‘IX. We have remarked above, that the most pleasing 
cesura in this species of verse falls after the fourth foot. 
Sometimes the verse is even so constructed as to give a 
succession of iambic dipodias, separately heard; as the fol- 
lowing from Aristophanes, Plutus, 253, seq.' 


Ὦ πολλὰ δὴ | τῷ δεσπότῃ || ταὐτὸν ϑύμον | φαγόντες, 
"Ανόρες φίλοι | καὶ δημόται || καὶ τοῦ πονεῖν | ἐρασταί. 


12. Tetrameter Acatalectic. 


I. This measure, called also Boiscius, from its inventor 

. Boiscus, is not used by the Greek tragic and comic wri- 

ters. Hephestion gives an example from Alceus, as fol- 

lows :? 

Aééat | μὲ K@ || μᾶζοντ | ἃ δὲξ || αἱ Aico | Guat || o& Aico | 
ὅμαϊ. || 

II. The Roman comic and tragic poets, however, made 
much use of this species of verse. The Latins called it 
octonarius. 

Ill. This measure allows of one of two cesuras. Plau- 
tus commonly divides it in the fourth arsis, and therefore 
intended it to be asynartete ; which is indicated by the 
hiatus and short syllable; as in the Amphitr. 3, 4, 5, and 
Bacch. 4, 9, 9. 

Llé πᾶ | vim sal || vim nin | ciat || — aut i | rati Gd || 
ventum | sénis. || 

O Troi | α ὃ patri || α ὃ Pérg | ami, || — 6 Pri | mé pé- 
ri || isti | sénée. || 

In Terence, on the other hand, this kind of verse is not 
asynartete, because he usually makes the cesura in the the- 
sis which follows the fourth arsis; as, 


Nine Am | phitriio || ném volt | délu || di-méiis | patér || 
faxd | probe. || 


1. Tate, Introd. p. 10. 
2. Hermann, Doctr. Elem. Metr. p. 102, ed. Glasg. 


TROCHAIC VERSE. - 7B 


11. Of Trochaie Verse. 


I. Trochaic verse derives its name from the foot which 
prevails in it, namely, the trochee. 

II. The trochee, however, as in the case of the iambus, 
is convertible into a tribrach, and the spondee and anapest 
are also admitted, but not the dactyl, except in a proper 
name.! ‘There is this difference, however, between iambic 
and trochaic measure, that the latter admits the spondee 
and anapest into the even places, the former into the uneven. 

Ill. The following are the principal trochaic metres : 


1. Monometer Acatalectic, or Base. 
Goté | νακτῦς. || 
πὴμᾶτ᾽ | οἰκῶν. || 
Trochaic monometers are usually found in systems, 

which, as in most other numbers, so in the trochaic also, it is 
the custom, especially of the comic writers, to form into dime- 
ters. These systems are continued in one unbroken tenour, 
concluded by a catalectic verse. On this account there is 
no place for hiatus at the end of each verse, nor is it held 
necessary to conclude a verse with an entire word ; but the 
whole system is as one verse. ‘Thus in Aristophanes (Pac. 
339, seg.) we have the following : 


καὶ βοᾶτέ, καὶ γελᾶτ᾽- ἤ---- 
On γὰρ ἔξεσται τόθ᾽ ὑμῖν 
πλεῖν, μένειν, κινεῖν, καθεύδειν, 
ἐς πανηγύρεις ϑεωρεῖν, 
ἑστιᾶσθαι, κοτταθίζειν, 
Ζ 

συθαρίζειν, 

ἰοῦ ἰοῦ κεκραγέναι. 


1. Compare remarks under trochaic tetrameter catalectic. 


G 


~ 


74 TROCHAIC VERSE. 


2. Monometer Hypercatalectic. 
ποντὶ | Ov oad || ὧν 
Mata | δὸς 76x || οὔ 
Bap6bap | ὦ β || a. 


3. Dimeter Acatalectic. 


Scale. 


Examples. 
ποῖ τρᾶπ | Gpat || ποῖ πῦρ | ed00; || 
el δὲ | τῖς ὑπὲρ || σπτᾶ | χεροῖν. || 
aidoc | OTE Μοῖρ᾽ || dvipev | atoc || 
GAvpoc | ἀἄχδρῦς || dvaré | φῆνξ. || 
4. Dimeter Catalectic.' 

ἢ AOy | ὦ πῦρ || eve | Tae — |] 

kat Kat | ἃ γνῶ || μὴν ἴδ | ρῖς. — || 
TO épov | Ex VE || οὔ KAA | Oc. — || 

Καὸόσμς | ἔμδλξ || TavdE | γᾶν. — || 


5. Dimeter Brachycatalectic? 
slot | δεῖν yiy || ἄντὶ | | 
aAvpov | audi || μουσᾶν. | | 
AaGbETE | PEpETE || TETET’. | I 


1. Called also Euripidean. 

2. Called also Ithyphallic. Compare Terentianus Maurus, v. 1845, 
and Atilius Fortunatus, p. 2698, as cited by Gaisford, ad Hepheest. p. 
265. 


TROCHAIC VERSE. 75 


6. Dimeter Hypercatalectic.' 
ac E| γῆμ᾽ ὅ || 760 | τᾶς Πὰρ || Tc. 
τοὺς μὲν | Ev στᾶθμ || oloty | innit || κοῖς. 
ἡ. Trimeter Catalectic.? 

Epyé | tat τι || μᾶ yv | ναΐκει || ὦ ye | ev. — || 
TUBETE | μὴ WOH || εἴτε | μῆδ᾽ ἔστ || ὦ κτῦπ | ὅς. --- |l 
8. Trimeter Brachycatalectic. 

ot δὲ | πρὸς ϑρὸν || ove Eo | ὦ μ || λοντξς. | Ι 
τὸν δ᾽ | μὸν πῦτμ || Ov ἄδᾶκρ | ὕτν || οὐδεῖς. | Ι 


9. Trimeter Hypercatalectic. 
HAOv | εἴς Oop || ove ἕν | αὖθ᾽ ὃ || καστᾶ | Gor Aéy | w. 


τῷ μὲν | ὃ στρᾶτ || ἡλᾶ | τᾶς πᾶτ || Hp EKA | FEET || 0. 


10. Tetrameter Catalectic. 


Scale. 
δ εὐ} Sy ee a 1. ΠΤ Ὶ ἼΣΤΕ 
So [Ξε τοι eae =v l- ~~ }='Proper Name. 
Examples. 
ὦ πᾶτρ | ἂς OF || βῆς Ev | δικδι, || λευσσἔτ᾽ | OtdE || ποῦς 
6 | δὲ 
ὃς τᾶ | κλεῖν ai || viyuar’ | ῃδῆ, || Kat κρᾶτ | τστς || ἣν 
ἄν | 7p. 


I. This measure is commonly called the tragic tetrame- 
ter ; and it has with the tragic writers the cwesura almost 


1. Called also Bachillidean, from the poet Bachillides. 

2. The trochaic trimeter acatalectic is found neither m tragedy nor 
comedy, as rightly stated by Bentley (ad Cic. Tusc. 3, 12). If any ap- 
pear to be found, as those which Gaisford (ad Hephest. p. 265) adduces 
from Sophocles (( 4. Col. 1081, 1092) they belong to epitrites. Her- 
mann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 52, ed. Glasg. 


76 TROCHAIC VERSE. 


always at the end of the fourth foot; as in the lines just 
given.' 


ὦ πάτρας Θήθης ἔνοικοι, | λεύσσετ᾽, Οἰδίπους Ode, 
ὃς τὰ κλείν᾽ αἰνίγματ᾽ ἤδη, | καὶ κράτιστος ἣν ἀνήρ. 


This cesura, however, is often neglected by the comie 
poets. 

II. The fourth foot of a tragic tetrameter should always 
end with some word that allows a pause in the sense ; not 
with a preposition, for instance, or an article belonging in 
syntax to what comes after.’ 

1Π. If the first dipodia of the verse is contained in entire 
words (and so as to be followed at least by a slight break 
of the sense), the second foot is a trochee, or may be a tri- 
brach ;* as, 


ὡς ἄτιμος, || οἰκτρὰ πάσχων, ἐξελαύνομαι χθονός. 
κάθ’ ὁ Βρόμιος, || ὡς ἔμοιγε φαίνεται, δόξαν λέγω. 
μητέρος δὲ || μὴδ᾽ ἴδοιμι μνῆμα: πολεμία γὰρ ἦν. 


IV. In every place except the fourth and seventh, a dac- 
tyl of proper names is admitted. ‘This dactyl is chiefly al- 
lowed to enter where its two short syllables are enclosed 
between two longs in the same word; very rarely when 
the word begins with them; under other circumstances, 
never ;* as, 


1. This cesura is found neglected in Auschylus, Pers. 164, where 
Porson corrects the verse by removing διπλῆ to the end of the line; an 
emendation of which Hermann speaks rather slightigly. (Porson, 
Suppl. ad Pref. p. xhii.—Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 52, ed. 
Glasg.) Blomfield follows Porson. 

2. Porson, Suppl. ad Pref. p. xliii. 

3. This nicety of structure in the long trochaic of tragedy was first dis- 
covered by Porson. Consult T'racts and Misc. Criticisms of Porson, 
ed. Kidd, p. 197.—Class. Journ. No. 45, p. 166, seg.—Maltby, Lex. 
Pros. p. \xvii. Tate, in his Introduction, p. 12, examines and explains 
(from his paper in the Class. Journ. |. c.) the different lines that appear 
to militate against this canon of Porson’s. 

4. The principle on which this rule is probably based has already been 
alluded to in a previous note, page 60. 


TROCHAIC VERSE. i i 


εἰς ap | Idiyé || νετᾶν | EAeviqc || vdordc | ἣν πὲ || TP@pEV 
Ἢ OG: 

πᾶντὲς | “EAA || ες στρᾶτ | ὃς δὲ || Moputdo | νῶν οὔ |] 
Gol Tap | ἢν. 

Evyyov | ov τ’ E || μὴν πῦλᾶ | δὴν τῇ || τὸν τᾶ | δὲ ξὺν || 
δρῶντᾶ | μδι. 


V. As to scansion, one limitation only obtains ; that — — 
or ~ ~ — in the sixth place, never precedes ~ ~ ~ in the 
seventh. Even in comedy, a verse like the following is 
exceedingly rare : 


οὔτε yap vavayoc, ἂν μὴ γῆς λάθηται | φερόμενος. 


VI. If the verse is concluded by one word forming the 
cretic termination (— ~ —), or by more words than are to 
that amount united in meaning, so that after the sixth foot 
that portion of sense and sound is separately perceived, then 
the sixth foot is -~ or~ ~~; that is, it may not be — — 
or~~—. Thus, 


ἐξελαυνόμεσθα πατρίδος, καὶ yap ἦλθες | ἐξελῶν. 
ἐλπίδες δ᾽ οὔπω καθεύδόυσ᾽, αἷς πέποιθα | σὺν ϑεοῖς. 


VIL. If from the beginning of a trochaic tetrameter you 
take away a cretic (— ~ —), or a first pron (— ~ ~ ~), or 
fourth peon (~ ~ ~ —), a regular iambic trimeter will be 
formed. Thus, 


>” 


ϑασσον ἢ μ᾽ | ἐχρῆν προθαίνειν ἱκόμην δι’ ἄστεος. 
ovyt MEvE | λεω τρύποισι χρώμεθ᾽ οἰστέον τάδε. 
idiov ἢ | κοινὸν πολίταις ἐπιφέρων ἔγκλημα τι; 


VIII. The senarius thus formed, however, must always 
have ἃ penthemimeral cesura, in order that the proper pause 
may take place at the end of the fourth trochaic foot.' 


1. It admits, too, a dactyl, although very rarely, into the fifth place. 
Porson, Suppl. ad Pref. p. xliii. 


78 ANAPHESTIC VERSE. 


Comic Tetrameter Catalectic. 


I. The scansion agrees with that of the tragic, except 
only that the spondee in the sixth sometimes, though very 
rarely, precedes the tribrach in the seventh ; as in the fol- 
lowing line from Philemon: 


οὔτε yap vavayoc, av μὴ γῆς λάθηται φερόμενος. 


II. The comic, like the tragic tetrameter, admits the dac- 
tyl only in the case of a proper name, and not otherwise. 

III. As regards structure, it must be remarked, that the 
comic poets freely neglect the nice points of tragic verse. 
They pay little attention to the pause at the end of the 
fourth foot, and to the rules respecting those divisions which 
sometimes take place after the first dipodia or before the 
final cretic. Lines like the following occur in great abun- 
dance εἰ 

πρῶτα μὲν χαίρειν ᾿Αθηναί | olor καὶ τοῖς ξυμμάχοις. 

ἅττ᾽ ἂν ὑμεῖς [ ἐξαμάρτητ᾽, ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον τρέπειν. 

πλεῖστα γὰρ ϑεῶν ἁπάντων ὠφελούσαις | τὴν πόλιν. 


Ill. Of Anapestic Verse. 


I. Anapestic verse admits its proper foot, the anapest 
(- -- - with the dactyl, which is said to be admitted κατ᾽ 
ἀντιπάθειαν. It admits also the spondee, and sometimes, 
though very rarely, the proceleusmaticus (~ ~ ~ ~ ). 

11. Systems of anapzstic verse are scanned by the dipo- 
dia. ‘They are generally dimeter acatalectic. 

III. These, however, like other dimeters, have not the 
last syllable common. A synapheia (συνάφεια) or principle 
of continuous scansion prevails throughout them, so that 
they run on, from beginning to end, as if they all formed 
but one verse. 

IV. The end of an anapestic system is marked by a 
dimeter acatalectic, or, as it is more commonly termed, a 


1. Tate, Introd. p. 13. 


ANAPESTIC VERSE. 79 


paremiac line, and the last syllable in this line is the only 
one in this system which is excepted from the law of syna- 
pheia, and which may be long or short indifferently. 

V. The principal anapestic measures are as follows : 


1. Monometer Acatalectic, or Base. 


Examples. 


ρξθῦς aicy | vvet || 
πολλῶν | μέθ᾽ ὅπλῶν || 
Aéktp’ Aya | μεμνῶν. || 


2. Monometer Hypercatalectic. 
δορὶ δὴ | dopt πέρ || σᾶν. 
3. Dimeter Acatalectic. 
dotic av | εἴποι || πότερον | φθιμενηῆν || 
πολλῷ | pedpart || πρδσνῖσσ | ὄμξνοῦς || 
Ζεῦς yap | μέγᾶλῆς  γλῶσσῆς | κομποῦς. | 

I. The anapestic dimeter of tragedy is so named from 
the striking predominance of the anapestic foot, though it 
frequently admits the dactyl and spondee. 
admitted by the tragic writers into a legitimate anapestic 
system. Even in comedy its admission is very rare.' 

III. As has already been remarked, a regular system con- 
sists of dimeters acatalectic, with a monometer acatalectic 
sometimes interposed, generally as the last verse but one 
of the system, and is concluded by a dimeter catalectic, 
otherwise called a paremiac.? 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 239, ed. Glasg. 

2. The paremiac took its name from the circumstance of proverbs 
(παροίμιαι) being frequently composed in this measure. Compare He- 
phestion, p. 46, ed. Garsford. 


80 ANAPZSTIC VERSE. 


IV. The anapestic dimeter admits indiscriminately the 
dactyl and spondee for the anapest. ‘The scale is as fol- 
lows : 


V. With regard to the arrangement of the feet, the fol- 
lowing rules are to be observed : 


1. The anapest and spondee are combined without any 
restriction, as will appear from the following : 
δερχθῆθ᾽ | otatc || atxt | atoty || 
Oiakvat | ὄμξνος || τὸν μῦ | ρἵξτη || 
χρῦνδον GBA | εὐσῶ. || 
2. In the dactylic syzygies the dactyl usually precedes 
its own spondee, as in the following verses : 
ἠκῶῷ | δολῖχῆς || τερμᾶ KEA | εὐθοῦ || 
Oiapetp | ἄμξνος πρὸς σὲ Πρ | μῆθεῦ || 
τὸν mTEpvy | ὥκῆ || τῦνδ᾽ οἵ | ὥνον. || 
3. Sometimes the dactyl is paired with itself; thus,’ 
ὦ péya | Ad Out || καὶ TOTV” | ApTéut || 
ὦ πᾶτἔρ | ὦ πῦλὶς || ὧν ane | νᾶσθῆν. || 
4. Very rarely does an anapest or a spondee precede ἃ 
dactyl in the same syzygy, especially in the last syzygy 
of the verse. Of the two following instances the first 
presents the more objectionable form ; the second, suc- 
ceeded by a dactyl and spondee, can hardly be said to 
offend at all. 


1. “ Dactyli sepissime substituuntur anapestis, nec tantum unus ali- 
quis, sed s@pe etiam plures continur. Quinque continuavit Alschylus 
an Agam. 1561, seg. Septem Euripides in Hippolyt. 1361, seq.” Her- 
mann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 240, ed. Glasg. 

2. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Med. 1050, note g.—Id. ad Soph., did. Col. 
1766.—Tate’s Introd. p. 15.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 314. 


ANAPZESTIC VERSE. 81 


δαϊμῶν | odé τῖς || λεῦκην | ατθερὰ || 
πορθμεῦ | μένος. |) Si 
ϑνητῶν | δ΄ δλθϊος || εἰς τελδς | οὔδεϊς. || ? 


5. An anapest ought not to be preceded by a dactyl, to 
avoid too many short syllables occurring together. On 
this subject, which is one of great awkwardness and 
difficulty to metrical scholars, the following rules may 
be laid down.° 
(a.) The concurrence of dactyl with anapest, in that 

order, is never found within the same syzygy. And 
hence the following line of Euripides (Alcest. 80), 
as given in the common editions, 


dotic ἄν Evert || πότερον φθιμένη, 
is well corrected by Monk, who reads εἴποι for év- 
ἕποι. 
(β.) The concurrence of dactyl with anapest, in that 


order, is not very often found between one dimeter 
and another, as in Euripides (Electr. 1320, seq.) : 


Sees: plataté 
διᾶ yap | ζευγνῦσ᾽ ἡμᾶς πατρίων. 


(γ.) The combination is very rare where one syzygy 
closes with a dactyl and the next begins with an 
anapest, as in the following (Electr. 1317) : 


ϑάρσει ἸΤαλλᾶδδς || Gaia ἥξεις. 


IV. Thus far of the anapestic dimeter, when the first 
syzygy, as most usually it does, ends with a word. This, 
however, is not always the case; and of such verses as 
want that division, those are the most frequent, and the most 
pleasing also, which have the first syzygy after an anapest 


1. Eurip. Androm. 1228 (1204). 
2. Id. Iph. A. 161 (159). 
3. Tate, Introd. p. 15.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 314. 


82 ANAPZSTIC VERSE. 


(sometimes after a spondee) overflowing into the second, 
with the movement anapestic throughout.’ ‘Thus, 
πτερύγων ἐρετμοῖ | σιν ἐρεσσόμενοι. 
καὶ ξυγχαίρου | σιν ὁμοιοπρεπεῖς. 

Here the last syllables of ἐρετμοῖσιν and ξυγχαίρουσιν 
overflow into the second syzygy, the first syzygy ending 
after the penultimate syllables of each of these words. 

V. In this species of verse one hiatus alone is permitted, 
in the case of a final diphthong or long vowel so placed as 
to form a short syllable. ‘The following instances may 
serve :ἢ 

καὶ ἐλειοθάται ναῶν ἐρέται. (Pers. 39.) 
ποθέουσαι ἰδεῖν ἀρτιζυγίαν. (Ib. 548.) 
οἴχεται ἀνδρῶν. (Ib. 60.) 

τὼ Θησείδα δ᾽, ὄζω ᾿Αθηνῶν. (Hecub. 123.) 

VI. The synapheia (συνάφεια), that property of the an- 
apestic system which Bentley first demonstrated,’ is nei- 
ther more nor less than continuous scansion, that is, scan- 
sion continued with strict exactness from the first syllable 
to the very last, but not including the last itself, as that 
syllable, and only that in the whole system, may be long 
or short indifferently. ‘Thus, 

εἰς ἀρθμὸν ἐμοὶ καὶ φιλότητα 
σπεύδων σπεύδοντι ποθ᾽ ἥξει. (Prom. ν. 199, seq.) 
Here the last syllable of verse 199 becomes long, from the 
short vowel α in φιλότητα being united with the consonants 
σπ at the beginning of verse 200. Hada single consonant, 
or any pair of consonants like xp, 7A, &c., followed in verse 
200, the last syllable of verse 199 would have been short 
in violation of the metre. Again, 
ὦ μεγάλα θέμι, καὶ πότνι᾽ "λρτεμι, 
λεύσσεθ᾽ ἅ πάσχω: . . . ὦ: (Med. 161.) 
IneDate, pal6. 
2. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.p. 237, ed. Glasg. 


3. Dissertation on the Epistles of Phalaris, p. 150, seg., ed. Lond. 
1816. 


ANAPASTIC VERSE. 83 


If, after verse 161, ending with a short vowel, any vowel 
whatever had followed in verse 162, that would have vio- 
lated the law of hiatus observed in these verses. And if a 
double consonant, or any pair of consonants like x7, om, 
ὃμ, μν, &c., had followed in verse 162, the word “Aprepc, 
necessarily combined with those consonants, would have 
formed a cretic or amphimacer (— ~ —), and not the dac- 
tyl required. But λεύσσεθ᾽ follows, with the initial A, and 
all is correct." 

VIL. The law of synapheia, however, is occasionally vi- 
olated ; namely, sometimes in a change of speaker, as 
Eurip. Med. 1368; Electr. 1333; Soph. Gad. Col. 139, 
143, 170, 173,1757; Antig.931. It is violated sometimes, 
also, at the end of a sentence, and likewise in exclamations, 
as in Ausch. Agam. 1544. 

VII. The paremiac verse has its scale as follows: 


eal a 


3 


ewe 


Examples. 
Aiyed | rap’ ἔμοι || δέδοκῆ | cae — || 
πᾶν pot | φῦθεξρον || TO πρῦσερπ | Ov. || 
IX. In the pareemiac one limitation as to the concurring 
feet obtains, namely, that a dactyl im the first never pre- 
cedes an anapest in the second place. 
X. In this same species of verse, also, the foot before 
the catalectic syllable must be an anapest; as, 
μέγαλῶν | κοσμῶν || κτξἄτετϊρ | a. 
XI. There are, however, some few verses, in which the 
foot preceding the paremiac is found to be a spondee ; 
thus, 


1. Tate, Introd. p. 17. 
2. Hermann cites also Soph. did. Col. 188, to prove that the syna- 
pheia is sometimes neglected likewise in the case of addresses. But the 


reading on which he founds this exception has been long corrected. 
Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 319. 


84 ANAPESTIC VERSE. 


ἵππων τ᾽. ἐλατὴρ Σῶσθᾶ | νης. (Pers. 32.) 

βέλος ἠλίθιον σκῆψει | εν. (Agam. 874.) 

ψήφῳ πόλεως γνῶσθει | σαι. (Suppl. 8.) 
Other examples may be found in the Sept. ad Theb. 832, 
and Suppl. 983, but these arise, most probably, from some 
corruption in the text." 

XII. In the anapestic dimeter, as has already been re- 
marked, the first syzygy usually ends with a word ; but in 
the pareemiac this is very seldom the case, and hence a 
very common shape of this latter species of verse is found 
in the following line : 

ExOpotc Exiyapt | ἃ TETOVOG. 
XIII. The paremiac sometimes, though rarely, begins 
with a dactyl ; thus, 
οὔκ ATOMOVOOV TO YVVALKOY. 
But it comes most agreeably to the ear when it presents 
the last three feet of a dactylic hexameter with an initial 
syllable ;? thus, 
πᾶν | pol pobspov τῦ TpOGEPTOV 
é | yOpotc Exiyapra πεπονθᾶ. 
Or with two initial syllables, when an anapest begins; as, 
φίλος | ἐστὶ βεθαιστερος σοι. 

XIV. With regard to position, the Attics observe the 
same laws, as to a vowel before a mute and liquid, &c., in 
the anapestic dimeter which prevail in the iambic trimeter.? 

XV. The question whether the augment may be occa- 
sionally rejected in regular anapestics still remains unde- 
cided.t It is safer not to exercise this license in modern 
versification. 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 240, ed. Glasg. 

2. Tate, Introd. p. 18.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 316. 

3. Some instances, however, may be found in the anapestic dimeter, 
where a short vowel at the end of a word is lengthened before xp, 7A, 
&c., in the beginning of the next. Consult Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 1120. 
—Blomf. ad Aisch. Sept. c. Theb. 1059. 

4. Elmsley (ad Eurip. Med. 1380) is in favour of the occasional re- 


ANAPESTIC VERSE. 85 


XVI. In systems of anapests the tragic writers neither 
always employ nor always discard the Doric dialect, at 
least those peculiarities of it which are usual in the choral 
parts or admitted into the senarius. 


4. Tetrameter Catalectie. 
I. This metre, called Aristophanic, from the frequent 
use of it by Aristophanes, consists of two dimeters, the last 
of which is catalectic. Its scale is as follows: 


a Na a Os wwe —] — 
— 7 Ns —N ww — 


EERE 


1 
wee ---. 


ene 
ἄλλ᾽ ἢ | δὴ χρὴν || τί A€yely | ὑμᾶς || σδφῦν ὦ | ντκῆ |} 
σὲἕτξ THY | OL 
ὥπτῶν | ydorépa || τοῖς avy | γξἕνξσιν || Kaz’ οὔκ | Eoxor || 
ἀμξλῆ | σᾶς. 

II. In the first three places, as will appear from the 
scale, besides the anapest and spondee, a dactyl may be 
used; but it must be observed that a dactyl is admitted 
much more sparingly into the second than into the first 
place of the syzygy.’ 

IlI. A dactyl is also admitted into the fifth place, but is 
always excluded from the fourth and sixth places. 

IV. The two feet —-~~, ~~ -, in that order, nowhere 
occur in the anapestic tetrameter. The catalectic syllable 
is never preceded by a spondee in the seventh place, which 
should always be an anapest. The proceleusmaticus is ex- 
cluded from the verse. 

V. The cesura always occurs after the fourth foot, which 
must never end with an article or a preposition. Besides 


jection of the augment, but Blomfield (ad Avsch. Pers. 912) controverts 
this opinion. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 320. 

1. In the twelve hundred (or more) tetrameter anapestics of Aristoph- 
anes, only nineteen examples occur of a dactyl in the second place, the 
only second place of a syzygy which it can occupy. Tate, Introd. p. 19. 

Η 


86 DACTYLIC VERSE. 


this main division, moreover, there should be likewise an- 
other one after the first syzygy, which always gives an 
agreeable finish to a verse. ‘Thus, 
ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη χρῆν | τι λέγειν ὑμᾶς || σοφὸν, @ νικήσετε τηνδὶ. 
ἐν τοῖσι λόγοις | ἀντιλέγοντες" || μαλακὸν δ᾽ ἐνδώσετε 
μηδέν. 
The following verses, faulty on this account, 
ξυμθούλοισιν ἁπάσαις ὑμῖν χρήσωμαι. καὶ yap ἐκεῖ μοι, 
ἠνάγκαζεν ἔπη λέξοντας γ᾽ ες τὸ ϑέατρον παραθῆγαι, 
have been corrected, the one by Brunck, the other by Por- 
son,' thus, 
ξυμθούλοισιν | πάσαις ὑμῖν || χρήσωμαι Kal yap ἐκεῖ μοι. 
ἠνάγκαζεν | λέξοντας ἔπη || πρὸς τὸ ϑέατρον παραθῆναι. 
VI. In the anapestic tetrameter, the very same hiatus of 
a long vowel or diphthong sometimes occurs as in the dim- 
eter.2. Thus, 
ovr’ ἐν δάπισιν" τίς yap ὑφαίνειν ἐθελήσει, χρυσίον ὄντος ; 
ovKovy δήπου τῆς ἸΤτωχείας Πενίαν φαμὲν εἷναι ἀδέλφην. 


IV. Of Dactylic Verse. 
1. Monometer Hypercatalectic. 
Oidi76 | δᾶ" 
2. Dimeter Acatalectic. 
τὶς δ᾽ Ent | τυμθϊος. 
ov δεῖσ | ἡνδρᾶ. 
TAVOE γῦ | ναϊκῶν. 
The pure dactylic dimeter consists of two dactyls, as in 
the first example given; the impure admits a spondee into 


1. Suppl. ad Pref. p. lix., seqg.—Brunck, ad Aristoph. Eccles. 514, 
2. Tate, Inirod. p. 21. 
3. This may also be scanned as a choriambic monometer. 

Oidiroda | 


DACTYLIC VERSE. 87 


the first place, and sometimes into the second ; it is also 
found composed of two spondees ; as, 

πειθῶ | μόλπᾶν. (Agam. 104.) 

πομποῦς | τ’ apyovc. (Ib. 122.) 


3. Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 
ὃν τ᾽ Ent | λεξαμξ | νᾶ. 
oiktpov | yap TOAty | ὧδ᾽. 
4. Trimeter Acatalectic. 

δυσσξθζ | ἃς μὲν ὕ | ὀρῖς τἕκος | 
ai Mov | oat τὸν ἕ | para. | 


5. Trimeter Hypercatalectic. 
ὦ TOAD | KAadTE di | λοῖσί Ya | νῶν. 
Korps | εἴ φλῦγμ | ὦ Kpovi | dac. 

This measure, in its pure state, consists of three dactyls 
and asyllable over. It admits a spondee into the first place, 
and sometimes into the second, but never before the cata- 
lectic syllable. 


6. Tetrameter Acatalectic. 
σᾶ δ᾽ Epic | οὔκ Epic | GAAG dor | ὦ φδνὸς. | 
Oidirré | δᾶ δόμον | GAEGE | κρᾶνθεις. | 
αἰμᾶτϊ | δεινῷ | ατμᾶτϊ | χῦγρῶ. | 
I. Aleman composed whole strophes in this measure ; as, 


Moo’, aye, Καλλιόπα, ϑύγατερ Διὸς, 
ἄρχ᾽ ἐρατῶν ἐπέων, ἐπι δ᾽ ἵμερον 
ὕμνῳ καὶ χαρίεντα τίθει χορόν. 
II. These tetrameters have no cesura. Among the Lat- 
ins they were used by both tragic and comic writers. Thus 
Attius, ap. Non. s. v. “ Expergite :” 


Heti vigiles properate, expergite, 
Péctora tarda sopore, exsurgite. 


88 DACTYLIC VERSE. 


And Terence, Andr. 4, 1, 1: 


Hoccine credibile aut memorabile. 


7. Tetrameter Hypercatalectic. 


οὐδ᾽ ὕπῦ | παρθξἕνϊ | ἂς τὸν ὕ | πὸ βλεφᾶ | pote. 


8. Pentameter Acatalectic.' 
TMpATG μὲν | εὐδοκϊμ | οὔ στρᾶτϊ | ἂς ἄπξ | φατνδμξθ᾽. 


I. In its pure state, this measure consists of five dactyls. 
It admits, however, a spondee into every place. 

II. In the Eumenides of /schylus (v. 373, seq.) there is 
a system of pentameters which closes with a trochaic dim- 
eter catalectic ; thus, 


ddgat | τ᾽ ἀνδρῶν | καὶ par’ ὕπ᾽ | aibépi | σεμνᾶι, | 
TAKOME | vai Kata | γᾶν pivd | θοῦσϊν a | τῖμοι | 
ἡμξἕτἔρ | αἷς ξφδὸ | οἷς pEAaY | Elpooty | Opyjo— | 
μοῖς τ᾽ ἔπ | τφθῦν || οἷς. 


9. Pentameter Hypercatalectic. 
βοσκῦμξ | vot Adyt | vav Ept | κυμονᾶ | φερμᾶτϊ | yév- 
vav,k. 7.4. (Agam. 119.) 


10. Hexameter Acatalectic. 

πρὸς σὲ yév | eidddc | ὦ φίλος | ὦ DOxi | μῶτᾶτος | ‘EA- 

aot. 

A pure dactylic hexameter consists of six dactyls through- 
out. An impure one admits the spondee into all places but 
the fifth, and the spondee alone, excluding the dactyl, into 
the sixth place, thus forming the ordinary hexameter of epic 
verse, or, as it is often called, from its bemg employed to 
celebrate the exploits of heroes, Heroic Verse. 


1. The elegiac pentameter will be considered after the hexameter, 
since it is not properly a pentameter measure, but should be called merely 
elegiac verse. 


DACTYLIC VERSE. 89 


11. Heroic Verse. 


I. A heroic verse is composed of six feet, the last of 
which must be a spondee, while the fifth is almost always 
adactyl. ‘The first four may be either dactyls or spondees. 

II. Sometimes a spondee is allowed to enter into the fifth 
place, and the verse is then called spondaic. This is done 
when anything of a grave, solemn, or affecting nature is in- 
tended to be expressed, or in order to denote astonishment, 
consternation, vastness of size, &c. 

Ill. This spondee in the fifth place, however, is admis- 
sible under the following restrictions :' 1. It must not con- 
sist of one entire word.’ 2. It must not end with the end of 
a word, except that word be a monosyllable. 3. It must not 
consist of two monosyllables.° 

IV. A spondee in the third place of the verse may con- 
sist of two monosyllables, but not of one entire word. 

V. When a genitive in —ovo is used, the syllable οἱ must 
be the first of the foot. 

VI. In the close of the verse a short syllable may be 
lengthened. In other words, the last syllable of the verse 
is common, and hence a trochee here becomes a spondee. 

VII. A word cannot be divided between two lines in 
Homeric verse, although Simonides and other writers of 
epigrams have sometimes indulged in this license in the 
case of proper names. Nor does Homeric poetry allow the 
elision of a vowel at the end of one line before a vowel at 
the beginning of the next. Moreover, punctuation, or a 
pause in the sense, should not be admitted between the fifth 
and sixth foot. 


1. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 258. 

2. Hence, for δήμου, nw, &c., which occasionally appear in the fifth 
place, we should read δήμοο, joa, &e. 

3. The later writers of hexameters admitted two monosyllables into 
the fifth place (as —ad’ ὦ φωνα in Theoeritus), but the practice is not 
Homeric. 

H 2 


90 DACTYLIC VERSE. 


Of the Cesuras in Heroic Verse. 


I. The term cesura is used by grammarians in two ac- 
ceptations: first, as applied to whole verses, and, secondly, 
as applied to single feet.’ 

II. In the former acceptation, cesura means the division 
of a verse into two portions or members, affording a little 
pause or rest for the voice in some convenient part, where 
that pause may take place without injury to the sense or 
harmony of the line. 

Ill. In the second acceptation, cesura means the divis- 
ion or separation which takes place in a foot, when that 
foot is composed of syllables belonging to separate words. 

IV. These two kinds of cesura will now be considered 
in order. . . 


1. Cesura of the Verse. 


I. The favourite cesura of the Homeric hexameter falls 
after the first syllable of the third foot, or the fifth half foot, 
and is hence denominated the penthemimeral ; as, 


ἀλλὰ κακῶς ἀφίει || κρατερὸν δ᾽ ἐπὶ μῦθον ἔτελλε. 
Ii. Another principal cesura in a heroic verse is that 


which falls after the first syllable of the fourth foot, or the 
seventh half foot, and is hence called the hepthemimeral ; as, 


μῆ σε γέρον κοίλῃσιν ἐγὼ || παρὰ νηυσὶ κιχείω. 


Both this and the previous cesura are sometimes found 
in the same verse. 

If]. Another position of the cesura is after a trochee in 
the third foot; as in the opening line of the Odyssey : 


ἄνδρα μοι ἔννεπε Movoa || πολύτροπον, ὃς μάλα πολλά. 


1. Priscian uses the term in both acceptations: “ Cesure vero ver- 
sum et rhythmum leviorem solent perficere,” &c.; and again, ‘‘ Per pe- 
des in quinque diwiditur hic versus cesuras.” (Prisc. de xii. vers. Ain. 


ce. 1.—Op. vol. u., p. 276, 277, ed. Krehl.) 


DACTYLIC VERSE. 91 


But the trochee must either be an entire word, as in the 
example just given (Μοῦσα), or must be formed from the 
last two syllables of a word ; as in the following line, where 
it is formed of the syllable dovde : 

avtic ἔπειτα πέδονδξ || κυλίνδετο λᾶας ἀναιδῆς. 

IV. The beauty of hexameter composition lies as much 
in the variation of cawsuras in the different lines as in the 
variation of feet in the same line. 

V. There are many other cesuras admitted into heroic 
verse ; but in the variety there is one which, on account of 
its debilitating the strength and harmony of the numbers, 
was rejected by the best poets. ‘This cesura falls after a 
trochee in the fourth foot; as, 

Πηλεὺς ϑήν μοι ἔπειτα γυναῖκα || γαμέσσεται αὐτός 

ἄγχι μάλ᾽, ὡς ὅτε τίς τε γυναικὸς || ἐὐζώνοιο. 

VI. In passages of force or dignity the cesura sometimes 
falls after the first syllable of the sixth foot ; thus, 


γαῖαν ὁμοῦ καὶ πόντον ὀρώρει δ᾽ οὐρανόθεν || νύξ. 
VII. The bucolic cesura, so called from its prevalence 


in bucolic or pastoral poetry, falls after the fourth foot, 
which, in this case, is most commonly a dactyl. Thus, 


ἁδύ τι τὸ ψίθυρισμα καὶ ἃ πίτυς || οἰπόλε τῆνα, 

ἃ ποτὶ ταῖς παγαῖσι μελίσδεται: || ddv δὲ καὶ τὺ 

τυρίσδες: μετὰ Πᾶνα τὸ δεὺῦτερον || ὧθλον ἀποισῇ. 
This pause is often found in epic verse, and is generally 


employed by the epic writers in order to strengthen and 
amplify what is said.’ ‘Thus, in Homer (I/. 4, 424), we have 
πόντῳ μὲν TA πρῶτα κορύσσεται, || αὐτὰρ ἔπειτα 
χέρσῳ ῥηγνύμενον μεγάλα βρέμει, || ἀμφὶ δέ τ’ ἄκρας, 
and in Dionysius Periegetes, v. 131, 


Αἰγαίου πόντοιο πλατὺν πόρον" || ἔνϑα τε κῦμα. 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Meir. p. 214, ed. Glasg. 


92 DACTYLIC VERSE. 


It occurs, also, with the same effect in Latin verse ; thus, 
in Lucretius, 3, 920, and 6, 155, we find 


Insatiabiliter deflebimus ; \| eternumque. 
Denique sepe geli multus fragor, || atque ruina. 


And in Virgil, Georg. 1, 356: 
Continuo ventis surgentibus, || aut freta ponti. 


Sometimes the epic poets would make the fourth foot a 
spondee, and the most ancient of them occasionally admit- 
ted even a trochee into that place which, by a pause after 
it, becomes a spondee in pronunciation. ‘Thus, we have 
the following lines in Homer (J/. 11, 86) and Ennius (Ann. 
1, p. 22, ed. Hessel.) : 

τῇ δ᾽ ἔπι μὲν Τοργὼ βλοσυρῶπις || ἐστεφάνωτο. 
Omnis cura viris uter esset || induperator. 


Theocritus, on the other hand, in the composition of his 
lines, was careful to make the fourth foot a dactyl, so that, 
the last two feet being cut off, there would remain a dactylic 
tetrameter.' Thus, 

Gov τὶ | τὸ ψῖθῦ | ρισμᾶ καὶ ἃ πιτῦς | — 
ἃ πὅτι | ταῖς πᾶ | γαϊσὶ pé | Atodéerat | — 
Tupiad | ες wéta | Πανᾶ 76 | devtEpov | — 


VII. We will now proceed to the second kind of cesura. 


2. Cesura of the Foot. 


I. This species of cesura is equally important with the 
other, and equally necessary to the harmony and beauty 
of versification. A verse in which it is neglected, and in 
which the isolated feet seem to shun all society with each 


1. Warton, de Poes. Bucol. (Theocrit. vol. i., p. xxxvi.) Valckenaer 
was the first to mark the bucolic cesura in Theocritus. The first seven 
idylls, with the tenth and eleventh, contain nine hundred and twenty- 
seven lines, of which not less than seven hundred and eleven have this 
cesura. Vireil’s Eclogues consist of eight hundred and thirty lines, but 
of these only two hundred and thirty-two conform to the bucolic model. 


HEROIC VERSE. 93 


other, is stiff and awkward in the extreme, and wholly de- 
void of all poetic grace ; as the following examples from 
the old Roman poets, Ennius and Lucilius, will clearly tes- 
tify. 
Sparsis | hastis | late | campus | splendet et | horret. 
Has res | ad te | scriptas | Luci | misimus | Ath. 


II. On the other hand, the frequent recurrence of the 
cesura of the foot, which, while it breaks the feet, tends to 
link the words with each other, greatly contributes to the 
flow and harmony of the verse. As in the following pas- 
sage from Theocritus : 


Ὦ Πάν, | Πάν, ait’ | ἐσσὶ κατ᾽ | ὥρεα | μακρὰ Av | καίω, 

αἴτε τύγ᾽ | ἀμφιπο | λεῖς μέγα | Μαίναλον | ἔνθ᾽ Ent | νᾶ- 
σον 

τὰν Xue | Ady, “λί | κας dé Ai | πε Ῥίον, | αἰπύ τε | σᾶμα 

τῆνο Av | καονίδ | ao, τὸ | καί μακάρ | ἐσσιν a | γαστόν. 


III. The cesura of which we are now treating may either 
be syllabic, monosyllabic, or trochare. 

IV. The syllabic cesura is when the first part of the foot, 
that is, the part before the break, consists of a syllable be- 
longing to a preceding word. ‘Thus, in the lines of The- 
ocritus just quoted, λεῖς μέγα in the second verse is an in- 
stance of syllabic czsura, the syllable λεῖς forming the first 
part of the dactyl, being a syllable belonging to ἀμφιπολεῖς 
which precedes. 

V. The monosyllabic cesura is when the first part of the 
foot consists of a monosyllable; as Ὦ Πάν, in the com- 
mencement of the passage just given from Theocritus, and 
Πάν ait’, the foot that succeeds. 

VI. The trochaic cesura is when the first part of the 
foot consists of a trochee ; as, ἔσσζ Kat’, and μᾶκρᾶ Av, in 
the line just referred to. 

Two subjects remain to occupy our attention under the 
head of heroic verse ; the Digamma and the Ictus Metricus, 
each of which will be considered in order. 


94 HEROIC VERSE. 


1. The Digamma. 


I. The whole subject of the digamma rests on the fol- 
lowing remarkable fact. A certain number of words be- 
ginning with a vowel, especially the pronoun οὗ, oi, ἕ, and 
also εἴδω, ἔοικα, εἰπεῖν, ἄναξ, Ἴλιος, οἷνος, οἶκος, ἔργον, 
ἶσος, ἕκαστος, with their derivatives, have in Homer so 
often the hiatus before them, that, leaving these words out 
of the account, the hiatus, which is now so frequent in Ho- 
mer, becomes extremely rare, and in most of the remaining 
cases can be easily and naturally accounted for. ‘These 
same words have also, in comparison with others, an apos- 
trophe very seldom before them; and, moreover, the imme- 
diately preceding long vowels and diphthongs are far less 
frequently rendered short than before other words.’ 

II. From an attentive examination of the subject, the il- 
lustrious Bentley was led to conclude, that the words before 
which these deviations from the usual rules of prosody took 
place, although beginning with a vowel, must have been 
pronounced at least, if not written, as if beginning with a 
consonant. He recollected, that some ancient grammarians 
mentioned a letter as more particularly used by the /oli- 
ans or most ancient Greeks, and that its existence might 
be traced in the changes which some Latin words, derived 
from the AXolic Greek, had undergone ; as, οἷνος, vinum; 
ic, vis ; οἶκος, vicus; 7p, ver. The letter alluded to, which, 
from its form, has the name of digamma or double gamma 
(F), is yet to be seen in some ancient inscriptions and on 
coins; and it supplies the data for resolving the cases of 
metrical difficulty where the lengthening of a short syllable 
uniformly takes place before particular words. 

III. Let us examine some of the instances which are 
found at the very opening of the Iliad: ᾿Ατρξίδης τε ἄναξ 
ἀνδρῶν (v. 7).---- Αγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε ϑυμῷ (v. 24).---- Απόλ- 


1. Buttmann, Ausf. Gr. Sprachl. p. 27.—Buttmann’s Larger Gr. 
Gr. p. 28, Robinson’s transl.— Maltby, Greek Gradus, p. Xi., seq. 


HEROIC VERSE. 95 


7 See 


λωνι ἄνακτι (v. 36).—06 δ΄ ἤϊε νυκτὶ ἐοικώς (v. 47).—dap- 
σῆσας μάλα, εἰπὲ (ν. 85). In all these cases, according to 
the practice of the language in the days of Attic purity, the 
short vowel ought to have been elided before ἄναξ, ἥνδανε, 
&c. But if we write Βάναξ, Favdave, &c., or fancy the 
words pronounced wavak, whvdave, Wewolkwe, welTé, &c., 
the difficulty will in a great degree disappear.' 


2. The Ictus Metricus? 


I. There are, however, cases of syllables not merely at 
the end, but in the beginning and middle of words, where 
the digamma cannot operate, and which must be accounted 
for in a different manner. Thus, at the end, 


οὔτε ϑεοῖς, εἴπερ τις ETL νῦν δαίνυται εὔφρων. (Il. 15, 99.) 
οἵ τε κυθερνῆται, καὶ ἔχον οἰήϊα νηῶν. (Ll. 19, 43.) 
ἔγχει ἐρειδομενῶ" ἔτι yap ἔχον ἕλκεα λυγρά. (Ib. 49.) 


At the beginning and end; as, 
pire κασίγνητε κόμισαί Te we. . . . (Π,ὅ, 359.) 
In the middle ; as, 


kal τὰ μὲν ἔπταχα πάντα διεμοιρᾶτο δαΐζων. (Od. 14, 434.) 


II. The question naturally arises, upon what principle 
are such violations of quantity to be explained? Evidently 
on the following: In scanning any verse, the voice natural- 
ly rests longer upon the place where a long syllable is ne- 
cessary than where it may be dispensed with. In the he- 
roic verse we lay greater stress upon the long syllable of the 
dactyl, and pause more deliberately there than upon either of 
the short ones. ‘The same preference is naturally given to 
the first syllable of the spondee, which is equally long as 


1. The doctrine of the digamma, however, and its introduction into 
the text of Homer, still requires illustration. For an able examination of 
the whole subject, consult Tuersch, Gr. Gr. p. 295, Sandford’s transl. 

2. Maltby, Greek Gradus, p. xii., seg. Compare remarks on Arsvs, 
page 50 of this volume, 


96 HEROIC VERSE. 


in a dactyl, rather than to the second, which corresponds 
to the short syllables. We cannot pretend to know any- 
thing about the way in which the contemporaries of Ho- 
mer pronounced poetry. But, where so much was left to 
recitation, it is probable that the difference between long 
and short syllables, or those which occupied respectively 
the places of long and short, would be more marked than 
at a subsequent age, when refinement might moderate the 
vehemence of intonation, and the readier access to writing 
superseded the necessity of reciting. Certain, however, it 
is, that, when we perceive short syllables lengthened, and 
cannot have recourse to the aid of a digamma, we find that 
they occupy the long place of the dactyl. We therefore 
account for the temporary elongation by considering the 
place which they occupy in the verse ; and we call it the 
effect of ictus metricus, or arsis. 

III. Upon this simple principle, then, the greater part of 
those metrical phenomena which have so much perplexed 
the commentators on Homer will be found to receive a sat- 
isfactory explanation. Thus, 


αὐτὰρ ἔπειτ᾽ αὐτοῖσι βέλος ἐχεπευκὲς ἐφιείς. (Il. 1, 51.) 


Here the syllable λὸς in βέλος is made long, although 
short in itself, because it occupies the first or long place of 
the dactyl, and therefore receives the ictus or stress of the 
voice. For the same reason, the initial syllable of διὰ be- 
comes long in the first of the following verses, although it 
is short (which is its natural quantity) in the second. Thus, 


did μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε φαεινῆς ὄθριμον ἔγχος, 
καὶ διὰ ϑώρηκος πολυδαιδάλου ἠρήρειστο. (II. 8, 857, seq.) 


So, again, the first syllable of "“Apec appears both long 
and short in one and the same verse; as, “Apec, “Apec, 
ipamanorye fe 2? (1 δ. 5319 

IV. In both these cases, the long and unusual pronuhcia- 


ELEGIAC VERSE. 97 


tion is in arsis, or on the long syllable of the dactyl; while 
the short and usual one is in thesis, or laid on one of the 
short syllables of the dactyl. 


10. Elegiac Pentameter. 

I. This measure, although commonly called elegiac pen- 
tameter, a name which we have here, in obedience to cus- 
tom, allowed it to retain, is more correctly denominated ele- 
δίας verse.’ 

II. The construction of this species of verse is as fol- 
lows: The first two feet may be either dactyls or spon- 
dees ; then comes a long syllable, to which succeed two 
dactyls, followed by another long syllable. ‘Thus, 


Scale. 


2 3 5 


-- ---ς-- 


4 


--ῳ 


] 


-- --.-- 


Ill. Hence the elegiac pentameter may be considered to 
be composed of two dactylic penthemimers, or, in other 
words, of two dactylic trimeters catalectic joined together. 

IV. The place of the cwsura, which should always be at 
the end of a word, is ‘after the fifth half foot, or after the 
middle long syllable; a rule which is inviolably observed 
except in the case of a proper name, of which we have an 
instance in Callimachus. rag. excii.? 


Ἵερά νῦν δὲ Διοσκουρίδεω yeven. 


V. Some of the old grammarians, however, viewing this 
species of verse as pentameter, made it consist of two dac- 
tyls or spondees, followed by a spondee and two anapests, 
according to the following scheme :* 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 225, ed. Glasg. 
2. Hephestion, p. 93, 1. 11, ed. Gaisf. Callimachus is defended by 
D’Orville, Vann. Crit. p. 481. 
3. Compare Quintilian, 9, 4, 38.—Terent. Maur. 1757, seq. 
I 


98 ELEGIAC VERSE. 


VI. Hephestion, however, who has been followed by al- 
most all modern scholars, regards it as composed of two 
dactylic penthemimers,' according to what we have already 
stated. ‘That this is the proper view to take of its structure 
seems certain from the fact of the cesural pause falling after 
the fifth half foot. 

VII. We will now give specimens of the verse, with the 
two modes of scanning : 

EpTVAA | ὃς κεῖτ | at || ταῖς “HAL | novia | oF | 

val piré | τῶν Tapa | σοῦ || τοῦτ᾽ ἄνξρ | ἄστὅτἄ | τὸν. 
Or 

ξρπῦλλ, | ὃς κεῖτ | at ταῖς | “Ελϊκῶν | iaot | 

vat bide | τῶν Tapa | Gov τοῦτ᾽ | ἄνξρᾶστ | ὅτᾶἄτον. | 

VIII. An elision in the cesura is not regarded as injuri- 
ous to the verse.” Thus we have in Meleager, 12, 4, and 
Callimachus, Ep. 37, 


τὸν τριπάνουργον "Epwr’ || ἔπλασεν ἐν κραδία. 
ἀκρήτου προποθεῖς᾽ || ᾧχετ᾽ ἔχουσα κύλιξ. 
IX. An elegiac pentameter should not consist of feet 
composed of separate words, as the following from Theog- 


nis, 448. 
οὕτως | ὥσπερ | νῦν || οὐδενὸς | ἄξιος | et. | 
X. In the previous part of the elegiac pentameter, that 
is, the part preceding the cxsura, it is more elegant to have 


1. Tod δὲ δακτυλικοῦ πενϑημιμεροῦς δὶς λαμθανομένου γίνεται τὸ ἐλ- 
eyelov, κ. τ. A.—Hephast. p. 92, ed Gaisf. Compare the language of 
the scholiast, p. 186. Βέλτιον δὲ οὕτω μετρεῖν" ἐπεὶ καὶ εἰς δύο διύρη- 
ται πενθημιμερῆ, κ. τ. A. ὴ 

2. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p.226. The ease is different, how- 
ever, in Latin verse, where such an elision is regarded as a blemish. It 
occurs in Catullus, 68, 82 ; 68, 90; and 75,8; but he is here imitating 
the Greeks. Compare Ramsay’s Lat. Pros. p. 183. 


DACTYLIC VERSE. 99 


a spondee following a dactyl than a dactyl following a 
spondee, as decreasing numbers suit the measure better 
than increasing ones. ‘The difference will be perceptible 
in the following lines: 

πολλάκι τὰν αὐτὰν || δὶς μετέθηκε κόμαν. 

πέξηται λιπαρὸν || σμασαμένα πλόκαμον. 

XI. This species of verse is customarily subjoined to 
the heroic hexameter, thus forming the most ancient kind 
of strophes, having the name of éAeyeta. It has been once 
used in tragedy by Euripides (Androm. 103, seg.). On ac- 
count of the equality of its members, the elegiac pentameter 
cannot well be often repeated alone. Nor has it been so 
repeated, except in the Epigr. 4 of Philip of 'Thessalonica 
(Brunck, Anal. vol. ii., p. 212), and by Virgil in that spor- 
tive effusion, sic vos non vobis.' 


11. Molic Verses. 


I. folic verses are composed of pure dactyls, except 
the first foot, which may be any dissyllabic one whatsoever. 
In other words, they are dactylic verses with a base.” The 
scholiast on Hephestion (p. 177, ed. Gaisf:) admits spon- 
dees also instead of dactyls. 

II. These verses are apparently to be divided into two 
kinds ; the one used by the Doric poets, whom the Attic 
dramatic writers followed, and the other by the A®olic lyric 
poets. 

III. The Doric poetry excludes a pyrrhic from the base, 
admitting only an iambus, trochee, or spondee ; and, after 
the base, allowing a place to spondees, also, instead of dac- 
tyls. The olians, on the other hand, put a pyrrhic also 
in the base; the rest of the feet they appear to have kept 
pure dactyls.® 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 227, ed. Glasg. 

2. By “a base” metricians mean two syllables put before a verse or 
metrical clause, and which are to be pronounced somewhat apart. An 
anacrusis, on the other hand, is a prefix of a single syllable. 


8, Hermann, Elem, Doctr. Metr. p. 228, ed. Glasg. 


100 DACTYLIC VERSE. 


IV. Hephestion mentions the following kinds of Holic 
verses: 1. The trimeter (which may be termed more prop- 
erly the dimeter) catalectic on two syllables ; as, 

Supw | po πόδες Extopdyveot, 
τὰ δὲ | σάμθαλα πεντεθόεια: 
πίσυγ | you δὲ δέκ᾽ ἐξεπόνασαν. 

2. The tetrameter (now properly trimeter) acatalectic ; as, 

ἔρος | δ᾽ αὖτέ μ᾽ ὁ λυσιμελὴς δονεῖ, 
γλυκύ | πικρον ἀμάχανον ὄρπετον' 
᾿Ατθὶ, | σοὶ δ΄ ἐμέθεν μὲν ἀπήχθετο 
φροντίσ | δην, ἐπὶ 0° ᾿Ανδρομέδαν ποτῇ. 

3. The pentameter (more properly tetrameter) catalectic 

on two syllables ; as, 
τέῳ | σ᾽, ᾧ φίλε γαμθρὲ, καλῶς ἐϊκάσδω 
ὅρπα | κι βραδινῷ σε μάλιστ᾽ ἐϊκάσδω. 

4. The pentameter (more properly tetrameter) acatalec- 
ec sas: 

ἦρά | wav μὲν ἐγὼ σέθεν, ᾿Ατθὶ, πάλαι πόκα. 
5. The hexameter (more properly pentameter) catalectic 


on two syllables, which the ancient metricians call ἔπος 
Αἰολικόν. Thus, 


κέλο | pai τινα τὸν χαρίεντα Meiwva καλέσσαι, 
εἰ χρὴ | συμποσίας ἐπ᾽ ὄνασιν ἐμοὶ γεγενῆσθαι. 
V. Aischylus (Pers. 866, seg.) has many verses of this 


kind, and some of them very long, but admitting spondees, 
too, after the Doric manner." 


12. Logaedic Verses. 
I. These verses are generally classed with dactylic. 
They consist of two, three, or four dactyls, followed by any 
number of trochees. 


1. This is Hermann’s opinion. Burney and Gaisford make them 
common dactylic verses. Herm. Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 230, ed. Glasg. 
—Burn. Tent. Pers. p. 40.—Gaisf. ad Hephest. p. 275. 


DACTYLIC VERSE. 101 


ΤΠ. Logacedic verses (Λογαοιδικά μέτρα) are so called 
from their appearing to hold a middle station between song 
and common speech ; the dactylic measure being the lofty 
language of poetry, while the trochaic approaches more 
nearly to that of ordinary discourse. 

Ii. The form most commonly used was two dactyls fol- 
lowed by two trochees, which is the same with what is 
called the minor alcaic, or dactylico-trochaic of the Hora- 
tian stanza in Latin poetry. ‘Thus, 

kal Tic En’ | ἐσχᾶτϊ | aloty | οἵκεῖς | 
Kpainvopop | οἱ δὲ w’  ] πεμψᾶν | avpai. | 

IV. To this metre may also be referred what is called 

choriambic dimeter catalectic. Thus, 


ηὔσϊν ap | watevoac. Chor. dimeter catalectic. 
jooty | apud | tevoac.| Logaedic. 
V. Burney’ gives the following scheme of variations of 
logacedic verses. 
— ~~ |- = Called also Adonic. 
—v--|—-—~-—~ Choriambic dimeter catalectic. 
—vv-|-v-~|-v-~]---+ Logaedic. 


VI. Logacdic metre is found interspersed, among other 
kinds, through the lyric poets and the chorusses of the 
scenic writers. 

VII. Verses may often appear to be logacedic which in 
reality have other numbers, chiefly antispastic and chori- 
ambic, especially in the dramatic poets. These discover 
themselves both by measures in the antistrophe foreign from 
logacedic numbers, and by an association with other num- 
bers, which shows that they are to be reckoned among 
these rather than logacdic. 


1, Tentamen. p. |xvi. 
12 


102 CHORIAMBIC VERSE. 


VIII. By prefixing a base to logawdic numbers we ob- 
tain a Glyconic, Pherecratic, or Phalecian hendecasyllabic. 
Thus, 


—~~|—-~|-~| Logaedic. 


Mt {πιὰ πὶ [΄-- [- Glyconic hypercatalectic. 
SE ΞΕ | Logaedic. 
ae ene |~ Pherecratic. 
—v~~|-~-|--|-~ | Logacdic. 
ἘΠ }-~-|-~]-~]-~ | Phalecian. 


V. Of Choriambic Verse. 

I. Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic consists of a 
choriambus and a syllable over. It is also called Adonic, 
and is the same as an impure dactylic dimeter. Thus, 

THOE κῦμιζ | etc. (Iph. A. 156.) 
---λᾶς ὅπῦσᾶν | av. (Sept. Theb. 733.) 

II. Choriambic dimeter catalectic is formed of ἃ choriam- 
bus and a bacchius, or an iambic syzygy catalectic. This 
verse is called Aristophanic, as it is frequently found in 
Aristophanes, mostly joined with dimeters acatalectic. 


ἡδσῖν ap | μᾶτξυσᾶς. (Eurip. Orest. 988.) 
μᾶρμᾶρδεσσ | av αἴγλᾶν. (Soph. Antig. 610.) 
Kalvov ὅπῶς | davjoet. (Arist. Vesp. 526.) 


III. Choriambic dimeter acatalectic is either pure or im- 
pure. The first consists of two choriambi ; as, 
μᾶντϊς ἔἕκλᾶγξ | Ev πρόφξέρῶν. (Agam. 202.) 
Ek φρξἕνδς, ἃ | KAaiopévac. (Sept. Th. 926.) 


An impure dimeter admits an antispastus into either place 
for a choriambus. When it occurs in the first, the verse is 
called by some metricians “ Glyconeum Polyschematistum.” 

Another form of the impure choriambic dimeter consists 
of a choriambus and diiambus, or the contrary. Thus, 


CHORIAMBIC VERSE. 103 
DpipEdoveT | a μὲν YEwy. 
yap δε Tag | tc πτερυγῶν. 

IV. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic is not often found. 
The two following verses are from Sophocles, in the latter 
of which the choriambus of the second place is represented 
by the diiambus. As, 

τᾶν 6 μέγᾶς | pvO¢ GEE | εἴ. (Ajax, 226.) | 
vov yap ἔμοϊ | μἔέλεϊ yoped | oat. (Ibid. 701.) 


V. Choriambic trimeter catalectic consists of two chori- 
ambi anda bacchius. The first foot, however, is often a 
diiambus, as in Eurip. Med. 431. 


ov δ᾽ Ek μὲν oik | ὧν πατριῶν | ἔπλεῦσᾶς. 
VI. Choriambic trimeter acatalectic consists of three cho- 
riambi. As, 3 
opt’ ἄπ’ aicx | ρῶν ἄνατελλ | OVO ὅς Ef’ ἢ. 
In the following example from Euripides, Iph. Aul. 1036, 


the long syllable in the first foot is resolved; and we have 
a proceleusmaticus with a long syllable. 


tic ap’ ὕμξναϊ | ὃς Oia AG | τοῦ Λιθῦδς. 
VII. Choriambic tetrameter catalectic consists of three 
choriambi and a bacchius ; as, 
εἰ av péy αὖ | χεῖς ἕτξροϊ | σοῦ πλξδν Od | μέλδνταϊ. 
This measure is called Sapphic by Servius, Besides the 


tragedians, Anacreon always employs it, putting a diiambus 
in the second place ; as, 


Ex ποταμοῦ | πἄνερχῦμαϊ | TavTa dEpod | od λᾶμπρᾶ. 
VIII. Choriambic tetrameter acatalectic is used by Anac- 
reon, a choriambus and diiambus being put promiscuously, 


except that in the end there is almost always a diiambus. 


Thus, 


104 CHORIAMBIC VERSE. 
πρῖν μὲν ἔχῶν | KEpbEpiov, | κἄλυμμᾶτ᾽ Eod | ἠκῶμξνᾶ 
καὶ ξυλίνους | ἀστραγᾶλοῦς | Ev Got καὶ | φίλον πέρι. 
TOAAG μὲν Ev | Oovpl τίθεϊς | adYEVa TOAD’ | ἃ δ᾽ EV τρὄχῶ. 

IX. Choriambic verses are met with beginning with an 
anacrusis ; as in Adschylus, Sept. Theb. 330." 

ὑπ’ | avdpoc ~Axat | ov θξδθεν | περθδμξνᾶν | ἄτιμῶς. 
Of which kind some metres of the A®olic lyrics appear to 
be which by grammarians are accounted ionics a majore ; 
as the following of Sappho (ap. Hephest. p. 64, ed. Gaisf.) : 

ev | wopporépa | Mvdoidina | τᾶς ἁπᾶλᾶς | Tvpivvac. 

ἀ | σαρδτερᾶς | οὐδᾶμ᾽ En’ ὦ | pavvd σἔθεν | τύὔχοιϊσᾶ. 

X. The choriambics most in use are those with a base, 
which ancient metricians erroneously ranked among anti- 
spastic verses. But if they were antispastic, they could 
never begin with a trochee or pyrrhic, and they would have 
the last syllable of each antispastus doubtful. 

ΧΙ. The shortest of these verses has one choriambus ; 
as in /Eschylus, Suppl. 42. 

νῦν ἐν | ποιὄνδμοϊς. 

Next to that is the hypercatalectic, commonly called Pher- 

ecratic; as in Aésch. Sept. Theb. 301. 
τοὶ μὲν | yap mort πῦργ | οὖς. 
Then the Glyconic, in the same, v. 325. 
Soviet | ἂν ψαφᾶρᾶαᾶ | σπῦδῶ. 

The most common is the duneter hypercatalectic ; as in 

Sophocles, Aj. 628. 
οὐδ᾽ olxtp | ἄς yoov op | νιθῦς aq | dove. 


VI. Of Antispastic Verse. 
I. An antispast is composed of an iambus and trochee 
(- -|-~). 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 274, ed. Glasg. 


ANTISPASTIC VERSE. 105 


II. Several antispasti seldom follow one another, because 
these numbers have a very disagreeable and uncouth move- 
ment. as if one were to divide the following choriambic 
verse, with a base, after the manner of the grammarians : 

κἄτθνᾶσκεϊ Kv | θέρη abpoc | “Αδῶνϊς. τῇ | KE θεῖμεν ; 

ΠῚ. To soften this asperity, the poets increased the an- 
tispastus by one syllable, from which arises a dochmius 
(- ——~-—), associated it with other numbers, and made 
use of frequent resolutions. 

IV. The antispast being composed, as has just been re- 
marked, of an iambus and trochee, any variety of the iam- 
bus is admitted into the first part of the foot, and any vari- 
ety of the trochee into the second. Hence we get the fol- 
lowing kinds of antispast : 


V. In other words, the first or iambic part of the anti- 
spast may be either an iambus, tribrach, spondee, anapest, 
or dactyl ; and the second or trochaic part may be either a 
trochee, tribrach, spondee, or anapest. 

VI. Instead of an antispast, an iambic or trochaic syzygy 
is occasionally used ; as, 


-- — aa 


VII. The second foot of the iambic syzygy also admits 
a dactyl; as, 


--|-v-~ 


VIII. An antispastic monometer is rare. Thus, in Auschy- 
lus, Agam. 1151, 1161, we have, 
ὦ πῦτντ᾽ “Hpa | 
ὦ φίλ᾽ “Απολλόν. | 


106 ANTISPASTIC VERSE. 


IX. Nor is the dimeter frequent. sch. Agam. 1151 
1161. 
νῦμον ἄνομον οἱ | ἃ Tic E0vOa. 
τὶ δ΄ Eripoba Ovo | Pato κλᾶγγᾷ. 
X. The other kinds of antispastic verse are extremely 
various. A few may be here enumerated. 


Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 


ἔμοϊ χρὴν Sou | hopav. (Eurip. Hec. 627.) 


Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 
ἔμοϊ χρὴν πῆ | μῦνᾶν yévéoO | at. (Hec. 628.) 
KOTG πεμπῦ | μένᾶν TaAaty | Gv. (Ib. 455.) 
τἄλαϊν᾽ ovKéeT | ἵ σ᾽ ἐμθᾶτεῦ | σῶ. (Lb. 901.) 


Trimeter Acatalectic. 
ἄλλ᾽ ἃ poiptd | ta τῖς δῦ | vaoic δεῖνα. (Ib. 950.) 


Trimeter Brachycatalectic. 


TaAaiva TaA | atvat Kopat | Ppvyov. (Ib. 1046.) 


Trimeter Catalectic. 
abvpoot δ᾽ οἵ | ἃ viv δρᾶμοντ | E Baxyat. (Orest. 1502.) 
XI. Among the tragic writers chiefly, the antispastus is 
often associated with other numbers, mostly iambic and tro- 
chaic. Of these the iambic are not such as have been pre- 
viously treated of, which proceed by syzygies or dipodie, 
but of another kind allied to antispasts. This kind, because 
they consist of shorter orders, and, therefore, admit a doubt- 
ful syllable even into those places from which it is excluded 
in syzygies (whence arises a broken and feeble movement), 
are called Ischiorrhogic Iambics. 
XII. These verses are found even without any antispas- 
tus added. ‘Thus, Soph. Electr. 504, seq. :' 


1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 147, ed. Glasg. Hermanns ar- 
@ 


ANTISPASTIC VERSE. 107 
ὦ TIEAG | πῦς ἃ | πρῦσθεν 
πόλυῦπον | ὅς Imm | Eta 
ὥς ἔμ | λὲς ai | ἄνῆ 
τᾷδε ya. 7 Οτοΐϊο. 
evTé γᾶρ | ὅ πὸντ | τσθεῖς 
Μυρτιλὸς | Exot | μαθῆ, κ. τ. A. 


Dochmiac Verses.' 


I. A dochmius consists of an antispast and a long sylla- 
ble, thus, ~——~-—; and, therefore, a simple dochmiac is 
the same as antispastic monometer hypercatalectic. 

ϑξῶν ἢ EGY. 

II. Two of these feet or verses are continually united to- 
gether in such a manner, and with such various combina- 
tions of feet, that almost any two penthemimers put together 
may claim the name of dochmiac dimeter. 

If. A pure dochmiac dimeter is not of frequent occur- 
rence. The following are three instances : 


Boa χριμπτἕταϊ | πότᾶταϊ βρἔμεῖ. (Sept. Th. 84.) 
κὐκλοῦνταϊ pobdc | δ᾽ ἀρεϊῶν ὅπλῶν. (Ib. 114.) 
δικᾷ καὶ ϑέοϊ | civ οὔ Sduriztvet. (Hee. 1013.) 


IV. Impure forms of the dimeter dochmiac are varied 
almost ad infinitum. ‘Thus, the following occur in the 
chorus, Asch. Sept. Th. 79, seq. : 


μξθεϊταϊ στρᾶτος | στρᾶτοπξεδον Aindrv- 

ῥεῖ πόλὺς BE λξῶς  προδρδμδς ἱππῦτᾶς. 

albEpia Kovic | μὲ πεῖθεϊ φἄνεϊσ᾽ 

ἅμᾶχξτοῦ δίκαν  ὑδᾶτος δρστῦποῦ 

τῷ ϑέοι ϑξαϊ τ᾽ | OpopEvOY KaKdv 
poe ee ee 
rangement, however, of these verses is opposed by Wunder, Conspect. 
Metr. &c., ad loc. 

1. For a more detailed account of dochmiac verse, consult Seidler, de 

Versibus Dochmiacis, Lips. 1812, 8vo.—Burnewt Tentamen de Metris 


ab Hschylo in Choricis Cantibus adhibitis, p. xx., seq. (Intred.).—Malt- 
by, Observat. ad Morell. Gr. P. Lez. p. Ixx. 


108 IONIC A MAJORE VERSE. 
GAevoate Boa δ᾽ | ὕπερ τεϊχξῶν. 
τίς apa povoérat | Tic ap’ ἔπαρκἔσεϊ ; 
TETAGY Kal OTEMEDY | TOT’ EL μὴ νῦν, ἄμ---φί. 
av τ’ “Λρῆς φεῦ φεῦ, | ἹΚαδμοῦ ἕπῶνῦμον 
ἕν TE μᾶχαϊς μᾶκαϊρ᾽ | ἄνᾶσσᾶ TPO TOAEWS 
i@ TéAetol  τέλεταϊ TE γᾶς: 
V. A dochmiac is sometimes connected with a cretic, 
either pure or resolved ; thus, 
EntanvaAov | Edd¢ Exippvov. (Sept. Th. 151.) 
TaO0E πῦρ | yOPVAGKEC TOALY. (Tb. 154.) 
VI. Pherecratic and Glyconic verses are commonly 


ranked under antispastic, but they are more correctly to be 
regarded as choriambic with a base.’ 


ὙΠ. Of Tonic a Majore Verse. 


I. An Ionic verse a majore admits a trochaic syzygy pro- 
miscuously with its proper foot (—-—~~). It receives also 
a second peon (~ — ~ ~) into the first place, and a molos- 
sus (— — —) into an even place of a trimeter whole or cata- 


lectic. 
IJ. Resolutions of the long syllables are allowed in all 


possible varieties. 


1. Monometer Hypercatalectic. 
πτῶσσοῦσὶϊ μῦ | χῶν. (Hec. 1048.) 


2. Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 
χλῶραϊς ὑπ | βῆσσαϊς. (Cid. Col. 673.) 
‘Kal oOppova | πῶλοῖς. (Phen. 182.) 


3. Dimeter Catalectic. 
ἢ Ππαλλᾶδῦς | Ev πόλει. (Hee. 465.) 
6 ϑεσμῦθξ | τῆς ὅς ἄν. (Arist. Eccles. 289.) 


1. These two measures have already been touched upon at page 104. 
They will again be considered separately at page 117. 


IONIC A MAJORE VERSE. 109 


4. Dimeter Acatalectic. 
τὶ TOL TOTE | τᾶς ἅπλαστοῦ 
κοϊτᾶς ἔρῦς | ὦ μᾶτατα 
σπεῦσεϊ θᾶνᾶ | τοῦ τελευτᾶν: (Med. 152.) 
5. Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 
νῦν δ᾽ οὑτὸς ἂν | εἴταϊ oTvyé | ρῶ. (Aj. 1232.) 


6. Trimeter Brachycatalectic. 
ikov Ta Kpat | Lota γᾶς ἔπ | αὐλᾶ. (CEd. Col. 669.) 


7. Trimeter Acatalectic. 
ϑναᾶτῶν BIO | TH THTOAD γ᾽ | ἐκτὸς Grace. (Ant. 614.) 
τᾶν οὔθ᾽ ὑπνς | aipst TOD ὅ | παντογηρῶς. (Ant. 606.) 
III. The most noted kind of Tonic verses @ majore is the 
Sotadiec (so called from Sotades, a poet of Alexandria, who 
frequently employed it in his writings), or tetrameter brachy- 


catalectic. 

IV. The tetrameter brachycatalectic was constructed for 
recitation only, not for song.' In its pure state it consists 
of three Ionics and ἃ trochee. ‘Two trochees are found in 
any place, but for the most part in the third. 

V. The most usual form of the verse is as follows: 


αὐτὸς yap ἕ | ὧν πᾶντδγξ | νῆς ὅ πᾶντᾶἄ | γεννῶν. 
VI. It is seldom that all the feet are either Ionics ; as, 
av χρυσῦφῦρ | ἧς τοῦτ TH | χῆς ἐστὶν Ex | appa, 
or trochees ; as, 
ὥς πὲνῆς YEA [ὧν ἔχεῖν καὶ | πλοῦσϊδς TAE | ὃν σχεῖν. 
VII. The following are examples of resolutions : 
Ἔνθ’ οἵ μὲν En’ | ἄκραϊσζ πῦρ | αἷς vEKvEC E | κεῖντ 
γῆς Ent EE | νῆς Oppava | τειχξᾶ TPOAIT | δντὲς 


1. Aristides Quintilianus, p. 32. 


110 IONIC A MINORE VERSE. 

“EAA G6¢ tép | ἧς Kal μῦχδν | EoTinc πᾶ | τρῶῆς 

Honv τ’ Epa | τὴν Kat κἄλδν | RALOD πρῦσ | ὥπον. 

VIII. If the three remaining pzons, or the second peon 
in any place but the first, or if an iambic syzygy or an epi- 


trite be found in the same verse with an Ionic foot, the 
verse is then termed Epionic. 


VIII. Of Lonic a Minore Verse. 


I. An Ionic verse a minore admits an iambic syzygy pro- 
miscuously with its proper foot(~ ~ — -- It begins some- 
times with the third peon (~ ~ —~), sometimes with a 
molossus, which is admitted into the odd places. Resolu- 
tions of the long syllable are also allowed. 

II. An epionic verse a minore is constituted by intermix- 
ing with the Ionic foot a trochaic syzygy, an epitrite, a sec- 
ond or fourth pzon, or the third in any place but the first. 


1. Monometer Hypercatalectic. 
pérédc μᾶ | τρός. (Hec. 185.) 


2. Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 
ἔπ τανδ᾽ Eoo | vOeic. (Ib. 1065.) 


3. Dimeter Catalectic. 
ἔλαταᾶς Gkp | OKomoic. (Phen. 1540.) 
“Adadpuaytido¢g | “EAAje. (Pers. 71.) 
ϑέσθεν yap | Kata potp’. (Ib. 102.) 
III. 'Timocreon is said to have composed an entire poem 
in this measure. 
Σικελὸς κομψὸς ἀνὴρ 
ποτι τὰν ματέρ᾽ ἔφα, kK. τ. A. 
4. Dimeter Acatalectic. 


πᾶρᾶκλινοῦσ᾽ | ἕπέκρᾶνεν. (Agam. 721.) 


PMONIC VERSE. 111 


5. Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 
povad’ ατῶν | a διαξοῦσ | a. 
6. Trimeter Brachycatalectic. 
διεδιφρεῦσ | ἕ MiptiAod | Povor. 
7. Tetrameter Catalectic. 
TO yé μὴν ξεῖν | ta dovodc | λῦγδς ὥσπερ | λἔγξταϊ. 
IX. Of Peonic Verse. 


I. A peonic verse admits any foot of the same time as a 
pon ; viz., a cretic, a bacchius, or a tribrach and pyrrhic 
jointly. 

II. The construction of the verse is most perfect when 
each metre ends with a word. 


1. Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 
ὄμοὄγαμος | Kvpet. (Phan. 137.) 


2. Dimeter Catalectic. 
χαἄλκδδετᾶ | τ’ ἐμθόλᾶ. (Ib. 113.) 


3. Dimeter Acatalectic. 
dioixouEd’, | οἰχῦμεθᾶ. (Orest. 179.) 
Opouadéc ὦ | πτέρδφδροι. (Ib. 311.) 
4. Trimeter Brachycatalectic. 
κἄταϑοστρῦ | χῦς Oupaot | yopyoc. (Phan. 146.) 


5. Trimeter Catalectic. 
BaAoipi xpov | ὦ φύγαδα | μέλξον. (Ib. 169.) 


X. Of Cretic Verse. ~ 
I. Cretic numbers belong, in strictness, to the trochaic, 
and are nothing else but a catalectic trochaic dipodia, which 
consists of arsis, thesis, and arsis again. 


11 CRETIC VERSE. 


II. Since this order is periodic, it is plain that the thesis 
cannot be doubtful, but consists always and necessarily of 
one short syllable only ; but that each arsis may be resolved, 
whence it comes to pass that both the first and the fourth 
peon, and, moreover, even five short syllables, may be put 
for the cretic. Thus, 


Ill. It must also be remarked, that, when several cretic 
feet are conjoined in one verse, no one coheres with an- 
other in a periodic order; and the last syllable of the last 
foot, as every final syllable, is doubtful, and cannot be re- 
solved except in systems in which, since the numbers are 
continued in one unbroken-tenour, the last foot of the verses, 
unless it is, at the same time, the last foot of the whole sys- 
tem, is subject to the same law as each intermediate foot. 

IV. The dimeters are very much used by both tragic and 
comic poets, and are commonly conjoined in systems, so 
that the last syllable of the verses is neither doubtful nor 
admits a hiatus, and may be resolved. In these systems a 
monometer, too, is assumed. ‘Thus, in Asch. Suppl. 425, 
seq. : 

φρῦοντισον | 

καὶ γἕνοῦ | πᾶνδικῶς 
εὐσξθῆς | προξξνος" 

τᾶν φυγᾶδᾶα | μὴ mpddac 
τᾶν ἕκαθεν | ExboAatc 
δυσθξοις | Oppevar. 

V. The tetrameter, too, is frequent, having the cesura at 
the end of the second foot. ‘Thus, in Simmias, ap. Hephest. 
p. 74: 

μᾶτἔἕρ ὦ | πδτνϊᾷ || κλῦθί vip | φᾶν abpay, 
Δῶρϊ, Kv | μοκτῦπῶν || ἡρᾶν᾽ aAt | OY μῦχῶν. 

VI. Aleman used the catalectic hexameter, whence the 

following verse has the name of Alemanzan. 


ANACREONTIC VERSE. nal: 


τΑφρῦδι | τᾶ μὲν οὔκ | ἐστί, μᾶργ | ὃς δ᾽ Epac, | ota παῖς, 
| παϊσδεῖ, 
ἄκρ᾽ Ex’ ἄνθ | ἢ κἄθαϊ | νῶν, & pH | pot ϑίγῆς | τῶ κῦπαϊρ 
| tox. 


XI. Of Anacreontic Verse. 


I. This species of verse is generally ranked under the 
Ionic α minore class; it belongs, however, more properly 
to the Jonic a majore kind. 

II. The poems which pass at the present day under the 
name of Anacreon are not genuine, but are the productions 
of persons who lived at a much later period, and some of 
whom appear to have been quite ignorant. Hence the doubt 
and difficulty to which they have given rise. 

III. Asa great part of these poems consist of pure ‘iambi, 
we ought to rank such, no doubt, with iambic rather than 
Tonic numbers. As, for example, the following : 


VEAG | Aéyetv | “Atpetd | ac. 
IV. But of those which are really Ionic there appear to 
be two kinds ; one with a monosyllabic, the other with a 
dissyllabic anacrusis. 


V. The kind which has a monosyllabic anacrusis admits 
of two forms only, of which the proper one is this : 


and the other, which changes the dactyl of the Tonic foot 
into an amphibrach, is as follows: 


-|----|--- 


VI. The first of these forms, which is very like the 
Pherecratic, is found constantly employed in one ode mere- 
ly, the thirtieth ; as, 

al | Μοῦσαϊ τὸν ~E | porta 

δὴ | σᾶσᾶι στεἔφᾶν | οἵσῖ, 

τῷ | κἄᾶλλεϊ πᾶρξδ | ὥκᾶν, kK. τ. A. 
K 2 


114 ANACREONTIC VERSE. 


In other odes it is found intermingled with the second form, 
which is much more usual. 
VII. The second form is employed in the twenty-third, 

twenty-sixth, and twenty-seventh odes. ‘Thus, 

6 | πλοῦτος εἴγξ | χρυσοῦ 

τὸ | ζὴν πᾶρῆγξ | ϑνῆτοις. (23, 1, seg.) 

67’ | εἴς μὲ Βακχῦς | E207." 

εὖ | δοῦσϊν ai μὲ | pluvat. (26, 1, seq.) 


VIII. We now come to that species of Anacreontics 
which has a dissyllabic anacrusis. It has two forms, as 
follows : 


vv l]|---~-|-- 


The first of these is much less used than the second, and 
we will therefore treat of the latter first in order. 

IX. This latter form is employed in the 3d, 4th, 7th, 
21st, 28th, 44th, and 45th odes. Thus, 

μὲσδ | voKtiolc 700’ | Gpaic 

oTpépé | Tal ὅτ᾽ ἄρκτς | HOR. (3, 1, seq.) 
ἔπι | μυρσϊναῖς rép | εἴναῖς 

ἔπ | A@tivaic τέ | Tolatc. (4, 1, seq.) 
ἄγε | ζωγρᾶφῶν ap | lore 

γρᾶφξ | ζῶγρᾶφῶν ap | tote. (28, 1, seg.) 

X. When, in this species of Anacreontics, the anacrusis 
consists of one syllable, that syllable must necessarily be 
long, as arising from the contraction of two short ones. In- 
stances of this, however, are not frequent. ‘Thus, 

ke) | pov péretot | χατρῶν. (6, 16.) 
πῆ | γῆ ρξουσᾶ | πειθοῦς. (22, 6.) 


———— = 


1. We have given Barnes’s emendation, based on that of Scaliger. 
The common reading is ὅταν 6 Βάκχος ἐσέλθη. 


ANACREONTIC VERSE. 115 


XI. Sometimes the first long syllable is found resolved. 
Thus, 
av δὲ | φιλιός εἰ yE | Gpyav. (48, 8.) 
χῶ | rood φέροῦσϊν | ὕλᾶι. (Ib. 7.) 
and occasionally also the second ; as, 
μέθυ | ὡμὲν abpa yé | λῶντες. (6, 3.) 
idé | πῶς yépdvoc ὅδ | evel. (37, 6.) 

XII. Of the middle iambi the first has sometimes a long 
anacrusis, but oftener in the tragedians and comedians. 
Thus, 

ano | pintovrat μὲρ | wa. (39, 5.) 


The second more unfrequently ; as in Sophocles, El. 1058, 
and Euripides, Cycl. 497. 

φρῦνϊ | μῶτᾶἄτοῦς οἵ | BVOC. 

Ent | d&uviate τὲ | SavOov. 

XIII. The species of Ionics which we have just been con 
sidering under the preceding paragraph is found intermin- 
gled with that referred to in paragraph IX., in the following 
odes of Anacreon; the 5th, 6th, 22d, 29th, 36th, 37th, 39th, 
4151, 42d, 51st, 52d, 53d, 54th, 56th, 57th, and in fragments 
13, 17, and 21. 

XIV. We come now to the first of the two species men- 
tioned in paragraph VIII., namely, that consisting of a dis- 
syllabic anacrusis, with an Ionic a majore and two syllables 
over; as, 

vv~]--~vl|-- 

XV. These are often formed into systems by the tragic 
writers, with a monometer occasionally appended, and end- 
ing with a verse of iambic form. ‘The final doubtful sylla- 
ble is excluded, as in anapestics. 'Thus we have the fol- 
lowing in the Supplices of Aischylus, v. 1025, seg. εἰ 


1. Burney erroneously makes these lines Ionic a minore. (Tent. 
Suppl. v. 1013, p. 72.) 


116 ANACREONTIC VERSE. 
ité | μᾶν ἄστῦα | νᾶμκτος 
μᾶκᾶρ | ἂς ϑεους yava | ἔντὲς 
πῦλϊ | οὐχοὺῦς TE Kal | Ol χεῦμ᾽ 
“Epa | σινοῦ | 
mépt | valovtat πᾶλ | Gov 
bro | δεξᾶσθξ δ᾽ ὅπ | Ade 
μέλος" | ατνὸς δὲ TOA | τν τῆν- 
δὲ Ilé | λᾶσγῶν exe | τῶ, wd” 
Ett | NécAov | 

πρῦ | χῦᾶς | σξθῶ | μὲν vpy | οἷς. 


XV. Another kind of Anacreontic verse employed by the 
tragic writers is that in which anaclasis, or the conjunction 
of a third peon (~ ~ —~) and second epitrite (- ~ ——) 
prevails. Thus, 


XII. Of Galliambic Verse. 


I. Galliambic verse is composed of two Anacreontics, of 
which the last is catalectic ; in this form : 


- 
~~ wv 


II. The cesura always falls at the end of the first An- 
acreontic, and is observed with great care. ‘The following 
are two lines of this measure, given by Hephestion : 

TGAA | ai μητρῦς Op | ετῆς || PtAo | θῦρσδι Spopa | δὲς. 

alc | évtéa πᾶτᾶ | yetTat || Kal | YaAKEG Kpora | Aa. 

Ill. The following Galliambics are given by Diogenes 
Laertius (8, ad. fin.). HH. Stephens scanned them errone- 
- ously as hexameters; and Salmasius, in his eagerness to 
emend them, only corrupted them the more. Porson re- 
stored them to their true numbers. We have marked in 
each the place of the cesural pause, that the melody may 
be more perceptible. 


GLYCONIC VERSE. 117 


ἐν Μέμφει λόγος ἐστὶ || προμαθεῖν τὴν ἰδίην 
Εὔδοξόν ποτε μοῖραν || παρὰ τοῦ καλλικέρω 
ταύρον, κοὐδὲν ἔλεξεν" || Bot γὰρ πόθεν λόγος ; 
φύσις οὐκ ἔδωκε μόσχῳ || λάλον "Απιδι στόμα, 
παρὰ δ᾽ αὐτὸν λέχριος στὰς || ἐλιχμήσατο στολὴν, 
προφανῶς τοῦτο διδάσκων || ἀποδύσῃ βιοτὴν 

ὅσον οὔπω: διὸ καὶ οἱ || ταχέως ἦλθε μόρος, 
δεκάκις πέντ᾽ ἐπὶ τρισσαῖς || ἐσίδοντι πλειάδας. 


XII. Of Glyconic Verse. 


I. The first, and, at the same time, most simple and ele- 
gant form of Glyconics is a base followed by a logacdic 
order, consisting of a dactyl and trochee, and terminating 
with an arsis. Thus, 


Ah lowe + y|— ἰ 
Il. This kind of verses form systems, for the most part, 
which are customarily concluded by the catalectic verse 
called Pherecratic. Thus, 
ἅδ᾽ & | yO χἕρᾶς αἰμᾶτ | ἢ 
pac βρό | χοιϊσΐ KéxActpEv | ἃ 
πέμπο | pal Kata γαῖ] ἄς. (Androm. 502, seq.) 
Ill. The logacedic order was subsequently changed into 
a choriambus and iambus, by which the last syllable but 
one was made doubtful; as, 


wah [πο π-ι Ὁ -- 


Thus we have in Euripides, Hippol. 741, the following : 

τὰς ἢ | λεκτρῦφᾶεις | avyac. 

IV. The logacedic order having been divided into a cho- 
riambus and iambus, it was thought fit to vary the numbers 
by transposition, so that the iambus, being placed before 
the choriambus, was changed into a spondee or trochee, be- 


cause an arsis ought to follow the base. Thus, 


᾿ 


ἘΝ mote bo oa et eet σσον, 
s 


καὶ πεντ | ἡκὄνθ᾽ | ovyibiae. 


118 GLYCONIC VERSE. 


V. And again, another transposition also was made, 
though not of frequent occurrence, the choriambus taking 
the first place, and the base and trochee being changed into 
an iambic syzygy. As, 


an te | --- 


VI. The Pherecratic verse, in which the choriambus is 
not followed by an iambus that may be transposed, admits 
only two forms: 


' 
NN [πῶ ξὺν 


—-v~~-|v--~ 


Of which the last is uncommon, and used, for the most 
part, only in some compound verses. 

VII. The primitive species of Glyconics, which ends in 
an iambus, receives among dramatic poets, at least in the 
later tragedy, even a spondee in the end, so that in anti- 
strophics a spondee may answer to an iambus. ‘Thus, in 
Sophocles, Philoct. 1128, 1151, we have 

ὦ τόξον φίλον, ὦ φιλῶν. 
τὰν πρόσθεν βελέων ἄλκᾶν. 

VIII. A: pyrrhic is excluded from the base among the 
dramatic poets and in the graver lyric poetry. ‘The rest of 
the dissyllabic feet are used promiscuously by the dramatic 
writers, so that any one may answer to any one. The tri- 


brach is most used by the later tragedy, as in Euripides, 
Phen. 210. 


Topiov | otdua Airrove’| ἔθᾶν. 
The tragedians of the same age sometimes allowed them- 
selves an anapest also ; as in Sophocles, Philoct. 1098 : 
τὶ TOT av | pol τῦ Kat’ ἢ | wap. 
or a dactyd ; as in Iph. Taur. 1144: 


TrapbEvoc | εὐδοκιμῶν | γαμῶν. 


GLYCONIC VERSE. 119 


IX. The choriambus is not unfrequently resolved, espe- 
cially in the later tragedy. ‘Thus, the first syllable in 
Soph. Cid. Col. 186, 205: 

TETpOpEV | ἀφίλον ἄπο | στῦὕγεῖν. 
Tig ὧν | πόλυύπονδς ayq | τῖν᾽ ἄν. 
And in a Pherecratic ; as, Eurip. Hel. 1502, 1519: 
ἕπιπετ | μενος taKy | Et 
ῥδθιὰ | πόλϊᾶ Sadaoo | ἄς. 
So also in the last syllable ; as, Hel. 1505; Herc. Fur.781: 
Baré | Πλεταδᾶς ὕπο | péoac. 
Ισμῆν᾽ | ὦ στξφανδφορ | tar. 
X. In this other form of Glyconics, 


Gel 4 --ο-|--- 
ew 


the order which follows the base may have both a resolu- 
tion of the arsis and the last syllable doubtful. Whence, in- 
stead of a trochee, sometimes a spondee is put, sometimes a 
tribrach, and these very often; sometimes, but more sel- 
dom, an anapast also, as in Orest. 812, and Iph. Aul. 1041: 
οἰκτρῦ | tata ϑοῖν | Gara Kat. 
ΠΙξ | ρίδὲς ev | δαιτὶ ϑξῶν. 

ΧΙ. Sometimes both the long syllables of the choriambus 

are resolved; as in Eurip. Bacch. 410, 427: 
Exelo’ | ayé μὲ, | Boopié Bpopté. 
copay | δ’ anéxyé | mparrida ppéva τὲ. 

XII. As dochmiac verses have other numbers, resem- 
bling them or parts of them, both intermingled and coupled 
with them, so with Glyconics, also, a vast multitude of 
verses are found joined which are either like them or con- 
sist of Glyconics themselves, with some part taken away 
oradded. These verses have usually this in common, that 
they contain a choriambus joined with a different foot. 


120 GLYCONIC VERSE. 
XIII. The forms which are about the most in use are 
these: First, the shortest, 
—-Vev— | > — and .". -!. | --. . -.--- 
Thus, in Soph. Aid. Col. 128, 160, and Eurtp. Suppl. 960, 
968 : 
ἄς τρἔμομεν | Aéyetv. 
pevpart σῦν | τρἔχεϊ. 
dvoai | ὧν δ᾽ 6 Bide. 
οὔτ᾽ ἐν | τοῖς φθϊμξνοις. 
XIV. Next, with an anacrusis put instead of a base, as 
in Soph. Gad. T. 467: 
ὥ | pa viv ἄξλλ, | δῶν 
im | πῶν σθενᾶρῶ | τἔρον 
gu | γᾷ 700d νῶ | par. 
XV. There are other forms longer than a Glyconic. Of 


these the first is that of the hypercatalectic Glyconic. 
Thus, 


ae οἱ ms — 
wu lrev-[vso and Alc l-yvy-|o 


The following examples are from Soph. Gd. Col. 133, 165, 
and Eurip, Hel. 1317: 


iévt | ὃς τἄδξ νῦν | Tiv ἤκεῖν. 
κλύεις | ὦ πῦλυμοχθ᾽ | ἄλᾶτα. 
ὀρεί | ἃ TOT | E δρόμᾶδι | κῶλῶ. 
XVI. Another kind often joined with Glyconics is the 
following : 


Pee ee | es Se 
Extonlo¢ | σύθεϊς 6 πᾶντῶν. (Ad. Col. 119.) 


XVII. Another kind is this: 


ἘΝ ee πὸ 


GLYCONIC VERSE. 121 
Kaddior | ὧν ὄμθρ | ὧν Atobéy | orépetoat. (Electr. 736. 
κτείνεις | κλεϊνῶν | συγγενξτειρ᾽ | ἀδελφῶν. (Lb. 741.) 
XVIII. The longest of the verses allied to the Glyconic 
is the Phalecian hendecasyllabic. ‘Thus, 


wt l[ory-|[----|< 
αἵ te | valéte KGAA | ἵπῶλδν Edp | av. 
The more usual, but less correct way of scanning this meas- 
ure, is as follows : 


al τὲ | valété | KaAAL | πῶλον | Edpar. 
XIX. Glyconics are sometimes augmented in the begin- 
ning. Hence we have the following forms: 


Ὁ--|-Ὸ Ὁ--ἰτ-- and Ξ-Ξ-- |.ΞΊπο.- 
Téyyet θ᾽ ὕπ | δφρῦσϊ may | κλαῦτοιῖς. (Antig. 831.) 
EyKAnpov | ovté | νυμφίδιος. (Id. 814.) 
XX. Another kind has a trochee inserted between the 
base and the other parts of the Glyconic. Thus, 


Eurail | οὐσᾶ | Aeiaxoc ἢ | dovatc. (Bacch. 865.) 
πᾶδῆ | pot γὲνν | ατῶν | μὲν πᾶτερῶν. (Cycl. 41.) 
XXI. Another kind consists of a Pherecratic verse, with 
a molossus or cretic. Thus, 


πένθος | yap μέγᾶλῶς | 760’ | Opparai. (Med. 183.) 
τάκου | dvpopéva | σῦν | εὐνέτᾶν. (Ib. 159.) 


XXII. Sometimes a bacchius is put before a Glyconic. 


Thus, 
L 


122 PRIAPEIAN VERSE. 
vo-[ ie |---| s- 
ἔρῶτῶν, | Epwr | ὧν δ᾽ arérad | σἕν ὦ | -μοι. 
yévotuay, | tv’ ὑ | Adév ἕπεστ | ἵ πῦὸντ | -ov. 
XXII. A verse is often found among Glyconics com- 
posed of a cretic and choriambus; as in Eurip. Hel. 1356 : 
μᾶτρῦς Opy | ἂς EveTEL. 
Bare σεμν | at Χαρϊτες. 


XIV. Of Priapeian Verse. 


I. The Priapeian verse consists of a Glyconic and Pher- 
ecratic joined in one. ‘Thus, 


II. Of these forms it is probable that one was for the 
most part used to the exclusion of the rest; as by Anac- 
reon : 
ἠρίστ | ἢσᾶ μὲν trp | Τοῦ || λεπτοῦ | μικρόν ard | κλᾶς 
οἴνου | δ᾽ ξξέπϊον | Kaddv || νῦν δ᾽ Gbp | ὥς ἕρδξσσ | av 
ψάλλω | πηκτῖδᾶ TH | φίλῃ || κωμάξ | ὧν raid abp | ἢ. 

III. The cesura is everywhere carefully observed. This 
metre appears to have been asynartete ; and hence the hi- 
atus in the following line given by the scholiast on Theoc: 
ritus : 


ἄν pépo | μὲν mapa τῆς | ϑξοῦ || ἄν Exa | λεσσᾶτὄ τὴν | a. 


XV. Of Eupolidean Verse. 


I. The Eupolidean verse, which is peculiar to the comic 
poets, consists of a Glyconic verse having a choriambus at 
the end, and another like member, in which is a cretic in- 
stead of a choriambus. 

Il. In the base are found a trochee, iambus, spondee, and 
sometimes a tribrach. Thus, 


CRATINEAN VERSE, ETC. 123 
Η J, -- ο -- .- ha Ι slater 

-- I 
ὦ 9E | Gus | vot KaTEpG || πρὸς ὑ | μᾶς E | AevOEpac. 
EpwOpov | εξ ἄκρ | od πᾶχῦ τοῖς || παῖδ | οἷς ἕν | ἣν yéAdS. 


—_—_ ww -- , — 


—~ 


XVI. Of Cratinean Verse. 

I. The Cratinean verse differs from the Eupolidean in the 
first portion only, in which it has a choriambus and an iam- 
bic dipodia. ‘Thus, 

πᾶντᾶ φῦρῆτ | a πᾶντ | a TOAp | ητὰ | τῶδξ | τῶ YOPO. 

II. The cesura, as in the line here given, is often neg- 

lected. 


XVII. Of Polyschematistic Verse. 


I. This name is applied to verses whose composition is 
so irregular and variable that they cannot be classed with 
propriety under any particular head. In other words, poly- 
schematistic verses are those which consist of entirely ir- 
regular feet. Thus, 


Οἰδίποδα | Bpdradv οὐδὲ | νᾶ μᾶκᾶριζ | ὦ. (Aid. T. 1195.) 


XVIIL. Of Prosodiac Verse. 


This appellation is given to a verse in which choriam- 
bics are mixed with Ionics or peons. Thus, 


1. Dimeter Acatalectic. 
viata 8 τ || ἔτῦ πέδῷ. (Orest, 1481.) 


2. Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 
poArav δ᾽ ἄπδ | καὶ χὔρδποι | ὧν. (Hec. 905.) 
paotov ὕπερ | τελλὸντ Eotd | ὧν. (Orest. 832.) 


3. Trimeter Catalectic. 


λᾶϊνξοις | “Αμφϊονος | Opyavoic. (Phen. 114.) 


124 ASYNARTETE VERSES. 


4, Trimeter Hypercatalectic. 
μἔγαλα δὲ tic δύναμις | δῖ’ GAdoTop| Gv. (Orest. 1562.) 


XIX. Of Asynartete Verses. 


I. This name is given to those verses which consist of 
two different measures united into one line. 

II. The name denotes that the union is not a close one 
(ἀσυνάρτητος, i. e., “not jointed together”), and, in fact, 
the last syllable of the first member of the line may be ei- 
ther long or short, just as if it were the final syllable of a 
separate line. On this same principle, too, a hiatus is al- 
lowed between the two measures. Thus, 


detva | detva || πέπον | θᾶμεν. 'Troch. syz.+lamb. syz.' 

aldAivoy | atatvor || ἀρχᾶν  ϑᾶνατοῦ. Dact. dim.t Anap. 
mon. 

ἔπιδεμν | tov Ge || πέσοιμ᾽ | Ec evy | ἄν. Anap. mon.+ 
Iamb. penth. 

JIL. The metre of Archilochus is this, in which he uni- 

formly observed the cesura : 


SLU] fi σγζς θη Ξοψφώφ τ 
“Epdopov | δὴ Xap | trae || χρημᾶ | tot γξ | Actor. 
IV. Another measure employed by the same poet, and 
imitated by Horace (Od. 1, 4), is as follows: 


Bees 2 are ees RENO) ES ke 
οὔκ ἔθ᾽ 6 | μῶς ϑᾶλλ, | εἰς ara | Adv ypoa || καρφξ | Tat 
yap | ἤδῆ. 
V. Another asynartete verse of Archilochus, which Hor- 
ace has imitated in epode 11, is as follows: 


», -- 


GAAG μ᾽ 6 | λῦσϊμξ | λῆς || @’ ταῖρ | ἔ δᾶμν | a rat | πὄθος. 


1. A verse of this kind, in which a trochaic is followed by an iambic 
syzygy, or vice versa, is termed periodicus. 


RARABWRAARDEDAVLRRADREAANVEDADARAUADATAABRARSUTVERUUEDUTTUAABUCUVWEADDUAABERA 


PART OLE 


CHORAL SONGS. 


PRADA VRAD AAAAADREDAT EUAN DEAUBDEAEBALUAAA DEDUPEOD 


«οὐαὶ Cree Up 
πο; 


CHORAL SCANNING! 


OF THE 


PROMEFTHEUS .ViNC TUS. 


Vss. 114-119. 
AnTIspasTic SysTEM. 

1 Ὰ Chet, ea: 
2. τὶς ἄχῶ | Tic δδμᾶ | πρῦσξπτᾷ | μ᾽ ἄφεγγῆς, 
8. ϑεσσσῦτος ἢ | βρδτεϊδς ἢ | KEKPauEVT ; 
4. IKETO τερμῦνϊζ | Ov Ent TaYOY, 
5. πόνῶν Euav | ϑξωρῦς, ἢ | τὶ δὴ ϑελῶν ; 
6. 6paré δὲσμ | ὥὡτὴῆν μὲ δῦσ | πότμον ϑξδν. 


. Extra τηϑίσιμη. 

. Bacchic tetrameter. 
. Antispastic trimeter. 
. Antispastic dimeter. 
. Antispastic trimeter. 
. Antispastic trimeter. 


ΘΦὸ ὧι Ow = 


Vss. 120-127. 
Anapzestic MEASURE. 
1. τὸν Aide | ἐχθρὸν, || τὸν πᾶσ | τ θξοῖς || 
2. δ᾽ ἄπεχθ | ετᾶς || ἔλθδνθ᾽ | ὅπῦσοϊ || 
3. τῆν Δις | αὐλὴν || εἴσοῖχν | εὕστῖν || 


1. We have included under this general head not only anapestics, 
but parts of the play, also, not uttered by the chorus, but where the 
measure employed is of a choral nature ; as in the piece first given. 

2. Exclamations, not included in any measure. 


128 CHORAL SCANNING 

. Ola THY | Atay || φίλὄτῆ | Ta βρὅτῶν || 

. φεῦ φεῦ | τὶ 707’ αὖ || Kivabion | ἃ KAve || 

. πελᾶς Ot  ὥνῶν [[ατθῆρ | δ᾽ EAadpaitc || 

. πτὲρύγῶν | ρίπαϊς || ὑπῦσῦ | pier || 

. πᾶν wot | Pobépor || TO πρόσξρπ | Gy. (Parcemiac ) 


ο 2 nn 


Vss. 128-138 (Leipsic ed. 128--185). 
STROPHE β΄. 
. Μῆδεν φδθῆ | Ofc φιλτᾶ 
. yap δὲ τὰξ | τς πτέρῦγῶν 
.« Voaic ἄμϊλλ. | αἷς πρόσξθᾶ 
. τονδὲ πᾶγον, | πᾶτρῷᾶς 
. μῦγις πᾶρεϊπ | οὐσᾶ φρξἕνᾶς" 
. κραϊπνδφορ | ot δὲ μ᾽ E | πεμψᾶν | adpai 
. κτύποῦ yap ἃ | χῶ χαλῦύθος 
. δίῃξεν ἄντρ | av μῦχδν, EK δ᾽ 
. ἔπληξε μοῦ | 


Φῷ ο “1 ΦΟ δι αὶ WW = 


= 
i=) 


. τᾶν VEuEpOT | ἵν αἰδῶ: ov- 
. nv δ᾽ ané | διλῦς OY | ᾧ πτὲρ | OT. 


— 
_ 


. Glyconic polyschematistic. 

. The same measure. 

. The same measure. 

. Choriambic dimeter catalectic. 
. Glyconic polyschematistic. 
. Logacedic. 

. Glyconic polyschematistic. 
. The same measure. 

. Antispastic monometer. 
10. Choriambic dimeter acatalectic. 
11. Logacedic. 


ODOWwaarrwne 


ΟοΟΥ 1 δ᾽ δι ἢ WW να 


—_— 
=" 


Porn 


Θ Ὁ ὦ « δ᾽ δι τὰν WD κα 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 


Vss. 189-146 (Leipsic ed. 136-143). 


Anapzstic MEASURE. 


. At al αἵ at || 

. τῆς TOAD | τεκνοῦ || Τηθῦδς | Exyova || 

. τοῦ Trépt | πᾶσαν Y || εἴλῖσσ | Ouevod || 

. X06v’ ἄκοϊμ | τῷ || pedpart | παϊδὲς || 

. πᾶτρος ὦ | κξᾶνοῦ" || δερχθῆτ᾽ | ἔσϊδεσθ᾽ || 

. οἵῷ | δεσμῷ || πρδσπδρπ | ἅτῦς || 

. τῆσδὲ pap | ἄγγος || σκὄπξλοις | Ev ἄκροῖϊς || 
. ppovpav | ἄζῆ || Adv oxy7jo | ὦ: (Parcemiac.) 


Vss. 147-157 (Leipsic ed. 144-151). 


ANTISTROPHE β΄, 
corresponding line for line with StropHe β΄ 


. Aevood Πρῦμῆ | θεῦ φῦθερᾶ δ᾽ 
. ἔμοϊσῖν ὅσσ | οἷς ὄμίχλῆ 
. πρῦσηξξ TAP | ἧς Oaxpvav 


σῦν δὲμᾶσ eto | ἵδοῦσῆ 


. πέτραϊς πρῦσαῦ | ατνδμξνον 


ταῖσδ᾽ ada | μᾶντῦδξ | τοῖσὶ | λῦμαϊς 


. νξοϊ yap οἵ | GKovojuot 

. κρᾶτοῦσ᾽ Ολῦμπ | οὐ νξὄχμοιϊς 

. δὲ δὴ νόμοῖϊς | 

. Lede ἀθετῶς | κρᾶτῦνεϊ τὰ ὁ 

. πρῖν δὲ TEA | ὡρτᾷ | νῦν ἃ | ἱστοῖ. 


Vss. 158-164 (Leipsic ed. 152-158). 


Anapxstic MEasure. 


. Ez yap | μ᾽ ὕπ γῆν, || νέρθεν τ’ | ἀϊδοῦ |] 


. τοῦ veKpO | δεγμῦνδς || εἰς ἄπὲρ | ἄντον || 


Taptapov | ἤκεν, || δέσμοῖς | aAvrote [} 


. ἄγρϊῶς | πελᾶσᾶς, || ὥς μῆ | TE ϑέος, |} 


129 


130 CHORAL SCANNING 


IO oO 


oonranrrrk WN = 


Φ Ο « δ᾽ δι νὰ WN 


. PATE τὶς | ἄλλος || τοῖσδ᾽ ἔπε | y7HOeT: | 
. νῦν δ᾽ ald | épior || Kiviyp’ | 6 τἄλᾶς || 
ἐχθροῖς | ExiyapT || ἅ πέπονθ | G.. (Paremiac.) 


Vss. 165-173 (Leipsic ed. 159-166). 
STROPHE γ΄. 
. Τὶς ὧδε τλῆσ | ἵκαρδῖος 
. ϑεῶν OT@ | TAD’ ἔπῖχαρῆ ; 
. τῖς ov Evvdoy | GAG κακοῖς 
. TEOLOL, δίχα | yé Διὸς ; ὅ δ᾽ Ent | κὅτῶς ἄεϊ 
. ϑεέμξνδς  ἀγνᾶμπτ || ὃν vo | ὃν, 
. δαμνᾶταϊζ | οὐρᾶνϊ | av 
. γεννᾶν" | οὐδὲ | λὴξ- 
. εἴ πρὶν av ἢ κῦρξσ | ἢ κξᾶρ, | ἢ πᾶλᾶ | μᾷ TIVE 
. τᾶν δῦσα | λῶτον EX | ἢ τῖς | ἀρχᾶν. : 


. Antispastic dimeter. 

. The same measure. 

. The same measure. 

. Antispastic trimeter. 

Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 

. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 
. Dactylic pentameter. 

. Logacedic. 


Vss. 174-184 (Leipsic ed. 167-177). 
Anapzstic MEAsureE. 
. Ἢ piv | ἔτ᾽ ἔμοῦ, || καῖπερ | xparépaic || 
. ὃν yui | Orédate || αἰκτζ | ouévod || 
. Xpelav | ééet || μᾶκαρῶν | πρύτᾶνϊς || 
. delgal | τὸ νξον || βουλεῦμ᾽ | ὕφ᾽ ὅτοῦ |] 
. OKITTPOY | τιμᾶς || τ᾽ aTOOvA | arat || 


a Pr Ww = 


Ὃ οὐ SB o> ὧι mm OD ἐδ καὶ 
SOW “ δ 


Fou fk WW = 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 191 


. Kal μ᾽ οὔ | τί μέλε || γλῶσσοϊς | πειθοὺς || 
. ἔπᾶοϊ | δαῖσιν || ϑελξεϊ | στερξᾶς 7’ || 

. οὐπὄτ᾽ ἄπ | εἰλᾶς || πτηξᾶς | τῦδ᾽ Eye || 

. καταμηῆν | Ὁσῶ || πρὶν ἄν ξξ | aypiwr || 
10. 
1. 


δεσμῶν | χαλᾶση || ποῖνᾶς | TE Tivety || 
τῆσδ᾽ aik | τᾶς || ἔθέλῆσ | ἢ. (Parcemiac.) 


Vss. 185-193 (Leipsic ed. 178-185). 
ANTISTROPHE Y’, 


corresponding line for line with StRopue γ΄. 


. Σῦ μὲν Ypadove | TE καὶ Tikpatc 

. δυαϊσῖν οὐδ | Ev Exiyadac, 

. ayayv δ᾽ ἔλεῦθ | ἔρσστὄμεϊς" 

. ἔμᾶς δὲ φρξνᾶς | ἡρξθτσὲ Dia | τῦρος φὄθδς" 
. δεδτᾷ δ᾽ ἄμφὶ | σαῖς τὔχαϊς, 


πᾶ TOTE | TOVOE TOV | ὧν 


. χρῆ σὲ | τερμᾶ | KEA- 
. σᾶντ᾽ ἔσϊδ | εἴν" ἄκιχ | τᾶ γὰρ | ηθξᾶ, | καὶ κξᾶρ 
. παρᾶ | μῦθον ἔχ | et Kpov | οὔ παῖς. 


Vss. 194-200 (Leipsic ed. 186--193). 


Anapestic Mrasure. 


. O00’, Ort  τρᾶχῦς || Kat tap’ E | αὐτῷ || 

. τὸ δίκαϊ | Ov ἔχῶν || Ζεὺς" GAA’ | ἐμπᾶς |] 

. μάλᾶκδ | γνῶμῶν || 

. Eotal | 760’, ὅταν || ταῦτῃ | ῥαϊσθῇ" ἢ 

. THY δ᾽ atép | ἄμνον || στὸρξσᾶς | σργῆν, || 

. εἴς ἄρθ | μὸν ἔμοϊ || καὶ piAor | ἢτᾶ || 

. oTrevday | σπεῦδδντ || t 700’ HE | εἴ. (Pareemiac.) 


132 


SHUMDIAAKN LP wwe 


» jt 
— 


Co Ne μι μω 
μι Ὁ Ὁ. δ᾽ ΔΚ DU RP W 


41 ᾽ σι fk ὦ ὦ = 


CHORAL SCANNING 


Vss. 285-305 (Leipsic ed. 277-297). 
Anapzstic MEASURE. 


. Οὐκ ἃ | κοῦσαϊς || ἔπεθῶ | Ὁξᾶς || 

. TOVTO, II pope | HOEd. || 

.« καὶ νῦν | ἔλᾶφρῷ || πόδι κραῖπν | dovror || 

. ϑακὸν | πρδλϊποῦσ᾽, || aiBEpa | 8’ ayvor || 

. πῦρον ot | ὥνῶν, || OKptOo | Eoo7 || 

. χθονὶ τὴδ | E MEAG: || τοῦς σοὺς | δὲ TOV || 

» χρηζῶ | διαάπᾶντ || ὅς akove | at. (Paremiac.) 
. KO | δολϊχῆς || τερμᾶ KEA | εὐθοῦ || 

. διᾶμεϊψ | ἄμξνος || πρὸς σξ, ἹΤρῦμ | ἡθεῦ, || 

. τὸν TTEpvY | ὥκῆ || τονδ᾽ οἵ | ror || 

. γνῶμῆ | στομϊῶν || atép εὖ | Odvar* || 

12. 
. τῦ, TE yap | μὲ, δοκῶ, || ξυγγξνξς | οὐτῶς Il 

. ἔσᾶναγκ | ἄζεῖ, || χῶρϊς | TE yévove || 

. οὐκ ἔστ | ἵν OT@ || μειζονᾶ | potpar || 

. νεϊμαῖμ’, | ἢ oot. || 

- γνῶσεϊ | δὲ Tad’ Go || Etvp’, οὐδ | E μᾶτὴν ἢ} 

. Xapito | γλῶσσεϊν || Evi pot | Pepe yap || 

. σημαῖν᾽, | 0, τί χρῆ || oot ξῦμ | πρᾶσσεϊν" || 

. ov yap | TOT’ Epeic, || ὥς “Q | κξᾶνοῦ || 

. φίλος ἔστ | ἵ Bébat || ὅτερος | oot. (Parcemiac.) 


ταῖς σαῖς | δὲ τύὔχαϊς, || ἰσθῖ, σῦν | ἀλγῶ: |l 


Vss. 406-418 (Leipsic ed. 397-405). 


STROPHE 0”. 


. LTEVG σὲ τᾶς | οὐλῦμενᾶς 

. τύχᾶς, pou | θεῦ, daxpvai- 

. OTAKTOV δ᾽ an’ ὅσσ | ὧν ῥαδινῶν 
. ῥέος, πᾶρεϊ | ἄν νὄτϊοις 

. ἔτεγξξ Tay | αἷς: ἀμἔγαρ- 

. Ta yap τἄδὲ | Ζεῦς ἴδοις 

. νῦμοϊῖς κρᾶτῦν | OY, ὕπὲρη- 


© © 


ODMDIQ δι καὶ WW = 


ak wD = 


Ὁ (Ὁ “Ὁ δ) σι AR wD γι 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 


. φᾶνον Yéor¢ | τοϊσὶ πᾶρος 
. δεικνυσῖν αἰχμᾶν. | 


. Glyconic polyschematistic. 
. The same measure. 
. The same measure. 


The same measure. 
The same measure. 
The same measure. 
The same measure. 


. The same measure. 
. Dochmiac monometer. 


Vss. 414-422 (Leipsic ed. 406-414). 
ANTISTROPHE O’, 


corresponding line for line with StropHE 0”. 
. Πρδπασᾶ δ᾽ ἢ | δὴ στῦνδεν 

. AEAGKE χῶρ | ἃ, μεγαᾶλο- 

. σχημῦὄνᾶ τ’ ἄρχ | ατὄπρξπη, 

. στἔνουσϊ τᾶν | σᾶν Evvopat- 
. μόνῶν TE Ti | ἄν, ὅπὅσοϊ τ’ 
. ἔποιϊκὄν ayv | ἃς “Acide 

. ἔδος vEwovT | al, μέγᾶλδ- 

. στὔνοϊσϊ σοῖς | πημᾶσϊ avy- 
. καμνοῦσϊ ϑνῆτοι. | 


Vss. 423-427 (Leipsic ed. 415-419). 
STROPHE ἔ. 


. Κολχὶδ | ὃς τὲ || γᾶς Ev | οἴκοῖ || 
. παρθὲν | οἵ μᾶχ || ἂς a | τρέστοϊ || 
. καὶ Σκῦθ | ἧς Gp || τλς | οἱ γᾶς || 
. ἐσχᾶτον TOT | Ov audit Μαῖ- 

. ὥτὶν ἔχοῦσ | ἵ λιμνᾶν. 


1. Choriambic dimeter. 


133 


134 CHORAL SCANNING 


. Trochaic dimeter acatalectic. 
The same measure. 

. The same measure. 

. Antispastic dimeter. 

. Choriambic dimeter catalectic. 


σι Oe μὰ 


Vss. 428-482 (Leipsic ed. 420-424). 


ANTISTROPHE ἔ, 
corresponding line for line with STROPHE €. 
. Apabi | ἂς τ’ ap || etov | ἀνθῦς, || 
. owe | κρῆμνον || ¥ ot 716A | τσμᾶ || 
. Καῦκᾶσ | ov πὲλ | ἂς νὲμ | ὄνται, lf 
. δαϊος oTpaT | ὅς, σξύπρῶρ 
. Olot βρεμῶν | Ev αἴχμαῖς. 


arf ὡς Oo = 


Vss. 433-444 (Leipsic ed. 425-435). 
ANTIspasTic SysTEM. 
. Mover δὴ πρῦσθ | Ev GAAGY Ev | πὄνοϊσιν δὰμ- 
. Ev’ aKa | ἄντῦδὲε | τοῖς 
. Titava λῦμαιϊς | εἰσϊδόμᾶν ϑξῶν, 
. ΧΑτλᾶνθ᾽, ὅς at | Ev ὑπὲερδφον 
. σθένος κρᾶτατον | 
. οὐρᾶνϊ | ὃν TE πῦλ [ὃν 
. νῶτοϊσῖν ὕὉπῦ | βᾶσταζεϊ. 
. Boa δὲ πόντ | τὸς κλυδῶν | ἔυμ- 
. πιπτῶν, orévet | βύθος, KEAaTY | ὃς δ᾽ 
. ἀϊδὸς ὕπο | βρέμεϊ μῦχδς | γᾶς, 
. πᾶγαϊ θ᾽’ ἄγνδρρ | ὑτῶν ποταμῶν | στὲν- 
. οὔσϊν | ἄλγδς || οἰκτρῦν. | 


.Φ Ο “Δ arr WD = 


μι μὰ 
wn "» © 


. Antispastic trimeter. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypereatalectic. 
. Dochmiac dimeter. - 
. Antispastic dimeter. 


mm Ow = 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 135 


. Dochmiac monometer. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 

. Antispastic dimeter catalectic. 

. Antispastic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
. The same measure. 

10. The same measure. 

11. The same measure. 

12. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 


Oo Ot ὧἱ 


Vss. 535-546 (Leipsic ed. 527-535). 

STROPHE ς΄. 

. Μηδᾶμ᾽ 6 | πᾶντᾶ νὲμ | Ov 

. ϑεῖτ᾽ ἔμ [ἃ γνῶ- || 

. pa Kparoc | ἄντϊπᾶ | Adv Zeve, 

μῆδ᾽ & | λιννῦ- ἢ 

. σαϊμὶ 3E | οὖς Got | atc ϑοῖν- 

αἷς πὄτϊ | νισσῦμξ | νᾶ 

. βοῦφὸν | οἷς, πᾶρ᾽ || 

. Ὠκξᾶν | 016 πᾶτρ | ὃς 

. ἄσθεστον πῦρῦν, 

uno’ GAtr | oipt AGy | οἵς' 

. GARG | pot 760” || ἐμμὲν | οἵ, καὶ || 

. μῆπῦτ᾽ | Ext aK || et7. 


WODWRAP WW 


μὰ μὰ 
πα Φ 


. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
. Trochaic monometer. 

. Dactylic trimeter. 

Trochaic monometer. 

Dactylic trimeter. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
. Trochaic monometer. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
. Dochmiac monometer. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 


SOMDWANR WHS 


ph 


136 CHORAL SCANNING 


11. Trochaic dimeter. 
12. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 


Vss. 547-558 (Leipsic ed. 536-548.) 
ANTISTROPHE ¢’, 
corresponding line for line with SrroPHE ς΄. 
. Hdd τὶ | ϑαρσᾶλξ | αἷς 
. τὸν μᾶκρ | ὃν τεῖν- || 
. εἴν βίον | ἐλπῖσϊ, | φᾶναϊς 
. ϑυμὸν | ἄλδαιν- || 
. οὐσᾶν ἕν | εὐφρῦσῦν | αἷς" φρῖσο- 
ὦ δὲ σὲ | δερκομεν | ἢ 
. μῦρϊ | οἷς μοχθ- || 
. οἷς dia | Kvatopev | ὃν. 
* * * * * * 1 


ODIA AP ww oe 


_ 
i) 


. Ζηνᾶ yap | οὔ τρῦμξ | OY, _ 
. ἔν Wt | ἃ γνῶμ || ἢ o€6 | et ϑνᾶτ- || 
. οὖς ἄγ | ἄν, Πρῦμ || 760. | 


— μὲ 
no = 


Vss. 559-567 (Leipsic ed. 546-553). 


SrropHe ¢’. 


1. dep’ ὅπῶς | ἄχαρις || yapic ὦ | φίλος εἴπ- || 
2. ἔ ποῦ | τὶς GAK || ἃ 

3. Tic Epa | μερῶν || 

4. apné | ic ovd || ἔδερχθ | ἧς 

5. OAty6 | δρᾶντην || 

6. aki | κῦν τσ || ὄνεϊρ | ὅν a || TO φῶτ | ὧν 
7. ἄλᾶδν [ὃ * * || γένος ἐμ | πἔπδὄδισμ- || ? 
8. Evov ov | πῦτξ τᾶν || Aloc apy [ὄντᾶν || 

9. ϑνατῶν | πᾶρεξξ || ta | ot βοῦλ || αἱ. 


1. Aline is wanting here to answer to the corresponding one in the 


strophe. 

2. A trisyllabic word is wanting in this line. Blomfield suggests 
μερόπων ; Burney ἄλαῶς, changing at the same time the preceding 
ἀλαὸν into ἀλαῶν. 


ων Ὁ. WO "ὦ 


OD EQ δι να & We 


Ὁ Οὐ “Σ δῦ NR ὁ ἡ κα 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 137 


. Anapestic dimeter. 

. Iambic monometer hypercatalectic. 
. Anapestic monometer. 

. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 


Anapestic monometer. 


. Iambic trimeter catalectic. 

- Anapestic dimeter. 

. The same measure. 

. Iambic dimeter hypercatalectic. 


Vss. 568-576 (Leipsic ed. 554-561). 
ANTISTROPHE C’, 
corresponding line for line with Stropne 2’. 


. Ἐμᾶθον | rade, σᾶς || πρδσϊδοῦς᾽ | ὅλδᾶς || 
. τυχᾶς, | Πρῦμῆ || θεῦ: 

. τὸ Olam | ἴδῖον || 

. δὲ pot | μέλος || πρόσεπτ | ἃ 

. 700’, Exety | ὅ θ᾽ ὅ, τ’ ἄμ- ἢ} 


pt λοῦτρ | a kat || λέχος | σῦν Ὁ || pEvai | οὖν 


. ἵστα | TL yaar, || ὅτξ τᾶν | ὅμδπᾶ- || 
. Tplov Edv | οἷς ἃ || yayée Ἢ | otdvar || 
. πιθῶν | δᾶμᾶρτ || ἄ Koty | ὄλξκτρ || ὃν. 


Vss. 577-581 (Leipsic ed. 562-566) 
Anapestic Measure. 


. Τίς γῆ, | τί yévoe, || Tiva φῶ | λεῦσσεῖν ἢ 

. TOVOE YA | τνοῖς || Ev TETpiv | οἵστν || 

. χεῖμᾶςξ | μενον ; || τίνος ἃ | πλακϊᾶς || 

. ποῖν αἷς | OAEKET ; || σημῆν | ὄν, ὅπη || 

. γῆς ἢ | μὄγξρᾶ || πέπλᾶνη | wat. (Parcemiac.) 


M2 


138 


δ ἃ ἃ ἃ ἃ ἃ dv μὶ μὶ μὰ μὰ μὰ μεὶ μὰ ee μὲ 
ὦ ὧν ὦ ὦ ὃ »͵ὶ . Ὁ Ο “ ὦ δι να ὁ νὴ 


Ὁ ὦ “1 δ᾽ δι νὰ WO νὰ 


CHORAL SCANNING 


Vss. 582-607 (Leipsic ed. 567-588). 


Antispastic SysTEM. 


» 


ΛΑ ὅν δα ἔα’ 

. χρῖεῖ Tic αὖ μὲ | τἄλαϊνᾶν oLoTpOG, 

. εἰδωλῦν “Apy | 0d γῆγξνοῦς, | Ged’ ὦ OG, | PObodpat 
. τὸν poplaT | ὅν εἰσδρῶς | ἃ BovTay. 


ὅ δὲ πορευέτοϊ | δόλιον ὄμμ᾽ ἔχῶν, 


. ὅν οὐδὲ κᾶτ | OdvovTa γαῖ) a κεῦθεϊ. 

. GAAG μὲ τᾶν | τἄλαϊνᾶν 

. &F EvepaV πὲρῶν | κὔνηγξτεϊ, 

_ πλᾶνᾶ τἕνῆστ | ἵν ἄνᾶ τᾶν Tapa | Atay ψαμμῦν, 
. Ὁπῦ δὲ κηρδπλᾶστ | ὅς ὅτδθεϊ δόναξ 

. ἄχξτᾶς | 

. Ὁπνδδοταᾶν νῦμῦν. | 

. Τῷ Ἰῷ, | ποῖ ποῖ, πῶ πῶ, 

. πῷ πῶ πῆ μ᾽ Gy | ovoty τὴηλὲ | πλᾶγκτοϊ πλᾶνοιϊ. 
. TL OTE μ᾽, ὦ | Kpovte rat, 

. τὶ πῦτξ ταῖσδ᾽ ἕν | Eleva EvPaY 

. ἅμαρτοῦσᾶν | ἕν πημῦναϊσίν 


“vo 


ξ εξ. 


. οἰστρηλᾶτῶ δὲ | δειμᾶτζ detAatay 

. πᾶρᾶκδπον dE ; | τεῖρεῖς TUPL φλεξῦν, 
. ἢ χθονὶ καλυψόν, | ἢ TOVTLOLOLY 

. δακξσϊ δὸς βῦρ | ἄν, μηδέ jot 

. φθυνησῆς evy | μᾶτῶν ἄνᾶξ. 

,. ἄδην μέ TOAD | πλᾶγκτοϊ πλᾶναϊ 

. γεγυμνακᾶ | σῖν, οὐδ᾽ Exo 

. μᾶθεϊν ὅπῆ πῆ | μόνᾶς ἄλυξῶ. 


. Extra metrum. 
2. 
8. 


Dochmiac dimeter. 
Antispastic tetrameter catalectic. 


4. Antispastic trimeter catalectie. 


5. 


τῷ οο Ὁ Ο᾽ δι νὰ wn = 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 


Dochmiac dimeter. 


. Antispastic trimeter catalectic. 
. Choriambic dimeter catalectic. 


Dochmiac and antispastic. 


. Antispastic trimeter. 

. Dochmiac dimeter. 

. Cretic monometer. 

. Antispastic monometer. 
. Antispastic dimeter. 

. Antispastic trimeter. 

. Cretic dimeter. 

. Antispastic and dochmiae 
. The same measure. 

. Extra metrum. 


Dochmiac dimeter. 
The same measure. 


. The same measure. 
. Antispastic dimeter. 
. The same measure. 
. The same measure. 
. The same measure. 
. Dochmiac dimeter. 


Vss. 613-629 (Leipsic ed. 594-609). 
ΑΝΤΙΒΡΑΒΊΙΟ SYSTEM. 

. Tl60év ἔμοῦ ov πᾶ | TPOG ὄνομ ἄπῦεϊς 

. el pol | 
. τᾷ μῦγὲξρᾷ, Tic OY, | tic dpa p’, ὦ τἄλᾶς, 
. τᾶν τἄλαϊ | THpPbv ὧδ᾽ 
. ἔτυμᾶ πρῦσθῦρεϊς | 

. ϑεσσσῦτον | δὲ νόσῦν ὥνομασᾶς 
. ἃ μᾶραϊν | εἴ μὲ ypt | οὐσᾶ κἔν- 
. τροῖς φοϊταλξοισὶν. | 


nw 


. €€, 


139 


140 CHORAL SCANNING 


μ- 
So 


. σκιρτημᾶτῶν δὲ | vijoTioty αἴκταῖς 

. AdbpicavTGe HA | θόν ExtKdrOF | σῖν μηδέσιν | δᾶμεϊσᾶ 
. δυσδαιϊμονῶν | δὲ TivEc, οἵ, E E, Ov’ 

. ἔγῶ poyod | oly GAAG pot 

. τῦρῶς TEKWAPOY, | ὅ TL μ᾽ ἕπᾶμμξνεϊ 

. πᾶθεϊν τὶ ph xpH | τί φαρμᾶκδν 

. νῦσοῦ, detsov, et | πὲρ οἱσθᾶ ϑρδεῖ, 

. φρᾶζέ τᾷ | δυσπλᾶνῷ | παρθξνῷ. 


a μὰ μαὶ 
“Φ Φῷ ὧἱ᾽ Ὁ. ὦ ὦ ef 


. Dochmiac dimeter. 

. Cretic monometer. 

Dochmiac dimeter. 

. Cretic dimeter. 

Dochmiac monometer. 

. Antispastic and dochmiac. 

. Cretic trimeter. 

Dochmiac monometer. 

. Extra metrum. 

. Dochmiac dimeter. 
. Antispdstic tetrameter catalectic. 
. Antispastic and dochmiace. 

. Antispastic dimeter. 

. Dochmiac dimeter. 

. Dochmiac and antispastic. 

. The same measure. 

. Cretic trimeter. 


ὉΟ Ὁ “1 δ᾽ δι ὦ WN eH 


"μ᾿ μι μ μ μα 
“Ὁ σ᾽ ὧι ἢ WW —& © 


Vss. 706-718 (Leipsic ed. 688-694). 
ANTISPASTIC SYSTEM. 


. Ἔα ἔα. 

. ἅπἔχξ φεῦ" | 

. οὐπῦτ᾽ οὐπῦτ᾽  ηῦ- 

. χοῦν ξενοῦς μῦλ | εἴ- 
. Bai λῦγοῦς | 


ar OW "μὰ 


© © 2 om 


"μὰ μ μὰ 
won re 


ΟΟ 2 δ᾽ δι ἢ wns = 


Θ. ὦ «ὃ δ᾽ σι νὰ ww = 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 


. ἔς ἄκδ | ἂν Eu || av 

. οὐδ᾽ HIE Ovo | θξατᾶ, καὶ | δύσοϊστἄ 
. πημᾶτᾶα, Adpara | 

. delat’ ἄμφ- | 

10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 


ἥκει KEVTPa Wo | χεῖν poyay Euav 
io τῶ, | 

fotpa, | jotpa, πέφρτκ᾽ | εἴς- 
ioved πρᾶξ | ἕν “love. ; 


. Extra metrum. 
. Cretic measure. 
. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 


The same measure. 


. Cretic monometer. f 

. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 

. Antispastic trimeter catalectic. 

. Antispastic monometer. 

. Cretic monometer. 

. Dochmiac dimeter: 

. Antispastic monometer. 

. Pherecratic, commencing with trochee. 
. Antispastic dimeter catalectic. 


Vss. 898-908 (Leipsic ed. 876-885). 


AnapzsstTic ΜΈΑΛΒΙΒΕ. 


. Ἔλξλευ, | EAEA ED, || 
. ὑπ μ᾽ αὖ | σφᾶκξλος || Kat φρἕνδ | πλῆγεῖς [} 
. paviat | ϑαλποῦσ᾽, || οἱστροῦ | δ᾽ apdic || 

. xptet | μ᾽ ἄπῦρος. || 

. Kpaola | δὲ b066 || Ppeva λᾶκτ | Tet. || 
. TPOXOOLY | EtTai || δ᾽ Gupad?’ ὃ | λιγδῆν, || 
. EFM | δὲ dpopod || φέρομαι, | Adao7e || 
. TvEevpatt | μαργῷ, || γλῶσσῆς | ἄκρᾶτῆς" || 


141 


142 


— μὲ 
— 


Ὁ τῷ ὦ « 5. δι ἢν Wd 


— 
μι OODWA ME OD καὶ 


CHORAL SCANNING 


. ϑύλξροϊ | δὲ AGyor || πατοῦς | εἰκῆ || 
. στυγνῆς | πρὸς Kv || μᾶσϊν ar | ἧς. (Parcemiac.) 


Vss. 909-918 (Leipsic ed. 886-892). 
STROPHE 7. 


. Ἢ σῦφῦς, | ἢ o6p0¢ | ἣν, ὃς 


πρῶτος | ἔν γνῶμ- |l 


. ᾧ 700’ E| θαστᾶσξ | καὶ γλῶσσ- 

. ᾧ OLE | μυθδλδγ | ἢσξν, 

. ὥς τῦ | κῆδεῦσ- || 

. αἵ Ka’ & | αὑτὸν ap | ᾿Ἰστεῦ- 

. εἴ μᾶκρ | @ καὶ || pate | τῶν πλοῦτ- ἢ 
. τῷ OG | θρυπτῦμξν, | ὧν, 

. μῆτξ | τῶν yér- ἢ 

. νᾷ péya | Advopev | ὧν 

. ὄντᾶ | χερνῆ \| τᾶν E | ρᾶστεῦ || oat. 


. Dactylic trimeter. 
. Trochaic monometer. 


Dactylic trimeter. 


. The same measure. 

. Trochaic monometer. 

. Dactylic trimeter. 

. Trochaic dimeter. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
. Trochaic monometer. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
. Trochaie dimeter hypercatalectic. 


— ht 
= (ὦ 


wo = 


COVA MTR οὐ ἐδ μα 


Φοῶ “Ὁ δι καὶ WW κα 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 143 


Vss. 919-929 (Leipsic ed. 893-899). 
ANTISTROPHE 7, 


corresponding line for line with STROPHE 7. 


. Maroté | μῆπῦτὲ | μ᾽ ὦ μοῖ- 
.pa*|* * i! 


* AéxyéE | ὧν Δὸς | evva-? 


. τεϊρᾶν δ | oio0E TEA | οὐσᾶν' 


μῆδὲ | πλάθεῖ- | 


. ἣν yaue | τᾷ τῖνϊ | τῶν εξ 

. οὐρᾶν | οὔ" tap6 || ὦ γὰρ | dorép- || 

. yavopa | παρθενϊ | av 

. loop | ὥς᾽ to- |i 

. οὖς péya | ddrrrope | var. 

. δυσπλᾶ | voic “Hp || ἃς ἄλ | aret || ἂς" 


Vss. 930-938 (Leipsic ed. 900-905). 


Epope. 


. “Epot δ᾽ ott μὲν | ὅμᾶλδς 6 yauocg 
. ἀφδθος, ov | 
. δεδτα" | μῆδὲ || KpEtoodr- | 


ὧν ϑὲ | ὧν &p || ὥς ν 


. ἄφυκτον Ou | ἃ πρδσδερκοϊτὸ μ᾽. 

. ἅπολεμος OOE [γ᾽ ὅ πόλεμος, ἄπορα 
. πῦρϊμς: οὐδ᾽ ἔχῶ | Tig ἂν γξνοιμᾶν" 
. τᾶν Aide yap | οὔχ᾽ δρῶ 

. μῆτῖν ona | φύγοιμ᾽ ἄν. 


. Antispastic dimeter. 
. Cretic monometer. 
. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 


1. Four syllables wanting: ~ το — | — 
2. A syllable wanting. 


ῷ ὦ “ σ᾽ σι νὰ 


OMI fh ὦ ὦ μῷ 


δ ὼ ὼὰ Ὁ ὼὰ dd & πὶ πὰ μπῶ ee μὰ μὰ 
δι Ὁ ὦ μ͵πῸΟ ὦ Οο 1 55. σι να Ὁ μ 


CHORAL SCANNING 


. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 
. Antispastic and dochmiac. 


The same measures. 


. Dochmiac dimeter. 
. Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 
. Choriambic dimeter catalectic. 


Vss. 1075-1128 (Leipsic ed. 1039-1092). 


Anapzstic Measure. 


. Eiddri | tot pot || τἄσδ᾽ ayy | EAtae || 

. ὅδ᾽ E66 | ὕξεν, || πᾶσχεϊν | JE κακῶς || 

. ἐχθρὸν ὕπ᾽ | ἐχθρῶν, || οὐδὲν ἃ | ElKEe. || 

. πρὸς ταῦτ᾽, | Ex’ ἔμοι || ῥιπτεσθ | ὦ μὲν || 

. TUpOS Gu | ἢκῆς || βοστρῦχῦς, | ατθῇρ δ᾽ 1} 

. ἔρξθιζ | E0OG || βροντῇ, | σφακξλῷ 7’ || 

. ἄγρτῶν | ἄνεμῶν" || χθόνα δ᾽ Ex | πυθμξενῶν || 
. αὑταῖς | ῥίζαις || πνεῦμᾶ κρᾶδ | atvoi, ἢ} 

. κυμᾶ δὲ | TOvTOD || τρᾶχεϊ | POTS || 

. ξυγχῶσ | elév || τῶν τ᾽ οὔ | pavidr || 

. ἄστρῶν | διδδοῦς, || ὃς TE κὲλ | atvor || 

. Taptapov | apdjy || pirbet | ὃ deuce || 

. τοὐμόν, a | ναγκῆς || OTEppaic¢ | δῖναϊς || 

. πᾶντῶς | ἔμξ γ᾽ Od || Yavarao | et. (Parcemiac.) 
. Totdadé | pévtoi || τῶν φρἕνδ | πληκτῶν || 

. BovdAedp | at’ ἔπῆ || τ’ Eotiv ak | οὔσαϊ. || 

. τί yap EAA | elret || pH rapa | πατεῖν ; || 

. εἴ μῆδ᾽ | ἄτῦύχῶν || τί yaAa | μανϊῶν ; ἢ} 

. ἄλλ᾽ οὖν | ὑμεῖς || γ᾽ αἱ πῆμ | ὄσῦναϊς || 

. ξυγκᾶμν | οὔσαϊ || ταῖς τοῦδ | ἕ, Torey || 

. péta ποῖ | χῶρεϊτ᾽ || Ex τῶνδ | E ϑδῶς" || 

. μῆ φρενᾶς | ὑμῶν || ἤλῖθι | ὥσῇ | 

. βροντῆς | μῦκῆμ᾽ || ἄτξραμν | ὃν. (Paremiac.) 
. Αλλ ti | φῶνεϊ || καὶ Tapa | μῦθοῦ μ᾽ || 

- ὅ τί καὶ | πεῖσεϊς" || ov yap | δῆ ποῦ || 


OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 145 


. τοῦτ γὲ | TARTOY || πᾶρξσῦ | ρᾶς Erde || 

. πῶς μὲ KEA | εὔεῖς || KaKOTAT’ | ἀσκεῖν || 

. μετᾶ τοῦδ᾽ | 6 τὶ χρῆ || πᾶσχεῖν | EOEAG || 

. τοῦς yap | πρῦὔδῦτᾶς || μίσειν | ἔμᾶθον᾽" || 

. κοῦκ ἔστ | ἵ νῦσος, || 

. τῆσδ᾽ ἣν | tiv’ ἄπεπτ || vod μᾶλλ, | Gy. (Pareemiac.) 
. “AAX’ οὖν | μεμνῆσθ᾽, || Gyo | πρδλἔγῶ" || 

. pHROE πρὸς | ric || ϑηρᾶ | Getoaz ἢ 

. μεμψῆσθ᾽ | ὃ τύχῆν, || μηδὲ πὄτ᾽ | εἰπῆθ᾽ || 

. ὡς Zeve | Ὁμᾶς || εἷς apd | δπτὸν || 

. πῆμ᾽ elo | ξθᾶλεν" || μῆ δῆτ᾽, | αὔταϊ δ᾽ || 

. ὑμᾶς | αὐτᾶς" || etdvi | at yap, || 

. κοῦκ && | ατφνῆς, || οὐδὲ λᾶθρ | ατῶς, || 

. εἴς ἅπἔρ | ἄντον || dikrvor | arije || 

. ἐμπλέχθ | ἢσξσθ᾽ || ὕπ᾽ dvot | ac. (Paremiac.) 
. Καὶ μὴν | épy@ || κοῦκ ἔπ | μυθῷ || 

. χθῶν σξἕσᾶαλ, | evrat || 

. Bpvyia | δ᾽ HYG || πᾶραμῦ | κᾶταϊ || 

. βροντῆς, | EAtKEe || δ᾽ ἐκλᾶμπ | οὔστ || 

. στερδπῆς, | ζἄπῦροι, || στρόμθοϊ | δὲ κὄνϊν || 

. εἴλισσ | οὔστ' || σκῖρτᾷ | δ᾽ ἄνεμῶν | 

. πνευμᾶτᾶ | πᾶντῶν, || εἰς GAA | HAG || 

. oTaalv ἂν | τιπνοῦν || anodeix | vipeva: || 

. ξυντετᾶ | paxrat || δ᾽ ατθῆρ | ποντῷ. || 

. Tolad? | En’ ἔμοϊ || ριπὴ | Δδθὲν || 

. τεὐχοῦσ | & φῦθον || στεῖχεϊ | φᾶνξρῶς || 

. ὦ μῆ | τρὸς ἕμῆς || σξθᾶς, ὦ | πᾶντῶν || 

. αἸθὴρ | κοινὸν || φὰδς Eid | τσσῶν, || 

. ἔσδρᾶς | μ᾽ ὥς Ex || δίκᾷ πᾶσχ | ὦ. (Parceemiac.) 


Ν 


CHORAL SCANNING 


OF THE 


AJ AX VE AG Edi Lob BR. 


Vss. 134-171. 


Anapestic MEASURE. 
. Τελαμῶν | té rat, || τῆς ἀμφ | tpvTod || 
. Laddapiv | ὅς ἔχῶν || βάθρον ἄγχ | τἀλοῦ, || 
. σὲ μὲν εὖ | πρᾶσσοντ᾽ || Exiyatp | @. (Pareemiac.) 
. Σὲ δ᾽ ὅτᾶν | TAHY7 || Aloo ἢ | SapEvijg 1} 
. λογῦς Ek | Δαναῶν || κακδθροῦς | ἔπιθῇ, ἢ} 
. μεγᾶν oxv | ὅν ἔχῶ, || Kat πέφδθ | Huai, || 
. πτῆνῆς | ὥς Gp || @ wEAeT | ἃς. (Parceemiac.) 
. ΤὩς καὶ | τῆς νῦν || φθιμξνῆς | νυκτὸς [! 
. péyadot | ϑορῦθοι || κἀτἔχοῦσ᾽ | ἡμᾶς || 
10. Ent Ovo | κλεῖᾷ, || σξ τὸν int | Spare || 
11. λειμῶν᾽ | Exibave’, || ὅλἔσαϊ | Advadr || 
12. Bora καὶ | Aetay, || 
13. ἤπερ | δδρϊληπ || τς ἔτ᾽ ἣν | λοϊπῆ, || 
14. κτεῖνοντ᾽ | αἰθῶν || t σίδηρ | ὦ. (Paremiac.) 
15. 'Ῥοτοῦσδ | & λογοῦς || φιθυροῦς | πλᾶσσῶν ἢ 
16. εἴς OT | ἃ φἔρεϊ || πᾶσίν ~Od | Ὁσσεῦς || 
17. καὶ opodpa | πεῖθετ" || wept yap | σοῦ νῦν || 
18. evrelor | & Aéyel, || καὶ πᾶς | 6 KAO? || 
19. τοῦ A&E | ἄντὸς || yatpet | μᾶλλον || 
20. τοῖς σοῖς | &yéotv || κἀθυθριζ | Gv. (Parcemiac.) 
21. Tov yap | μεγαλῶν || ψυχῶν | τεῖς || 
22. οὔκ av ap | ἄρτοι: || Kata δ᾽ ἂν | τῖς ἔμοῦ || 


SH OMWIWIH NB wwe 


CHORAL SCANNING OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 147 


23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 
30. 
31. 
32. 
33. 
34. 
35. 
36. 
37. 
38. 


Ἢ 
SOMVAMA ὁ ὃ γα 


wo = 


τοταῦτ | a Aéyar, || οὔκ ἂν | πεῖθοτ'" || 

πρὸς yap | τὸν ἔχονθ᾽ || 6 φθῦνδς | ἕρπει" ἢ} 
καῖτοῖ | opixpot || μέγᾶλῶν | χῶρϊς || 
σφᾶλξρον | πῦυργοῦ || piud TEA | OvTat: || 
peta yap | μἔγαλῶν | βατς a | plot’ ay, || 
καὶ peyae | ὄρθοιθ’ || ὕπδ μῖκρ | ὅτερῶν᾽" || 
ἀλλ᾽ ov | dvvaror || τοῦς avo | τοῦς || 
τοῦτῶν | γνῶμᾶς || πρὄδιδᾶσκ | εἴν. (Parcmiac.) 
πο toi | ovtay || ἀνδρῶν | Yopvbez || 

x? ἡμεῖς | οὔδεν || σθένδμεν || πρὸς ταῦτ᾽ || 
ἅπαλεξ | dobat | σοῦ χῶρ | te ἄναξ. || 

ἄλλ᾽ GE | yap δῆ || TO σὸν ὄμμ᾽ | arédpay, || 
πᾶταγοῦσ | ἵν, ἄτξ || πτηνῶν | ἄγελατ" || 
μἔγᾶν al | γύπϊον δ᾽ || brddeto | ἄντες || 
τἄχ᾽ dv & | αἰφνῆς, || εἰ ov φᾶν | εἴης || 
oly | πτῆξεϊ || ἄν ἄφῶν | ot. (Parcemiac.) 


Vss. 172-181 (Leipsic ed. 172-182). 


STROPHE ά. 


. Ἢ pa σξ | Tatpdro | Aa Aide | “Αρτἔμϊς, 

. ὦ péyan | ἃ φᾶτϊς | ὦ 

. μᾶτἕρ αἰσχῦν | ἄς ἕμᾶς 

. ὧρ | pace πᾶνδᾶ | μοῦς ἐπὶ | βοῦς ἄγξ | λατᾶς 


ἤ | ποῦ τῖνδς vi | κᾶς ἄκαᾶρπῶ | τὸν xaptv 
ἢ pad KAv | τῶν Eva | ρῶν 
ψευσθ | εἰσᾶ δῶροϊς | εἴτ’ EAG | P76OAT | alc 


. ἢ | χαλκδθῶρᾶξ | εἴ Tiv Ev | DaAr | ὃς 
. pond | av ἔχῶν ξῦν | od δῦρῦς | Evvvyt | οἷς 
. paxavatc ἕ | τισᾶτδ | λῶθᾶν. 


. Dactylic tetrameter. 
. Dactylic trimeter ecatalectic. 
. Epitritic and cretic monometers 


Φῷὦ Ο “1 δ᾽ δι ἢ BWW = 


— 
So 


CHORAL SCANNING 


Tambelegus hypercatalectic.' 


. Epitritic dimeter with anacrusis, and cretic. 


Dactylic trimeter catalectic. 
Iambelegus. 

The same measure. 

The same measure. 

Epitritic monometer and Adonic.? 


» ---ο---ἀ -..--.-. 


Vss. 182-191 (Leipsic ed. 183-193). 


ANTISTROPHE @. 


. Od πῦτξ | yap φρἕνδ | θὲν γ᾽ En’ ἃ | plorépa, 

. παῖ Τελᾶ | μῶνδς ἔθ | ἂς 

. τοσσῦν, ἕν ποῖμν | αἷς TITY: 

. ἥ || Kot γὰρ ἂν Yet | ἃ vood¢: | GAA’ ἅπξρ | Ὁκοῖ 
. καὶ | Δεῦς κἄκᾶν καὶ | Φοϊθς “Apyet | ὧν φᾶτιν 
. εἴ δ᾽ ὑπὸ | BaAAGpE | vot 

. κλέπτ | ovat μυθοὺς | οἵ μεγᾶ | λοῖ βᾶσϊλ | ἧς 


ἢ | τᾶς ἀσῶτοῦ | Σισῦφι | dav γἔνξ | ἂς, 


. μὴ, | μὴ μ’, ἄναξ, £0’, | OO’ ἔφᾶλ, | οἷς κλῖσϊ | αἷς 
. ὄμμ᾽ ἔχῶν, Kak | ἂν partly ἄρῆ. 


Vss. 192-198 (Leipsic ed. 194-200). 
Epope. 


. “AA ava | εξ ἔδρᾶν | ὧν | ὅποῦ | μᾶκραξ || Ort 
. στῆριξ | el πῦτε | τᾷδ᾽ | ἄγῶν | τῷ || σχῦλῇῃ 

. ἅτᾶν | ovpaviay | φλεγῶν. 

. ἐχθρ | ὧν δ᾽ ὑβρὶς ad” | a  τἄρθητᾶ 

5. 


ὁρμᾶται Ev | εὐᾶνξμ | οἷς βᾶσσ | αἷς 


1. The iambelegus is ranked under concrete numbers, and consists of 
a second epitritic monometer with an anacrusis, and a dactylic dimeter 
hypercatalectic. Herm. Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 425, seq., Glasg. ed. 
2. The last syllable of the epitrite is doubtful, or, in other words, ad- 


mits a short for a long, but only when it is followed either by other 


numbers, as dactylic or cretic, or by another member formed of epitrites, 
Compare the ninth verse of the antistrophe that follows. 


« or] 


“4 δ᾽ δι ἃ wo we 


ee ee 
Nour WW = © 


ONDNWNAMP wwe 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 149 


. πᾶντῶν καγχαζοντ | ὧν γλῶσσαϊς 
. βᾶρυαλγῆτ᾽- ἔμοι | δ᾽ ἀχῦς ξστᾶκεν. 


. Dactylic dimeter hyperc. and Jambic dim. brach. 
. The same measures. 

. Glyconic. 

. Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following." 

. Epitritic monometer and dactylic dim. hyperc. 

. Dochmiac dimeter catalectic.’ 

. Dochmiac and antispast. 


Vss. 199-218 (Leipsic ed. 201-220). 
Anapestic Measure. 


. Ναῦδς dp | Gyot || τῆς At | ἄντος, || 

. yévéde | χθονϊῶν || an’ “EpéyxO | etday, || 
. Exouev | orovayae || ot κὴδ | Ouevot || 

. τοῦ Τελᾶ | μῶνος || THAODEY | οἴκοῦ. ἢ} 


νῦν yap ὅ δεῖνος, || μεγᾶς, ὦ | μδκρᾶατῆς || 


. Aide | ϑολξρῷ || 

. κεῖταϊ | χεϊμῶν || t νδσῆ ἢ σᾶς. (Paremiac.) 

. Τὶ δ᾽ ἔνηλλ, | ἄκταϊ || τῆς ἃ] μὲρϊας || 

. νῦξ ἢδ |  βᾶρος: | 

. παῖ τοῦ | Φρύγϊτοῦ || ov Τελεῦ | τᾶντος, || 

. Aéy’, ἔπεϊ | GE λἔχος || dovpiaA | ὥτον || 

. στερξᾶς | avexet || ϑοῦρτὸς | Aiac: || 

. ὥστ᾽ οὔκ | ἄν aidp || tc ὕπεϊπ | οἷς. (Parcemiac.) 
. Πῶς δῆτ | & λεγῶ || Adyov app | ἡτὸν; || 

. ϑανᾶτῷ | yap ἴσον || πᾶθδς Ex | πεῦσεϊ. || 

. μᾶνϊᾷ | yap ἄλοῦς || μὲν 6 | κλεῖνος || 

. voKTépoc | Ατᾶς [[|ἀπελῶ | 6707. || 

18. 


τοιαῦτ᾽ | ἂν ἴδοις || σκῆνῆς | ἔνδον || 


1. “ Catalectico (Glyconeo) interdum molossus adjicitur.” (Herm. 
Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 361, ed. Glasg.) 

2. Compare Aisch. Pers. 978, ἢ καὶ τὸν ἹΠξρσῶν ; and 678, πᾶσᾷ γᾷ 
od (Burn. Tent. p. xxili., n. xill.; p. xv., ἢ. xiii.) 


150 


19. 
20. 


anh wwe 


«ὡΦὡ ὦ ss 


55 δι νὰ ὦ ὃ να 


Φο ὦ 


no = 


CHORAL SCANNING 


χειρδδᾶ | τκτᾶ || σφᾶγτ᾽ aip | o6ap7. 1] 
κεῖνοι | χρῆστῆρ || ta τ᾽ ἄνδρ | ὃς. (Parcemiac.) 


Vss. 219-227 (Leipsic ed. 221-232). 


STROPHE β΄. 


. Olav | ἔδη || λῶσᾶς | ἀνδρὸς |I 

. αἰθὅπος | ayyeAt | av 

. GAG | TOY, οὐδ || E φεῦκτ | ἄν, 

. TOV μεγᾶλ | ὧν Aava | ὧν ὕπῦ | κλῆηζομὲν | ay, 

. τῶν O péyac | wvO0c ἄξξ | εἴ. 

. οἵμοῖ, | Pobovp || al τὸ πρῦσεξρπ | Ov" TEpibayT | ὅς 


aviip 


. Savelt | al, πᾶρἄπλῆκτ | ὦ χἕρϊ ody | κἄταἄκτᾶς 
. κἔλαϊν | οἷς ξίφεσ | tv Bora, | κατ' 
. βὅτῆρ | ἃς int || ὄνῶ | μοῦς. 


. Iambic and trochaic monometers. 
. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 


Tambic dimeter catalectic. 


. Dactylic pentameter catalectic. 
. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic. 


Iambic monometer and choriambic trimeter cat2 


. Choriambic trimeter cat., preceded by an iambus. 
. Dactylic dimeter hyperc., preceded by an iambus. 
. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 


Vss. 228-239 (Leipsic ed. 233-244). 


AnapzstTic MEASURE. 


. Q pot | κεῖθεν, || KetOEv ap | jury || 
. δεσμῶτ | ἵν ἄγῶν || HABE | ποϊμνᾶν' 


1. This and the succeeding line may be united into one logacedic, 
consisting of a base, two dactyls, and four trochees. 

2. Compare the remarks of Hermann on the choriambic catalexis, 
Elem. Doctr. Mecr. p. 267, ed. Glasg. 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 151 
3. ὧν THY | μὲν ἔσῶ || σφᾶζ᾽ Ent | γατᾶς, || 
4. τᾶ δὲ πλεῦρ | OKOTMY || diy’ ἄνερρ | ἢγνῦ || 
5. dvd δ᾽ apy | ἵπὄδᾶς || κρτοῦς | ἀνξλῶν || 
6.. Tov μὲν | κεφαλὴν || Kat yA@oo | ἄν ἄκρᾶν || 
7. ρίπτεϊ | Yépiode || τὸν δ᾽ pO | ὅν ave || 
8. Klovit | δῆσᾶς || 
9. péyav in | odériy || ρὑτῆρ | ἃ Adbar || 
10. παζῖεῖ | Atyvpa || μᾶσττγ |  δίπλη || 
11. Kaka dévy | afar || ρημᾶθ᾽ a | δαϊμῶν || 
12. κοῦδεϊῖς | ἀνδρῶν || ἐδίδαξ || Ev. (Parcemiac.) 
Vss. 240-248 (Leipsic ed. 245-256). 
ANTISTROPHE β΄. 
. “Opa | tiv’ ἢ || δὴ Kap | ἃ κἄ- ||! 
. λυμμᾶσϊ | κρυψᾶμξ | νὸν 
modotv | κλῦπᾶν || ἄρεσθ | ai, 
. ἢ 900v | Elpéot | ἃς ζύγδν | εζῦμξ | νὸν 
. ποντῦπὺῦρῷ | vat μξθεῖν | at. 
. τοϊᾶς | ἔρξσσ || οὐσϊν aretA | ἂς δίκρᾶτεϊς | “Ατρεῖδαξ 
. KGW ἣμ | Ov πεφσθημ | αἵ λιθολεῦστ | Ov ApH 
. ξυνᾶλγ | εἴν μετα | tovdé τῦπ | εἴς, 
. TOV alo’ | ἅπλᾷ || τς toy | εἴ. 


ΦΟοῦ “Ὁ δ δι τῷ Wd = 


Vss. 325, 328, 331 (Leipsic ed. 333, 336, 339). 
ANTISPASTICS. 
325. τῷ μοῖ jor. | 
328. τῶ jot pot. | 
331. τῷ παῖ ral. | 


325. Antispastic monometer. 
328. The same measure. 
331. The same measure. 


1. Hermann’s arrangement. Compare, however, the remarks of 


Wunder, ad loc. 


152 


a 


ὧι fk ὦ Ww = 


1: 
2. 
3. 


mw Oe 


mone 


CHORAL SCANNING 


Vss. 340-344 (Leipsic ed. 348-353). 


STROPHE y’. 
ζῶ 


. φίλοι ναὐθᾶταϊ, | μῦᾶνοϊ ἔμῶν φιλῶν, 
. μὄνοϊ τ’ ἐμμξνδντ | ἔς ὀρθῷ voua, 
. ἴδὲσθ | ἕ μ᾽ οἵ || ὅν ἄρτ | ἵ κῦμ || a φοῖν | Lae || ὕπο 


| ζᾶλῆς Ih 


. ἄμφϊδρομον κὔκλεϊτ | at. 


. Iambus.' ‘ 

. Dochmiac dimeter.” 

. The same measure.® 

. Iambic tetrameter. 

. Dochmiac monometer hypercatalectic. 


Vss. 847-351 (Leipsic ed. 356-361). 
ANTISTROPHE γ΄. 


ζῶ 


. γένος νᾶϊᾶς | ἀρῶγδν τἔχνᾶς, 
. ἄλϊον ὅς ἔπεξθᾶς | ἔλισσῶν πλᾶτᾶν," 
. σὲ TOL, | σὲ Tot || μόνον | dEddpK || a ποῖμ | Ever |] 


ἔπᾶρκ | ἔσοντ᾽" || 


. GAG μὲ συνδαιϊξ | ov. 


Vss. 354-356 (Leipsic ed. 364-366). 


STROPHE ἔ. 
ὅρᾶς τὸν ϑρᾶσῦν, | TOV EvKAapdIOY, 
τὸν ἔν Odlolc | ἄτρεστον μᾶχαϊς, 
Ev apobotc μὲ ϑῆρσ | t δεῖνον χερᾶς ; 


1. A single iambus, followed by a dochmiac verse, is of frequent oc- 
currence in the tragic choruses, Consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 


115. 


2. Respecting the hiatus after the shortened final syllable in μόνοϊ, 
consult Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 158, ed. Glasg. 

3. Sezdler, de Vers. Dochm. Ὁ. 15. 

4, In the first foot of this line two long are resolved into four short. 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 153 


\ 


. Dochmiac dimeter. 
. The same measure. 
3. The same measure. 


wo — 


Vss. 362-366 (Leipsic ed. 372-376). 


STROPHE ς΄. 


ὦ δῦσ | μῦρος, ὃς || χερί μὲν | 

. μἔθηκ | ἃ τοῦς \| ἄλᾶστ | ὅρᾶς, \l 
. ἔν δ᾽ ἔλιίκεσσ | ἵ Bove | ἵ xat || 

. κλύτοις | πὲσῶν || αἰπὄλϊοϊς, | 


οι Ὁ wwe 


. Epsuv | ὅν aip || Edevo | ἃ. 


. Anapestic dimeter brachycatalectic. 
. Iambic dimeter. 

. Choriambic and Iambic monometer. 
. lambic and Choriambic monometer. 
. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 


art ww = 


Vss. 369-371 (Leipsic ed. 379-381). 


ANTISTROPHE ἔ. 


_ 


. Τῷ πᾶνθ᾽ δρῶν, | GravTay τ᾽ Get 


ἴω 


. KGKOY Opyavor, | τέκνον Λᾶρττοῦ, 
8. κἀκὄπινεστᾶτον | τ’ ἅλημᾶ στρᾶτοῦ. 
Vss. 377-381 (Leipsic ed. 387-391). 
ANTISTROPHE ς΄. 
1. ὦ Zev, | πρόγδνῶν || πρόπᾶτῶρ, | 
2. πῶς av | τὸν αἷμ || ὕλῶτ | ἄτον, || 
8. ἐχθρὸν ἄλημ | ἄ τοὺς | TE Oio- || 


1. Line 360 (Leipsic ed. 370) is an antispastic monometer, αἱ αἵ αἴ 
ai | like lines 325, 328, 331. 


154 CHORAL SCANNING 


4. oapxac | ὅλεσσ | ἂς βᾶσϊλεϊς, 
5. τἕλος | ϑᾶνοιμ || C καῦτ͵ ] ὃς. 


Vss. 384-400 (Leipsic ed. 394-409). 


STROPHE ¢’. 
. Ἰῶ 
. σκότος ἔμον bade | ' 
. ἔρξθδς ὦ φᾶξνν | OTaTOY, ὥς ἔμοϊ 
ἔλεσθ᾽, | ἔλεσθ || E μ᾽ οἰκητόρᾶ 
. ἔλεσθ | E μ᾽" οὔτ || E yap 
. Vewy yévoc, οὔθ | GuEpiar? 
. ἔτ᾽ ἀξ | le || BAEmeiv | tiv’ εἴς || Gva | oly ἄνθρ |] 
ὥπῶν 3 
8. ἀλλᾶ | p’ ἃ Δὲ || ὃς 
9. ἀλκῖμα ϑὲδς ὅ- | 
10. λεθρτόν αἵ | κίζεῖϊ 
11. ποῖ tic | οὖν φῦγ || ἢ 
12. ποῖ μῦλ | ὧν μὲν || ὦ 
18. εἴ τᾶ | μὲν φθῖν || εἴ PIA | οἵ 
14. τοῖσδ᾽ op | ov πὲλ || ἂς 
15. μῶραϊς | δ᾽ ἄγραϊς || πρδσκεῖμ | ἔθᾶ ἢ 
16. πᾶς δὲ | στρᾶτος || δίπᾶλτ | ὅς ἂν || μὲ 
17. χειρί pov | evor. 


WDaumk wn es 


. Iambus. 

. Dochmiac monometer. 

. Dochmiac dimeter. 

. Iambic monometer and dochmius. 
. Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 
. Choriambic dimeter. 


aonrk wn = 


ee eS ρεκαθεν ῶθι ΟΞ ΕΡΞΞΞΕ -οο--- 

1. Respecting the short syllable made long here at the end of the doch- 
mius, consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 85. 

2. The word ϑεῶν forms one long syllable here. 

3. Qui in fine trimetri additus est pes, numero videtur trocheus se- 
mantus esse.’ Herm. ad Cid. R. 1318. 


Ἴ. 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 


Iambic trimeter and Semantus trochee. 


8. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 


9. 
10. 
TE. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 


1. Compare Hermann, ad loc. 


OSD om OO κα 


Dochmiac monometer." 

Glyconic without a base. 

Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 
The same measure. 

Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 
Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 
Iambic dimeter. 

Iambic dimeter hypercatalectic. 
Adonic. 


Vss. 403-419 (Leipsic ed. 412-427). 


ANTISTROPHE ζ΄. 
ζῶ 


. TOpot ἄλιρρδθοιϊ | 

. πᾶρᾶλᾶ τ’ ἄντρᾶ, Kat | νξμδς ἔπακτϊον 
. πῦλῦν | πόὄλὺῦν || μὲ δᾶρον TE δῆ 

. κἄτεϊ | χἕτ ἀμφ || ἵ Τροῖ- | 


Gv χρὄνδν: GAA | οὔκ ETE μ᾽ οὐκ 


γεϊτῦνες poat | 

evppovéc “Apy | εἴοῖς 
ovK ἔτ᾽ | ἄνδρα || μῆ 
τονδ᾽ td | qT’ ἔπ || ὃς 
ξξξρ | ew μὲγ || otov | ov-* 


155 


. ἔτ᾽ aut | νδᾶς || ἔχοντ | ἃ τοῦτ || 6 tic | φρδὄνῶν || tors 
. ὦ Σκᾶ | pavdpi || οἵ 

9, 
10. 
11: 
12. 
13. 


We have given his reading, although 


Wunder maintains that the first syllable of ὀλέθριον cannot be thrown 


back to the preceding line. 


The latter editor makes ὄλεθρον aixilet a 


dacty! (the long being resolved into two short) and molossus. Hermann, 


on the contrary, makes the dochmius end in two short, resolved from one 


long. 


2. Compare Herm. Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 361, ed Glasg. 
3. We must read ἐξερέω here as a trisyllable. 


Porson and Elmsley 


prefer ἐξερῶ at once, but the Attic rule does not hold good in lyric verse. 
Compare Hermann, ad loc. 


156 CHORAL SCANNING 


14. tiva Tpot | ἃ στρᾶτ || οὔ" 
15. δέρχθη | χθῦνος || μόλοντ᾽ | ἄπο [I 


16. “EAAay | ἴδὸς || τὰἄνῦν ] δ᾽ arip || ὥς 
17. ὧδὲ πρῦ | κεῖμαϊ. 
Vss. 589-598 (Leipsic ed. 596-608). 
STROPHE 7. 


. Ὧ κλειν | ἃ Σἄλᾶμις | od μὲν | Tov? 

. val | εἰς ἄλϊπλᾶγις | τὸς | εὐδαϊμῶνϑ 

πᾶσ | ty πὲριφᾶντ | ὅς αἵ | εἴ 

éy@ | δ᾽ ὅ τλᾶμ || wy παλ | aloc dd’ ov | χρῦνδς 
“dat | ἅ μῖμν || ὦ λειμ | Ovi’ aroiv | a μὴν | ὥν' 
. ὧν | ἡρϊθμς at | ἕν | εὐνῶμᾷ 

. χρῦνῷ.] τρυχῦμξνος 

. κακᾶν | ξλπὶδ᾽ ἔχῶν 


ῷ ὦ Χ σ᾽ δι αὶ WN ναὶ 


. ETL μὲ TOT’ ἄνύσειν | ° 
. τὸν ἄποτρδπον ἃ | 1δὴλ | Ov ἃ || dav.® 


μ- 
Oo 


1. Glyconic hypercatalectic. 

2. Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following. 

- Glyconic hypercatalectic. 

Tambic monometer and Glyconic. 

. Iambic monometer and Glyconic hypercatalectic. 
. Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following. 
Iambus and choriambus. 

. The same measure. 


1. The diphthong ov in the word Τροίαν is shortened before the suc- 
ceeding vowel, and the first foot becomes a-tribrach, answering to the 
trochee in the corresponding line of the strophe. Compare Spitzner, 
Gr. “Pros. Ὁ. ΕἾ: 

2. Herm. Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 362, ed. Glasg. 

3. Compare line 195. 

4. We have adopted the xeading recommended by Hermann. 

5. We have adopted the arrangement of Hermann. Compare A’schy- 
lus, Pers. 1055, a? wi? wia|; Agam. 1162, τί τῦδξ Topdv ἄγαν, ἄς. 

6. “ Versus antispasto incipit, quem sequitur penthemimeres iambi- 
cum.” Herm. ad loc. 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 157 


9. Dochmiac monometer. 
10. Antispastic monometer and iambic monom. hypercat 


Vss. 599-608 (Leipsic ed. 609-621). 
ANTISTROPHE 7. 


1. Καί μοι | dvobéparevt | ὅς At | ἂς 

2. ξύν | Eotiv Epedp | ὅς | ὦ jot pot 

3. Vet | ἃ pavia | ξῦν αὖλ | ὃς 

4. ov && | ἔπεμψ || w πριν | δὴ πῦτξ ϑοῦρ | i 

5. κρᾶτοῦντ᾽ | Ev “Ap || et νῦν | δ᾽ ad φρενὸς oF | 6607 | a, 

6. φίλ | οἷς μέγᾶ πὲνθ | ὅς | εὑρῆταϊ 

7. τᾶ πρῖν | δ᾽ Epya χἔροῖν 

8. péylor | ἄς ἄρἕτᾶς 

9. ἀφίλᾷ πᾶρ᾽ ἄφϊίλοις | 

10. Enéo’ ἔπὲσξ EX | ξοῖς | “Ατρεῖϊδ || αἷς. 
Vss. 609-617 (Leipsic ed. 622-633). 

STROPHE ¥. 

1. Ἢ ποῦ | πᾶλαξ || ἃ μὲν | ἐντρῦφος ἃ | μὲρᾶ 

2. AevKw | δὲ yijp || ᾳ par | jp viv ὅτᾶν | νδὄσοῦντ | ἃ 

3. φρξνομ | ρῶς ax || οὐσῇ | 

4. atdivov | atdAivov 

5. οὐδ᾽ oixtp | ἂς yoov ὃρν | τθῦς aH | dove 

6. ἥσει | dvopopd¢g GAA’ | σξυτονοῦς | μὲν ῷδᾶς 

7. ϑρηνήσ | el χἔρδπλῆκτ | ot δ᾽ 

8. ἐν στέρν | oloi récovrT | αἵ 

9. δοῦποϊ, kal TOAL | ἄς ἃ | μυγμᾶ | χαϊτᾶς. 


. Iambic monometer and Glyconic. 

. Iambic monometer and Glyconic hypercatalectic. 
. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

- Dactylic dimeter." 


mR Ow μὰ 


—— 


1. This verse may also be scanned as an iambus and choriambus. 


158 


WODIAN 


aro δι ' ODN = 


Φῷ ὦ «Ὁ δὴ δι νὰ wD κα 


CHORAL SCANNING 


. Choriambie dimeter hypercatalectic, with base. 
. Choriambic trimeter catalectic, with base. 


Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic, with base." 
The same measure. 


. Phalecian hendecasyllabic. 


Vss. 618-626 (Leipsic ed. 634-645). 


ANTISTROPHE θ΄. 


. κρεϊσσῶν | yap Go || a κεύθμ | ὧν 6 νδσῶν || μᾶτᾶν ᾿ 
. ὅς ἐκ | πᾶτρῷ || ας ἥκ | Gv yEvEae | Gplot | ὅς 


πόὄλὺπον | ὧν ~A || χατῶν | 


. οὔκ ETL  συντρῦφοϊς 
. ὀργαῖς | ἔμπεδος GAA’ | Exo ὄμιλ, [εἴ 


ὦ τλάμ | ὧν πᾶτξἕρ ot | ἄν σὲ μένεϊ | πῦθεσθ | αἵ 


. παιδὸς | δυσφῦρον at | ἂν 


ὃν οὔπ | ὦ Tle ἔθρεψ | Ev 


. ατῶν | AiaKid | av a | TépOE | TOvdE. 


Vss. 674-686 (Leipsic ed. 694-706). 


STROPHE ἔ. 


. ἔφριξ | ἔρῶτ || i, πὲρϊζ | yapic || δ᾽ ἄνξπτ | ὅμᾶν. II 
. 16, τῶ, Mav, Πᾶν, | 

. ὦ Πᾶν, | Πᾶν ἄλίπλαγκτ |  Κῦὺλ- 

. Aavi_| ἂς χιδνοκτ | ὕποῦ 

. πετραί | ἂς ἄπ δεῖρ | ἄδος 

. φάν | ηθ᾽, ὦ | ϑεὼων χῦρδποι | ἄναξ 

. ὅ | πως μοι | Νῦστᾶ κνῶσσ | τ dpy- 

. quar’ | αὐτῦδᾶ | ἢ Evy | Oy T | ajc 

. νῦν yap E | jot wed | et yop | evoat 

: ἰ τκἄρϊτῶν δ᾽ ὕπερ] πέλαγξῶν μόλῶν | ἄναξ |~ATrOAA || 
a: 

12. 
. ἔμοι | Evvet || ἧς | δὲ | a πᾶντ | ὅς εὖ || φρῶν. 


ov 
6 | Δᾶλϊὄς εὖ | γνῶστος 


1. Called also a Pherecratic verse. 


Sr SO DG) SUES eee es 


μ- 


μ" 
~ 


ὦ ὦ « δ᾽ δι ν᾿ WD γα 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 159 


. Iambic trimeter. 
. Dochmiac monometer.' 


Glyconic. 

The same measure. 

The same measure.? 

Glyconic, increased by a syllable before the base. 


. The same measure. 


Phalecian hendecasyllabic. 
Logacedic. 
11. Dochmiac dimeter and iambic monom. hyperc. 


. Glyconic. 


Two iambic monometers hypercatalectic, the second 
with anacrusis. 


Vss. 687-699 (Leipsic ed. 706-718). 
ANTISTROPHE ἔ. 
Evo | Ev atv || ὅν ἄχος . az’ Sup || ἅτῶν | “Δρῆς Il 
ζῶ, τῶ" νῦν av, | 
νῦν, ὦ | Ζεῦ napa λεῦκ | ὅν ev- 
άμερ | ὃν πελᾶσαϊ | φᾶδς 
ϑοῶν | ὥκυαλῶν | νξῶν 


. ὅτ᾽ | Αἴας | λαθϊποὄνος | πᾶλῖν 

. Ve | ὧν δ᾽ αὖ | πανθῦτᾶ ϑέσμ | τ᾽ &E- 

. ἢνῦσ᾽, | evvout | ἃ σξθ | ὧν péy | tora 

. πᾶνθ᾽ ὅ μὲγ | ἂς χρν | ὃς pap | aivet 

: ἰ κοὐδὲν avavditov | φᾶττιξαϊμ᾽ av εὖ | τέ γ᾽ εξ | 


ἄελπτ || ov 


. Al | ἂς μετἄνεγν | ὥσθῆ 
. ϑυμοῦ | τ’ “Atpetd || αἷς | pey | ἄλῶν || τέ νεῖ [κεων. 


1. Consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 35. The second vowel in 
the verse is shortened before the one that succeeds. 

2. In this and the three following verses Hermann gives a different 
arrangement. ‘The mode adopted above, however, is sanctioned by Seid- 


ler (ep. 


ad Lobeck). 


3. Consult Hermann, Llem. Metr. Doctr. p. 358, seq., ed. Glasg. 


160 


Verse 


847. 
848. 


849. 
850. 


801. 


852. 
853. 


854. 


855. 
856. 


857. 
858. 
859. 


847. 
848. 
849. 
850. 
851. 
852. 
853. 
854. 
855. 
856. 
857. 
858. 
859. 


CHORAL SCANNING 


πόνος | πὄνῶ || πῦνον | Pépet. || 

πᾷ, πᾷ, | 

πᾷ yap | οὔκ &6 || ἂν ἕγ | ὦ 

κοῦδεϊς | ἔπῖστ || drat | μὲ σῦμμ || ἄθεϊν | τῦπος || 
Ἰδοῦ | 

δοῦπὸν | αὖ κλῦ || ὦ tiv | ἃ 

ἡμῶν | yé νᾶ || ὃς κοῖν | ὅπλοῦν || outa | τῶν. |) 

τὶ ovy δῆ] 

πᾶν ἔστ | t6qr || αἱ πλεῦρ | Ov Eor || ἔρον | νξῶν [! 
ἔχεις οὖν | 

πῦνοῦ | yé πλῆθ || ὃς Kovd | Ev εἴς || Oty | πλξον |] 
ἄλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ | ἔμοι δῆ THY | ad’ FA || Cod | βδλῶν || 
κἔλεῦθ | ὅν ἃ || νῆρ οὐὸ | ἅμοῦ || δῆλοτ | φᾶνεϊς. ἢ 


Iambic dimeter. 

Spondee (as part of an iambic line)." 
Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

Iambic trimeter. 

Iambic monometer brachycatalectic. 
Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

Iambic trimeter. 

Bacchic monometer. 

Iambic trimeter. 

Bacchic monometer. 

Iambic trimeter. 

The same measure. 

The same measure. 


Vss. 860-868 (Leipsic ed. 879-890). 


STROPHE Ud. 


1. Τὶς ἂν δητᾶ pot, | tic ἂν φίλόποδνῶν 
2. ἀλιᾶδαν ἔχ | ὧν ἄϊπνοῦς ἄγρας 


1. Or, in other words, iambic monometer brachycatalectic. 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 161 


ὡ 


. ἢ tic ὅ | λυμπῖᾶ | δῶν  ϑξῶν ἢ ρύτῶν 

. Booropt | ὧν ποταμῶν ἵδρις 

. τὸν ὦ | 1000 || μὸν | εἰ πόθ | πλαζομξνον λεῦσσῶν 
. ἅπῦοι | σχετλτᾶ yap 

ἔμξ γέ τὸν μᾶκρῶν | ἅλατᾶν πῦνῶν 

. οὐρτῶ | μὴ πελᾶσαϊ δρδμῷ 

. ἄλλ᾽ ὄμξνηνον ἄνδρ | ἃ μὴ | λεῦσεῖν || ὅποῦ. | 


Ὁ ὦ “τ ὅ σι νὰ 


. Dochmiac dimeter.! 

. Antispastic and dochmiac monometers. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercat. and dochmiac monom.? 
. Dactylic and dochmiae monometers. 
Tambico-dactylic and dochmiac monometers. 

. Cretic dimeter. 

- Dochmiac dimeter. 

Cretic and dochmiac monometers.° 

. Dochmiac monometer and Ischiorrhogic iambic.* 


Verse 

869. τῶ jot jot | 

871. Τῷ τλημῶν | 

875. τὶ δ᾽ Eotiv | 

878. ὦ pol ἔμῶν νδστῶν | 

879. ὦ | wot Kate | πεφνἕν ἄν | at 

880. TOE σῦνν  αὑτᾶν ὦ τἄλᾶς 

881. ὦ τἄλαξ | φρῶν γῦύναϊ] 

886. ὦ pol ἔμᾶς τᾶς | οἵὸς ap’ αἴμᾶχθῆς 
887. ἄφρᾶκτος φίλῶν | 

888. éy | ὦ δ᾽ 6 παντᾶ | κῶφς ὅ | πᾶντ᾽ aidp | τς 
889. Kath | μέλη || oa πᾷ | πᾷ 


1. Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 13. 

2. Id. p. 145. 

3. Id. p. 123, 127. 

4. “ Versus 874 (859) iambico finitur ex eo genere, quod apte ischior- 
rhogicum appellart posse in elementis doctrine metriee@ dix.” (Herm., 


ad loc.) 4 
2 


162 CHORAL SCANNING 


890. κεῖταὶ 6 | δῦστρᾶπε | Adc 
891. δυσ | ὥνυμος | Alac. 


869. Antispastic monometer. 

871. The same measure. 

875. Bacchic monometer. 

878. Dochmiac monometer.! 

879. Dactylic trimeter catalectic, with anacrusis. 
880. Cretic and dochmiac monometer. 
881. Cretic dimeter. 

886. Dochmiac dimeter.* 

887. Dochmiac monometer. 

888. Iambelegus.* 

889. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 

890. Dactylic trimeter catalectic. 

891. Adonic, with anacrusis. 


Vss. 902-910 (Leipsic ed. 925-936). 
ANTISTROPHE 0d. 
1. ἔμελλες τἄλᾶς | ἔμελλες YpOVH 
2. στἔρξδῳφρῶν ap’ | εξᾶνύσειῖν κακᾶν 
8. μοιρᾶν ἃ | πειρξσϊ | ὧν | πῦνῶν τοϊᾶ [ot 
4. mavvvya | καὶ φἄξθοντ᾽ * *4 
5. avéor | Evas || ες | Guodpor’ | E9007’ Artpéidaic 
6. οὐλτῷ | σὺν πᾶθεϊ 
7. μεγᾶς ap’ ἣν ἕκεῖν | ὅς ἀρχῶν χρῦνος 


1. “ Monuit Serdlerus hunc versum conjungi posse cum sequenti in 
unum hexametrum heroicum. At recte me monuit Hermannus, non so- 
lere tragicos versum lum ita nude ejusmodt numeris adjungere, quales 
sunt qui antecedunt et sequuntur.” (Wunder, ad loc.) 

2. In the common text, verse 883 (Leips. 905) reads as follows, τένος 
ποτ᾽ ap’ ἔπραξε χειρὶ δύσμορος, and is an iambic trimeter. Hermann, 
however, gives ἔρξε for ἔπραξε, and makes the line consist of an iambic 
monometer hypercatalectic and iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

3. Consult page 148, note 1. 

4. Two syllables wanting to complete the line. Hermann reads dpa. 
Elmsley prefers ἄναξ. 


᾿Ξ 
OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 163 


8. πημᾶτῶν | ἡμῦς aplotoyeip 
9. * * * * ὅπλῶν | Exelt’ | dydv | πέρι. | ' 


Verse 

911. τῶ pot pot | 

913. τῶ μοῖ pot | 

917. ἔυνασδῶ | 

920. ὦ poi, ἀνᾶλγητῶν | 

821. dic | σῶν EOp0 | joac ἂν | αὐδὸν 
922. épyov “Arp | elday tad’ ἄχεϊ 

923. ἄλλ᾽ ἄπεϊργ | ot ϑὲος 

928. ἢ pa κἔλαϊνῶπᾶν | Souov ξφυθριζεῖς 
929. m0AdTAGC avi | 

930. ye | Ad δὲ τοῖσι | patvopuE | νοῖς ἄχξ | σῖν 
931. πόλῦν | yéAwr || a φεῦ | φεῦ 

932. ξὺν τέ δῖἴπλ | ot BaotA | ἧς 

933. KAv | δντἕς “Atop | eldat. 


The scanning of these verses, from 911 to 933, corre- 
sponds, line for line, to that of verses 869-891. 


Vss. 1136-1140 (Leipsic ed. 1162-1167). 
Anapestic MEasure. 
. ἔσται | μεγᾶλῆς || ἔρῖδος | tic ἄγῶν || 
. ἀλλ᾽ ὥς | dvvdoat || TevKpEe Tax | Ὁνᾶς || 
. σπεῦσον | κοϊλὴν || κἀπετον | tiv’ ἴδεῖν || 
. τῷδ᾽ EvO | ἃ βρῦὅτοῖϊς || τὸν det | μνῆστον || 
. TaPOY εὖ | ρῶξντ || ἅ καθὲεξ | εἰ. (Parcemiac.) 


σι Ὁ ww = 


1. Four syllables wanting at the beginning of the line. Brunck re- 
ceives into the text the supplement given by Triclinius, namely, ’Ay.A- 
λέως ; but Musgrave, with more probability, suggests χρυσοδέτων, which 
is approved of by Hermann. 


164 CHORAL SCANNING 


Vss, 1158-1164 (Leipsic ed. 1185-1191). 


STROPHE 3’. 
. Tig dpa | νξᾶτος || Eo TOTE | λῆ- 
. el πόλυπλαγκτ | ὧν ἔἕτξῶν | ἄριθμὸς 
τᾶν ἃ | παῦστὸον || ατὲν ἔμοϊ 
. δὸρ | Ὁσσοντῶν | μοχθῶν' 
. a| τᾶν ἔπαγῶν | ava 
. ταν | εὐρῶδῆ | Ῥροϊᾶν 
δυς | τἄνδον Ovetd | ὅς Ἐ!λλᾶνῶν. 


Yoaurhwnver 


. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 

. Choriambic dimeter catalectic. 

. Trochaic and choriambic monometers. 
. Glyconic. 

The same measure. . 

. The same measure. 


ἘΣ δὴ δι ἦν οὐ ὃ τα 


. The same measure. 


Vss. 1165-1170 (Leipsic ed. 1192-1198). 
ANTISTROPHE ιβ΄. 
1. 6EAE | mpdTEpOr || atOEpa | δῦν- 
2. al péyav ἢ | τὸν mOAvKOLY | Ov ἃδᾶν 
3. Kelvoc | ἄνῆρ || ὃς στυγερῶν 
4. & | deigev ὅπλῶν | “EAAG- 
5. σι | κοῖνόν ~Apijy: | to 
6. πον | of mpoyovol | Tovar 
7. κεῖν | ὃς yap ἕπερσ | Ev ἄνθρῶποῦς. 


1. A molossus here takes the place of the choriambus, and so also in 
verse 6. Compare Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 360, ed. Glasg. 


— et 
n= ς 


"» μὰ μ᾿ 
none © 


eo =— 


ῷ ORR A ναὶ οὐ dO» 


Ὁ DBD oP wD μα 


OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 165 


Vss. 1171-1182 (Leipsic ed. 1199-1210). 


STROPHE vy’. 


. ἔκεϊν | ὅς ov || TE στεφανῶν 
. ovTé Babel | ἂν KvATKOY 
. νεῖμεν Euot | TEppiv OutA | εἴ 


ov | TE yAvKvY αὖλ | Gv ὅτοθον 


. δυσμορος οὔτ᾽ | ἐννύχιαν 


τερψῖν ζαῦ | εἴν 
ἔρῶωτῶν | 


. ἐρώτ | ὧν δ᾽ ἄπεπαῦ | σἕν ὦ pot 
. κεῖμ | αἵ δ᾽ ἄμξριμν | ὅς οὐτῶς 

. ἀ | εἰ πῦκϊναϊς | δρὅσοιϊς 

. τεγγῦμξνος | κῦμᾶς 

. λυγρᾶς | μνημᾶτᾶ Τροῖ | ἂς. 


. Iambic monometer and choriambus. 

. Choriambic dimeter. 

. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic. 

. Choriambic dimeter, with anacrusis. 

. Choriambic dimeter. 

. Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic. 


Bacchic monometer. 


. Glyconic hypercatalectic, with base. 


The same measure, with anacrusis. 


. The same measure. 
. Choriambic monometer and iambus. 
. Pherecratic. 


Vss. 1183-1194 (Leipsic ed. 1211-1222). 


ANTISTROPHE ty’. 


. καὶ πρῖν | μὲν οὖν || Evvvyiod 
. δεϊμᾶτος ἣν | wot προθῦλᾶ 


166 CHORAL SCANNING OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 
3. καὶ βελξῶν | Youvpio¢ AT | ἂς 
4. νῦν | δ᾽ οὑτῦς ἄνεϊτ | ai orvyEPO 
5. δαϊμῦνϊζ tic | μοῖ τὶς Er’ οὖν 
6. τερψίς Enéor | αἵ 
7. γενοιμᾶν | 
8. ἕν vA | Gév ἔπεστ | ἵἴ ποντοῦ 
9. mpd | βλῆμ᾽ ἀλικλῦστ | Ov ἄκρᾶν 
10. ὑπ ὃ πλᾶκᾶ Σοῦν | tod 
11. τᾶς tépac | ὅπῶς 
12. πρῦσεϊπ | οἵμὲν “Αθᾶ | ναῖς. 
Vss. 1374-1392 (Leipsic ed. 1402-1420). 
Anapzstic MEASURE. 
. adic ἢ | δῆ yap || TOADS Ex | TETATAT 
. XpOvee ἀλλ᾽ | οἵ μὲν || κοϊλὴν | κἄπξτον || 
NEpol TAY | Ὁνἕτξ || TOL δ᾽ vw | τθᾶτον || 
. τρίποδ᾽ Gud | ἵπῦρον || λουτρῶν | ὄσϊῶν || 
ϑεσθ᾽ Ext | καῖρον || pia δ᾽ Ex | KAtotae || 
. ἀνδρῶν | τλῆ || τὸν ὕπᾶσ | πῖἴδϊον || 
. κδσμον | φερξτῶ || 
. Tal ov δὲ | πᾶτρος || γ᾽ ὅσον tox | Vere || 
. φιλδτῆτ | t ϑίγῶν, || πλευρᾶς | σῦν ἔμοτ || 
. τᾶσδ᾽ Ext | κοῦφιζ᾽- || ἔττ yap | ϑέξρμαϊ || 
. ovptyy | ἔς ave || φυσῶσ | ἵ μέλαν || 
12. μένος ἄλλ᾽ | ἄγξ πᾶς, || φίλδς do | Tic ἄνῆρ || 
. φησὶ πὰρ | Eetvat, || σουσθῶ | Bare || 
. τῶν ἄνὸρ | ἵ πονῶν || τῷ πᾶντ᾽ | ἀγαθῷ || 
. Kovdéevt | πῶ λῷ || ὅν ϑνῆτ | ὧν. (Parceemiac.) 
. Atay | τῦς ὅτ᾽ ἣν || TOTE φῶν | ὥ. (Pareemiac.) 
. ἢ πολλ |  βρῦτοιϊς || ἐστίν id | οὔσιν || 
. γνῶναϊ | πρὶν ἵδεῖν || δ᾽ οὔδεῖς | μᾶντις || 
. τῶν μξλλ | OvTOY, || ὅ Ti πρᾶξ | εἴ. (Parcemiac.) 


— »-ὦ 
= © 


ete 
oon Dd ὧι & ὦ» 


OPoRakone 


CHORAL SCANNING 


OF THE 


GD ΡΒ. T Yona N. NUS: 


I. Vss. 151-158. 


STROPHE 4G. 


. "Q Aide | GddE | πῆς Pati, | Tic MOTE | τᾶς TOAD | 


χρῦσου 


. Πυθῶν | ὃς ἄγλ || ἀᾶς | ξθᾶς || 
. Θηθᾶς ; | ἐκτἕτᾶ | wat PdbEp | ἂν φρξνᾶ, | δειμᾶτϊ | 


παλλῶν, 


εὐ [τὲ | Δᾶλτξ | Tatar, 
. ἄμφϊ oot | ἀζομξ | νὸς τί pot | ἢ νξδν, 
. ἢ πὲρϊ | τελλὸμξ | ναῖς ὦ | ραῖς πᾶλϊν 


ξξᾶνῦ | σεῖς χρξῦς. 


. εἰπέ ot, | ὦ χρῦσξ | ἃς τέκνον | “Ελπῖδος, ἀμθρὅτξ | 


Φαμᾶ. 


. Dactylic hexameter. 

. Iambic dimeter acatalectic. 

. Dactylic hexameter. 

. Dactylic trimeter, with anacrusis. 


Dactylic tetrameter. 


. The same measure. 
. Dactylic dimeter. 
. Dactylic hexameter. 


168 


1. 


ἘΞ Θ᾽ το τ, ow 


1. 
2. 


0 Σ 55 δι νὰ 


CHORAL SCANNING 


I. Vss. 159-166. 
ANTISTROPHE @. 
πρῶτᾶ σὲ | κξκλόμξ | vig Svya | τὲρ Atog | Gubpor’ 
~A | Bava, 


. yaia | ὄχον || τ᾽ GEA | Ear || 
. “Aptéuty | ἃ KdKAO | Evr’ ayo | pag ϑρδνδν͵ ] ev«- 


Aéa | Saooet 

καὶ | Φοιθὸν & | καθδλδν, | τῶ 

tplocot ἄ | λεξιμδρ | ot πρδφᾶ | vATE pot, 

el πῦτξ | καὶ TPOTE | pac ἃ | τᾶς UTEp- 

Opvvpe | Vac TOAEL 

qvioar’ | extort | dv φλδγᾶ | πημᾶτῦς, | EAGETE | 
καὶ νῦν. 


II. Vss. 167-175. 
StTrRoPHE β΄. 
“Q πδποϊ, | ἄνἄρτθμ || a yap | Pepe || 
miata: | vooet || δὲ pot | mporrac || στὅλδς, οὔδ᾽ | ἕττ ἢ 
ppovridds | ἔγχῦς, 
ὦ tig & | λεξξταϊ, | OVTE yap | Exyova 
kAv'| τᾶς χθῦνδς | adsETaL, | οὔτε TO | κοῖσῖν 
in | t || Ov Kapa | τῶν ave | χοῦσϊ yv | ναϊκὲς 
ἄλλον | δ᾽ ἄν GAA || ὦ πρῦσϊδ | οἷς, ἄπὲρ | eVTTEpOY 
| dpviv, 
κρεϊσσῦν a | μαϊμᾶκξ | τοῦ TUpOC | OppEVOY 


. ἄκτᾶν | πρὸς Eor || Epod | Yéov." 


Iambic dimeter acatalectic. 
Verse resembling an iambic trimeter.? 


1. We must pronounce ϑεοῦ as one syllable, by syneresis, in order 
that the verse may correspond with the last line of the antistrophe. Com- 
pare Porson, ad Orest. 393: “ Veteres Attici hanc vocem (Se0c) libenter 
am sermone contraxisse videntur ; nomina enim a ϑεὸς incipientia pro- 
nunciarunt, Θουγενίδης, Θουκυδίδης," &c. 

2. Compare Hermann, ad loc. : ‘ Versum efficiunt similem trimetro 
tambico, nist quod quintus pes anapestus est.” 


SODNWANR WN 


—_ 


OF THE CDIPUS TYRANNUS. 169 


. Dactylic dimeter, or Adonic. 

. Dactylic tetrameter. 

. Dactylic tetrameter, with anacrusis. 

Iambic monometer catalectic, with dactylic tetram. 
. Iambic monometer acatalectic, with dactylic tetram. 
. Dactylic tetrameter. 

. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 


II. Vss. 176-184 (Leipsic ed. 179-189). 
ANTISTROPHE β΄. 

. ὧν TOAic | ἄνᾶρϊθμ || ὅς GAA | drat || 

νηλξᾶ | δὲ yEVEOA || & πρὸς | TESS || ϑᾶνατη | φδρῶ || 

κεῖταϊ ἂν | οἴκτῶς 

. ἕν δ᾽ GAG | χοῖ TOAL | at 7’ Ext | μᾶτερες 

. ἀκ | τᾶν Tapa | βωμὸν | GAACBEY | GAAat 

λῦγρῶν | nov ᾿᾿ ὧν ter | ἢρἔς ἔπ | tordva | χοῦσῖν 

. Talay | δὲ λᾶμπ || εἰ στῦνδ | Ecod TE | γῆηρῦς Op | 

αὐλὸς: 

. ὧν ὕπὲρ, | ὦ χρῦσὲ | ἃ ϑύγᾶ | τὲρ Aloe, 

. εὐῶ | πᾶ πὲμψ || Ov GAK | ἄν. 


III. Vss. 185-197 (Leipsic ed. 190-202). 
STROPHE γ΄. 
“Αρξᾶ | τὲ τὸν || μᾶλερδν | 
ὃς νῦν | GXaAK || ὅς Gor | ἵδῶν [} 
. φλἔγεϊ | μὲ rept || θδῆ | τς ἄντ || tag | ὧν 
πᾶλισσ | ὕτον || δρᾶμη | μᾶ ver || toat | πᾶτρᾶς |] 
. arov | pov ett’ || Ec μέγᾶν 
. ϑαλὰαμδν | “Audi || τριτῆς | 
. εἴτ᾽ | ὃς TOV Gm | OSEvov | δρμὸν 
Θρῆκϊ | ὃν κλῦ || ddva | 
. τἔλεϊ | yap εἴ || TE νῦξ | ἄφῆ Il 
. τοῦτ᾽ En’ | ἡμᾶρ || ἐρχἕτ | at 


170 CHORAL SCANNING 


— 
--- 


. τὸν ὦ τᾶν πῦρῳ | δρῶν' 
. ἄστρᾶ | πᾶν κρᾶτ || ἢ véw | ὧν Zed | 
. TATED ὑπὸ TED | φθισὸν κἔραῦνῷ. 


— μὰ 
w ws 


. Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

. Iambic dimeter acatalectic. 

. lambic trimeter catalectic. 

. Iambic trimeter acatalectic. 

. Iambic monometer and cretic. ‘ 
. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

. Dactylic trimeter, with anacrusis. 

. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

. Iambic dimeter acatalectic. 

. Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

. Antispastic monometer brachycatalectic. 
. Trochaic dimeter acatalectic. 


. Dochmiac dimeter. 


Θ ὦ “2 οι WD 


"μὰ μὰ μα 
won = 


III. Vss. 198-210 (Leipsic ed. 203-215). 


ANTISTROPHE γ΄. 


". 
. 


Λύκετ᾽ | ἄναξ || τᾶ TE σᾶ. | 

. χρυσῦστρ | ὄφῶν || an’ ἄγκ | DAG? || 

. BEAEG | ϑέλοιμ᾽ || ἄν ada | war’ Ev || δώτεϊσθ | ai 
. ἄρῶ | γᾶ πρῦσ || τἄθεντ | a τᾶς || TE πῦρ | φδροῦς. || 
τΑρτὲμζ [δὸς atyA || ἂς ξῦν αἷς 

. Αὐὔκτ᾽ Op | ξᾶ δὲ || Gooet | 

. τὸν | Ypvoomi | τρᾶν TE Ki | KAROKO 

. τἄσδ᾽ Ex | ὥνῦ || μὸν γᾶς | 

. ovat | & Βᾶκχ || ov ev | Tor || 

. Maivad | ὧν Gp || dorod | ov 

11. πέλασθῆναι | φλξἔγοντ᾽ 


CHOWOAkwWDN 


_ 
fo) 


1. We have adopted, in this and the two succeeding verses; the ar- 
rangement of Hermann, as given by Erfurdt, ad loc. 


OF THE CDIPUS TYRANNUS. 171 


12. * * ἄγλᾶ || Gri | πεῦκᾷ || 
13. émt τὸν ἄπὄτι | μὸν Ev ϑξοιῖς ϑξον. 


ΙΝ. Vss. 458-466 (Leipsic ed. 463-472). 
Srrorue 0’. 

1. Tic ὃν | tiv ἃ || ϑεσπῖξ | πετᾶ | AéAdic | εἰπὲ | πέτρα 

2. appar’ | appar | ὧν EAE | odvTa | Hotvi | ator | 
χερσὶ" 

8. ὦ | pa viv ἄελλ | ἄδῶν » 

4. in | πῶν σθεναρῶ | TEpdv 

5. pu | ya 700d νῶ | μᾶν 

6. ἔνδπλος | yap En’ ad || τὸν ExEvOp | Boxer. ἢ} 

7. πῦρϊ καὶ | oréporatc || 6 Δῖος | yéverag || 

8. dey | at δ᾽ ay’ ExdvT | at 

9. Κηρὲᾶς | ἄναπλᾶ || κῆτοϊ. 


. Iambic monometer, with a logacdic. 
. Spondaic dimeter, with a logacedic. 
. Glyconic. 

The same measure. . 
Glyconic catalectic, or Pherecratic. 
. Anapestic dimeter. 

. The same measure. 

. Glyconic catalectic. 

. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic. 


ῷ ὦ “ δ᾽ σ᾽ τὸ wd ν 


IV. Vss. 467-475 (Leipsic ed. 473-482). 
ANTISTROPHE 0”. 
1. ἔλαμψ | E yap || τοῦ νϊφῦ | ξντς | ἄρτϊ | ὥς φᾶν | 
ELOa 
1. A word of two syllables wanting, according to Hermann’s atrange- 


ment. 


2. The two spondees which begin this measure are very probably se- 
mantus trochees. 


CHORAL SCANNING 
papa | Ἰπᾶρνᾶσσ | ob τὸν ἃ | δῆλῦν | ἄνδρᾶ | nav?’ 
ἴχν | evetv 
got | ἃ yap ὕπ᾽ ayp | tay 
vA | ἂν ava τ’ ἄντρ | & Kat 


. πέτρ | ἂς Ge ταῦρ | Gc! 


μἔλξος | μέλξῶ || OST χῆρ | EDGY || 


. τᾶ μέσομ | Pada γᾶς || ἄπονοσφ | τζῶν || 
. pavt | ela τὰ δ᾽ at | εἴ 
. ζωντᾶ | πὲρϊπῦ || τᾶταϊ. 


V. Vss. 476-484 (Leipsic ed. 483-497). 


STROPHE ἔ. 


. deiva μὲν οὖν, | δεῖνᾶ τὰἀρᾶσσ | et σδφδς οἵ | ὥνὄ- 


θἔτᾶς. 


. οὔτε δοκοῦντ᾽, | οὔτ᾽ ἄπδφᾶσκ | GVO" 6 Ti λεξ | ὦ 


δ᾽ ἄπορῶ 


. TETOUAT | δ᾽ εἐλπῖσϊν, οὔτ᾽  ἐνθᾶδ᾽ δρῶν, | οὔτ᾽ ὄπίσῶ 


τὶ yap ἢ | Λαθδᾶκϊἴδαϊς, | ἢ 


. τῷ Πόλυθοῦ | νεϊκς Exeit’, | οὔτξ πᾶροϊ | θὲν TOT’ 


ἔγῶγ᾽ 


οὔτε τἄνῦν | πῶ 


. ἔμᾶθον | πρῦς ὅτοῦ || * * * * | δὴ bacdva? 


Ent τᾶν | ἔπίδα || μὸν φᾶτϊν εἴμ’ | Οἰδίποδα 
Adbdaxt | δαῖς Ext | Kovpoc adj | λῶν ϑᾶνᾶτῶν. 


. Choriambic tetrameter. 

. The same measure. 

. An anapest, with a choriambic trimeter. 

. An anapest, with a choriambic monometer hypercat. 
. Choriambic tetrameter. : 

. Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic. 


1. Consult Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 359, ed. Glasg. 

2. A word is wanting here to complete the measure, and make the 
line answer to the corresponding one of the antistrophe. Hermann sug- 
gests χρησόμενος. 


7. 
8. 
9 


ame wee OO 


wo = 


OF THE CDIPUS TYRANNUS. 173 


Anapestic monometer and choriambic dimeter. 
The same measure. 
Dactylic dimeter and choriambic dimeter. 


V. Vss. 485-493 (Leipsic ed. 498-511). 


ANTISTROPHE ἔ. 


. GAN’ 6 μὲν ovv | Ζεῦς, 6 τ’ “AnOAA | ὧν ξῦνξτοϊ, | 


καὶ Ta βροτῶν. 


. εἰδότες avdp | ὧν δ᾽ Ott μᾶντ | τς TAEOY ἢ | γῶ φἔ- 


ρἕταϊ 


. κρισϊς οὔκ | ἐστῖν ἄλῆ | θῆς oodia | δ᾽ ἂν σδφϊᾶν 
. Tapapet | elév ἄνῆρ" | ἄλλ᾽ 
. οὐπτ᾽ ἔγῶγ | ἄν πρίν iWoilp’ | δρθῦν Erde,  μεμφὅ- 


μενῶν 


. ἄν κἄταφαϊ | ἣν 

. Pavépa | yap ἔπ αὖ || TO πτἔρδεσσ᾽ | RADE KOpa 

. TOTE Kal | σδφδς OHO || ἢ, βασᾶνῷ | ¥ HOvTOATC 
. τῷ am’ ὃ | μᾶς ppEvoc | οὐπὄτ᾽ δφλῆ | σεῖ κακϊᾶν. 


VI. Vss. 630-636 (Leipsic ed. 649-657). 
STROPHE ς΄. 


. 728 | οὔ YEAR | σᾶς φρῦνη | σᾶς τ’ ἄναξ, | Atooduat. 
. τὶ oot | ϑέλεϊς || δῆτ᾽ εἴ | KaOG || 


τον | ovté πρῖν | νῆπϊον, | νῦν τ᾽ Ev dpk | ὦ μἔγᾶν 


. κἄτατὸ | ἔσαϊ. || 
. 0100’ οὖν | & χρῆς || εἴς; οἵ | ἅ. φρὰξζ [{ δῆ | τί 


φῆς |l 


. τὸν ἔνᾶγῆ φίλον | μηπὄτ᾽ Ev aitia 
. σὺν ἄφᾶνεϊ λογῶ | ἄτιμον βἄλειν 


. Cretic tetrameter, with anacrusis. 
. Iambic dimeter. 
. Cretic tetrameter, with anacrusis. 


P2 


174 CHORAL SCANNING 


. Iambic monometer. 
. Iambic trimeter. 

. Dochmiac dimeter. 
. Dochmiac dimeter. 


IO δι "ὦ 


VII. Vss. 639-645 (Leipsic ed. 660-668). 
STROPHE ¢’. 
1. ov τὸν | πᾶντῶν | ϑξῶν | ϑέον πρόμον GAtov 
2. ἔπεϊ ἀθξῦς, GHiAGc, | 6 TL πυμᾶτον 
3. OAoiway ppovy | civ εἰ τἄνδ᾽ EYO 
4. ἀλλᾶ μ᾽ ἃ | δυσμδρῶς" 
5. ya φθίνουσα τρῦχ | εἴ 
6. καὶ tad’ | εἴ Ka || οἷς Kak | ἃ 
7. mpoodwel τοῖς | maAat | τᾶ πρὸς || σφῶν. 


1. Ischiorrhogic iambi, with dochmius. 

2. A dochmiac and cretic monometer.” 

3. Dochmiac dimeter. 

4. Cretic dimeter. 

5. Dochmiac monometer hypercatalectic. 

6.° Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

7. Antispast and iambic monometer hypercatalectic. 


VI. Vss. 655-661 (Leipsic ed. 678-686). 
ANTISTROPHE ς΄. 
. yb | vat τὶ EAA | εἰς κῦμιζ | εἴν δόμῶν | TOvd’ ἔσῶ 
. μᾶθοῦ | σᾶ γ᾽ ἢ || tic ἢ | THY. |] 
. 06k | ἢσῖς ἄγν | ὥς λῦγῶν | HAGE, δᾶπτ | Et δὲ Kat 


—m OO WO "ὦ 


. TO μὴ ᾽ν | δῖἴκον || 


1. We have adopted Hermann’s emendation, μ᾽ ὦ δυσμόρως, in place 
of the common reading, μοι δυσμόρῳ, and have rejected ψυχάν, which the 
common text gives in the succeeding line. 

2. The dochmius is here resolved into eight sheet syllables (Sezdier, 
de Vers. Dochm. p. 63, seq.), and the cretic into five. 


No oh WW = Q 


SCODIRAPR WN 


—_ 


_— 


OF THE @DIPUS TYRANNUS. 175 
. ἄμφοῖν | ἄπ᾽ adr || oly vat | yi κατ] tig ἣν | λὄγδς ]} 
. ἄλϊς Euoty’ adic | γᾶς πρόπονουμξνᾶς 
. paivetat, ἔνθ᾽ EAHE | Ev αὑτοῦ μενεῖν. 


VIL. Vss. 664-670 (Leipsic ed. 689-697). 


ANTISTROPHE ζ΄. 


. ὦ ᾽νᾶξ | εἴπον | μὲν οὔχ | ἅπαξ povor iad δὲ 
. πὰραφρῦονϊμόν, ἄπορον | Ext φρόνιμα 

. πέφᾶνθαϊ μ᾽ ἂν εἴ | σὲ νοδσφιζῦμαϊ 

. ὅςτ᾽ ἔμᾶν | γᾶν φίλᾶν 

. Ev πῦνοϊς GAD | Ov- 

. σᾶν Kar’ | δρθῦν ||| ovpio | ἂς 

. τἄνῦν τ’ εὐπόμπ | ὅς et | δῦναϊ || δ. 


VIII. Vss. 836-845 (Leipsic ed. 863-872). 


STROPHE 7. 


. εἴ pot | svvet || ἢ pep | Ove || 
. poipa τᾶν ed | σεπτὸν Gyvel | Gv Adyov 


Loy | ὧν TE πᾶντῶν, | ὧν νῦμ | οἵ pO || κεῖνταϊ | 
Dwpirddéc, | ovpavi | av dv’ 
αἰθέρα | τὲκνῶ || θέντ | ἔς ὧν | ~OAvpT || ος 


. Tat | Hp μῦνδς οὔ | δὲ viv 

. ϑνα | Ta φῦσϊς ἄν | ἕρῶν 

. ἔτικτ | Ev ov || δὲ 

. μῆν TOTE AG | θᾶ κἄτἄκοιμ | ἄσεϊ 

. μέγᾶς ἔν τοῦ | τοῖς ϑξῦς | οὐδὲ | γῆρᾶσκ | εἴ. 


. Jambic dimeter and trochaic dimeter. 


2. Epitritic dimeter and cretic monometer. 


, Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic 


dimeter brachycatalectic. 


. First peon, dactyl and trochee. 


Two iambic monometers hypercatalectic. 


176 ᾿ CHORAL SCANNING 


. Glyconic. 

. The same measure. 

. Iambic monometer hypercatalectic. 

. Choriambic dimeter, with a spondee. 
10. Ionic a minore and logacedic, with spondaic ending. 


© Ost 5 


VIII. Vss. 846-855 (Leipsic ed. 873-882). 
ANTISTROPHE 4. 
. wBpic | φύτεῦ || εἰ TH | ρᾶννον 
. Ὁβρῖς εἴ TOAA | ὧν ὑπερπλῆσθ | ἢ μᾶτᾶν 
ἃ | μὴ ᾿πϊκατϊρᾶ | μῆδὲ | συμφὲρ | ὄντᾶ 
akporatoy | eloavab | ao’ ἔς 
. GOTO | μὸν ᾧ || pov | σὲν εἴς | ἄναᾶγκ || av 
ἔνθ᾽ | ov rOdt χρῆ | σϊμῶ 
. χρῆ | Tal TO κἄλῶς | δ᾽ ἔχον 
. TOAEL | πᾶλαϊσμ || a 


Ὁ ὦ “ σὴ AR WW = 


. μηπῦτξ AD | cal Yor ai | τοῦμαϊ 
. DOV οὔ ARE | ὦ TOTE | πρδστᾶ | τᾶν ἴσχ | Or. 


pot 
=] 


IX. Vss. 856-868 (Leipsic ed. 883-896). 

STROPHE θ΄. 

. εἴ δὲ | Tic ὕπερ || σπτᾶ | χερσῖν || 

. ἢ Ady | ὦ πῦρ || Ever | αἱ 

. dix | ἃς ἄφδθ | ητῦς, | οὔδὲ | 

. Oaipov | ὧν ἔδ || ἢ σξθ | ὧν 

. kak | ἃ viv EA | οἵτῦ | poipa | 

. δυσπῦτμ | ov yap || Ty yAtd | ἂς 

εἰ | μῆ TO κερδὸς | κερδᾶν | εἴ dix | aide 

. καὶ | τῶν' ἄσεπτῶν | EpsETat 

.« ἢ | Tov ἄθικτῶν | ξξξ | Tai par | ἄζῶν | 

. Tle Ett | πῦτ᾽ Ev || τοισὸ ἄν | Ap ϑὺμ || od BEA | ἢ 

. Epgétal oy | Gc auvveiv 


ΘΟ ὦ “ἢ δ᾽ AA WD κα 


pt μ" 
"- 


OF THE DIPUS TYRANNUS. 177 


12. εἴ yap at tol | aide πρᾶξεϊς | Tipiat 


13. 


1: 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
ce 


SCODRVOAUR WD = 


—_ 
»- 


— 
i) 


τί | δεῖ μὲ χῦρ | Evety; 


Trochaic dimeter. 

Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

Logaeedic, with anacrusis. 

Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

Logacedic, with anacrusis. 

Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic 
dimeter brachycatalectic. 


. Epitritic monometer, with anatrusis, and cretic. 
. Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic 


dimeter brachycatalectic. 


. Iambic monometer and trochaic dimeter catalectic. 
. Epitritic dimeter. 

. Epitritic dimeter, with cretic. 

. Adonic, with anacrusis. 


IX. Vss. 869-881 (Leipsic ed. 897-910). 
ANTISTROPHE θ΄. 


. οὔκ ET [ἴ τὸν ἃ || θικτὸν | εἰμΐ || 
. γᾶς Ex’ | σμφᾶλ || Gv o&6 | ὧν 
. οὐδ᾽ | ὃς τὸν ΓΑ | baiat | νᾶδν | 


οὐδὲ | τᾶν Ὅλ || ὉὈμπὶ | av 


. εἰ | μὴ τὰδξ | χεῖρ | δεϊκτᾶ 
. πᾶσϊν | ἀρμ || cet βρὅτ | οἷς 
. ἀλλ᾽ | ὦ κρᾶτῦνῶν | εἴπὲρ | ὄρθ’ ak | οὔεῖς 


Zev, | πᾶντ᾽ ἄναᾶσσῶν, | μὴ AGO 


. σὲ, | τᾶν TE σᾶν ἃ | Oavarov | aiév | ἄρχᾶν 
. POivovT | ἃ yap || Adi | οὔ πᾶλ || aia | τᾶ 

. ϑεσφᾶτ᾽ ξξαϊ | ροῦσϊν 707 

. κοὐδαμοῦ τι | μαῖς “Απολλῶν | ἐμφᾶνῆς 

. Ep | pet δὲ Ta | ϑετᾶ. 


178 
1. 
2 
3 
4 
5. 
6 
7 
8 
9 


10. 
11. 


-“ μ 
— © 


Ὁ» ὦ DO = 


CHORAL SCANNING 


X. Vss. 1057-1067 (Leipsic ed. 1086-1097). 
STROPHE ἔ. 


elmép Ey@ | μᾶντϊς | εἰμὶ [} 


. καὶ KaTa γνῶμ | ἣν topic | 
. ov τὸν Ὅλ | ὑμπὸν ἄπ | εἰρῶν 
. ὦ Κιθατρῶν, | οὔκ ἔσεϊ 


τᾶν αὖρ | tov || πἄνσξληνον 


. μὴ ov o€& γὲ | καὶ πᾶτρι | Otay | Οτδίποῦ 
. καὶ τρῦφον καὶ | pATEP’ αὐξεῖν 

. καὶ χῦὔρεῦξσθ | αἵ πρός ἡμῶν 

. ὥς Ent | ἡρᾶ φὲρ | ὃν 


τᾶ τοῖς | ἔμοιϊς || τῦρανν | οἷς 
i | ηϊξ  Φοιθξ, | cot δὲ | ταῦτ᾽ dp | ἔστ᾽ et | ἢ. 


. Choriambic monometer and trochaic monometer. 


t Epitritic monometer and dactylic tetrameter. 


. Epitritic monometer and cretic. 


Iambic monometer and epitrite. 


. Dactylic tetrameter. 

. Epitritic dimeter. 

. The same measure. 

. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic. 

. Iambic dimeter catalectic. 

. Logacdic, with anacrusis and catalectic syllable. 


X. Vss. 1068-1078 (Leipsic ed. 1098-1109). 


ANTISTROPHE ἔ. 


. Tig 0&, τέκνον, | Tic σ᾽ E | τικτὲ |] 
. τῶν μᾶκρατῶν | ὧν apa | ὲ 

. Πᾶνος op | éootba | τᾶ ποῦ 

. προσπελασθεϊσ᾽, | ἢ OF γὲ 


OF THE DIPUS TYRANNUS. 179 
5. τῖς ϑύγᾶτῆρ, | Adgiov ; τῶ! 
6. yap πλᾶκες | ἄγρῦνδ | μοῖ͵ πᾶσ | at Pidat 
7. εἴθ᾽ 6 Κυλλᾷ | νᾶς avaoowy 
8. εἴθ᾽ 6 Βᾶκχεϊ | ὃς Ede vai- 
9. ὧν ἔπ ἄκρ | ὧν Ope | ὧν 
10. εὐρὴμ | ἃ δὲξ || ἅτ᾽ Ex | τοῦ 
11. Νυμφ [ἂν “Edt [κῶνϊδ᾽] ὧν αἷς | πλεϊστᾶ | ovp- 
παῖς | εἰ. , 


XI. Vss. 1155-1165 (Leipsic ed. 1186-1195). 
STROPHE (a. 

. 1 [ὦ yévéat  βρόὅτῶν 

ὡς ὑ | μᾶς tod Kai | τῦ μῆ- 

. δὲν ζώ | σᾶς ἔνᾶριθμ | ὦ 

. τίς | yap, tig ἄνῆρ | πλἕον 

. τᾶς εὖ | δαϊμονϊᾶς | φἔρεϊ 

ἢ Too | ovTOY ὅσον | δὄκεῖν᾽ 

καὶ δόξ | ἄντ’ aroKAt | vat 

. τὸ σόν | Tol Tapadetyp’ | ἔχῶν 

. τὸν σὸν | daipova, τὸν | σὸν ὦ 

. τλᾶμον | Οτδίποδα, | βρδτῶν 


SCODNaANR YN 


»ὦ 


11. οὐ | déva μᾶκαριξζ | ὦ. 
. Glyconic. 
. Glyconic, with a spondee in the base. 
. Pherecratic. 
. Glyconic. 


Glyconic, with a spondee in the base. 
. Glyconic, with a trochee in the base. 
. Pherecratic. 

. Glyconic, with an iambus in the base. 


DERN WD κα 


ΠῚ. The choriambus in this line answers to the iambic syzygy in the 
corresponding verse of the chorus. Compare Hermann, Elem. Docér. 
Metr. p. 160, ed. Lips.—Id. Epi. p. 160. 


180 CHORAL SCANNING 


9. Glyconic, with a spondee in the base. 
10. Glyconic, with a trochee in the base. 
11, Pherecratic.' 


XI. Vss. 1166-1176 (Leipsic ed. 1196-1203). 
ANTISTROPHE Ud. 

1. ὅσ | tic κἄθ᾽ ὑπὲρ | θδλᾶν 
2. togev | σᾶς ExpatH | σᾶς τοῦ 
3. πάντ᾽ Ev | δαϊμᾶνδς 6A6 | οὔ 
4. ὦ | Ζεῦ, nata μὲν | φθίσᾶς 
5. τὰν γαμῳ | Gvoya πᾶρθ | ἕνδς 
6. χρησμῳ | δὸν: ϑανατῶν | δ᾽ Eva 
7. χώρᾳ | πύργῦς ἄνεστ | ἂς 
8. ἐξ ov | καὶ θᾶσϊλεῦς | KaAet 
9. ἐμὸς, | καὶ τᾶ μέγιστ᾽ | ἔτι- 
10. μάθης, | ταῖς μέγᾶλαϊσ | ἕν ἔν 
11. Θή | θαϊσῖν ἄνᾶσσ | ὧν. 


XII. Vss. 1177-1187 (Leipsic ed. 1204-1212). 


STRoPHE 13’. ν 


. Tavov | δ᾽ ἄκοῦ || εἴν, | Tic GOA | τῶ || TEpde | 
. Tle Ev | πὄνοϊσ || tv, | Tic ἃ | ταῖς ayp | tai¢ 
. ξῦνοι | κῦς GAA || aya | Biovd | 

. τῷ κλεῖνὸν | Otdt | ποῦ Kap || ἃ 

. ὦ μὲγ | ἂς λὶμ || qv 

αὐτὸς | ἡρκἕσ || ἔν 

. tatdt | καὶ πᾶτρ || τ 

. ϑαλᾶμῆ | TOAD || πεσεῖν 

. πῶς πὅτξ, | THC πῦθ᾽ | ai πᾶτρ | Gato’ | 

. ἄλδκες | φέρεϊν, || τἄλᾶς | 

11. σῖγ᾽ ἔδυναᾶσθη | ody ες | τῦσον || dé. 


Ὁ “ ὦ σι 'ὰ τ ἐδ μα 


— 
oO 


1. The first syllable of the choriambus is resolved into two short. 


OF THE CDIPUS TYRANNUS. 181 


. Iambic monometer hypercat. and dimeter brach. 

. Iambic monom. hypercat. and ischiorrhogic iambi. 
Iambic dimeter. 

. Antispastic monom. and trochaic monom. hypercat. 
. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic. 

. The same measure. 

. The same measure. 

. Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

. Logacedic. 

. Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic. 

. Antispastic monom. and iambic monom. hypercat. 


Ὁ OD BD δι ναὶ wD καὶ 


» μα 
-Φ 


XII. Vss. 1188-1198 (Leipsic ed. 1213-1222). 
ANTISTROPHE (0. 

. ἔφεῦρ | Eo G|| κονθ᾽ | 6 πᾶνθ᾽ | δρῶν || ypdvac | 

Aika | diKag || et | yapov ἃ | γᾶμον || πᾶλαϊ |} 

. TEKVODVT | ἄ καὶ || TEKVOD | μένον. || 

τῷ Adi | elov | τἕμνον || * 

. £108 | σ᾽, Elbe | * 

. μηπῦτ᾽ | etd || wav 

dvpou | αἱ yap || ὥς 

. TEpPLGAA | taxy || τῶν | 

. Ek στὅμᾶ | τῶν Td | δ᾽ σρθν | εἰπεῖν | 

. ἄνἔπνεῦ | σὰ τ’ Ex || σέθεν | 

. καὶ κατξκοϊμῆσ | a τοῦ | μὸν ὄμμ | ἄ. 


tel 
KH ΘΟ “Ὁ δ᾽ ὅν καὶ WN καὶ 


XIII. Vss. 1272-1282 (Leipsic ed. 1297-1306). 


ANAPESTICS. 


1. ὦ δεῖν | ὅν ἴδεῖν || παθὸς av | Oparoic || 
2. ὦ δεῖν | ὅτᾶτον || TavTAY | ὅσ᾽ ἔγῶ || 
3. mpooéKvpo’ | 707 || τῖς σ᾽, ὦ | τλαμῶν || 


1. We have adopted Herrnann’s reading in this and the corresponding 
lume of the strophe. 
Q 


CHORAL SCANNING 


. mpooeby | pavia ; || tic 6 πῆ | δῆσᾶς || 

. μειζονᾶ | δαϊμῶν || τῶν pa | κιστῶν || 

. πρὸς of | dvodat || μᾶνϊ μοῖρ | ἃ (Parcmiac.) 
. φεῦ φεῦ | δυστᾶν᾽. || GAA’ οὐδ᾽ | ἔσϊδεῖν || 

. δυνᾶμαϊ | σ᾽, ἔθελῶν || TOAA’ ἄνξρ | ἔσθαϊ ἢ 

. πολλᾶ πῦ | θέσθαϊ, || πολλᾶ δ᾽ GOp | Hoar || 

. τοϊᾶν | φρικῆν || πᾶρἔχεϊς | wot. (Ῥατοιηϊδο.) 


XIV. Vss. 1283-1287 (Leipsic ed. 1807-1311). 


ar Ow = 


mr On = 


Ἡς 
2. 


)_ ee ----- ----- 

1. A proceleusmaticus in the first place. On the admissibility of this 
foot into anapestic measure, consult Hermann, lem. Doctr. Metr. p. 
243, ed. Glasg. 

2. We have adopted Hermann’s arrangement. 
versus ultimus constat duobus dochmiacis, quo genere versuum s@pe clau- 
duntur systemata, usque premisso proceleusmatico.” Herm. ad loc. 

3. With regard to the iambic monometer preceding the dochmiac 


ANAP#ESTICS. 


. Gt at, | at ai, | 

. φεῦ, φεῦ" | δυστᾶ || voc ἔγῶ. | ποῖ γᾶς || 
. pépbpat | τλαμῶν ; || πᾶ pol | φθογγᾶ || 
. OiaTETE | ταῖ τᾶς || ἄϊῶ | φορᾶδῆν ||’ 

. χῷ δαϊμν | iv’ εξηλλοῦ. 


XV. Vss. 1290-1293 (Leipsic ed. 1313-1316). 


STROPHE ly’. 


. χῷ | oxdro [1 


νέφος Euov ἅπδτρδπον | ἕπίπλῦμενον ἄφᾶτδν" 


. ἄδαμᾶτον TE καὶ | δύσοῦριστον ὃν 
. oipot. | ° 


Jambic monometer 
Dochmiac dimeter. 


measure, consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p. 116, seq. 


4. Respecting the resolution of the dochmius into eight short sylla- 


bles, consult Seidler, de V. D. p. 68. 
5. Regarded by some as a semantus trochee. 


“Ἐπ mea descriptione 


OF THE CDIPUS TYRANNUS. 183 


3. The same measure. 
4, Extra metrum. 


XV. Vss. 1297-1300 (Leipsic ed. 1321-1324). 


ANTISTROPHE Ly’. 


1. 16 | φῖλος | 

2. ov μὲν ἔμδς ἔπϊπολος | ETL μοᾶνϊμος ETL yap 
8. ὕὑπομξνεϊς μὲ τὸν | TUPAGY κηδεθῶν 

4. φεῦ dev. | 


XVI. Vss. 1305-1310 (Leipsic ed. 1329-1334). 
STROPHE 10’. 
1. “ἀπολλῶν τᾶἄδ᾽ ἣν | ~ATOAA | ὧν, ὦ || φίλοι | 
2. ὅ κἄλᾶ | Tad’ Eua | τελῶν | κακᾶ τἄδ᾽ Eva πᾶθξᾶ | 
3. Erato | & δ᾽ αὖ || τὄχεϊρ | viv ov || Tig GAA | ἔγῶ || 
τλαμῶν | 
4. Ti yap Edel μ᾽ Spar | 
5. ὅτῶ | γ᾽ δρῶν || ti μῆ | δὲν ἣν || δεῖν | γλῦκῦυ. || 
6. ἣν ταῦθ᾽, | ὅπῶς || περ Kat | od φῆς. ἢ 


. Dochmiac monometer and ischiorrhogic iambi. 
. Ischiorrhogic iambi and dochmiac monometer. 
. Iambic trimeter and semantus trochee. 

. Dochmiac monometer. 

. Iambic trimeter. 

. Iambic dimeter. 


ork Wd = 


XVII. Vss. 1811-1317 (Leipsic ed. 1337-1343). 


STROPHE LE. 
. τι | δῆτ᾽ Euot | βλεπτὸν ἢ | 
. στερκτῦν | ἢ πρῦσ || ἢγῦρ | ὃν 
3. ἔτ᾽ ἔστ’ | ἄκοῦ || ety | Hdov | ἃ φῖλ || OF 


woe 


184 CHORAL SCANNING 


4. dmayés’ ExTontov | Ori τἄχιστᾶ μὲ 
5. adnayét’ ὦ φίλοι | τὸν ὄλεθρον péEyav 


7. ἐχθρότᾶτον βρῦτῶν. | 


. Cretic dimeter, with anacrusis.' 

. Trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

. Iambic monom. hyperc. and trochaic mon. hyperc. 
. Dochmiac dimeter.* 

The same measure. 

. The same measure? 

. Dochmiac monometer. 


XVI. Vss. 1820-1325 (Leipsic ed. 1349-1354). 


ANTISTROPHE 10’. 


— 


. ὅλοιθ᾽ δστῖς ἣν | ὅς an’ ayp | tae | πέδᾶς | 

. νὅμᾶδος | ἔπῖπῦδ | τᾶς | EAGBE μ᾽ ἄπο TE Hovod | 

3. Eppv | τό Kav || ἔσῶσ | Ev οὐδ || & εἴς | yapir ἢ} 
πρᾶσσῶν | 

4. TOTE γὰρ av ϑᾶνῶν | 

« οὐκ ἣν | φίλοι || otv οὔδ᾽ | Euot || τόσονδ᾽ | ἄχος. ἢ} 

6. ϑέλοντ |  κᾶ || μοὶ τοῦτ’ | ἄν ἣν. || 


ἴω 


ao 


XVII. Vss. 1326-1332 (Leipsic ed. 1857-13638). 
ANTISTROPHE ἐξ. 

. οὔκ οὖν πᾶτρος | γ᾽ GY φῦν EvC 

. ἡλθὸν | οὐδὲ || νυμφὶ | ὃς 

. βρῦτοις | ἕκλῆ || θὴν | ὧν E | φῦν ἄπ || 6 

. νῦν δ᾽ ἄθξος μὲν εἴμ’ | ἄνδσϊῶν δὲ παῖς 

. μὄγξνῆς δ᾽ ad’ ὧν | αὑτὸς ἔφῦν τἄλᾶς 


ὧι ἢ). ὦ Ww = 


1. Seidler, de Versibus Dochmaacis, p. 144. 
2. Ibid., p. 58. 
3. Compare Hermamn, ad loc. 


OF THE CDIPUS TYRANNUS. 185 
6. εἴ δὲ Ti πρεσθυτἕρον | EMD KaKOD κακον 
7. τοῦτ᾽ ἔλᾶχ᾽ Oidirovc. | 


XVIII. Vss. 1490-1496 (Leipsic ed. 1524-1530). 
Trocuaic TETRAMETERS CATALECTIC. 
1. ὦ πᾶτρ | ἄς O76 || je Ev | οἴκοϊ || Aedookr’, | O77 || 


ποὺς 6d ξ 

2. ὃς τᾶ | κλεῖν’ αἷν || τγμᾶτ᾽ | GOR, || καὶ κρᾶτ | ἱστὸς]! 
ἣν av | ἢρ 

8. dotic | οὔ SAA || ὦ TOA | trav || καὶ τῦχ | aig ἔπ || 
τθλἔπ | ὧν 

4. εἰς ὅσ | dv κλῦδ || Gra | δεϊνῆς || συμφὸρ | Ge EA |] 
ἡλῦ | θὲν 

5. ὥστὲ | ϑνητὸον || ὄντ᾽, = | κεϊνὴν || τῆν TEA | evrat | 
av id | ety 

6. ἡμὲρ | Gv ἔπ || toxdr | οὐντᾶ, || μηδὲν | σλόιξζ || ety 
πρὶν | av 

7. τερμᾶ | τοῦ bi || οὔ πὲρ | Go", || μῆδὲν | ἄλγεῖν || ὃν 
πὰθ | ὧν. 


Q 2 


Blea! 15. cee ἂν ee 
oe SA ee 
i Hi . a 
SESE CUDA GAR ERE Δ. 


ἀν ἀπ τ, 
ΤΑΎΤΗΝ 


PAR hey. 


INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES. 


“ 
ἢ 
‘ 
————— 


-- τ eA ν eA ae 


τ δὼ ᾿ ᾿ ᾿ | ee 


Ἢ i wo 


ἐν | i “τἀν τ hae t wil ᾿ 


wt , 
ἮΝ ᾿ | 
1 εἰ 
᾿ ᾿ i : | 
. δὲ - ; 
Ψ ὦ ὦ ΩΝ “> * ~~ . | 
τ APR Cn AD Mee Nya in, 
: 
i" τ τὰν ἊΣ" " 
4 Tg te Ἵ 
i , ᾿ ‘ ' ᾿ 
5 . 
. Ν ω ᾿ ἣ 
᾿ . ; ; | 
J - μ ᾿ ; 
᾿ γι ω J . ; 
y 
- : : 
- . 7 a i 7 
- ‘J τῷ Υ | | 
‘ 3 ὡ ᾿ “1 . 
, ἁ acy 
ἢ + as J * ᾿ | | 
᾿ ἢ ἣ Ι' ᾿ : : 
[ Ν ᾿ ᾿ ᾿ | 
ὮΝ " ; J ἜΝ ᾿ ᾿ - . . 
t Ἵ ῥ : ‘ : ᾿ 
i) y i ἦ 
᾿ Φ ὶ -᾿ - ΤΑ f . 


“he 7 | 
’ : | 
- * * ; 
at i i } 
᾿ 5 Ὴ 
᾿ ' - ᾿ 
᾿ ‘ ‘ Ἢ ᾿ : 
4 ᾽ | 
_— | 
¥ ῃ ; ᾿ (eae 


INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES. 


I. OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL. 


I. Tue farther comparative philology carries back its researches into 
the earlier periods of the history of language, the more convinced do we 
become that all the spoken idioms of the globe have originated from one 
common source, and, consequently, that all the members of our race 
may trace their descent from one common parentage. 

II. The idea of a primitive language for our species, though often 
made a subject of ridicule by the superficial and half-learned inquirer, 
rests on too firm a basis to be shaken, and connects itself too closely with 
the earliest traditions of our race, as recorded in the sacred writings, to 
leave any doubt of its truth on the mind of the philologist. 

III. What this primitive language may have been is, of course, all un- 
certainty, and each investigator is here left to the conclusions of his own 
judgment. It would seem, however, that a very large portion of this 
early vocabulary consisted of terms which sought to imitate, by their 
sounds, the various movements of the natural world, such as the noise of 
thunder, the roaring of the tempest, the gentle or rapid flow of waters, 
and the different cries of the animal creation. 

IV. The simple narrative of Scripture, which represents the Deity as 
bringing into the presence of our first parent the numerous creatures 
that peopled his new domains, in order that the progenitor of our race 
might give each its appropriate name, is only another way of stating that 
the germe of language is a faculty inherent in the soul, and that the ap- 
pellations given by Adam to the various members of the animal kingdom 
consisted simply of imitations of their peculiar cries, or of attempts to 
express, in strong though inartificial terms, some striking peculiarity of 
structure. 

V. Following up this idea, we will come naturally to the conclusion 
that, in the ir“ancy of our species, a close sympathy, founded on immu- 
table laws, must have united the visible to the intellectual world, and 
that the result of this sympathy manifested itself in a variety of simple 
but expressive sounds, which, by gradual combinations and progressive 
improvement, formed eventually the splendid fabric of language. 


190 OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL. 


VI. The earliest spoken idiom of our race was necessarily analogous 
to the sensations which gave it birth. Melodious sounds were employed 
to express soft and gentle emotions ; sounds of a rough or harsh nature 
served to indicate what was painful or unpleasing ; beauty, activity, and 
strength were each depicted, as it were, by different intonations, and 
thus each syllable became a kind of musical note, the peculiar force of 
which we are still, in many cases, able to perceive, though so many ages 
have intervened.! 

VII. To pretend to analyze, however, at the present day, all these 
accordances of the soul of man with external nature ; to endeavour to 
show how each rapid perception of form, of movement, and of colour, 
affected in different ways the internal sense, and was then enunciated 
by some particular sound, is a task which presents insuperable difficul- 
ties, and bids defiance to the most ingenious hypotheses. 

VIII. The utmost that we can ascertain respecting the earlier move- 
ments of language is simply this: that primitive words must have been 
comparatively few in number, and all of them monosyllabic ; that each 
element of these syllables, designating as it did some principal object, 
was soon applied, in various combinations, to a series of other objects 
analogous to the first, which last served in their turn as types for new 
analogies ; and that thus, by a progressive march, the same sounds be- 
came applied to a multitude of things, always more and more removed 
from each other, and the affiliation of which, though real, became con- 
tinually less apparent. 

IX. Guided by that instinct of comparison or assimilation so inherent 
in the human mind, thought, though infinite in its essence, submitted, 
nevertheless, to the restrictive forms of language, and yielded itself 
to general laws, which arranged in the same class all things that were 
susceptible of partial approximation. Hence we see, in the most ancient 
languages, and those that are nearest the infancy of our species, the ideas 
of height and depth, of hollowness and convexity, of light and heat, of 
cold and gloom, expressed by one and the same sound, as being of one 
and the same origin. 

X. The rapid increase of the human family, and the corresponding in- 
crease of their relations and wants; the modification of material objects 
by the inventive spirit of man, and his subjugation of the domain of na- 
ture, in order to adapt it more immediately to his use, all tended to the 
gradual but sure development of what had at first been little better than 
the union of a few simple sounds ; and language, departing in this way 
more and more from its monosyllabic, changed at last into what may be 
called a polysyllabic, character. 


1. Eichoff, Paralléle des Langues, &c., p. 4, seq. 


OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL. 191 


XI. The division of the human family, by their necessary dispersion 
in quest of new and more distant abodes, soon brought about other and 
more important changes. Separated from each other by wide intervals, 
by mountains, rivers, and seas, intervals which great terrestrial revolu- 
tions contributed from time to time to increase, the various tribes that 
had migrated from home wrought out each their peculiar idiom under 
influences of the most opposite character. Melodious in the temperate 
regions of the globe, languid under the fires of the tropics, strong and 
rough amid the snows and ice of the north, language was employed 
under these different characters to depict respectively the contemplative 
life of the shepherd, the listless inactivity of the tenant of southern 
climes, and the menacing cries of hardy and warlike tribes ; and, in this 
way, what were at first intonations common to all, became, under each of 
these three distinct influences, as different as were the characters of the 
different tribes or races that employed them. 

XII. Amid the yarious movements of our race, some tribes, in re- 
moving from the common centre of civilization, fell into barbarism ; while 
others, more fortunate, attained, in process of time, to a high degree of 
culture. Among the former, continually agitated and divided as they 
were by intestine wars, language, which had already begun to degenerate, 
broke off into a multitude of idioms, as vague and fluctuating as they 
were strange and incoherent. Among civilized communities, on the 
other hand, which, by reason of a fertile soil and peaceable possession, 
had it in their power to lead an intellectual life, and to make themselves 
acquainted with sciences and arts, language became more and more pol- 
ished, and, extending itself in a constant and uniform manner, knew no 
other limits save the frontiers of the race. Hence we perceive that the 
idioms of Europe have al! a common physiognomy, whereas those of the 
aborigines of our own country differ almost continually in the case of 
each petty tribe. 

XIII. The conclusions, then, which we are authorized to draw from 
a careful examination of this most interesting subject are manifestly the 
following: 1. There was originaily but one! single language ; 2. What 
are called languages are, in fact, only different dialects of this primitive 
tongue ; 3. The form of words varies, but their essence undergoes no 


1. “Sise comparan hoy las muchas lenguas que hay esparcidas por la superficie 
del glovo, se vera que todas ellas descienden de una sola, y que guardan tal herman- 
da y analogia en su estructura, que no seran otra cosa que la misma lengua primi- 
tiva variada, cambiada, enriquecida.”” (Zamacola.)—‘ 1] résulte de ces principes, 
que parmi les hordes les moins civilisées, il est impossible d’en trouver une seule 
dont le vocabulaire ne presente un certain nombre de mots également usités dans les 
dialectes les plusconnus Mais les ‘ innwmere lingue dissimillime inter se, ita ut 
nullis machinis ad communem originem retrahi possint,’ voila ce qu’on chercherait 


en vain sur notre globe.” (Mérian, Principes de U Etude comparative des Langues, 
p- 3, in notis.) 


192 OF ROOTS. 


change; 4. The essence of words is in the roots, and in the elements 
which compose these roots. 


II. OF ROOTS. 


I. In every word composed of several syllables, a single one alone of 
these comprises the fundamental idea of the word, and is termed the 
radical syllable. The others are merely accessory, and serve to modify 
the meaning of the primitive one. 

II. All roots are monosyllabic, and consist generally of three letters, 
a consonant, a vowel, and a consonant. 

III. With regard to what are erroneously styled ‘dissyllabic roots, it 
will be well to bear constantly in mind the judicious observation of Ade- 
lung :! “ Every word, without exception, may be reduced to a monosyl- 
labie root, and ought to be so reduced if we wish to follow the path 
which nature has traced out for us. If the grammarians, who laboured 
on the Semitic tongues, misled by a blind regard for rabbinical authority, 
still hold to the doctrine of dissyllabic roots, this error only shows the 
proneness of man towards everything complicated and intricate, at the 
expense of simplicity and the clearest indications of nature.” 

IV. For example, to carry out the idea of Adelung, why are we to re- 
gard katal as a root in Hebrew, when we have in Latin ced-o, and in 
English cut? Why call karaé, galal, or marar radicals when they can 
be traced respectively to kar, gal, and mar? He who should doubt 
whether the roots just mentioned be really so or not, would doubt, in like 
manner, whether the syllables ced in cedo, car in caro, cap ἴῃ capio, mar 
in mare, κυλ in κυλίω, εἷλ in εἱλέω, be radicals, and would end by with- 
holding his assent from the clearest and most positive principles.2 

V. A similar error is sometimes committed even by those who inves- 
tigate the Sanscrit language. Thus, in many of the elementary works 
published by them, we find such roots as bri or bhri, djna, kram, srip, 
stou, tri, trip, trou, &c. Now these are, in fact, only lengthened forms, 
including a contracted root, or one that has lost its vowel. ‘The root of 
bri is bar, ber, &c., and the contraction has given bri. This radical may 
be traced in the Greek $ép-w, the Latin fer-o, and the English “ to bear.” 
The root of djna is ken or ghen, the consonant g being pronounced like 
dj, as in many English words ; and this root may be traced in the Greek 
γιν-ώσκω and in the English ken. ‘The root of kram is kar, lengthened 
into karam, and then contracted into kram. The root of srip is sar, ser, 
&c., preserved in the Latin serp-o, the Greek ép7-w, and the Latin rep-o, 


1. Mithridates, vol. i., p. 301, seq. 


2. Merian,p. 10. Compare Klaproth sur les Racines des Langues Sémitiques, 
appended to Mérian’s work. 


OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 193 


belonging to the same source. The root of stow is sat, sot, sout, &c., 
whence the Persian soutow or south-ou, and the Latin suad-eo. And so, 
in like manner, of the rest.! 


Ill. OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 


I. The numerous points of resemblance that exist between different 
languages would be rendered still more apparent and striking, were we 
not often arrested in our inquiries by the change of consonants belonging 
to the same series, and which are often employed the one for the other. 

II. In the European alphabets the utmost confusion prevails. The 
series of consonants is nowhere apparent in them, and there is nothing 
by which we can perceive the relations which consonants produced by 
the same organ respectively bear to each other, and the propriety which 
exists for their being mutually interchanged. This propriety gives rise 
to an almost infinite number of variations, to which we find it extremely 
difficult to accustom ourselves, from the irregular disposition of our own 
alphabetic characters. 

III. The alphabet of the Sanscrit tongue is in this respect much more 
philosophically arranged, though still even its disposition is far from be- 
ing perfect. 

IV. The order in which the Sanscrit letters are arranged is as fol- 
lows : 


First Series. Long and short vowels and diphthongs. 
Seconp Series. Guttural consonants and their modifications. 


k ch 9g. gh. ng 


σ. 
Tuirp Series. Palatals, which have an analogy with the prece- 
ding : 
tch. tchh. dj. dyjh. ny. 
Fourtu Series. Consonants which the grammarians designate 
by the name of cerebrals.? 
fly ths, χα dhs!) Th 
Firtu Series. Dentals. 
Ca a Ra a 8 
Sixt Series. Labials. 
ΡΠ ΝΡ ~ bh. 7m: 


1. Meérian, p. 29, seq. 

2. The cerebrals are pronounced by turning and applying the tip of the tongue far 
back against the palate, which producing a hollow sound, asif proceeding from the 
head, is distinguished by the term murddhkanya or cerebral. (Wilkins, Sanscrit 
Grammar, p. 8.) R 


194 OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 


Sevenrn Series. Semivowels. 
Yo ΔῊ alae). Vs 
E1eutH Series. Sibilants and aspirates. 
ΕΞ Yh 


V. This arrangement would be more regular if the sibilant and aspi- 
rated consonants followed immediately after the palatals, for they often 
confound themselves with these. 

VI. An alphabet rectified in this way will present four series of homo- 
geneous consonants, under which all those which one can imagine, and 
that can only be modifications of the former, easily admit of being ranged." 
Thus ; 


if II Ill. IV. 
k. 8 n. I. 
Wh. j m L 
g. ch b. y 
ng. h. p- 
tch. kh. ft 
dj. v. 

1. 

d. 


VII. There exists an affinity between the first and second series by 
means of the mutual relations which £, #’h, and g have with kh or h aspi- 
rated, and by means of those which ¢, d, tch, dj, bear to ch, s, and 1. 

VIII. The third and fourth series have fewer points of contact. Nev- 
ertheless, g often changes into h, kh, and v ; the letters f and hare often 
confounded ; the v of the third and the y of the fourth series connect 
themselves with the vowel sounds; the liquids J, m, m frequently supply 
each other’s place; while, in many idioms, m, d, and r are also con- 
founded. 

IX. The mutual interchange of vowels is of so frequent occurrence 
that it cannot be taken at all into account in the comparison of languages 
and dialects. Indeed, it often happens that, in the same idiom, the dif- 
ference of vowe} sounds only serves to indicate certain modifications of 
the root. 


First Example. Drawn from the French. 
J’-ai, tu a-s, ils o-nt, j’-a-y-ais, ]’-eu-s, }’-au-rais. 


Second Example. Drawn from the change of vowels in the Ger- 


— 


1. Merian, p. 32. 


OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 195 


man word stezn (stone), which in the different cognate dialects 
varies as follows : 


German 3 ς 4 stein. 
Gothic . oe a Ἢ stains. 
Anglo-Saxon . ἢ ᾿ βίαῃ. 
English : : 5 stone. 
Dutch . A ᾿ : steen. 
Cimbric : : Σ stoane. 
Tslandic : F ι stein. 
Frison . : : : sting. 
Swedish ‘ δ ᾿ sten. 
Danish . : : 5 steen. 


X. In the words liebe (love) and lieben (to love), not only the vowels, 
but the very consonants are modified. Thus: 


German : . 4 liebe. 
Sclavonic . : ; huby. 
Illyrian . : : c gloubav. 
Vende . : A : liobotch. 
Anglo-Saxon . ἢ 5 lufe. 
English : : : love. 
Dutch . : ἐ : hiefde. 
Frison . ; : : liwe. 
Finnish : : : giouve. 
Permian : : : lioubov. 


XI. The case is the same with the German word graben (to hollow 
out). 


Gothic . 2 : : graba. 


Old German . : . grapo. 
German : : 2 graben. 
Danish . : ᾿ : grave. 
Swedish : : grafva. 
Esthonian. 3 5 krawt. 
Lappish . : ᾿ “τοιορία. 
Finnish : : ravi. 
Russian 3 : : του. 
Georgian 4 : : rowt. 
Illyrian . ὃ : A rouppa. 


XII. A remark here very naturally presents itself: if variations such 
as these occur in dialects which belong all, or nearly all, to one and the 


196 OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT, 


same family, what must the changes be that occur in dialects belonging 
to different families of languages! And this single remark will serve us 
as a guide in many an intricate speculation into linguistic affinities. 

XIII. Let us now pass to the variations of consonants, and give a few 
examples in each of the series indicated under § VI. 


First anp Seconp SERIES. 


German kirche 

English church 

Sclavonic tserk-ov >church. 
Swedish kyrka 

Danish kirk 

German gieb-el and gipf-el! 
Arabic djeb-el and gheb-el 
German kopp-e 

Sclavonic sop-ka summit. 
Turkish top-a, tub-e, tepp-e 
English top 

Swedish lopp 

German kehl-e2 

Latin . gul-a 

French gueul-e 
Armenian koul 

Georgian ghel-i — 
Arabic Welq 

Mongul ὃ ς khol-oi 

Old German khel-e 

German zahn 

Dutch tand 

Swedish tand 

Latin . dens toot 
French dent 

Hebrew chen J 
German kopf 

Dutch hoofd 

English head 

Swedish hufved »>head. 
Danish hoved 

German haupt 

Samoiede ngaib-a J 


The interchange of 7' and D, and of P and B, is very common in 
German. That of F' and His frequent in Spanish. Thus, from the 
Latin facere, the Spanish forms hacer ; from filius, hijo; from formosus, 


hermoso. 


1. Compare the English gable. 
2. Compare the English hollow 


OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 19% 


The interchange of F and Kh exists in the different dialects of Japan. 
Thus, the inhabitants of the isle of Sikokf say 


Khirando for Firando, the name of a city. 


khana “  fana, _the nose. 
khasst ἐδ asst, a bean. 
khehi τες fed: a snake. 
khisa py (RY the knees. 
khone fone, a bone. 


khourou “ fourou, ἰο shake. 


The interchange of S, H, or Kh, is also very frequent. For example, 


German, _salz, salt, : Breton, hal-on. 
Matin, ¢, sal,s, “ : Old German, hail.! 
Slavonic, serdtse, heart, German, hertz. 
Slavonic, zim-a, winter, Greek, χεῖμα, 


Latin, hiems. 


Changes also take place between the sibilants and gutturals. Thus, 


Armenian . " sar 
Hebrew . ᾿ har 
Greek ῆ : ὅρ-ος ἐκ 
Slavonic i ; gor-a mountain. 
Afghan Ἢ ghar 
Arintse ΤῊΣ ΤῊΝ kar 


There is also an affinity between K and Sh. Thus, many Sanscrit 
roots which commence with Sh begin in Latin and Greek with C or Καὶ ; 


as, 
Sanscrit, shoun®-a, . a dog, 5 Latin, can-is, Greek, κύων. 
τς sham-a, . softness, . “-. com-is. 
Se shad-a, . to fall, ὦ NOTES 
a Shach-a, . tokill,- . “Ὁ  0C-Cis-US, C@S-US. 


Tutrp SERIEs. 


The letters M, B, P, are employed for one another in the Turkish di- 
alects. Thus, for 


bouz, . . they say : mouz, ice. 
boinuz, . , cei τος f momuz, ahorn. 
Bahhmout, Ξ Seales ? Mahmoud (a name.) 
michik, . : ceo ce : pichak, a cat. 


1. Hence the name of the city of Halle, derived from the neighbouring salt- -mines. 

2. This interchange is very frequent in Greek and Latin; as, gorw, serpo; ἕξ, sex; 
ἅλς, sal, &c. 

3. Compare the German hund and the English hound. 


2 


198 OF THE AFFILIATION OF LANGUAGES. 


The root of the Latin faba, “a bean,” is found in the Slavonic bob 
and in the French feve. So also numerous instances might be cited 
where F is put for B and B for V. 


Fourta SErizs. 


In all languages there is a mutual and very frequent change between 
Land R. Thus, 


Greek, πῦρ, : : Ὥτο οἷ. Ἢ Russian, pyl. 
“Ὁ φράγελλον, . ascourge, . Latin, flagellum. 
“© Δείριον, Ρ alily, ἡ 5 ae hiiwm. 
Latin, titulus, . F a title, . : French, titre. 
«<  eprstola, ὁ anepistle, . τ epitre. 
SimcapuUlum, ° achapter, . cc chapitre. 
“  apostolus, . an apostle, . s apotre. 
cc  ulmus, . ‘ an elm, A orme. 


The Japanese, in the greater part of their provinces, cannot pronounce 
L, but use R in its stead, while with the Chinese the case is directly the 
reverse. 

The vowel that is found between two consonants in the root often 
disappears, and the two consonants then follow in immediate succession. 


Thus, | 


Greek, χαράττω, ; German, kratzen. 
“ κολάπτω, 2 - klopfen. 
ἐς κολούω, é ce klieben. 
ce en AT ς < ἐξ klaue. 


IV. OF THE AFFILIATION OF LANGUAGES. 


I. It is acommon but very great error, to represent languages as pro- 
ceeding from one another in a kind of perpendicular line of descent, one 
tongue disappearing in order to make way for another. 

II. The true doctrine represents all languages as moving on, side by 
side, from one common source, some developing themselves and attain- 
ing to maturity at an earlier, others at a later period, but all pursuing an 
onward and simultaneous course, and no one of the number proceeding 
from or produced by the other. 

III. It must be borne in mind, however, that we are here speaking of 
separate and distinct languages, such as the Sanscrit, the Greek, the 
Latin, German, &c., and not of such as are merely corrupt dialects of 
some parent tongue, or, in other words, that same tongue reappearing 
in an altered and more barbarous form. ‘Thus, the Italian, French, 


OF THE INDO-GERMANIC TONGUES. 199 


Spanish, and Portuguese are only, in strictness, so many corrupt dia- 
lects of the parent Latin ; and yet, at the same time, they may be truly 
said to possess an affiliation among themselves. 

IV. This affiliation between the Italian, French, Spanish, and Portu- 
guese, will serve to explain what we mean by affiliation in the case of 
the Indo-Germanic tongues. As the former all sprang from one com- 
mon source, the Latin, and have pursued an onward route, side by side, 
so the Zend, the Sanscrit, the Greek, the Latin, the German, and other 
Indo-Germanic tongues, have all come from some parent tongue, now 
lost, and have all pursued routes side by side with each other, some of 
them attaining to an early, others to a late maturity. To quote the 
graphic language of Ovid, 


“¢ Facies non omnibus una, 
Nec diversa tamen, qualem decet esse sororum.” 


V. OF THE INDO-GERMANIC TONGUES. 


I. The term Indo-Germanic is applied by philologists to the group of 
nations extending from India, along central Asia, and throughout the 
Continent of Europe. 

II. This group, more strictly speaking, is divided into six principal 
families, the Indian, Persian, Greco-Roman, Slavonic, and Celtic. 

III. All the languages coming under the general appellation of Indo- 
Germanic, whether in India, Persia, or Europe, and whether considered 
with reference to their structure or phraseology, are originally identical ; 
that is to say, they are composed of the same primitive roots, which the 
influence of climate, of national pronunciation, and of logical combina- 
tions, has in various degrees affected and modified. 

IV. Before entering, however, more fully into the analogies between 
these tongues, we will give a brief sketch of each language, in order 
that the points of resemblance between them may be more clearly un- 
derstood. 


INDIAN LANGUAGES. 


I. At the head of these is to be placed the Sanscrit, the sacred idiom 
of the Brahmins, and the common source of all the languages of India. 
Its name means “ complete,” “perfect,” or ‘ altogether finished,” from 
stim, “altogether,” and krita, “done ;” and hence is equivalent to the 
Latin confectus.1 

II. This very name “ Sanscrit’” is one among many proofs of the high 
antiquity of the language ; for if it plainly point to an antecedent state 


1. Wilkins’s Sanserit Grammar, p. 1.—Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, Ὁ. iv. 


200 INDIAN LANGUAGES. 


of the tongue in question, when as yet the language had not become 
completely settled, and if, as has been well ascertained, the most posi- 
tive literary monuments carry back the Sanscrit, in its actual form, to 
more than fifteen centuries before our era ; for how long a period must 
it have existed prior to this, in a fluctuating and changing state, before 
it finally settled down into an established tongue, and became entitled 
to the appellation of “‘ completely formed !”” 

III. The Sanscrit has an alphabet of fifty characters ; but, upon ex- 
amining their powers with some degree of care, the number of simple ar- 
ticulations may be reduced to twenty-eight, namely, five vowels, and 
twenty-three consonants.! ᾿ 

IV. Sanscrit nouns are of three genders, masculine, feminine, and 
neuter. They have three numbers, singular, dual, and plural, and they 
are declinable through eight cases in each number.” 

V. The names of the cases are, the nominative, vocative, dative, ac- 
cusative, ablative, locative, instrumental, and genitive. The force of 
these will be explained more fully hereafter. 

Vi. The Sanscrit verb has two voices, the active and passive ; but 
the active voice has two forms, one with the ordinary transitive meaning, 
and the other with a reflexive or intransitive force, indicating that some 
action is exerted on the agent himself, or for his advantage or disadvan- 
tage. ‘This latter form is analogous to the middle voice in Greek. 

VII. The moods in Sanscrit are five in number, the indicative, poten- 
tial, imperative, precative, and conditional. Besides these, there occur 
im the Vedas fragments of another mood, which the grammarians term 
lét, and which corresponds to the Greek subjunctive. 

VIII. The indicative has six tenses, namely, a present, three preter- 
its, and two futures. The conjugations are ten. 

IX. The syntax of the Sanscrit is simple and logical, and the facility 
in compounding words, which the language so abundantly affords, opens 
one of the widest fields imaginable for the culture of poetry. Hence 
poetic writing enjoyed a decided ascendency during all the four ages of 
Indian literature. The primitive and religious epoch, marked by the 
Vedas, was soon followed, about the time of the heroic ages, by the laws 
of Menu, the Pouranas, or Annals of Mythology, and the gigantic poems 
of Ramayan and Mahabharat, which celebrate, the one the conquest of 


1. Those pretended philologists who regard the number of alphabetical characters 
in the Sanscrit as a proof of the modern origin of the language, appear to forget that 
they are thus adducing an argument in favour of the very side which they seek to op- 
pose. For if the appellation of “ Sanscrit” was only given to the tongue in question 
after it was completely formed, how many centuries must it have existed before its 
alphabet. was modernized by this large increase of characters ! 

2. Wilkins’s Sanscrit Grammar, p. 36 and 121, seg.—Bopp, Vergleichende Gram- 
matik, p. 617, seq. 


PERSIAN LANGUAGES. 201 


Ceylon, the other a contest between two dynasties, and the authors of 
which poems, at once bards and philosophers, appear like two majestic 
figures, the rivals and contemporaries of Homer. Soon after this suc- 
ceeds the elegant and polished era, a short period antecedent to Vir- 
gil, when Jayadevas produced his pastoral elegies, and Calidasas his 
beautiful poem of the Sacountala. After these commenced the decline 
of the language, which shows itself more and more in all subsequent pro- 
ductions.! 

X. The Sanscrit has ceased to be a spoken tongue, and is now studied 
in India as the Greek and Latin are with us. Even when in a living 
state, however, and at the period, too, of its greatest extension, it was 
only spoken by the privileged classes. The main body of the people 
employed what was called the Pracrit, that is, the “‘ natural” or “ spon- 
taneous” tongue. This Pracrit contained the same elements as the San- 
scrit, but under a rude and uncultivated form, and differing in each lo- 
cality. 

XI. Another language, more cultivated than the Pracrit, namely, the 
Pali, and which was spread formerly throughout the south of India, was 
adopted by the sect of the Buddhists, who, expelled by the Brahmins 
from their native land, carried beyond the Ganges into Thibet, and also 
into China, their dogmas, traditions, and literature, as preserved in their 
sacred books. 

XII. Of the modern dialects of India, which have arisen from the in- 
termingling of the ancient idiom with the languages of various races as 
brought in by conquest, we need only briefly speak. The most widely 
extended of these is the Hindoostanee, which, originating on the banks 
of the Indus, from the fusion of the Sanscrit and Arabic, has eventually 
established itself throughout all the Mogul empire and all Mohammedan 
India. The Bengalee, peculiar to the banks of the Ganges and to the 
worshippers of Brahma, has deviated least from the primitive language 
of the country. The Mahratta tongue in the north of the peninsula, the 
Tamoul and Telinga along the southern coasts, and the Maldivian in 
the isles of the same name, are the most important of those that remain, 
and are all in a greater or less degree derivatives from the Sanscrit, or, 
more correctly speaking, the Pracrit tongue.? 


PERSIAN LANGUAGES. 


I. The Persian family has for its primitive type the Zend, the sacred 
idiom of the magi, the language of Zoroaster, which, issuing from the 
same parent source as the Sanscrit, spread itself over the eastern part 


1. Eichoff, p. 22. 
ἃ. p. 23. 


2. I 


202 PERSIAN LANGUAGES. 


of Asia, among the worshippers of the sun, and has been preserved for 
us in the valuable fragments that remain of the Zend-Avesta.! 

II. The Zend was in use among the ancient Persians, as the Pehlvi, 
another idiom intermingled with Chaldee, was spoken by the Medes and 
Parthians. More masculine and more concise than the Sanscrit, but less 
varied in their terminations, these two languages, appropriated to warlike 
tribes, were written in cuneiform characters before having special alpha- 
bets. 

III. The theory of Rask attempts to explain the origin of the Zend 
and Sanscrit by a bold and ingenious hypothesis. According to this 
writer, the Scythian race had spread themselves, at a remote period an- 
tecedent to all positive history, over the whole of Northern and Central 
Asia, and had possessed themselves of India. The Japhetic race, how- 
ever, advanced subsequently into India from the eastern part of Persia, 
conquered the northern and more central parts of the former country, 
and drove the Scythian hordes towards the southern coasts, where the 
remnants of the race are, still, at the present day, distinguished by the 
darkness of their colour from the comparatively fairer hue of the Brah- 
mins. Out of the Japhetic language were framed, according to Rask, 
the Sanscrit and Zend.2 

IV. The Zend and the Pehlvi were displaced, about the commence- 
ment of our era, by the Parsi, a dialect of the same family, which, after 
being restricted for a long period to Persia proper, where it perfected 
itself more and more, became eventually, under the dynasty of the Sas- 
sanides, the dominant idiom of the whole empire. It preserved itself 
pure and unaltered until the period of the Mohammedan invasion, when, 
from a union of the Arabic with the national idiom, arose the modern 
Persian. 

V. The modern Persian, notwithstanding its double origin, which 
places it in the same relation to the Zend as that in which the English 
stands to the German, is nevertheless distinguished by conciseness and 
force, and full of grace and poetic spirit. The monuments erected by 
its writers, the Schahnameh of Firdausi, and the Gulistan of Saadi, give 
it a high literary importance, and plainly show what it is still able to ac- 
complish. Enriched at one and the same time by Arabic and Indian 
roots, the terminations of which it abridges, simple and clear in its syn- 
tax, expressive in its compounds, it is with good reason regarded as the 
most polished language of modern Asia. 

VI. Around the Persian are grouped, at distances more or less re- 


1, By the Zend-Avesta are meant the sacred writings of the early Persians, in which 
the religion of Zoroaster is set forth. The work was first made known to Europe by 
Anquetil. 

2. Ueber das Alter und die Echtheit der Zendsprache. Berlin, 1826. 


GRECO-ROMAN LANGUAGES. 203 


mote, certain rude and barbarous idioms, such as the Afghan, spoken 
in the kingdom of Caboul ; the Belowtche, on the confines of India ; the 
Kourde, among the mountaineers of Persia ; and, finally, the tongue of 
the Ossetes, in the range of Caucasus, which is the most remarkable of 
all, as affording indubitable traces of the great migration of Indian com- 
munities into Europe. 

VII. Before leaving this subject it is important to remark, that the 
modern Persian contains not only Sanscrit, but a large number also of 
Zend roots, a fact which at once overthrows the opinion that the Zend 
was never a spoken language, but merely brought in as a sacred idiom 
from India. 


GRCO-ROMAN LANGUAGES. 


I. The Thracian, or Greco-Roman family of languages, divides itself 
into four branches, the Phrygian, Greek, Etruscan, and Latin. 

II. The first or Phrygian branch isethat comprising the languages, 
now extinct, that were formerly spoken in Asia Minor by the Phrygians, 
Trojans, Lydians, and in Euxope by the Thracians and Macedonians : 
languages which now exist only in proper names (but which names are 
sufficient to establish the Indian affiliation of these tongues), and also in 
some fragments intermingled with the particular dialect of the Amauts 
of Albania. 

III. The second, or Greek, comprehends the Pelasgic idioms, or, in 
other words, the language of that active and intelligent race which peo- 
pled Thessaly, Epirus, the coasts of Italy and Asia Minor, and the con- 
tinent and islands of Greece, and from the bosom of which sprang the 
Hellenes, who gave to Europe the most beautiful of its languages.1 

IV. The Greek, considered generally, is remarkable for its melody, 
for the abundance of its inflexions, for the delicate shades of meaning 
marked by the tenses of the verb, for its clear and highly logical syntax, 
and its richness and facility in compounding. In this last-mentioned re- 
spect, as well as in the fulness of its terminations, no language in the 
world approaches more closely to the Sanscrit than the Greek. 

YV. The third branch is that of the Etruscans or Rhaseni, of whose 
early history and of whose language so very little is known. As far as 
an opinion may be ventured, the origin of the race was a triple one, Pe- 
Jasgic, Lydian, and Celtic, and their idiom, known only by some monu- 
mental inscriptions, which have never been satisfactorily elucidated, par- 
took, in all probability, of the features of the Pelasgic, Lydian, and Cel- 
tic tongues. 


1, The identity of the Pelasgic and Hellenic races is now generally acknowledged 
by scholars, 


204 GERMAN LANGUAGES. 


VI. The fourth branch is that of the Osci or Ausones, and of many 
other, if not all, of the Italian communities, the gradual blending of 
which with one another and with the Greek produced the Latin tongue. 
This last-mentioned tongue, concise and energetic, more Indian in its 
substance than even the Greek, but less varied in its terminations, and 
less pliant in the combining of words, underwent several changes before 
it acquired an established character, an event which only took place about 
the commencement of the Christian era. 

VI. The Rustic Latin, or the idiom spoken by the lower orders of 
the people and by the soldiers in the military colonies, and which subse- 
quently became more and more altered by invasions from the north, end- 
ed at last by transforming itself into various secondary idioms, which, 
adopted by the new conquerors of Rome, have prevailed since that period 
under the names of the Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese, through- 
out all the south of Europe. 

VIII. The Walachian, spokensin a corner of Turkey in Europe, may 
also be regarded as a fragment of the Latin, which, by its admixture with 
the Slavonic, has assumed a form quite peculiar to itself, but which pre- 
sents to the view but little culture, and possesses, therefore, but little 
interest.! 


GERMAN LANGUAGES. 


I. The German race, spread over the whole of Northern Europe, ap- 
pears to have been divided originally into several large tribes, the spoken 
idioms of which constitute five great branches, the Teutonic, Saxon, 
Anglo-Saxon, Norman, and Gothic. 

II. The first of these, comprising the nations of Southern Germany, 
produced the High-German, the monuments of which can be traced back 
to the eighth century of our era, and which was spoken at the courts of 
the Franc and Saxon kings, until it was superseded at the former by the 
Romance tongue, and at the latter by the Allemannic, which last was 
the poetic idiom of the Minnesingers and of the Nibelungenlied. At 
last, from the impulse given by the writings of Luther, in the sixteenth 
century, arose the modern German, so conspicuous as ἃ rich, picturesque, 
and energetic tongue. If this language has lost that variety of termi- 
nations which once brought it into so close an approximation with the 
Greek and the Sanscrit, if its conjugation is too restricted, and its peri- 
ods are too complicated, it has, at the same time, however, an incontest- 
able advantage over all modern tongues in the exact derivation of its 
words, in their almost unlimited composition, and, above all, in the tone- 


1. Molnar, Walachische Sprachlehre, Wien., 1788. 


SLAVONIC LANGUAGES. 205 


accent, which, resting invariably on each radical syllable, imparts to the 
German an intellectual type, which no other idiom possesses to the same 
degree. 

III. The second branch, that of Western Germany, comprises the old 
Low-German or Saxon, from which has arisen the patois at present pre- 
vailing along the German borders, the Frison, which is now extinct, on 
the borders of Holland, and the Netherland, which, remaining in an un- 
cultivated state in the Flemish dialect, has, on the other hand, become 
in Holland a national and literary idiom. 

IV. The third branch, a mixture of almost all the rest, was formed in 
England by the union of the Saxons, the Jutes, and the Angles, to whom 
were added, at a subsequent period, the Danes. Thus arose the Anglo- 
Saxon, the earliest monuments of which date from the eighth century of 
our era, and which language, about three centuries later, combining in 
its turn with the old French brought in by the Norman conquest, gave 
birth to the English tongue. 

V. The fourth branch, that of Northern Germany or Scandinavia, gave 
birth to the Old Norman, the sacred language of the Edda, superseded 
afterward by the Norwegian or Icelandic, in which the Scalds composed 
their sagas. This last-mentioned idiom also fell into disuse about the 
fifth century of our era, and from it arose the Swedish and Danish, two 
languages intimately connected with each other, which to the force and 
regularity of the German add a peculiar clearness and conciseness of 
their own, and the culture of which is far from being neglected. 

VI. The fifth branch, formed from the conquering nations which cov- 
ered Eastern Germany, but the dialects of all of whom are now extinct, 
is known to us merely by the Meso-Gothic, some fragments of which 
are preserved in the Bible of Ulphilas. This precious monument of the 
fourth century, the most ancient that remains to us of the German idi- 
oms, displays to us, in its rich grammatical forms, the common bond that 
united these idioms to one another, and shows, at the same time, the 
affiliation, no less intimate and real, which connects them all with the 
Latin, the Greek, and the Sanscrit. 


SLAVONIC LANGUAGES, 


I. The Slavonic family, which occupies the eastern part of Europe, 
divides itself into but three branches, which may be denominated the 
Servian, Tchekhe, and Letton. 

II. The first of these comprehends the eastern Slavi, whose language 
was the old Slavonic, employed, about the commencement of the ninth 
century, in the writings of Cyrill, who was also the inventor of their al- 
phabet. This old Slavonic has given birth to several dialects, still used 


206 CELTIC LANGUAGES. 


in Illyria and Servia, but it has become an ecclesiastical and dead lan- 
guage in Russia, where it has been superseded, in all the ordinary rela- 
tions of life, by the Russian, which only differs from it, however, in 
some small degree. 

III. The Russian language, but little known beyond the precincts of 
that empire, yields not, however, either to the Greek or the German in 
the abundance of its roots, the regularity of its derivations, or the happy 
combination of words, while, on the other hand, it surpasses the latter 
in sweetness and harmony. Around the Russian are grouped, with a 
striking analogy, the Servian, Croatian, and Winde, spoken by the Slavi 
of the Turkish and Austrian provinces. 

IV. The second branch, that of the western Slavi, comprehends the 
Bohemian, formerly a cultivated tongue, and of which the Slovaque, in 
Hungary, is a rude dialect, the Polish, the Wende, and the Soradian, the 
two latter of which remain still in an uncultivated state. 

V. The third branch, very different in its character from the other 
two, which it in all probability preceded, is that of the central Slavi, 
whose primitive idiom, the Prucze, is now entirely extinet. The Lath- 
uanian, however, and the Letton, spoken at the present day in Lithuania. 
and Courland, still offer to the consideration of the philologist the most 
interesting subjects of comparison with the other Slavonic dialects, whose 
elementary forms they reveal to our view, as well as with the Sanscrit,, 
with which they appear immediately connected. 


CELTIC LANGUAGES. 


I. This ancient family, which we have reserved for the end of the list, 
as having been the first that was separated, and, consequently, the farthest 
removed from its Asiatic source, is divided into two branches, the Gae- 
lic and Cymric. 

II. The Gaelic branch, that of the pure Celts, who fled to the north- 
ern part of England and to Ireland, is marked by frequent aspirations, 
by a scarcity of terminations, and by the monotony of its combinations, 
which leads to the supposition that there were earlier flexions than those 
which have reached us. This language, after having attained to a con- 
siderable degree of culture, still exists, in some obscure degree, in the 
Irish and the mountaineer-Scotch. 

III. The Cymric branch, that of the Celto-Belge, known at a later 
period by the name of Bretons, is remarkable for its moveable articula- 
tions and its close affinity to the Latin, the result of the Roman sway. 
It remains in two popular dialects at the present day, the Welsh in Eng- 
land, and the Bas-Breton or Breyzad in France. 


INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES. 207 


Such are the languages that compose the Indo-Germanic group, and 
to an examination of the analogies between which we will now devote 
the remainder of this volume. We have omitted, in the enumeration 
above given, the Basque tongue, spoken in the southwestern part of Eu- 
rope, and the Finnish dialects in the northeast. ‘The reason is, because 
they present a physiognomy too different from that of all the languages 
we have just been considering to admit of their being ranked in the same 
class with them. It may be observed, however, that the Finnish dialects 
have borrowed many words from the German and Slavonic, while the 
Basque, notwithstanding its African origin, displays many points of con- 
tact with the Celtic and Latin.! 


VI. INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES. 


I. In conducting the present inquiry, we will first turn our attention 
to the interchange of sounds, consonants as well as vowels, traceable in 
words etymologically corresponding to each other in the Sanscrit and its 
European and Oriental sister tongues. 

II. It is highly probable that, in all languages, only the simple vowels 
a, i, and u primarily existed, and that all other vowels arose out of these 
three elementary sounds by mixture, or, in some instances, by their mu- 
tual influence when placed in close proximity to each other in the same 
word and in successive syllables.” 

III. In Sanscrit, the short vowels a, i, and u only are represented by 
distinct characters; and if we consider the extreme accuracy with which, 
in the Dévandgari alphabet, all the varying articulations of the human 
voice are expressed, we are driven at once to the conclusion that, in the 
age when that alphabet was invented to fix the various sounds and com- 
binations of sounds occurring in the Sanscrit language, the latter pos- 
sessed no other short vowels but these.% 

IV. It is even remarked by a recent writer,’ that, in the vernacular 
idioms now current in India, he never was able to detect any sounds sim- 
ilar to the Italian short ὁ and ὁ in the pronunciation of natives from all 
the different provinces of India. 

V. Inthe Gothic, the short e and o are in like manner wanting, and 
the short German e corresponds to a, 7, and τῷ of the former tongue. 
Thus, for faltha, in Gothic, we have in German (ich) falte ; and for the 
Gothic giba, the corresponding form in German is (ich) gebe. 


1. Eichoff, p. 24, seq. 

2. Pott, Etymologische Forschungen, p. 1. 

3. Pott, l. c-—Journal of Education, No. 20, p. 341.—Bopp, Vergleichende Gram- 
matik, p. 3. 

4, Colonel Vans Kennedy, Researches, &c., Ὁ. 242. 


208 SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC. 


SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC. 
1. Vowel-changes. 


I. For the Sanscrit long a the Gothic has almost always long ὁ, the 
long a being entirely wanting in this latter tongue. In contractions, 
however, this long 0 becomes short a. Sometimes, in Gothic, long e is 
found to correspond to the Sanscrit long a, as, for example, in the geni- 
tive plural of the masculine and neuter. ; 

II. For ἢ and 7 in Sanscrit, the Gothic has 7 and εἰ, which last is ev- 
erywhere equivalent to 2, and in the old High-German appears as such. 
In the modern German this old 7 is most commonly changed to ez. Thus, 
mein in German, meina the Gothic genitive, min in old High-German. 

III. As a general rule, the ὁ as a final vowel disappears entirely in 
German, and-most commonly in Latin. Thus, 


SANSCRIT. GREEK. Latin. Gornic. 
pari, περΐ, per, fair. 
upart, ὑπέρ, super, ufar. 
ast, ἐστί, est, ast. 
santi, ἐντί, sunt, sind. 


IV. Wherever a final 2 occurs in Gothic and old High-German, it is, 
in fact, only a mutilated sound remaining from what was originally 7 fol- 
lowed by a vowel. Thus, the Gothic hari (exercitum) is mutilated from 
harja. ‘The Sanscrit would require here harya-m, and the Zend, meet- 
ing the German half way, would be hari-m. 

VY. For the Sanscrit ὦ and ὦ the Gothic has uw, which is for the most 
part short. Among the few examples, on the other hand, that exist 
of the long u, the following may be cited as giving the parent source of 
a well-known English term. ‘Thus, in Sanscrit we have dhri, “‘ to stand 
firm,” whence comes dhruva, “firm,” ‘‘ certain,” ‘‘drue ;” and in old 
High-German truén, “to confide.” 

VI. For the Sanscrit diphthongs é (formed from a-+2) and ὃ (formed 
from a+u) the Gothic has ai and au, which, like the Sanscrit, are of 
one syllable, and most probably were pronounced as é and 6. Thus, 
compare the Gothic bauaima (edificemus) with the Sanscrit b'avéma 
(simus), and the Gothic swnau-s (‘‘ of a son”’) with the Sanscrit suné-s, 
which has the same meaning. In the old High-German these diph- 
thongs appear as é and 6, but are to be still regarded as equivalent re- 
spectively to a2 and a+-u. Just as in Latin we have amémus from 
amaimus, and bés from boits (βοῦς) ; where the u changes before a vowel 
to v, as in bovis, bovem. Compare, in farther illustration of this point, 
the following : 


: 


SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC. 


209 


SaNscRIT. Gornic. ΟΡ Hicu-German. 
charéma (eamus), faraima, varémes. 
charéta (eatis), faraith, varet. 
tebhyas (his), thaim, dém. 


2. Consonant-changes. 


I. The German family of languages are influenced, as regards the in- 
terchange of consonants, by a remarkable law, according to which they 
change, with reference to the Greek, Latin, and, under certain restric- 
tions, the Sanscrit and Zend, ¢enuwes into aspirates, as, for example, put- 
ting h for k, th for t, f for p; giving tenwes for media, as ¢ for d, p for 
ὦ, and k for g; and, finally, medi@ for aspirates, as g for χ ὦ for 3, and 


ὦ for 7.1 


II. The following table will show these changes more clearly, as well 
as those which take place in the old High-German. 


SANsorRIT. GREEK. Latin. Gornic. O. H. Grr. 
pada-s, πούς, ποδ-ός, pes, pedis, fotus, vUuoz. 
panchan, πέμπε, quinqgue, fimf, ving. 
purna, TAEOC, plenus, fulls, vol. 
pur, πατήρ, pater, fadrein,? vatar. 
upari, ὑπέρ, super, ufar, ubar. 
bhongh, frangere, brikan, préchan. 
bhug, Jrut, fructus, brukon,  prichon. 
bhratr, frater, bréthar, pruoder. 
bhri, φέρω, fero, baira, piru. 
bhri, ὀφρύς, prawas 
kapala, κεφαλή, caput, haubith, houpit. 
tvam (Nom.), τύ, tu, thu, du. 
tam (Acc.), TOV, is-tum, thana, dén. 
trayas (N.pl.M.), τρεῖς, tres, threis, drt. 
antara, ἕτερος, alter, anthar, andar. 
danta-m (Acc.), ὀδόντ-α, dentem, thuntu-s, zand. 
dvau ( N. du), δύο, duo, tvai, zueéne. 
dakshina, δεξία, dextra, taihsvo, zésawa. 
uda, ὕδωρ, unda, vato, wazar. 
duhatr, ϑυγάτηρ, dauhtar, tohtar. 
dvar, Supa, fores, daur, tor. 
madhu, μέθυ, meto.4 

1. Grimm, Deutsche Grammatik, p.584.—Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, p 79, 
ay « Parents.” 

3. The English “ brow” closely resembles the Sanscrit. 

4 Compare English “ mead,” a drink. 


S2 


210 


shouna, 
hridaya, 
aksa, 
asruy 
pasu, 
svasurd, 
dasan, 
gna, 
gati,\ 
ganu, 
mahat, 
hansa, 
hyas, 
lih, 


SANSCRIT 


κύων, 
καρδία, 
ὄκος, 
δάκρυ, 


ἑκυρός, 
δέκα, 
γνῶμι, 
γένος, 
γόνυ, 
μέγαλος, 
χήν, 
χθές, 
λείχω, 


canis, 
cor, cord-is, 
oculus, 
lacrima, 
pecus, 
socer, 
decem, 
2nosco, 
genus, 
genu, 
magnus, 
anser, 
heri, 
lingo, 


AND TEUTONIC. 


hunths, 
hairto, 
augo, 
tagr, 
faihu, 
svaihra, 
tathun, 
kan, 
kunt, 
kniu, 
mikils, 
gans, 
gistra, 
laigo, 


hund. 
hérza. 
ouga. 
zahar. 
vihu. 
suehur. 
zéhan. 
chan. 
chunt. 
chniu. 
mihil. 
kans. 
késtar. 
lekom. 


III. The Lithuanian language has allowed the consonants to retain 


their ancient places, almost without any change. 


The only alteration 


that occurs is the substitution of the tenues for the Sanscrit aspirated 


tenues, and of the medie for the aspirated medie. Thus, 

LirHuaNiAn. SANSCRIT. 

rata-s (“ἃ wheel’’), ratha-s (“ἃ wagon”). 

busu (“I will be”), bhavishyami. 

ka-s (‘* who’’), ka-s. 

dumi (“I give’), dadam. 

pats (‘a master’), pati-s. 

penkt (‘‘ five”), panchan. 

trys (“ three”), trayas (N. pl. M.). 

keture (‘four’), chatvaras (N. pl. M.). 


chaturtha-s. 
sakha. 


ketwirtas (‘the fourth’), 
szaka (‘fa bough”’), 


IV. The following table shows a striking similarity between the Zend 
and the Gothic, in certain letters admitting an aspirate before them, and 


thus departing from the ¢enuis of the root. 
principally to semivowels, and so also in Gothic. 


thri 
thu-s 


fra 


Goruic. 
(‘‘three,”’ the root), 
(‘to thee’’), 
(insep. prep.), 


ZEND. 
thri, 
thwor, 


fra, 


Thus, 


In Zend this remark applies 


SANSCRIT. 


tri. 
tvé. 


pra. 


1. From the root gan, ‘to beget.” 


SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 911] 


frijo (“I love”), afrindmi,! prinami. 
ahva2 (*‘ river’), afs, ap (root). 


V. Frequently, however, we have flections, or grammatical additions, 
which do not obey the laws regulating the interchange of consonants, 
but remain true to the primitive sound. Thus, the old High-German re- 
tains the original ¢ in the third person singular and plural ; as, for ex- 
ample, hapet, “he has,” and hapent, ‘ they have ;” with which compare 
the Latin habet and habent. The Gothic, on the other hand, has habazth 
and haband. So, also, in the participle present, and in that of the pas- 
sive voice, the old High-German adheres to the ¢, as hapenter, hapeter, 
whereas the Gothic, under the influence of the ἢ that precedes, brings 
in the d; as, habands, gen. habandins ; habaith, gen. habaidis. 


SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 


1. Vowel-changes. 


I. The short vowels ἄ, 7, %, in Sanscrit, generally correspond to the 
Greek a, 4, v. The Greek language has seldom substituted these three 
vowels one for another ; but its two short vowels, ¢ and o, have each their 
share of the province which in Sanscrit is left to the a solely. The fol- 
lowing examples may serve to throw some light upon this subject. 


I. Sanscrit a corresponding to a in Greek. 


1. In roots. 

SAnscrirt. GREEK. 
labh (‘to take”), AAB, Aaubavo. 
das_ (‘‘to bite’), AAK, δάκνω. 
dam (‘to tame’’), AAM, δαμάω. 
tan (‘to extend’’), TAN, τανύω. 
han (‘to kill”), OAN, ἔθανον, ϑάνατος. 
apa {01}. “‘ from’’), ἀπό. 
asru (‘a tear’), δάκρυ. 
sata (“ἃ hundred”), ἑκατόν 
a (negative prefix), ἀ-. 


2. In terminations, suffixes, &c. 


as, the termination of the accusative case of the plural number of 
masculine words, the crude forms of which end in a consonant, corre- 
sponding to the Greek ας in Aéovt-ac, &c. 


1. “1 bless,” from the Sanscrit root p77, “ to love,” with the preposition a prefixed. 

2. The Zend afs and Sanscrit ap denote ‘‘ water,” and the Gothic form is explained 
by the frequent change of p into k, for which the law that regulates the interchange 
of consonants requires h. Compare the Latin agua. 

3. Pott, Etymol. Forsch. p. 180.—Journal of Education, No. 20, p. 342, seg., where 
an able abstract is given by Rosen of part of the German work. 


Te SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 


man is in Sanscrit the termination of a number of substantives, de- 
rived from verbal roots, and generally denoting the result of the 
action implied by the verb ; as, ganman (nom. ganma), “ birth,” 
from the root gan, ‘‘to beget,” ‘to produce ;” karman (nom. 
karma), ‘an action,” “a deed,” whether good or evil, from the 
root kri, “todo.” ΤῸ this termination corresponds the Greek suf- 
fix -μα, gen. -ματος ; as in ὅραμα, “a spectacle,” ‘‘anything seen,” 
from ὁράω, “to see ;” dja and déua, “a tie,” from δέω, “ to 
bind?’ to tie,’”” &c. 

an is in Sanscrit the termination of the crude form of the numer- 
als for five, seven, eight, nine, and ten, panchan, saptan, ashtan, 
navan, dasan. 'The corresponding Greek numerals have dropped 
the final n, and three of them, ἑπτά, ἐννέα, and δέκα; haye re- 
tained the a, while πέντε and ὀκτώ! have kept it only when placed 
in composition before other parts of speech ; as, ὀκταέτης, ὀκτά- 
pnvoc, πενταέτης, πεντάπηχυς, &c. 


II. Sanscrit a corresponding to ε in Greek. 


1. In roots. 

Sanscrit. GREEK. 
pat (‘* to fall’), WET, πέτω. 
pach (‘to cook’), TIE, TENT. 
ad (‘to eat’’), EA, ἔδω. 
tap (‘to be hot’’), TE®, τέφρα. 
taksh_ (‘to build’’), TEKT, τεκταίνω. 
abhi (‘‘near’’), ἐπί. 
part (“around”), περί. 
aham (“1”), ἐγώ. 
hyas _(‘‘ yesterday’’), χθές. 


2. In terminations, &c. 


a, the augment of several forms of the preterit tense in Sanscrit, 
has in Greek become e. 

as in Sanscrit is-the termination of the nominative case in the 
plural number of substantives, the crude form of which ends in a 
consonant, corresponding to the Greek -e¢ in λέοντ-ες, &e. 


ΠῚ. Sanscrit a corresponding to the Greek o. 
1. In roots, &c. 


SANSCRIT. GREEK. 
sad (*‘ to go”), OA, ὁδ-ός. 
pad (“to go”), ΠΟΔ, ποῦς, ποδ-ός. 


1. The w in ὀκτώ is thought to come from the aw in ashtau, the nominative duak 
Compare the Latin octavus from octo. (Pott, Etymol. Forsch. p. 88.) 


SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 919 


pate (‘‘master,”’ “ husband’’), πόσις. 

dama (‘‘ house’’), δόμος. 

pra, pratt, πρό, πρός, προτί. 
sama (‘“‘ alike,” “ the same”), 60, in composition. 


sah (“ he’), 6, ὅς (for οὗτος, ὅδε). 
2. In terminations, &c. 


as is in Sanscrit the termination of the genitive case singular of 
substantives, the crude forms of which end in a consonant, cor- 
responding to the Greek o¢ in λέοντ-ος, τα. 

a, as the termination of the crude forms of a large number of San- 
scrit nouns (substantives, adjectives, participles), corresponds, in 
the majority of instances, to ὁ in Greek ; as, asva, “ἃ horse,” 
ἵππος ; vrika, ‘a wolf,” λύκος, &c. 


IV. The instances of words in which a Greek ¢ corresponds to a in 
Sanscrit are few in number. The following are some of the 
principal ones : 


SanscrirT. GREEK. 
pat, JIT, πίτνω. 
khara_ (‘an 855). . κἴίλλος. 
as, ἴσ-θι. 
WAS, éo-tia, Ionic ἱσ-τίη. 


2. Consonant-changes. 


1. Gutturals. 


I. The guttural letters in Sanscrit and Greek generally correspond to 
each other. Thus, in the case of the Sanscrit k, we have the root kv7, 
“to do,” and in Greek κραΐνω, “to accomplish,” with which may be 
compared the Latin creare. So, also, kapdla, “the head,” Gr. κεφαλή 
(Alexandrian κεθαλή) ; kapi, “an ape,” Gr. κῆπος ; kumba, ““ἃ vase,” 
Gr. κύμθος, ἄς. 

II. Sometimes the guttural in Greek corresponds to a y or 7 sound in 
Sanscrit ; as, 767, Sanscrit root yar (compare the Latin juv-enis), where, 
moreoyer, the v sound has passed into a 8; and ἧπαρ, gen. ἥπατ-ος, 
where the Sanscrit has yakrit and the Latin jecur. ‘The old form of 
jecur is thought to have been jecurt (jecurit), which would supply the 
link. 

III. Sometimes the Sanscrit k changes to a 7 in Greek. Thus we 


1. Instances are found also in Gothic; thus, sibun (S. saptan) ; fidvor (S. tshat- 
vari) ; fimf (S.pantsch) ; kinnus (8. hanu) ; ἄο. 
2. Pott, Etymol. Forsch. vol. iy pels; vol. ii., p. 290, 609. 


214 SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 


have in Sanscrit, in the case of the interrogative pronouns and particles, 
kas, ka, kim, &c., and in Greek the pronominal roots ΠΟΣ, ΠΗ, ΠΟΝ, 
whence come ποῦ, πόθεν, πότερος, &c. It is worthy of remark, that « 
is used for 7, however, not only in Jonic, as κοῦ, κόθεν, κότερος, χα.» 
but also in Zolic Greek, the oldest of the dialects, and more extensively, 
too, in this than in Ionic.!- The Latin qu, equivalent to x, may also be 
compared with this. 

IV. The consonants ksh in Sanscrit answer to € in Greek (where the 
fEolians say xo); as, aksha, “a chariot,” Gr. a&-wv (axis); daksha, 
“the right,” Gr. δεξ-ιός. Sometimes, however, the & is preserved in 
Greek, but the sh changes into ἃ τ ; as, kshinOdmi, “ to destroy,” Gr. 
κτίννυμι; riksha, ‘a bear,” Gr. ἄρκτος ; with which may be compared 
vakshas, “ἃ breast,” in Latin pect-us. 


2. Palatals. 


I. The palatal consonants in Sanscrit are ch and 7, and their respect- 
ive aspirates chh and jh. Neither of these sounds seems to have exist- 
ed in Greek or Latin, and, accordingly, we must expect to find their 
places occupied by different letters in such words as are common to 
either of these languages with the Sanscrit. Ch has often passed over 
in Latin into 4, and in Greek into z or τ. Thus, 


SANSCRIT. 
chatur (“four”), Latin quatuor, Gr. τέσσαρες, AXol. πίσυρες. 
panchan (‘five’), “  quinque, Gr. πέντε, πέμπε 
vach (“to call’), ἐς voco, Gr. Fezoe. 
pach (‘* to cook’’), “  coquo, Gr. πέπτω. 
cha (GSand%): LMC TION (τὰ; ΤΕ, 
paschat (‘after’), st 0Sts 


3. Dentals. 


I. The letters of the dental class, the common ¢ and d, with their as- 
pirates, and τ, are very extensively used in Sanscrit, and have, for the 
most part, been preserved unchanged in such words as are common to 
the Greek and Latin with the Sanscrit. Thus, among others that might 
be cited, 


SANSCRIT. 

trip (‘to satiate”), Greek τέρπω, τέρπομαι. 

tap (““ἴο warm’’), Latin tepere, Gr. τέφρα, “" ashes.” 
tri (** to. cross’’), “ trans, intrare, Gr. τέρμα. 
writ (‘to turn’’), (6 φργίογα. 

tan (““ἴο 5ίγοίς 7), Greek τείνω, τάνυμι. 


1. Corinth. Dial. p. 412, 579, seq., et Bast. ad loc. 


SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 215 


II. In some instances, the Sanscrit t has become o in Greek, but re- 
mains unchanged in Latin. Thus, 


Sanscrit. 
tuam_ (‘* thou’’), Gr. od, Dor. and Zol. τύ, Latin tu. 
chatur (‘four’), Gr. τέσσαρες, Latin quatuor. 


pat _(** master,” “husband’’), Gr. πόσις, Latin potens. 


III. The instances where d has been kept unchanged are very frequent. 
The following are a few of the number : 


SaNscRIT. 

ad (‘to eat’) Greek édw, Latin edo. 

dam (‘to subdue’’), “ δαμάω, Latin domare. 

da_ (‘to give’’), “ AQ, δίδωμε, Latin do. 

da: δ ἴθ οὐ}, “« δαίομαι, whence δαίς. 
sad (‘to 5107), “ ‘EA, ἔζομαι, Latin sedere. 


IV. The number of words with n, which letter has generally been pre- 
served unaltered in all the cognate languages, is also considerable. The 
following may serve as specimens : 


Sanscrirt. 
man (‘to think’), Greek MEN, μέμονα, Latin meminz. 
mrt. (‘aman’), “ava. 
mau (‘‘a ship”), “ γαῦς, Latin navis. 
nas (‘to die”’), Latin necare, nex, Gr. NEK, νεκρός, χα. 


I GRAMMATICAL ANALOGIES.1 
I. Ground-form. 


I. The Sanscrit settles the long-contested question whether the nom- 
inative is a case, or only the form from which cases are derived. In 
this language there exists a theme or ground-form entirely distinct from 
the nominative, and from which the nominative itself is formed by add- 
ing a distinctive termination. 

II. Before we proceed to describe the manner in which the respective 
cases are formed, it will be important to make some general remarks on 
the end-vowels which connect the case-suffixes with these ground-forms 
in different words, and on the points of resemblance or difference, in this 
respect, between the Sanscrit and the other Indo-Germanic tongues. 

III. The three ground-vowels a, 2, τέ, appear in Sanscrit, as well short 
as long, at the end of the grovnd-forms of words. The short a is al- 
ways either masculine or neuter, never feminine, and we find a corre- 
sponding a in Zend and Lithuanian. In the German dialects, however, 


1. Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, p. 133, seq. 


216 SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 


even in the Gothic, this a very seldom appears, and in the younger dia- 
lects is superseded by u ore In Greek, the o of the second declension 
(Adyo-¢) answers to this same a, as was also the case in the early Latin, 
where they said domino-s in the nominative for dominu-s.! 

IV. The Greek masculines of the first declension in ἄ-ς, together with 
the form in 7-¢, proceeding from them, point at once to the connexion 
between themselves and the Sanscrit masculine a, while, on the other 
hand, their identity with the o-stem is shown by the termination ov in 
the genitive. So, too, in the compounds μυροπώλη-ς, παιδοτρίθη-ς, the 
vowel 7 appended to the roots QA and TPIB takes the place of the 
Sanscrit a in similar compounds, where in Greek the o-sound generally 
appears. 

V. The short 7, which is of three genders, answers to the same vowel 
in the other Indo-Germanic tongues. In Latin, however, this 7 is some- 
times interchanged with e; as, facile for facili, mare for mari, where 
we may compare the Sanscrit root vari, ‘‘ water.” In Greek, this same 
ὦ is weakened, for the most part, before another vowel, into ε. 

VI. The short τ. also appears in Sanscrit in the three genders, like 
the Greek v and the Gothic wu. To this corresponds the Latin u of the 
fourth declension. 

VII. The long vowels a, 7, u belong in Sanscrit mostly to the femi- 
nine, never to the neuter, very seldom to the masculine. In Zend, the 
long final a is shortened in polysyllables. So, also, in Gothic, where 
the Sanscrit feminine stem in a long changes to o long, this 0 becomes 
short ἃ in flectionless nominatives and accusatives singular. The Latin 
also has shortened the old feminine long a in flectionless nominatives 
and accusatives, while the Lithuanian, on the other hand, preserves the 
a in the nominative long. 

VIII. The long ὁ appears most frequently in Sanscrit as the charac- 
teristic addition for forming the feminine stem. Thus, from mahat 
(‘magnus’) comes mahati (‘“‘magna”). The same thing occurs in 
Zend. ‘The Lithuanian, however, has preserved this ὁ as a feminine 
characteristic in the truest manner, for in this language an 1 is added to 
the old participle-sufiix ant ; and thus we have esant-i (“« she being’’) and 
bu-sent-t (“ she about to be”). In Greek and Latin this long feminine 
i generally disappears, or else, when traces of it happen to be found, we 
also find, at the same time, some letter added as a kind of support for 
the case-ending. This addition is in Greek an a or d, in Latin a c. 
Thus, the Greek ἡδεῖα corresponds to the Sanscrit svadv-7, from svadu, 
*‘ sweet.”” And so also in Greek, -rpva and -rpid in ὀρχήστρια, and 


1. Struve, uber die Lat. Declin. p. 11. 


SANSCRIT AND GREEK. Az 


ληστρίς, ληστρίδος, answer the same purpose as the Sanscrit -tri in gan- 
ztrt, which last again corresponds to the Latin forms genetri-c-s, gen. 
genitri-c-is. 

IX. In such Greek forms as yevérevpa the feminine 1 is removed one 
syllable back, and the same analogy prevails in μέλαινα, τάλαινα, τέρει- 
va, &c., and also in such substantive forms as τέκταινα, ϑεράπαινα, 
λέαινα. The instances in Greek where the feminine 7 is supplied by a, 
limit themselves to feminines from forms in v7, where the t changes to 
ao, and the ν is transformed into an v or 4, or else its place is supplied 
by the lengthening of the preceding vowel. ‘Thus, 


ovo-a, εἰσ-α, εσσ-α, ao-a, ὕσ-α, 
for οντ-α, ἐντ-α, ἔνττ-α, -αντ-α, υντ-α. 

X. The long wu appears in Sanscrit very seldom at the end of ground- 
forms, and is mostly feminine. The most, usual terms with this are 
vadhu, “a wife ;” bhi, “ earth ;” svasri, “a mother-in-law ;” bhri, 
“the eyebrow.” To this last corresponds the Greek ὀφρύς, which has 
also a long v in the termination of the nominative, though the short v in 
the genitive. 

XI. Very few ground-forms in Sanscrit end in a diphthong. None in 
é, and only one in ai, namely, rai, “a thing,’’ “ wealth,” which in the 
nominative makes rd-s for rai-s, and is evidently the same with the 
Latin res. 

XII. Ground-forms in 6 are seldom found in Sanscrit. The only two 
thus far ascertained are ἄγ, ‘‘ heaven,” and gd. In the former of these 
the 6 changes into a in the accusative ; as, dya-m, with which we may 
compare the Latin accusative diem. The latter, namely, go, has sev- 
eral significations, the most common of which are, in the masculine, “a 
steer,” in the feminine, ‘‘ a cow,” and also ‘‘ the earth.” For the last of 
these significations the Greek employs the form γῇ or yd, but for the 
meaning of “ bull,” “cow,” &c., it brings in the diphthong ov, and 
changes the old guttural letter into the cognate labial 3, forming in this 
way βοῦς." 

XIII. Ground-forms in aw are also few in number in Sanscrit. The 
most remarkable is mau, “a ship,” with which we immediately compare 
the Greek ναῦς and the Latin navis. This Sanscrit root nau is thought 
to have been originally snau, from sna, ‘to bathe,” and which probably 
signified at first also ‘to swim,” with which, in this sense, we may com- 
pare the Latin na-to and the Greek vd-o, vé-w. The digammated form 
νᾶ ες may easily be assimilated to the Sanscrit nav-as. In the Latin a 
foreign appendage presents itself; as, navi-s, navi-bus, for nau-s, nau- 


1. Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, p. 146. 
ae 


218 SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 


bus. As the half vowel v easily hardens into a guttural, we find a sister 
form for nau, nav-am, in the German nach-en, ‘a wherry,” which in old 
High-German is nacch-o. 

XIV. We now pass to the consonants. Of these, x, ¢, 5, and r most 
frequently appear in Sanscrit at the end of ground-forms. All the other 
consonants are found only at the end of radical words that are of rare 
occurrence, and appended to certain verbal stems whose origin is not 
clearly established. Of the gutturals, again, namely, k, kh, g, gh, we 
find none at the end of the more familiar verbal stems, whereas in Greek 
and Latin they are of frequent occurrence, as PPIK, KOPAK, ®AOT, 
ONYX, DUC, VORAC, EDAC, LEG, &c. The d seldom appears in 
Sanscrit ground-forms ; the ¢, on the contrary, is of very frequent occur- 
rence. The Greek, besides 7, shows also ὃ and ὃ. We must be care- 
ful, however, not to regard such words as KOPYO and OPNIO in the 
light of simple roots. In the former of these the © is part of the root 
6H or OF, and the term denotes originally something placed on the head. 
In the latter case we trace the etymology to the Sanscrit arani, in Ben- 
galee oron, “a forest,” whence the Greek dpvz, which, with © added 
from ϑέω, “to run” or ‘move swiftly,” indicates a creature that flies 
swiftly through the woods, no unapt designation, certainly, of a bird. 

XV. Ground-forms ending with a labial, the nasal m being included 
in this class, appear in Sanscrit only in the case of naked roots, as the 
last member of a compound, and even here not very often. We have, 
however, as an isolated root, the term ap, ‘“ water,” whence the Latin 
agua, the p being changed into qu, as in guinque, from the Sanscrit pan- 
can, ‘‘ five,” and a vowel being added. From this same ap comes the 
Latin am-nis, ‘a river,” like somnus for sopnus, and σεμνός for cebvic. 

XVI. Of the Sanscrit sibilants, the ’s and sh appear only at the end 
of radicals, and therefore but seldom. ‘The s, on the contrary, becomes 
a closing letter for a very usual suffix in the forming of words ; as, for 
example, in as, which is employed in the formation of neuter nouns. 
The Greek apparently is without any root in 2; but, the truth is, this 
sibilant in Greek is commonly rejected between two vowels, especially 
in the last syllable, and therefore neuters like μένος and γένος (from 
ΜΈΝΕΣ and ΓΈΝΕΣ, the ε being changed to 0) form the genitive μέν- 
ξος and γένεος, for μένεσος and yévecoc. 


Il. Individual Cases. 


I. The Sanserit cases, as has already been mentioned, are eight in 
number, namely, the nominative, vocative, dative, accusative, ablative, 
Jocative, instrumental, .and genitive. 

II. The locative refers not only to place, as its name imports, but also 


oe 
NOMINATIVE. 219 


to the point of time conceived as space, and to the state, condition, or 
circumstances made up of time and place. 

III. The instrumental case indicates the instrument or means by which 
anything is done, and, under the general idea expressed by this latter 
term “ means,” are included the individual ideas of the accompanying 
person, the member or part affected, and the quantity or amount effected. 

IV. The genitive is placed last, as it is a case per se, standing in the 
same relation to the noun as the other cases do to the verb, and, although 
a single case, imbodying all their different usages and acceptations. 
Hence the wide range given to the genitive in the Sanscrit, Greek, 
Latin, and German; ‘and hence, also, this same case has been styled the 
adnominal, since it is properly used with the noun, while the other cases 
have been termed adverbial, from their relation to the verb. 


Nominative. 


I. The suffix of the nominative singular in Sanscrit masculine and 
feminine stems that terminate in a vowel is s, and the origin of this may 
be traced to the pronominal stem sa, “‘he,” “this one.” ‘Thus we have, 
among masculines, 

vrika-s (stem vrika), ‘a wolf.” 
pati-s (stem pati), “ἃ lord” or “ husband.” 
' kawt-s (stem kawz), “ἃ poet.” 
And among feminines the following : 
priti-s (stem priti), “love.” 
tanu-s (stem tanu), ‘a body.” 
ndu-s (stem nau), “a ship.” 

II. In Zend, this 5, if preceded by a, changes into τι, and then the a 
and u are blended into ὃ. The same happens in Sanscrit, but only be- 
fore sonant letters. Thus, in Zend we have véhrké (from véhrka-u, 
stem véhrka), “a wolf,” and ké, “ this,” for ka-u (stem ka). So in San- 
scrit, suté mama, ‘‘my son,” from suta-w; but suta-s tava, “ thy son.” 

III. This nominative suffix s appears also in Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, 
and Gothic. Thus, λύκο-ς, πόσι-ς, πίτυ-ς, ὄπ-ς, ἔπο-ς ; lupu-s, hosti-s, 
PecUu-S, VOC-S, OPU-Ss ; Lithuanian, wilka-s, pati-s, sunu-s ; Gothic, vulf’-s, 
gast’s, sunu-s, &c. 

IV. The Gothic, however, suppresses a and ὁ before the s, except in 
monosyllabic words, where such suppression would be impracticable. 
Thus, it says hva-s, “‘ who ;” 7-s, “he ;” but vulf’s, gast’s, for vulfa-s, 
gasti-s.1_ Masculine stems in ja must be excepted from this rule, since 


1. The term gasti-s means “a stranger,” whence the English “guest.” With the 
Gothic we may compare the Latin host: s, inits original acceptation, which, according 
to Cicero, was also “a stranger.” Thus, he remarks, “ Hostis enim apud majores 


220 NOMINATIVE. 


they retain the vowel at the end¥only softening it toz; as, harji-s, “an 
army.” If, however, what is frequently the case, a long vowel or more 
than one syllable precede the final syllable, then ji changes to εἶ; as, 
andei-s, ‘the end ;” raginei-s, ‘ advice.” 

V. In others of the Teutonic dialects the nominative-ending s has 
passed into r ; as, Old German, 7-7, ‘he ;” de-r, “this ;” hue-r, ‘* who ;”” 
plinte-r, “blind.” Old Norse, wilf-r, ‘‘ a wolf ;”’ son-r, ‘a son ;” blind-r, 
“blind.” German, er, der, wer, blinde-r. Swedish and Danish, blind-r. 
In the rest of the Teutonic dialects the nominative-characteristic is lost. 

VI. If the ground-form in Sanscrit end in a consonant, the s is omit- 
ted in masculines and feminines ; and when two consonants close the 
ground-form, the latter of the two is rejected by the same law of euphony. 
Hence we have bibhrat for bibhrat-s, “he that bears ;” tudan for tu- 
dant-s, “‘ he that afflicts.’ The Zend, Greek, and Latin, on the other 
hand, preserve the s, and therefore stand, in this respect, on earlier ground 
than the Sanscrit. Thus we have, in Zend, af-s (for ap-s), ‘‘ water ;” 
kerefs, “a body.” The Greek and Latin, when the final consonant of 
the stem will not unite with the s, prefer giving up a part of the stem it- 
self, and hence we have χάρις for χάριτ-ς, comes for comit-s. Moreover, 
the Latin, Holic Greek, and Lithuanian agree in a surprising manner 
with the Zend, in that nt, when uniting with s, gives the form ns. 
Thus we have amans ; τιθένς ; Lithuanian, sukans ; Zend, srdvayans, 
“he that speaks.” 

VII. A final 2 after a short vowel is no favourite in Sanscrit. Hence 
we have the rejected from a stem in the first part of a compound ; 
as, rdga-putra, ‘‘ the king’s son,” for rdgan-putra. It is rejected also 
from the nominative, in which rejection a preceding short vowel is made 
long if the stem be of the masculine gender. ‘Thus, rdgd, ‘‘a king,” 
from ragan, masculine, and ndmd, ‘“‘a name,” from naman, neuter. 
The Zend agrees in this with the Sanscrit, except as regards the length- 
ening of the vowel; as, ashavd, “the pure,” from ashavan, masculine ; 
cashma, ‘‘ the eye,” from cashman, neuter. 

VIII. The Latin follows the Sanscrit and Zend in suppressing in 
the nominative of masculines and feminines, but not in neuters; as, 
sermo, sermon-is ; actio, action-is ; but nomen, not nome or nomo. ‘The 
root can at the end of compounds does not, however, reject the ἢ, in 
order, very probably, to prevent any further weakening of so feeble a 
syllable. Hence we have tubi-cen, fidi-cen, os-cen, &c. The term lien 
is a mutilation from lient-s. Pecten appears to be an isolated case. 

IX. If the theme in Sanscrit end in 7, the ris omitted; neither does 


nostros is dicebatur, quem nune peregrinum dicimus” (De Off. 1, 12). The Indian 
origin of hostis, therefore, is fully appareat. 


NOMINATIVE. pa | 


any nominative suffix s appear. The preceding vowel also is length- 
ened. Thus we have bhratd, from bhratar, ‘a brother ;” data, from 
datar, “a giver ;” mdatd, from malar, “ a mother ; pita, from pitar, “a 
father.” The lengthening of the vowel appears to supply the place of 
the rejected r. 

X. The Zend and Lithuanian follow the analogy of the Sanscrit, and 
reject the r, while, on the other hand, the Teutonic dialects, together 
with the Greek and Latin, retain it. Thus we have, in Gothic, bréthar, 
svistar, daughtar ; in the old High-German, pruodar, suéstar, tohtar ; 
in Greek, πατήρ, μήτηρ, ϑυγάτηρ, dajp; in Latin, pater, mater, frater, 
soror, &c. The question here presents itself, whether these forms in r 
be the earlier ones, or whether the rejection of this same letter be not 
more ancient. A careful examination of the point will result in favour 
of the latter opinion. In the first place, we have the testimony of the 
Sanscrit, Zend, and Lithuanian for the early origin of the rejection of r; 
and, in the second place, such Greek forms as πατήρ, μήτηρ, &c., show 
in their declension something peculiar and strange, since, as p and o are 
unwilling to coalesce, they prefer giving up the case-sign and retaining 
the stem-consonant, a process directly the reverse of what takes place in 
the more regular forms, such as παῖς and ποῦς, for maid-¢ and πόδ-ς. 

XI. Masculine and feminine ground-forms in Sanscrit that end in as 
lengthen the vowel a in the nominative singular. They are mostly com- 
pounds, and have for the last member in this composition a neuter sub- 
stantive in as. Thus, dur-manas, ‘ bad-spirited,” from dus (which be- 
comes dur before the sonant letters) and the neuter noun manas, “ spirit” 
(the root, probably, of the Latin animus, but certainly the source whence 
come mens and μένος). We have, therefore, in the masculine and fem- 
inine, durmands, but in the neuter durmands. The analogy between this 
and the Greek 6, 7, δυσμενής, neuter τὸ δυσμενές, is very striking. The 
Sanscrit genitive, again, is dusmanas-as, with which we may compare 
the old Greek form δυσμενέσ-ος, whence, according to a previous para- 
graph, comes the received form δυσμενέ-ος. The ς at the end of the 
nominative is to be regarded either as a stem-consonant, or a case-sign 
before which the stem-consonant ¢ has fallenaway. The former of these 
opinions is the more probable one, and derives support from the analogy 
of the Latin, where those masculine and feminine forms of the nomima- 
tive which correspond to the Sanscrit stems in as are, in like manner, 
without a case-sign. Thus, the Sanscrit comparative suffix -tyas be- 
comes in Latin -ior, with the usual change of s into r, and the nomina- 
tive is without the case-sign in both the masculine and feminine ; but in 
the neuter we have ws, corresponding to the Sanscrit ds, the u being 

T2 


222 LOCATIVE. 


friendly to a final s,and protecting it from being changed into r. Hence 
gravius answers to the Sanscrit gartyas. ; 

XII. Feminine ground-forms in ἃ lose the s ; as, dshiwd, “a tongue,” 
ka, “ which.” The same takes place in Zend ; as, hizwa, ‘a tongue,” 
ka, “which ;” and so in Lithuanian, rankd, “a hand ;” with all which 
may be compared the Greek and Latin forms χώρα, μοῦσα, terra, musa, 
ἄς. We find, also, in Zend, feminine nominatives in ἃ; as, perené, 
ΚΕ full,” kainé, ‘‘a maiden ;’’ and these nominatives resemble very closely 
in appearance Greek nouns in 7. The Zend form in e, however, appears 
to be merely euphonic, and the 6 has been changed from an ὦ through 
the influence of a suppressed y (compare the Sanscrit form kanya, where 
this y appears). Hence it is not unreasonable to suppose that the é of 
the Latin fifth declension, as in almost every instance an 7 precedes it, 
has been changed from an a by the influence of this 2. This may serve 
to explain why we have occasionally two forms for the nominative, one 
of the fifth and the other of the first declension ; as, for example, mate- 
ries and materia, the latter of which follows the analogy of the Greek, 
and allows a to remain unaltered before 1, ἃ5 ἴῃ σοφία. The Ionic form, 
on the other hand, follows the Zend, as σοφίη. 


Vocative. 


1. The vocative in Sanscrit has no peculiar case-sign of its own. It 
is often identical with the nominative, and where it differs from that case 
it coincides very nearly with the naked theme or ground-form. 

II. In monosyllables the vocative is the same as the nominative. 
Thus we have, nom. bhi-s, “ fear,” voc. bhé-s, “oh fear,” like «i-¢ and 
other monosyllables in Greek. 

III. In other kinds of words an a at the end of the stem remains un- 
altered in Sanscrit and Zend, but in Lithuanian is weakened into e. 
The Greek and Latin, like the Lithuanian, change o and w into a short 
e in the corresponding declension, as λύκε, lupé. We must not, how- 
ever, regard this ὅ as a species of case-ending either in the Greek or the 
Latin. The forms λύκε and lupé bear the same relation to the Sanscrit 
vrika that πέντε and quingue do to pancan; that is, the old a, which in 
λύκος appears as 0, and in lupus as u, has assumed the form of a short 6. 

IV. Sanscrit stems in 1 and u are increased by guna :} neuters have 
also the pure vowel. Thus we have in Sanscrit paté, vocative of pati-s, 
“a lord” or “husband ;” sund, vocative of sunu-s, ‘‘a son;’’ nama, 
vocative of naman, ‘‘a name,” neuter. 

V. The guna-form in ὃ (from au) agrees in a remarkable manner 


= 
1. Guna, in Sanscrit, means the insertion of a short a before ὁ and w, and in then 
waking a+-7 coaiesce into é, and a+ into ὁ, 


DATIVE. 223 


with the Gothic and Lithuanian. Thus we have, in the two latter, su- 
nau, sunau, and in Sanscrit suné (from sunau). 

VI. The Gothic and Latin, where the stem ends in ἢ, suppress this 
letter in the vocative as in the nominative, whereas the Sanscrit and 
Zend restore to the vocative the nasal letter taken from the nominative. 
Thus we have in Sanscrit atman, in Zend asman, but in Gothic ahma’, 
with which compare the Latin sermo in the vocative. 

VII. The Greek, in numerous instances, takes its vocative pure from 
the nominative. In others, it gives this case the naked stem, or else 
the stem only so far altered as euphony or assimilation requires. Thus 
we have τάλαν as the vocative of τάλας, χαρίεν (for χαρίεντ) as the 
vocative of χαρίεις, and παῖ (for παῖδ) as the vocative of παῖς. The 
Latin carries out still more fully the example of degeneration set for it 
by the Greek in the case of the vocative, and, with the single exception 
of the second declension, makes the vocative the same as the nominative. 


Dative. 


I. The dative in Sanscrit ends properly in ὃ, which termination de- 
rives its origin, in all probability, from the demonstrative pronominal 
stem ὃ. The Zend has a similar ending. Thus we have in Sanscrit 
bhratr-é, ‘to the brother ;” duwhitr-é, ‘to the daughter ;” and in Zend, 
brathr-é and dughdher-é. 

II. Feminine stems in ὦ, ἢ, %, and occasionally those in 7 and w, lengthen 
out, in Sanscrit, this termination ἃ into dz. Stems in ὦ have, moreover, 
an 1 inserted ; as, givdi-di, “to the tongue” (stem g7zvd), while those in 
ἢ and w take the guna before é; as, sunav-é, “to a son” (stem sunu). 
In Zend, feminine stems in ὦ and ὃ have also the ending of the dative in 
di, as in Sanscrit. 

III. Sanscrit stems in ἄ add another a to the case-sign ὃ, and then, 
«since ἃ is here equivalent to a+, there results from this union the form 
aya. Hence we have vrikaya, “to the wolf” (stem vrika). The Zend 
makes merely di; as wehrkai. 

IV. The Sanscrit forms the dative-ending of pronouns in smdi, from 
the particle sma with anz appended ; as, tasmai, ‘to this,” kasmdi, “ to 
whom.” In Zend, this sma changes to hma; as, kahmdi, ‘to whom.” 
In Pracrit and Pali, also, we have the s converted. into an ὦ, but the hk 
and m at the same time are placed in an inverted order, whence we find 
mha used for hma. In Pracrit, therefore, we have amhe, ‘‘ we,” with 
which compare the Greek ἄμμες ; and from mha we come to the Gothic 
nsa, in u-nsa-ra and u-nsi-s. 

V. In Lithuanian the dative ends in 7; as, wilku-t, “to the wolf ;” 


224 ACCUSATIVE. 


sunu-i, ‘to the son.” In adjectives and pronouns it ends in m; as, 
tam, ““ το him;” geram, “to the good.” 

VI. The usual Greek and Latin dative are taken from the original lo- 
cative, to which the student is here referred. 


Accusative. 


I. The characteristic of the accusative in Sanscrit, Zend, and Latin, 
is the letter m; in Greek, ν is substituted on grounds of euphony. In 
Lithuanian the old m is still farther weakened into a species of nasal n, 
which in Sanscrit is termed anusvara. The Germanic languages have 
lost the accusative-sign in substantives, and this loss shows itself as early 
as the Gothic. In masculine adjectives and pronouns, however, a ter- 
mination appears, and this termination in Gothic is ma, but in the old 
High-German more correctly 2. 

II. The following tabular view will make this subject more apparent : 


Sanscrir. ZEND. Greek. Latin. Lite. Gorutc. 
vrika-m (wolf) weéhrké-m λύκον lupu-m  wilka-n_ vulf’ 
pati-m (lord)  pati-m πόσιν hosle-m_pati-n — gast’ 
stinu-m (son)  pasti-m ἰχϑύν — pecu-m—s sunu-n ~— sunu 
dana-m (gift)  daté-m δῶρον donu-m ***** — daur’ 
tanu-m (body) tanii-m πίτυ-ν. «δοῦγωτῆς,. ***** handu. 


III. Monosyllabie words, in Sanscrit, ending in 2, %, and du, make the 
termination of the accusative am in place of the simple m, and this ap- 
pears to be done in order to give them somewhat of a polysyllabic ap- 
pearance. ‘Thus, bhi, ‘“ fear,” and nau, ‘a ship,” do not make in the 
accusative bhim and néum, as We might be led to expect from the anal- 
ogy of the Greek ναῦν, but bhiy-am, ndv-am. With this agree the Greek 
stems in ev, since they make, in the accusative, e-a, from ¢F-a, instead 
of ev-v 3 as, βασιλέ()α for βασιλευ-ν. 

IV. It is erroneous, however, to regard, as many do, the Latin m in the 
termination of the accusative as originating from an earlier ending em; 
and to make, for example, lwpu-m come from lupo-em ; horam from hora- 
em; fructum from fructu-em, and diem from die-em. 'That a mere nasal 
letter is amply sufficient to indicate the accusative, appears from the his- 
tory of not only the whole class of Germanic tonges, but also the Sans- 
crit, Zend, Greek, and Lithuanian. 

V. The Latin em in the accusative of the third declension is of twofold 
origin. At one time the 6 belongs to the stem, and stands for 7; as, 
e-m in ign-em (Sanscrit agni-m), which corresponds to 2-m in Sanscrit, 
é-min Zend, ἐν in Greek, 2-n in Lithuanian, and i-na in Gothic : at other 
times, when the stem terminates in a consonant, the e of em answers to 
the Sanscrit a, to which it also corresponds in numerous other instances. 


ACCUSATIVE. 205 


VI. Sanscrit and Zend neuter stems in a, and those related to them 
in Greek and Latin, take an m for the termination of both the accusa- 
tive and nominative ; as, sayana-m, “ἃ guard,” in Sanscrit ; sayané-m 
in Zend. So in Latin and Greek, donu-m, δῶρο-ν. All other stems of 
the neuter gender remain, with a few exceptions in Latin, unaccompa- 
nied by any case-sign in the nominative and accusative, and present 
merely the naked stem, which, however, in Latin, changes a final ὁ into 
δ; as, maré for mari, in Sanscrit wari, “ water.” The Greek, however, 
like the Sanscrit and Zend, leaves the ὁ unaltered ; as, ἔδρι-ς, ἔδρι, as 
in Sanscrit, sucis, suc-i. Examples of neuter u-stems, which supply 
the place of both nominative and accusative, are, in Sanscrit, madh-u, 
“honey,” “ wine ;” asr-u, “tears ;” swad-u, * sweet ;” in Zend, wéh-u, 
“ wealth ;” in Greek, μέϑου, δάκρεου, 70-0 ; in Latin, pec-u, gen-u. 

VII. The © in Greek neuters, such as γένος, μένος, εὐγενές, has al- 
ready been explained as belonging to the stem. The case is the same 
with respect to the Latin s in such neuters as genus, corpus, &c. 3; it is, 
in fact, the earlier form of the r of the oblique cases, as in gener-ts, cor- 
por-is, for genes-is, corpos-is, with the latter of which we may easily 
compare the Sanscrit vapus, also signifying “a body,” genitive vapus-as. 
The Σ, also, of neuter stems in T, for example, τετυφός and τέρας, is 
not to be regarded as a case-sign, but as having been changed from T, 
which latter is never tolerated at the end of a word, but is either thrown 
away entirely, as in the case of μέλε and πρᾶγμα, or is exchanged for the 
cognate Σ, just as πρός is formed from the Sanscrit prati, through the 
intermediate Alolo-Doric form sport. 

VIII. Gothic neuters and masculines want the case-signm. In Lith- 
uanian the neuter entirely disappears in the case of substantives, and 
has only left a trace behind in pronouns and adjectives. 

TX. Pronominal stems in a have in Sanscrit ¢, in Zend ἐ, as the flec- 
tion-sign of the nominative and accusative neuter. The origin of the 
neuter case-sign ¢ is to be found in the pronominal stem ἔα, “he,” “ this 
one,” Greek TO, Gothic THA, &c. The Lithuanian tai, *‘ that,’’ used 
as a nominative and accusative, corresponds to the Sanscrit ta-t, the 
Zend ta-t, the Greek τό, &c. The final ὁ appears to have some affinity 
to the demonstrative ¢ in such forms as οὑτοσί, ἐκεινοσί, and both the 
Lithuanian and Greek terminations may be traced to the old Sanscrit 
form it, occurring in the Vedas, and which, on account of its antiquity, 
appears to have lost all regard for the particular gender of its termina- 
tion, since, though neuter in form, it attaches itself also to masculine 
pronouns of the third person. This same it appears to be the sister-form 
of the Latin id and the Gothic 7-ta. 


226 ABLATIVE. 


Ablative. 


I. The ablacive in Sanscrit has ¢ for its characteristic, the origin of 
which is to be traced, in all probability, to the demonstrative pronoun 
tan 15; 

Il. This case-letter, however, only appears with stems in a, which 
vowel is lengthened before it; as vrikdt, “ from the wolf.” 

III. In Zend, the ablative, in like manner, ends in ¢; as, wehrkdt, 
“from the wolf ;” but stems in ὁ have 6/-t ; as, dfrét67-t, ‘‘ benedictione ;” 
radshéi-t, ‘ institutione.’’ 

IV. The old Latin agrees in this respect with the Sanscrit and Zend 
to a very remarkable degree. Thus we have on the Columna Rostrata, 
and in the decree of the senate ‘‘ De Bacchanalibus,” such forms of the 
ablative as presented dictaiored, predad, in aliod marid, senatud, &c. 
The Oscan also formed the ablative in d, as appears from the Bantian 
inscription, where we find dolud, mailud, cum preivatud, toutad, pre- 
_sentid, &c. We may remark, in passing, that the old Latin and Oscan 
forms of the third person of the imperative, namely, es-tod and es-tud (for 
es-to), correspond surprisingly to the Veda-form obtained from Panini, 
giva-tat, which signifies as well ‘ vivat’’ as “ vive,” and which may it- 
self be compared with “ vivito’” of both the third and second person. 

V. In classical Latin we meet with a kind of ablative form in the in- 
separable pronoun met, which, from having originally belonged only to 
the first person, as far as we can hazard a conjecture (supposing it to 
be cognate with the Sanscrit ablative mat, “from me’), passed subse- 
quently over to all the persons. The conjunction sed, too, appears to 
have been nothing more, originally, than the ablative of the reflexive pro- 
noun se. In the decree of the senate “ De Bacchanalibus,” sed occurs 
twice as a pronoun governed by inter, whence we may infer either that 
inter was construed, in early Latin, with the ablative, or that the accu- 
sative had then, in some instances, the same force as the ablative. In 
favour of the latter opinion we may cite the accusative use of med and 
ted in Plautus, and the employment of ead for ea (accusative plural neu- 
ter) in the decree just referred to. We find, in this same decree, the 
preposition exlra appearing under the form of extrad. ‘This will serve 
to strengthen the opinion that the Latin prepositions in @ were all origi- 
nally ablative cases, and even pro would seem to have been at first writ- 
ten prod, as an ablative, since we find traces of this early form in prod-es, 

_ prod-eram, &c., whereas, in prosum, the ὦ has disappeared from before 
s by a law of euphony. 

VI. The ablative in Sanscrit expresses removal from a place, answer- 

ing to the question “ whence ?” and this is its true and original meaning, 


LOCATIVE. ΟΝ 


which the Latin has preserved only in the names of places. From the 
idea of ‘“‘ whence,” the ablative passes over to the relation of cause, 
since that, on account of which anything takes place, may be regarded as 
the spot or place from which the action goes forth. In this way the do- 
mains of the ablative and instrumental cases touch each other. When 
used adverbially, the ablative embraces a still wider range, and express- 
es, in the case of some words, certain relations that are otherwise quite 
foreign to it. In Greek, adverbs in we may be regarded as sister-forms 
of the Sanscrit ablative; so that w-c, from a stem in 0, bears relation to 
the Sanscrit d-t, from a stem in a, just as δίδωσι does to dada-ti. Hence 
ὁμῶ-ς is related to the Sanscrit samd-t, “ similarly,” both in its ending 
and its stem. Now, in the Greek language, the change from T to Σ at 
the end of a word was absolutely necessary, in order to prevent the 
total suppression of the former letter; and, therefore, we may safely 
conclude that such adverbs as ὁμῶ-ς, οὕτω-ς, ὥ-ς, came originally from 
ὁμῶ-τ, οὕτω-τ, ὥ-τ, &c. We have a similar analogy in the Latin ad- 
verbial forms guomodo, raro, vero, perpetuo, &c. 


Locative. 


I. This case has, in Sanscrit and Zend, an i for its characteristic 
letter. , 

II. In Greek and Latin the locative has united itself under one form 
with the dative, but still without losing its own peculiar reference to 
place. Hence we have Δωδῶνι, Μαραθῶνι, Σαλαμῖνι, ἀγρῷ, οἴκοι, χα- 
pai. 8:0 αἰξο we find this same case retaining its reference to a point of 
time conceived of as space ; as, τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ, TH αὐτῇ νυκτί, and in 
Sanscrit divasa, ‘in the day,” nisi, “in the night.” 

III. When the stem ends in a, the case-sign 7 passes into ἃ in both 
Sanscrit and Zend, except that, in the latter language, δὲ also stands for 
e, which circumstance produces a singular analogy between Zend lo- 
catives in οἱ and such Greek datives as οἴκοι, pol, σοί. 

IV. In Lithuanian, the stems in @ agree surprisingly in the locative 
with the Sanscrit and Zend, since they convert this a, together with the 
old locative-sign 7, which nowhere. any more appears pure in this tongue, 
into the vowel ὃ, saying diewé, “in God,” stem diewa, with which we 
may compare the Sanscrit dévé and the Zend daévé. 

V. Masculine stems in Sanscrit that end in 7 and u, and occasionally 
also feminine ones, have a locative ending in au; as, tanaw, “in the 
body.” The Zend gives to stems in u the gemitive ending ὃ, while to 
express a genitive meaning the form eu-s is more usually empioyed. 

VI. In Zend and Sanscrit we discover in several instances a species 
of alliance between the genitive and locative, and the one appearing for 


228 INSTRUMENTAL. 


the other. ‘The same remark holds good with reference to the Latin; 
and as in this language the genitive of the first and second declension 
only appears with a locative meaning, for example, Rome, Corinthi, hu- 
mi, not in the third declension nor in the plural, the opimion has been 
advanced that the Latin genitive of the first two declensions is derived 
from an ancient locative. It would seem, therefore, that when the first 
declension lost its genitive in d-s, the dative (in its origin a locative) 
was compelled also to supply the place of a genitive. In the second de- 
clension, the form in 0-2, which belongs properly to the locative, corre- 
sponding to the Greek @ and οἱ, and of which examples still remain, 
as popolot Romanoi, underwent a twofold change. It lost in the one 
case the vowel that marked the ending, as domino; while, in the other, 
it dropped the stem-vowel and retained the ending, as dominz; the for- 
mer of these settled down into a dative, the latter into a genitive. 

VII. This view of the Latin cases frees that language from a gross 
absurdity of syntax invented by the grammarians. According to them, 
the name of a town is put in the genitive when the question is ‘‘ where ?” 
provided that name be of the first declension ; but if it be of the third 
declension or of the plural number, the name is put in the ablative! The 
truth is, what the grammarians mistake for a genitive in the one case, 
and for an ablative in the other, is in both instances the same, namely, 
a locative, and the error has arisen from confounding similar forms. 


Instrumental. 


J. The instrumental case has 4 for its characteristic letter in Sanscrit, 
and this termination appears to be nothing more than a lengthening of 
the pronominal stem a, and identical with the inseparable preposition 4, 
“on,” “along,” “to,” which comes from the same stem. 

IJ. In Sanscrit, masculine and feminine stems ending in a short vowel 
take a euphonic x. If the vowel at the end be a it is changed into é. 
Hence we have vriké-n-a, ‘ by the wolf ;” stinu-n-a, ‘‘ by the son.” 

III. The Vedas show likewise the remains of a formation without x ; 
as, swapnay-d, ‘by sleep,” for swapné-n-a, theme swapna; and the or- 
dinary language exhibits two forms analogous to this in may-d, ‘through 
me ;᾽) and tway-d, ‘through thee,” from ma and twa. 

IV. In Zend the instrumental case is marked, as in Sanscrit, by a, 
but more commonly short than long. Thus we have zaosh-d, ‘through 
design ;” wehrk-a, “by the wolf.” Monosyllabic stems, however, in a, 
always lengthen the case-ending ; as, kha, “‘ proprio.” 

V. In Lithuanian, this case ends in vw, ὦ, and mi. Stems in a form 
their instrumental in u; as, diew-u, “ Deo ;” feminine stems in ἃ retain 
this vowel as a case-ending ; as, ranka, “by the hand ;” while all other 


GENITIVE. 229 


&tems take mi as the termination of the instrumental ; as, swnu-mi, “by 
the son.” 

VI. In Latin, the ablative is generally employed to denote the instru- 
ment or means. ‘Traces, however, of an independent instrumental case 
still appear in such adverbs of manner as duré, “hardly ;” bené, “ well,” 
ἄς. ἢ 

VII. In Gothic, the instrumental, usually called the dative, ends in a; 
as, gast-a, “by the guest.” In the other Germanic tongues it remains 
in certain pronominal adverbs of manner ; as, in old High-German, di, 
swa, wio? in Anglo-Saxon, thus, swa, hv? in English, thus, so, how 2 


Genitive. 

I. The terminations of this important case, in Sanscrit, are s, sya, as, 
and ds, whereof the first three are common to the three genders, while 
the last is confined to the feminine. 

II. In Sanscrit, the vowels ὁ and u take the guna, and this is also the 
case in Zend; as, paté-s, ‘ of ahusband ;” stind-s, “of a son;” in Zend, 
patoi-s, “οἵ a husband ;” taneu-s, “of a body.” The Lithuanian and 
Gothic, on the other hand, take the guna in the case of these same vow- 
els in a more limited degree. All w-stems in these two languages in- 
sert an a before their final vowel, and thus the Lithuanian sunau-s and 
the Gothic swnau-s correspond to the Sanscrit stind-s, from sunau-s. 
The guna, however, limits itself, in Gothic, in the case of 2-stems, to 
feminines merely ; as, anstai-s, ‘of favour.” 

III. The Sanscrit genitive-ending as passes over, in Greek, into o¢ in 
the case of ἐ and ὃ stems, as also where the stem ends in a diphthong the 
last vowel of which is v. Thus we have πόρτι-ος, ἰχθύ-ος, βασιλέ-ος. 
In these no guna appears, such as πύόρτει-ς, ἰχθευ-ς, forms utterly un- 
known in Greek as genitives; but, on the contrary, the true forms cor- 
respond, like z0d-d¢, to the Sanscrit genitive of consonant-stems, pad-as, 
“‘nedis ;” vac-as, “vocis,” &c. The Latin, on the other hand, agrees 
more closely with the sister tongues, though not so far as to have the 
guna, and hence hosti-s resembles the Gothic gasti-s. In the case of 
Latin u-stems (4th declension) the lengthening of the u may take the 
place of the guna; or perhaps, more correctly speaking, this class of 
words follow the Greek or consonant-principle, and the vowel which has 
fallen away from before s is compensated by the lengthening of w. 

IV. Stems in a, and also the pronouns of the third person, of which, 
however, only one, namely, amu, ends with any other vowel but a, have 
in Sanscrit the fuller genitive-sign sya; as, vrika-sya, “of the wolf;” 
ta-sya, “hujus,” &c. ; amu-sya, ‘ illius.” In Zend, this ending takes 
the form of hé; as, vehrkahe, ‘ of the wolf; ka-hé, “ of whom.” 


U 


230 GENITIVE. 


V. The Greek and Latin show manifest traces of this genitive ending 
in sya. Thus, since Sanscrit stems in a@ answer to Greek ones in 0, and 
since o towards the end of Greek words, when placed between two vow- 
els, generally disappears, there can be but little, if any, doubt that the 
old epic genitive-ending in vo is a mutilation from ovo, and that, for ex- 
ample, in τοῖο (compare the Sanscrit ta-sya), the first ὁ belongs to the 
stem, and vo to the case-endng. As regards the dropping of o from 
τοῖο (τύσιο), it may be remarked, that the Greek language exhibits an- 
other οἷο, from which a o has been dropped, namely, διδοῖο, the old form 
of which was διδόεσο, just as éAéyov comes from ἐλέγεσο, and ἐδίδου 
from édidoco. It is easy to infer, therefore, by analogy, that τοῖο comes 
from τόσιο, and that this last is identical with the Sanscrit ta-sya. In 
the common language, this form τοῖο, after parting with the old o, loses 
also ἐ, and makes To-0, out of which comes, by contraction, the form τοῦ. 
The Homeric termination ao, in Bopé-ao, Aivei-ao, and the like, belongs 
to this same part of the subject, and stands for a-o, which last was ori- 
ginally a-cvo. The Latin, on the other hand, changes the Sanscrit sya 
into jus, with the favourite conversion of a into w before a final s; as, 
for example, hu-jus, cu-jus, e-jus, allius for alli-jus, &c. 

VI. The Lithuanian genitive of the a-stems deviates in a remarkable 
manner from that of the other declensions, and has 0 for its case-sign, in 
which vowel there is a blending also of the vowel that closes the stem ; 
thus we have wilko, ‘of the wolf,” for wilka-s. The Gothic has pre- 
served as little as the Lithuanian any trace of the full genitive ending sya, 
and the Gothic a-stems are in this case like those in 2, the a being weak- 
ened before a final s into 2, so that we have vulfi-s for vulfa-s. The 
consonant-stems have in Gothic a simple s for the case-sign of the geni- 
tive ; as, namin-s, ‘of a name ;” bréthr-s, ‘of a brother.”” The earlier 
sister languages, however, lead us to infer that this s was originally pre- 
ceded by an a, and at a later period by an 1, which vowels subsequently 
disappeared, like the a from the nominative vulf?-s for vulfa-s. 

VII. Feminines have in Sanscrit, as has already been remarked, a 
fuller genitive ending, namely, ds. ‘The Greek is somewhat analogous 
to this in the long vowel which characterizes the genitive singular femi- 
nine of the first declension ; as, σφύρᾶς, Μούσης, &c. It appears also 
in the old Latin genitive of the first declension, escas, terras, &c. 


Duat Cases. 
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative. 


J. These three cases have in Sanscrit, in masculines and feminines, the 
ending au, which arose very probably from das by vocalizing the s, and, 
consequently, is nothing more than a strengthening of the plural ending 


DUAL CASES. 4» 2oB 


as. Since the dual implies a clearer designation than mere undefined 
plurality, and involves more of strong expression and lively personifica- 
tion, it loves the broadest endings, as well in the cases here named as in 
the others that remain to be mentioned. 

II. While the Pracrit and Pali have lost the dual, the Zend, on the 
other hand, has preserved it, yet in such a way only as that the plural 
frequently occupies its place. The dual in Zend is much less frequent, 
however, in the case of verbs. The Sanscrit ending au becomes in Zend 
do. 

III. In the Veda dialect, the ending au is mutilated frequently to ὦ, 
the latter element of the diphthong being suppressed. Jn Zend, by a sim- 
ilar process, a is used for ao, and more frequently, too, than the full form, 
From this Veda-ending 4, and the short a that often stands for it in Zend, 
we easily come to the Greek dual ¢, since this vowel is fond of taking 
the place of the old short a at the end of words ; and as, in the vocative, 
λύκε stands for vrika and vehrkd, so, in the dual number, ἄνδρ-ε (with 
the evphonic δ) corresponds to the Veda-form nar-d and the Zend nar-a. 

IV. In Lithuanian the dual termination of masculine stems in a is τὸ 
contracted from wo; and the Veda-form vrikd, the Zend vehrka, and the 
Lithuanian wilku, are in principle identical. In the vocative, the Lith- 
uanian places a shorter uv, and hence throws the accent back on the pe- 
nult; as, wiki! which resembles the change that takes place in the 
Greek πατήρ and πάτερ. 

V. Masculine and feminine stems in 7 and w suppress, in Sanscrit, the 
dual-ending au, and in its stead lengthen the end-vowel of the stem; as, 
pati, “two husbands,” from palit; stini, “two sons,” from stimu. The 
same principle operates frequently in Zend; as, mainyti, “‘ two spirits ;” 
crezi, ‘two fingers.” The Lithuanian, in like manner, suppresses the 
case-ending of the dual in its 7 and u stems, and lengthens the end-vowel 
of the stem in full accordance with the Sanscrit rule; as, aw, ‘‘ two 
sheep,” from awi (compare the Sanscrit avi, from avi); and sunti, “two 
sons,” from sunw (compare the Sanscrit sinit). 

VI. In Greek, the dual of the first two declensions follows the same 
principle. In the first declension, the nominative singular, it is true, 
often ends in 7, but the stem always terminates in d, and this becomes 
ἃ in the dual; as, κεφαλ-ᾶ, Ti-G, Kou-@. In the second, the w of the 
dual is a lengthening of the ὁ in the stem; as, Ady-w, 60-6, δωρ-ώ. 

VII. Neuter nouns in Sanscrit have in the dual not au, but ἢ for an 
mding, as in the plural they have not as, but a short 2. Ana at the end 
of the stem coalesces with this ἢ into ὦ, and hence we have saté, *“‘ two 
hundred,” from sata-?. Other vowels insert a euphonic n; as, talu-n-1. 

VIII. Lithuanian dual-forms of the feminine gender ending in ὁ agree 


232 INSTRUMENTAL, ETC., DUAL. 


with those ending in ὁ in Sanscrit and Zend; as, ranki, from ranka: 
The accusative dual, however, is formed in Lithuanian, contrary to the 
other sister tongues, after the analogy of the singular, by means of a na- 
sal letter; as, wilkun. 

IX. The study of comparative grammar shows that the dual was ori- 
ginally common to the different branches of the Indo-Germanic family, 
but that it has gradually disappeared from the greater number of them. 
We find it in the Sanscrit and Zend, for example, whereas in Pali it oc- 
curs only in the two words dui, “" two,” and oubha, “both.” ‘Traces of 
it are found in the Gothic, but not in the more modern Teutonic dialects. 
It occurs in Greek, but often with a mere plural meaning, whereas in 
modern Greek it is unknown. Jn Latin we find it remaining only in two 
words, duo and ambo, exactly as in Pali. 


Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative. 


I. These three cases have a common termination in the dual number 
in both Sanscrit and Zend, whereas in Greek the genitive has attached 
itself to the dative, and borrowed its termination from the latter. ‘The 
Sanscrit termination for these three cases is bhyam, which in Zend is 
curtailed to bya. | 

II. Connected with this dual termination is, in the first place, the end- 
ing bhyam of the pronouns of the first and second person in the dative 
singular and plural, but which, however, in the pronoun of the first per- 
son, is curtailed to hyam. 

III. The curtailment alluded to at the close of the preceding paragraph 
appears to have existed at a very early period, since we find a remarka- 
ble coincidence, as regards this form, between the Latin and Sanscrit, 
the Latin pronoun m-hz corresponding directly to the Sanscrit ma-hyam, 
and the Latin ἐϊ- δὶ, on the other hand, to the full Sanscrit form tu-bhyam. 

IV. In the second place, connected with the dual termination bhyam 
is the form bhyas, which marks the dative and ablative plural, which in 
Zend becomes byd, and in Latin bus, by suppressing in this last-men- 
tioned language the letter y, and by the usual conversion of as into us. 

V. In Lithuanian, in the dative dual, the letter m alone remains to in- 
dicate the dual; as, for example, wilka-m. This m, however, is not to 
be regarded as the final letter of the Sanscrit bhy-am, but the initial la- 
bial converted into a nasal. 

VI. The dual-ending bhydm is also related to the Sanscrit bhis, which 
is the mark of the plural instrumental. This latter termination, which 
in Zend becomes bis, has settled down in Latin into the case-sign for 
the dative and ablative; as, for example, in no-bzs and vo-bis, where bis 
takes the place of bus, that comes from bhyas. In Lithuanian, on the 


INSTRUMENTAL, ETC., DUAL. 233 


other hand, mis (the labial being changed to a nasal) is peculiar to the 
instrumental, and pati-mis answers to the Sanscrit pati-bhis and the 
Zend pati-bis. 

VII. The old epic ending in Greek in gz and gv belongs to this part 
of the subject. On the supposition that ¢cv is the earlier form of the 
two, we may easily hazard the conjecture that it arose from gic, just as 
we trace μὲν from μὲς in the first person plural of verbs ; which ending 
in sec, moreover, corresponds to the Sanscrit mas and the Latin mus. 
τῇ accordance with this idea, the old Greek form gz¢ will answer to the 
Sanscrit bhis, and to the Latin dis in nobis and vobis. It is highly prob- 
able, too, that originally a difference existed between ge and φιν, and 
that the former belonged to the singular, the latter to the plural, having 
the same analogy between them as δὲ and dis in the Latin forms ἐϊ- δὲ and 
vo-bis, and mi and mis in the Lithuanian aki-mi, “ by the eye,” and aki- 
mis, “by the eyes.” 

VIII. That the endings ¢ and gv belong especially to the dative is 
well known. ‘The locative and instrumental use of the same termina- 
tions in such forms as αὐτόφι, ϑύρηφι, βίηφιν, is easily explained on the 
principle that the common dative itself has assumed a locative and in- 
strumental relation. That ¢ and φίν, however, have at any time a 
strong genitive meaning may very safely be denied ; since when prepo- 
sitions, that are otherwise construed in Greek with a genitive, appear also 
with cases ending in ¢¢ or φίν, there is no need whatever for us to re- 
gard these last as genitives, or as supplying the place of a genitive. All 
prepositions that are construed in Greek with a genitive would be much 
better joined with an ablative or locative, if such cases existed in Greek. 
Even the suffix ϑὲν, which is commonly regarded as supplying the place 
of the genitive ending, is, strictly speaking, of genuine ablative significa- 
tion, expressing as it does the departing from a place. 

IX. The Greek dual-ending in ἐν appears to be a curtailing of the 
Sanscrit form bhydm, by throwing out the initial labial, as, in the latter 
language, vrtkais is formed from vrikabis, and then by contracting yam 
into ἐν, just as, in Sanscrit again, ἰδέα is said for yasta, from yag, “to 
offer,” and in Zend ém, “‘hec,” is formed from zyam. The third de- 
clension in Greek might, by its dual termination, as in δαιμόν-οιν, give 
rise to the suspicion that ov, and not ἐν, was the true endipg. The 
latter, however, appears in both the first and second declensions, where 
wv, and not ovy, attaches itself to the final vowel of the stem; as, Movca- 
ἐν, Adyo-cv, &c. Hence, in the third declension, we are to regard the 
o before ἐν merely in the light of a connecting vowel between the stem 
and case-ending. 

X. On the principle that the dual-ending in ἐν is contracted from bhy- 

U2 


. Ν 


234 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE PLURAL. 


dm, we discover also the origin of the ἐν appended to the dative plural of 
certain pronouns, namely, ἡμ-ῖν, du-iv, o@-iv. This latter ἐν appears to 
have been of very early origin, since we find that the Sanscrit has bhyam 
for the ending of the dative plural of the pronouns of the first and second. 
person, but in all other words bhyas. From this bhyam we come as 
easily to ἐν, as from the dual termination bhydm. ‘The accusative use of 
this same ending, in such forms as piv and viv, may be explained in two 
ways: either by supposing that the original dative force of the termina- 
tion had become forgotten, or that the analogy of the accusative ending 
in v was followed, μίεν, vi-v. 


‘ 


Genitive and Locative. . 


I. These two cases have in Sanscrit the common ending 6s, which 
may possibly be connected with the genitive ending of the singular. 
Thus we have wrikay-6s, paty-os, tanu-ds. 

II. In Zend, this ending seems to have disappeared, and its place to 
have been supplied by the plural. So also in Lithuanian, where, for ex- 
ample, awj-u is both the dual and the plural genitive. 


PLURAL. 
Nominative and Vocative. 


I, Masculines and feminines in Sanscrit have the nominative plural 
ending in as, with which case, as in the sister tongues, the vocative is 
identical in all the declensions. This plural termination in as appears 
to be nothing more than an enlargement of the s which forms the case- 
sign of the nominative singular, in order that by such enlargement the 
idea of plurality might be symbolically, as it were, expressed. 

II. The neuter, as in the singular and dual, so also in the plural, 
wants the letter 5, which would seem, therefore, to have too much of a 
personal reference to harmonize with this gender. 

III. In Zend, as becomes ὃ, but before the particles ca and cit it 
changes merely to as’. In Greek it appears under the form ec, though 
with some limitations; in Latin it makes és ; in Lithuanian, when the 
stem ends in 7, the termination of the nominative plural is es, otherwise 
merely s. Hence we have in Sanscrit duhitar-as ; in Zend, dughdhar- 
as’-ca; in Greek, Svyarép-e¢ ; in Lithuanian, dukter-es ; with all which 
we may compare the Latin matr-es. 

IV. The masculine pronominal stems in Sanscrit, Zend, and Gothic ᾿ 
that end in a do not take the full nominative sign, but, in place of this, 
they lengthen the stem by the addition. of an 2, which vowel, on being 
blended with the a of the stem, becomes in Sanscrit ὃ, and in Zend é or 
oz. Hence we have in Sanscrit ἐδ, in Zend ἐξ, and in Gothic thai, all 


ACCUSATIVE PLURAL. 235 


signifying ‘“ these,” whereas the feminine forms of the same case and 
number are ¢ds, tdo, and thés, corresponding to the masculine forms 
just mentioned in the Greek roi (Doric for oi). In Greek and Latin, 
however, this 2, which is added to the stem in Sanscrit, Zend, and Goth- 
ic only in masculine pronominal themes, takes a much wider range, and 
is to be found connected with all other stems of both the first and sec- 
ond declensions. Hence we have χῶραι, λύκοι, for χωρα-ες, λυκο-ες ; 
and lupi (from lupot), terre (from terraz), for lupo-es, terra-es. 

V. Stems ἴῃ ὁ and τὸ have in Sanscrit the guna, and hence we find 
patay-as and stinav-as for paty-as and stinv-as. ‘This guna has been 
preserved in the Gothic, though in its weakened form 7, which before the 
vowel u changes into aj. Hence in Gothic we have sunj-us, ‘ sons,” 
for suni-us, from sunau-s. In the Gothic i-stems the guna-2 blends 
with the z of the stem and becomes long 7 (written ez) ; as, gastei-s, from 
gaslt. 

VI. Neuters in Zend, as in the sister languages of Europe, have a 
short ἄ for the ending, the remains, in all probability, of the fuller form 
as, after the s had been thrown away as having too much of personal ref- 
erence to harmonize with the neuter. This a remains also in the accu- 
sative, since masculines and feminines most commonly have as for the 
termination of this case. 

VII. Corresponding to these Zend-European neuters in a the Serserit 
has neuters in i, which latter vowel is evidently a weakening merely of. 
an earlier a. The end-vowel, moreover, of the stem is lengthened, and 
between this and the case-ending a euphonic Ἢ is inserted ; whence we 
have dand-n-i, vdri-n-1, madhii-n-i. Stems ending in a consonant, ἢ and 
r excepted, place before the same a nasal, and lengthen the preceding 
vowel; as,-vacdn-si. With this insertion of ὁ we may compare the very 
isolated neuter-forms which appear in the Latin que (quar) and hec 
(haic). But the analogy is most striking between que and the Sanscrit 
ké, formed from ka--i, which appears as a dual, but was originally also a 
plural form. 


Accusative. 


I. Stems ending with a short vowel in Sanscrit affix an x and lengthen 
the final vowel of the stem; hence we have vrika-n, pati-n, sunti-n. 
This 7 in the accusative plural is a curtailment of the full form ns, which 
has remained fully in the Gothic ; as, rulfa-ns, gasti-ns, sunu-ns. The 
Greek, on the other hand, has retained the sibilant, but converted the v 
into a v3; as, λύκους. The form λύκους, therefore, bears the same anal- 
ogy to λύκονς that τύπτουσι does to τύπτονσι (formed from τύπτοντι.) 

II. For πόσι-ας, ἰχθύ-ας, and the like, however, we cannot expect that 


236 ACCUSATIVE PLURAL. 


any such old forms as πόσι-νς, ἰχθύ-νς ever existed. In the case of their 
t and v stems, the Greeks constantly follow the same rule as in stems 
ending with a consonant, namely, by appending ac, as in Sanscrit, where 
we have padas corresponding to the Greek πόδας. 

III. This as for ns may be compared with the Ionic atae, aro, for 
vTat, vTo, a form which has extended itself from cases where the vocali- 
zing of n was absolutely necessary; as, πεπείθαται, τετράφαται, for 
πεπείθνται, τετράφνται, even to those where v could very properly have 
been allowed to remain; as, πεπαύαται, κεκλίαται, for πέπαυνται, KEK- 
λινται. , ' 

IV. Feminine stems ending in a vowel follow in Sanscrit the analogy 
of consonant stems, with the suppression, however, of the a, and they 
have therefore s foras or ns. Feminines ending in a short vowel length- 
en this, in order to compensate, very probably, for the suppression of the 
a; hence we have priti-s from prity-as, and tani-s from tanu-as. 
Something like an analogy with this may be found in the Greek forms 
of the accusative plural ending in ἔς and dc, but these are not limited to 
feminines, and the same terminations occur in the nominative also for 
ἐ-ες and v-ec. 

V. The Zend follows, like the Greek, in its 2 and w stems, the analo- 
gy of consonant stems ; while in feminine stems inz and u we sometimes 
find a form corresponding to the Sanscrit in é-s, vi-s; as, for example, 
gairi-s, ‘mountains ;”’ perelii-s, “‘ bridges.” Masculine stems ending in 
a have in the accusative an; as, im-an, “hos ;” mazistan, ““ maximos.” 

VI. In modern Persian, animate objects form the plural in az, and in- 
animate in ha; as, merd, ‘“‘a man,” plural, merd-an, ‘men ;” murg, ‘a 
bird,” murg-an, “birds ;” ruz, ‘a day,” ruz-ha, “ days ;” khiwan, “a 
table,” khiwan-ha, ‘“ tables.” & 

VII. A peculiar neuter suffix in the singular number of Sanscrit 
nouns is found, as has already been remarked, in as. This occurs still 
more frequently in Zend, and forms, in this latter language, its plural in 
ha. The modern Persian hd, with its vowel lengthened, stands in close 
analogy with this. So also in the modern German many striking resem- 
blances to the modern Persian may easily be found. That the German 
worter (‘‘ words’), however, shows an analogy in termination with the 
Persian ha, can only be discovered through the medium of the Sanscrit 
and Zend. And this discovery is readily made when we call to mind 
that the old High-German, in its earliest periods, almost continually 
changed s into r, and as frequently converted a into 2, which became at 
a later period e. 


PLURAL CASES. 237 


Instrumental. 


The Instrumental plural has already been referred to under the head 
of the instrumental dual. In Sanscrit it ends in bhis ; in Zend, in és ; 
in Lithuanian, in mis ; in Gothic, in m; in Greek, in dz or φίν; in Latin, 
in bis, &c. 


Dative and Ablative. 


I. The suffixes of both these cases have already been referred to. In 
the Latin, all that remains of the termination bus in the first and second 
declensions is merely the letter s; as, penni-s, terri-s, lupt-s, domini-s ; 
except forms in a-bus, presently to be mentioned. 

II. The vowel ὁ in ¢erris, lupis, &c., belongs to the stem, not to the 
case-sign. Lupi-s, in fact, is for /upo-bus, according to the analogy of 
ambo-bus, duo-bus. From o-bus, the language passed over to 2-bus, for 
the purpose of lightening the end-vowel of the stem, just as in the be- 
ginning of some compounds we find multi-plex for multu-plex or multo- 
plex. 

III. The form 7-bus remained in the vulgar dialect of the lower orders, 
and hence we have in Gruter (2, 9, 24: 6, 46, 9: 5, 618, 3: &c.) 
such forms as dibus, diibus, filibus, parvibus, &c. (Compare also En- 
nius, ap. Charis., p. 4.) 

IV. In the first declension the form a-bus has remained in several in- 
stances as a convenient mode of distinguishing between feminines and 
masculines. _ No traces of 7-bws are found in this declension. Still, how- 
ever, we can hardly suppose that the language passed at once from a-bus 
toi-s. It is far more probable that a-bus weakened the stem-vowel ἃ 
into 7, and that this 7 was subsequently lengthened as a compensation for 
the removal of bu. Hence terri-s arose from terri-bus, for terrd-bus ; 
just as the verb malo arose from mévolo. 

V. The Erse language makes azbh the termination of the dative plural, 
and this striking analogy connects that language at once with the case- 
system of the other European tongues. ‘Thus we have, in Erse, ghri- 
anai-bh, “to” or ‘with suns ;” fearai-bh, ‘to’ or ‘ with men.” 


Genitive. 

I. The Genitive plural in Sanscrit, in the case of substantives and ad- 
jectives, ends in dm; in Zend, in anm. The Greek wy connects itself 
at once with the primitive am, just as, in verbs, ἐδίδιων answers to the 
Sanscrit adad-dm. The Latin has preserved the final m unaltered, but 
has shortened, through the influence of this letter, the preceding vowel ; 


238 PLURAL CASES. 


and hence we have, in this latter language, ped-wm, whereas the corre- 
sponding form in Sanscrit is pad-am. 

II. The Lithuanian terminates the genitive plural in %, rejecting the 
m, and in this rejection of m the German agrees with it. In Gothic, the 
m in like manner disappears, and the vowel that remams assumes the 
form either of an é or an ὃ. The 6 appears in feminine 0 and n stems. 

III. Stems ending in a vowel, with the exception, generally speaking, 
of those that are monosyllabic, insert, in Sanscrit, a euphonic πὶ between 
the case-ending and the stem; and when this is done, the end-vowel of 
the stem, if short, is lengthened. This insertion of nm appears to be of 
very early date, since the Zend participates in the same, though in a 
more limited degree ; namely, in stems that end in a and ἃ ; as, vehrka- 
n-anm, gihva-n-anm. Analogous, in a striking degree, to this is the 
genitive of the corresponding class of words in old High-German, in 
old Saxon, and in Anglo-Saxon, which genitive ends in 6-n-6 or e-n-a. 
Thus we have, in old High-German, kép6-n-6 ; in old Saxon, gébé-n-6 ; 
in Anglo-Saxon, gife-n-a. 

IV. Pronouns of the third person have in Sanscrit the genitive plural 
ending in sam instead of am. It is probable that this sém was the 
earlier form of the two, and that am is merely the ending of this ending. 
The High-German has here, as in many other instances, changed the 
sibilant to an r. The Latin does the same, as in zstorum, istarum, &c. 

V. This rum, in the termination of the genitive plural, has passed 
over, in Latin, from the pronominal inflection to.the first, second, and 
fifth declensions. And this was the more easily effected, since these 
pronouns of the third person are all in the genitive plural of either the 
second or first declension. Forms, however, occasionally present them- 
selves, especially in earlier Latin, which show that the language was not 
always equally favourable towards the reception of this ending in rum, 
and hence we have such genitives plural as the following, socitim, deim 
amphorim, drachmim, agricolim, &c. 

VI. The Latin rwm and Sanscrit sém would lead us to expect σὼν in 
Greek. Such, however, is not the case. But still the forms that do 
occur in d-wy and é-wy, such as αὐτά-ων, αὐτέ-ων, ἀγορά-ων, dyopé-wy, 
point very plainly to a consonant that has fallen out. It remains a ques- 
tion, therefore, whether a o has been dropped in every instance or only 
ao in pronouns, and in other words ἃ ν, as in μείζω, from μείζονα. If 
this latter view be correct, λύκων will be for λυκο-ν-ων, χωράων for ywp- 
a-v-wy ; but τῶν for τόσων, and τάων for τασων. 


PLURAL CASES. 239 


Locative. 


J. The characteristic of the locative plural in Sanscrit is sw, which is 
converted also, on some occasions, into shu. For this in Zend we have 
shu and hu. The primitive form in Sanscrit, however, was swa, from 
which comes shwa in Zend, which is more usually employed for shu 
and hu. 

II. The primitive ending swa is identical with the reflex possessive 
stem swa. And as in Latin si-b2 points to an earlier form su-dz, which 
we would be led to expect from su-2; and ¢i-)2 to an earlier form tu-0i, 
which we may compare with the Sanscrit tu-bhyam, so the Greek dative 
locative ending in oz (or σιν) points at once to the Sanscrit su. 

III. Stems in ἄ append to this vowel, as in many other instances, an 
ἢ, and from the blending of a+ arises é, to which the Greek oz corre- 
sponds, as in λύκοι-σι, Sanscrit vriké-shu. Thee in Greek passes over 
from these stems to others in ὦ and 7, and either appears in its full force 
or as a subscript εὲ. Hence we have Πλαταιᾶσιν, ’OAvuriao, ᾿Αϑήν- 
not, ἄς. 

IV. In Lithuanian, the endings of the locative plural are for the mas- 
culine se, for the feminine sa. This sa appears to have arisen from swa, 
by rejecting the w. 


NUMERALS. 


240 


“AOLDN? 


“Ῥαφου 10. 


; “7400413 ἢ 

“a Ἵ 790423 
SDB 
3443 


"9140 


3.43.» 

; ‘gurls 
*pdo131 
‘Sada003u 
‘S3daoru 
“pId4 
3330. 

8. “1 "9190: 


. { 
φῖορ “mag 


"43. ‘pin! ‘573 


| “9910 


“ἈΠ 11190 


QUST] 


“ULSIA 


‘uI909p 
ΠΠΘΛΟΙΙ 


“0100 


“πιοη495 
ΧΟΒ 


‘anbumb 


“UDISC) 
‘royod 
‘ronyenb 


ἢ “ely 
‘sory 


} ‘renp “9 T 


‘enp ‘oup 


‘um ‘e ‘snun 


ὍΠ8ΒῚ 


ΠΡΟ 
‘uresn 
Ie Sap 


‘uresn 


‘Sap 


‘Meu 
yy Aa 


“yates 
‘qoamyo 


‘dund 


‘rrepod 
; ‘rempod 


ἢ “181 
“1 


ee 


‘un 


“USIeM 


yay 
; “pryory 
ie 0190 


“pryoy 
‘yorap 
‘lou 


“090 


“qyoas 
‘as 


SINY 


‘Treyyeay| 


“1 


ἔων 


π98 


‘asa 


“015 


8211) 


¢ 4eZyeAp 


‘ yeksop 

‘ yekaop 
“UUaSOA 

; ‘uso 
‘was 


asoys 
‘ve kd 


‘ar1hyoyo 


“μη 


i ‘atap 


‘tap 


‘ 
πρὸ 


᾿ΠΕΙΘΘΠῊ 


‘quny, 


81431) 


Stuany 


“ueyay 
“πη στα 


“ΟἼ1[0 
‘unqIs 
‘syas 
‘oyuy 


‘Imny 


“1 
‘any 


‘ula 


429 -US1H Ὁ 


‘puny 
‘NS ySULIYy 
«ΙΗ ΘΠ M4 


“ΠΠ11Ὁ1 
‘unyIu 


‘ueqyye 


‘unqIs 
‘syres 


“μὰ 


“IOMpY 


‘suIIy} 


“emy ‘soay ‘TRA\} 
f ‘ure 

7) ‘eure 

‘s Ue 


“Oto 


‘pes 
“Is 
“sq 


‘yop 
‘ynu 


‘ysoy 
‘yay 
‘ysays 
‘{ued 


“ΠΡ 1910 
‘yos 
‘np 


“τά 


‘uRisiag 


“{18785 | 


‘essULI} 


“yesSura | "0% 


‘ueysep | Ὁ 
‘URABU | “6 
‘neqyse 
‘uRqyyse 8 
‘uejdes | “yp 
‘yseys | Ὁ 
‘eyoued | ἃ 


‘myeyo | . 
‘reayeyo v 


1 ‘g 


; neMp 
“Qaap 


*ex9 oT 


*ylaosutg | 


Ἵ 


‘SUAGWON IVNIGUVO AHL AO MAIA UVTNAVE 


“qioA pue ‘sunouoald ‘syexournu 911 0} 1919 
-MOY ‘SyeUIAI INO BUYUOD ΠΛ 9 ΛΔ. ‘SuIyIs fyenba are ΘΑΙΊΟΘΙΡΒ oy} Jo 9580 oy} ut saajasuey} yuesord yet sotsoyeue 987, 


NUMERALS. 24) 


Remarks. 

I. A very slight inspection of the preceding table will show that nearly 
all the words contained in them are derived by each language from some 
of its cognates, or by all from a common source.! 

II. Certain consonants, or certain classes of consonants, in one lan- 
guage, are almost uniformly substitutes for certain others in a different 
language. And one of the most striking facts that appears on compa- 
ring these lists of numerals is, that in some of the languages of Western 
Europe guttural or hard palatine consonants abound, and take the place 
of-the sibilants, soft palatines, and dentals, and even of the labial con- 
sonants which are found in the more eastern and in some northern lan- 


guages. 
III. The following examples will prove the truth of this remark, 

Numeral 4. 
chatur, Sanscrit, 
chetyre, Russian, ben 
chehar, Persian, 
Poker? pacel, ᾿ ἡ ἢ 4, quatuor, in Latin. 
es 7 ir a : k, keathair, in Erse. 
pedwar, Welsh, ὶ 
petor, Oscan, P 
fidwor, Gothic, ξ 
fiuuar, Teutonic, 

Numeral 5. 
pancha, Sanscrit, p and ch 
penj, Persian, p andj ν } 
πέντε, Greek, mandT Peaaete ; q and q, quinque, Latin. 
πεμπε, « m and π 6 k and g, kuig, Erse. 
pump, Welsh, pandp 
fimf, Gothic, fandf 

Numeral 6. 
shash, Sanscrit, sh and sh 

sags ch and ch ἡ chwech 

Bee pee: speed ar become guttural, ἱ Welsh. 
poe τ (ὃ and &, &, Greek. 
saihs, Gothic, sands 


Numeral 7. 


saptan, Sanscrit, s and pt sand cht, Erse. 
septem, Latin, s and pt become hand ft, Persian. 


saith, Welsh, 5 and th (Ὁ and wr, Greek. 
Numeral 8. 

ashtan, Sanscrit, sht cht, ocht, aad 

hesht, Persian, sht become i pete ΡΝ 

wae. Welsh, th ht, ahtan, Gothie. 


1. Prichard, Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations, p. 40, seq. 
x 


242 NUMERALS. 


Numeral 10. 
Kk, eka, Greek. 
c, decem, Latin. 
Ξ ch, deich, Erse. 
dashan, Sanscrit, sh becomes PRUE Welsh. 
h, tehan, Teutonic. 
h, taihun, Gothic. 
Numeral 20. 
g, viginti, Latin. 
vinshati, Sanscrit, sh becomes 4 ὃ’ ae Welsh. 
Nuke εἴκοσι, Greek. 


ch, fichid, Erse. 


Numeral 30. 
trinshat, Sanscrit, sh becomes Me permeate Greels 
g,  triginta, Latin. 


Numeral 100. 


K, ἑκατόν, Greek. 
- Ὁ; centum, Latin. 
satam, Sanscrit, b Welsh 
Ἐπ Barsinn 8 ecomes Ὁ; cant, elsh. 
: a k, kett, Erse. 
h, hunt, Gothic. 


From the data here afforded the following inferences have been de- 
duced.! 


I. The Sanscrit, and some other languages holding a near relation to 
it in the form of words, abound in sibilants and soft palatine consonants. 
They have these letters in several instances in which cognate words in 
other languages have in the place of them gutturals, or hard palatines, 
or dentals. 

II. The Greek substitutes for the sibilants and soft palatines of the 
Sanscrit chiefly the tenuwes of the hard palatine or guttural class and of 
the dental, namely, « and 7. In several instances the Greek, particular- 
ly the Aolic, has π᾿ in the place of the Sanscrit soft palatine, or ch; as 
in πέμπε for pancha, réovpa (πέτυρα 1) for chatur. 

III. The Welsh makes nearly the same substitutions as the Holic 
Greek. It puts p for the soft palatine ch in the instances before men- 
tioned. It substitutes more generally hard palatines or gutturals (either 
c, i. e., k, or ch) for the soft palatines and sibilants of the Sanscrit. It 
has the aspirate guttural ch instead of the aspirate sibilant sh. It has th 
in the place of ct and pt. 

IV. The Erse substitutes for the sibilants and soft palatines of the 
Sanscrit, gutturals, as the hard c or k, as also in some instances the gut- 
tural aspirate ch. 


1. Prichard, J. δ. 


NUMERALS. 243 


V. The Latin displays nearly the same phenomena as the Erse. It 
puts c or g, equivalent to £, in the place of the letters above mentioned. 
Neither the Erse nor the Latin adopts the p of the Welsh and olic 
Greek, but they have ὁ or g instead of it, as in other instances where the 
Sanscrit has ch. 

VI. The Gothic and other Teutonic dialects resemble the Welsh and 
the AZolic Greek, except in the circumstance that they prefer aspirate 
consonants, as finfe for πέμπε or pump ; fidwor for pedwar or πέτυρ ; thri 
for trz. They likewise substitute the simple A in the place of palatines 
and sibilants in other languages, as may be seen in a variety of instances, 
as in the numerals, 6, 8, 9, 10,100. The Persic and the Greek lan- 
guages use the aspirate in some instances in a similar manner. 


More Special Analogies in the Cardinal Numbers. 


\ 1. 

I. In designating the number one a great diversity prevails among the 
Indo-Germanic tongues, owing to the circumstance of pronouns of the 
third person being employed to express it, and the wide scope thus af- 
forded by the early richness of their forms. 

II. The Sanscrit éka, the comparative of which we have reappearing 
in Greek in the form ἑκάτερος, appears to have arisen from the joining 
of the demonstrative stem ὁ with the interrogative ka ; which same ka 
unites likewise with api, ‘‘ also,” forming kém, ‘‘ any one,” ‘* whosoever.” 

III. The Gothic ain’s, from the theme aina, the same as the Ger- 
man einer, connects itself in origin with the Sanscrit defective pronoun 
éna, ‘‘ this one.” ΤῸ this same pronominal stem we may trace the old 
Latin form oinos, the accusative of which, oom, appears in the inscrip- 
- tion found in the tomb of the Scipios. From this oinos comes the later 
unus, by the common change of the old 6 into uw, with a lengthening of 
the vowel at the same time, in order to compensate for the 7 which is 
thrown out. 

IV. Besides the analogy pointed out in the preceding paragraph, the 
Latin wnus also shows a surprising resemblance to the Sanscrit tina-s, 
which properly signifies ‘‘ less” (compare the German wen-zg, “ little ;” 
wen-iger, ‘“‘less’’), and is placed before higher numbers in order to ex~ 
press diminution by unity ; as, ina-vinsati, “ nineteen,” in Latin unde- 
viginti ; tina-trinsat, “ twenty-nine,” in Latin wndetriginta, &c. 

V. The Greek év connects itself very probably with this same Sanscrit 
éna, and has lost its final vowel, like the Gothic aina, in the nominative 


3) 


masculine, namely, ain’-s. The Greek οἷος, “alone,” in Latin unicus, 
comes in all likelihood from an old form οἶνος, analogous to the old Latin 


oinus. 


244 NUMERALS. 


2. 


I. The theme in Sanscrit is dwa, which is naturally inflected with the 
dual endings. The Gothic has in place of this éwa, and as it dispenses 
with a dual, it inflects this theme like a plural, Nom. twai, twos, twa; 
Dat. twaim; Accus. twans, thwos; twa. With twai the form bai, “ both,” 
connects itself from the root ba. Dat. baim; Accus. bans. This ba is 
supposed to come from the Sanscrit wbha, stem obo. 

Il. In Greek and Latin, δύω, δύο, and duo, have changed the old w 
into τι, but have not parted with the end-vowel of the stem ; δύω agrees 
with the masculine dwa, found in the Vedas. In Sanscrit, the a of dwa 
becomes weakened into ὁ at the beginning of compounds ; as, dwimdéra, 
“having two mothers.” The Greek, where such a form as dF is im- 
possible, employs δὲ; as, διμήτωρ. ‘The Zend and Latin agree very re- 
markably in altering this dwi, since they throw away the d, and change w 
into ὁ by a hardening pronunciation. Hence we have in Zend lipaitis- 
tana, and in Latin biceps, bidens, &c. ᾿ 

III. In old Norse we find swar, which appears in thriswar, ‘three 
times,” and with which is connected the syllable ce, in the English twice, 
thrice, &c. This swar may be traced to var, which corresponds to the 
Sanscrit vara, and this latter indicates “‘time.”” Thus we have ékavara, 
“once,” and vdramvdram, “repeatedly.” Now from vara comes the 
Persian bar, also referring to time; as, bar-i, ‘once ;” and from this 
same source, in all probability, is derived the Latin termination ber, ap- 
pended to the names of months; as, Septem-ber, &c., meaning literally 
the seventh time-portion of the year ; Octo-ber, the eighth ; Novem-ber, 
the ninth, &c. 


3. 


I. The theme in Sanscrit, Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, and Slavonic is 
tri, for which we have in Zend and Gothic thri. 

II. The declension of this theme is in most of these languages quite 
regular, except that in Gothic, on account of the word being a mono- 
syllable, the 1 before the vowel-ending does not disappear, but becomes 
17, and hence we have the genitive ¢hri-e, and nominative neuter ¢thry-a. 

III. The Sanscrit and Zend, however, have, the former ¢ri, the lat- 
ter thri, only as a designation for the masculine and neuter. In the 
feminine they employ the Sanscrit ¢isras for tisaras, from the root tisar, 
and the Zend tisaro. 


4. 


I. The Sanscrit feminine theme is chatasar, which follows the analogy 
of tisar mentioned in the preceding paragraph, and the resemblance be- 


NUMERALS. 245 


tween the two is so striking as to lead +s at once to the supposition that 
chatasar is formed from ¢isar (itself a weakening of tasar) by the addi- 
tion of the particle cha, “and.” Viewing tasar as identical with the 
demonstrative stem in Sanscrit, we may obtain a glimpse of the earliest 
and most natural mode of counting ; namely, 1, this, that, and-this, &c. 

II. The Gothic fidvér connects itself with the Sanscrit chatvdr by the 
ordinary change of consonants. This form chatvér is the stronger, and 
chatur the weaker, one in Sanscrit. The Lithuanian ketwri may also be 
compared with the same; but still more clearly the Latin guatuor (i. e., 
chatvor). The Greek τέτταρ-ες (τέσσαρ-ες) connects itself with the Sans- 
crit chatvdr-as, the nominative masculine of chatvdr. In Pali the form 
is chattdr-6, and both this and the Greek τέτταρες gain the second ἐ by 
assimilation. 

III. The Zend converts the softer form chatur into chathru at the 
beginning of compounds, which agrees in a very striking manner with 
the Latin guadru in quadrupes, quadruplex, &c. 

IV. The adverbial 5, by which are formed in Sanscrit dwis, “ twice,” 
tris, “thrice,” is dropped in chatur, ‘‘four times,” for chaturs. The 
Latin drops the s in both three and four; as, ter, quater. 


” 


5. 


I. The Sanserit-Zend panchan is the theme, and the genders were 
not distinguished in this and the following numerals. Moreover, we 
have the nominative, accusative, and vocative always in the singular 
neuter form, whereas the other cases show plural endings ; as, genitive 
panchandm, in Zend panchananm. This irregularity in inflection pre- 
pares us for a total want of it in the Greek πέντε and Latin guinque. 

II. It is also worthy of remark, that the final nasal in panchan appears 
in none of the sister European tongues, whereas the n of saptan, navan, 
and dasan is found also in Lithuanian and Gothic. ‘The final 7 in the 
Sanscrit and Zend numerals was properly a later addition, and the origi- 
nal termination would seem to have been cha, “ and,” which occurred 
as a prefix in the case of the number four in Sanscrit. Analogous to 
this are both the Latin quinque, ending with que, ‘and ;” and the Greek 
πέντε, ending with the enclitic te. In pan-cha, therefore, the root pan 
will be euphonic for pam, and the final m,will be the neuter case-sign, 
while pa, as a pronoun, will be identical with ka, to which we have re- 
ferred in our remarks on the numeral one. ‘This interchange of p and k 
has already been alluded to, and we may compare the old Latin form 
pidpid for guidquid, as well as ποῖος for κοῖος, ἄς. 

III. From what has been premised, it would appear that the numeral 
five, when traced to its origin, meant, ‘and one,” indicating the one, 


X2 


246 ΠΝ 


namely, which, on being added to four, made up the number five. We 
may, however, derive panchan at once from the Sanscrit pani, “the 
hand,” and make the term refer to the number of the fingers on the hand, 
just as the word finger is to be traced, through the Gothic jiggrs (i. e., 
Jingrs) to the numeral βίη, i. e., fimf, “ five.” 


6. 


I. For the Sanscrit shash, the Zend has cswas, and it is highly probable, 
inasmuch as sh does not properly commence a syllable in Sanscrit, but 
requires ἃ & to precede it, that the original form in this latter language 
was kshash. 

II. In Latin, Greek, and German the guttural appears to have been 
inverted, and hence we have in Latin sex, evidently inverted from zes. 


Me 


I. The Zend has haptan, which closely resembles the Greek form ; 
the Lithuanian, on the other hand, has septyni, and the Slavonic sedmu. 
The m in septem and sedmz appears to have come in from the ordinal 
number, which in Sanscrit is saptama, nom. masc. saptama-s, and in 
Slavonic sedmyi. The same remark will apply to osmz, ““ eight,” and to 
the Latin novem and decem, in Sanscrit navama-s, dasama-s, “ninth” 
and “ tenth.” 

II. It is not probable that the final x of the Sanscrit cardinal forms 
changes to m in septem, ἕο. The change of m to πὶ is very frequent, 
especially at the end of words, in which case it becomes in Greek a ne- 
cessary alteration. But the change from tom is hardly ever met with. 


8. 


The termination aw in asht-au reminds us very strongly of the av in 
the Latin octav-us, of the oF in the Greek éydoF-oc, for ὄγδοος, and of 
the ow in the Teutonic dative ahtow-en. 


9. 

I. The Lithuanian has dewynz, the Slavonic devyatz. Both of these 
appear, at first view, altogether different from the forms that occur in 
the other sister tongues. On a closer inspection, however, we will find 
that they all agree, the nasal letter being converted in the Lithuanian 
and Slavonic numerals into the medial, just as we have Gpotdo¢ in Greek 
from the same source with the Sanscrit mrita-s, with which compare the 
Latin mort-uus. 

IJ. Etymologists deduce the Sanscrit navan from nava, ‘ new,” as 
indicating a new number after eight ; and they refer, in support of this 
etymology, to the Latin secundus, ‘“‘ second,” from sequor. 


NUMERALS. 247 


10. 


The Gothic ¢azhun involves two peculiarities of that language. In 
the first place, the letters ἡ and r never allow a pure 2 or u to precede 
them in Gothic, but always call in the aid of the guna, converting, there- 
fore, 2 into ai, and u into aw. In the next place, the old a does not every- 
where remain unaltered in Gothic, but is frequently, through the influ- 
ence of a liquid that follows after, converted into w, not only in the radical 
syllables, but also in endings. 


20—100. 


I. The increase by tens is éxpressed in Sanscrit by sati, sat, or ti, 
and in Zend by saiti, sata, or ti. ‘The words to which these terminations 
are appended are substantives with singular endings. 

II. The analogy is very striking in Greek and Latin as regards the 
termination é2, for which we have τί, τα, t2, ta. Thus, 


Sanscrit. Zend. Greek. Latin. 
20. | vingsata, visailt, εἴκατι," viginit. 
30. | tringsat, thrisata, τριάκοντα, ἐγιστηία. 
40. chatvaringsat, | chathwarésata, τεσσαράκοντα, | quadraginta. 
50. | panchasat, panchasata, πεντήκοντα, quinguaginta. 
60. | shashti, csvastt, é&HKOVTA, sexaginta. 
70. | saptaii, haptditi, ἑβδομήκοντα, | septuaginta. 
80. | asiti, ; iat ὀγδοήκοντα, octoginta. * 
90. | navatz, navaite, ἐνενήκοντα, nonaginta. 
100. | sata-m, saté-m, ἑ-κατό-ν, centu-m. 


III. The terminations satz, sat, sata, and t2, are shortened from dasati, 
dasat, and dasata, which are themselves derivatives from dasan, “ten.” 
To the same dasan are we to trace sata, the theme of sata-m, ““ ἃ hun- 
dred,” and with this sata-m the Greek κατόν connects itself, for ἑ-κατόν 
is literally “one hundred.” So the Latin centu-m points to the same 
source, and is, moreover, the connecting link for the Gothic hund and old 
High-German hunt, the k or hard ¢ of centum being expressed by the 
aspirate. 


1. Old form for εἴκοσι. 


248 PRONOUNS. 


Tabular View of the Ordinal Numbers. 


Feminine Gender. 


as Sanscrit. Zend. Greek (Vor) Latin. | Gothic. | Lithuanian. 
Ist|prathama |frathéma j|xpord |prima fruma pirma 
2d |dwitiya —_|bitya δευτέρᾷ |secunda fanthara — jantra 
3d |tritiya thritya τρίτά  |tertia thridjo’ trecia 
4th chaturtha |tdirya τετάρτᾷ |quarta | (fidvord0’)?/ketwirta 
5th/panchama |pugdha πέμπτα |quinta — |fimftd” penkta 
6th/shashtha —jcstwa ἕκτᾷ sexta saihst6’ —|szeszta 


7th/saptama |haptatha ἑῤδόμᾶ |septima |(sibundd’) |sekma 

Sthjashtam& jastéma ὀγδύόᾷ |octava |ahtudd’) |jaszma 

9thjnavama nauma évvata |nona niundd’ —_—|dewinta 
10th) dasama daséma |dexaTd jdecima_ |taihundo’ deszimta 
llth/ekadas& δδνδηάδβα ἐνδεκάτα undecimal(ainlift6’) |wienolikta 
20th|vinsatitama|visaititéma|eixooTa@ |vicesima | * * * ἃ * 'dwideszimta 


I. The Latin prima appears to come at once from the Sanscrit prath- 
amd, by changing a ἴο ὁ and dropping the middle syllable. The pra of 
prathamd points directly to the lolic πραΐ for πρό, and to the Latin 
pre. 

II. The Gothic frwma shows nearly the same analogy to prathama as 
the Latin prima and the Lithuanian porma. 


ἶ PRONOUNS. 
Tabular View of the Personal Pronouns 1 and Tuov. 
Singular. 
___ Sanserit. ἐδ νος Zend. Greek. | Latin. | Gothic. |Lithuanian.| Slavonic. 
Ε “gd jaham Ζζὅπι ἐγών lego [ik asZz az 
Z yee tam τούν τὰ thu [τὰ ty 
5 jmam, ma jmanm, ma μέ mé |mik j|manen |mja 
E>] ἢ twa, twa|thwanm, thwaj7é té thuk tawen {14 ὰ 
«3 4. maya manimi |mnojii 
ie τὰ ἢ tawimi |toboji 
So hee éuiv {mihi {mis |man  |mnje, mi 
2 mé, moi μοί a 
A ‘abhyomn τεῖν [Ὁ] |thus |taw 
thweé, te |thwdi, té, toi [τοί 
Jina me(d) 
ἘΠ mattas ἐμέθεν 
< \twat ᾿ |thwat te(d) 
twattas σέθεν 
(mame mana Ὁ μοῦ |mei ᾿ |meina/manens|mene 
gj mé, mé, moi 
τ ) tawa tawa Ted {tui theina|tawens | tebe 
twé, té thw6i, té, tdi 
Θ § mayi mei manijé |mnje 
" ‘wey: thwahmi tui tawijé |tebje 


1. The feminine gender is selected as showing the different analogies more clearly 


than the masculine. 
2. Supposed Gothic forms, constructed according to the analogy of the old H.-Ger 


PRONOUNS. 249 


Dual. 
Sanserit. Zend. | Greek. Latin. | Gothic. Lithuanian. Slavonic. 
g ; avam voi vit muddu m. va: f. vje 
> tyuvam σφῶϊ τ [104ἃ ' 
_(avam ugkis /mudu m. va: f. yje 
oj nau vot 
ARS ἜΣ 
< } yuvam igqwis |judu 
(vam Va0 σφῶϊ 
+3 § Avabhyam nama 
S ; yuvabhyam vama 
avabhyam νῶϊν ugkis |mum dwiem |nama 
+ ) nau νῶϊν nama 
AQ en σφῶϊν igqwis |\jum dwiem |vama 
vam vao σφῶϊν vama 
a ρου τῷ 
=< ¢ yuvabhyam 
_ (avayos ugkara |mumi dwiejii/naj& 
§ ) nau νῶϊν ' ͵ τος [μα] 
io) oe igqwara|jumu dwieji [να] 
yam vao σφῶν vaya 
3 ye, γαγὰ 
4) ὁ yuvayos | να] 
Plural. 
Sanscrit. Zend. |__Greek. Latin. j Gothic. |Lithuanian.) Slav. 
vayam yaem veis 
S ) asmé ἄμμες |nos |veis |mes_ | my 
> ) yayam yuschém 
yushmé yus ὔὕὔμμες |vos jyus | jus vy 
asman ἢ ἄμμε unsis |mus_ ᾿ ny 
8 = no ἢ nos | | ὃς 
< )yusman .] ὔμμε izvis | jus vy 
vas vo vos 
+3 § asmabhis nobis mumis | nami 
5 Srustim bis vobis jumis | yami 
asmabhyam ἄμμι (Vv) unsis | mumus} nam 
3 fas no nobis} ὦ]: nam 
Q } yushmabhyam|yusmaeibya| ὕμμι (v) izvis | jumus | vam 
vas vobis vam 
— § asmat nobis 
a ἢ yushmat yismat yobis 
asmakam ahmakém ἀμμέων | unsara| mfish | nas 
Ξ ) nas no nostri 
ὦ )yusmakam  j|ydsmakém ὑμμέων izvara | jasi | vas 
vas _ Ἰνὸ vestri 
g gasmasu Ὁ mususe] nas 
.Ξ ἀρ thiadsn jususe | vas | 


250 PRONOUNS. 


Remarks. 


I. The Indo-Germanic tongues all agree, after a remarkable manner, 
in forming the nominative singular of the pronoun of the first person from 
a theme altogether unlike that whence the oblique cases are deduced. 
The am in aham is only a termination, as in twam, and in the European 
languages, with the exception of the Greek and Latin, all traces of this 
ending disappear. In Avolic Greek we have ἐγών, which comes nearer 
the Sanscrit than the later form ἐγώ. In the pronoun of the second per- 
son, all the European tongues, including the regular Greek and the Latin, 
drop the ending am. It occurs, however, in dialective varieties, such > 
as the Beotian τούν, and the Doric and Laconic τύνη and tovv7, where 
traces of the am are very apparent. 

II. The oblique cases have in Sanscrit ma for the theme of the pro- 
noun of the first person, and twa for that of the second. These themes 
in some cases coalesce with ani, and become mé and twé. With the 
stem ma the Greek stem MO connects itself, and forms the basis of the 
genitive μοῦ and dative μοί. ‘The e in EMO arises from the strong ten- 
dency in Greek to prefix a vowel to stems beginning with a consonant ; 
as, for example, in ὄνομα, ddovc, ὀφρύς, ἐλαχύς, where in Sanscrit we 
have nama, danta-s, bhri-s, laghu-s. In MO or’EMO, the o interchanges 
with e, and hence we have ἐμεῖο, ἐμέθεν, for ἐμοῖο, ἐμό-θεν (compare 
πόθεν, ἄλλο-θεν, and the like), as also ἐμέο for ἐμόο, and ἐμεῦ, ped, for 
ἐμοῦ, μοῦ. In the AMolo-Doric forms ἐμεῦς, ἐμοῦς, the o is a later ad- 
dition (as in τεῦς, τεοῦς) and was brought in as a characteristic of the 
genitive, after the old genitive sign s, which in the o-declension stood 
not at the end, but in the middle (compare τοῖο for roovo), had complete- 
ly disappeared. 

III. The theme of the pronoun of the second person, namely, twa, as- 
sumes in Greek two forms, according as the a or w is dropped. In the 
former case we have ZY, in the latter ZO, and the o is interchanged 
with ε in σεῖο, σέθεν, and the like. 

IV. The Gothic weakens the a in ma to an ἢ, and contracts the va ot 
να to u, whence arise the two themes MI and THU. The Latin, like 
the Gothic, shows the a of ma weakened to ὃ, and hence we have mi-hi 
in the dative, where in Sanscrit we find ma-hyam. The accusative 
me is for mem, as hoste-m, from the theme hoséz, and the ablative me 
is for med, like the Sanscrit mat. The genitive mez is connected with 
the locative may-2 (euphonic for mé-2) in Sanscrit. From the form mei 
we would expect, by analogy, some such a form for the genitive of tu 
as ¢vet, from the Sanscrit ¢vay-2, but euphony changes the v after a con- 
sonant into wu, and at the same time rejects the vowel that follows, and 


PRONOUNS. 251 


hence we have tui. The analogy between #i-bi and the Sanserit tu-bhyam 
is too striking to need any comment. 

V. In almost all the Indo-Germanic tongues the nominative plural of 
the pronoun of the first person comes from a stem altogether unlike that 
of the singular, for the idea expressed by the personal pronoun I is not 
susceptible, strictly speaking, of plurality, since there is but one I, where- 
as the term we indicates merely one’s self along with others. Inthe Vedas 
we find the form asmé as a nominative plural, instead of the more usual 
Sanscrit vayam. This asmé comes from a theme asma, out of which 
last all the oblique cases in ordinary Sanscrit are formed ; and with the 
theme asma the Aolic ἄμμες, by assimilation for ἄσμες, closely connects 
itself, just as we have éupi, by assimilation for éoui, connecting itself 
with the Sanscrit asmi, “1 am.” The forms ἡμεῖς, ὑμεῖς, on the other 
hand, presuppose such themes as ἦμι, dt, where the weak ὁ takes the 
place of the Sanscrit final a. From stems in ὁ are also to be deduced 
the genitives dupé-wr, ὑμμέ-ων, for aypi-wv, ὑμμί-ων, and the datives ἡμῖν, 
ὑμῖν, for ἡμι-ιν, ὑμι-ιν. The accusative ἡμᾶς, vac, become in Alolic 
ἄμμε, ὕμμε, which later forms connect themselves at once with the San- 
scrit, asmdn, yushman (for asma-ns, yushma-ns), by a rejection of the 
case-suflix. ' 

VI. It will be seen by an examination of the table, that in Sanscrit 
nas and vas appear in the accusative, dative, and genitive. This cir- 
cumstance shows conclusively that the s cannot be a case-sign, and 
hence, reasoning from the analogy afforded by the Zend, we may regard 
nas and vas in the accusative as abbreviated from nasmdn and vasmdn, 
and in the dative and genitive from nasmabhyam, nasmakam ; vasmabhy- 
am, vasmakam. After removing the residue of each of these forms, we 
have na and va remaining as the chief element in either case of person- 
al designation, and from these latter come the dual forms nau and vam 
(for vax). 

VII. The principle on which nas and vas were sought to be explained 
in the preceding paragraph may also be extended to the Latin. The 
stems na and va would lead us to expect-in this language such themes 
as nu and vu (nd and vd), as also mi and vz for plural nominatives, and 
nos and vos for accusatives. But we find nos and vos already appearing 
in the nominative, and the final s maintaining its ground even in the pos- 
sessives nos-ter, ves-ter (for vos-ter). Hence the os in nos and vos can- 
not well be explained in the same way as the os, for example, in /upos, 
and we must therefore regard these two words, like the Sanscrit nas and 
vas, in the light of abbreviations or curtailments from some more extend- 
ed form, in which, very probably, the pronoun sma appeared. It is very 
singalar that we actually find traces of such a form in the syllable mez 


202 PRONOUNS. 


appended to various pronouns, as egomet, memet, lumet, nosmet, vosmet, 
&c., and this met connects itself readily with smat the ablative, from 
which we pass at once to the Sanscrit ablative plural, a-smat, yu-shmat. 
Now, as this last-mentioned case is employed also by the Sanscrit gram-_ 
marians as a species of ground-form for all cases and numbers, we may 
easily account for the free employment of met in the Latin tongue. 

VIII. The Greek dual has ΝῺ and ΣΦΩ as themes for the pronouns 
of the first and second person, and from these come voi and σφῶϊ. The 
peculiar form of v@i and σφῶϊ, as duals, has led to the supposition that 
the ὁ is a weakening of the a which originally formed the dual-ending of 
the masculine and feminine, and which a, in the ordinary declension, was 
changed to e. 


Tabular View of the Pronoun of the Third Person. 


Singular. 
Pracrit. Zend. Greek. | Latin. | Gothic. | Lithuanian. Slavonic. 
Acc. ooé, é, | se, | sik, sawen, | sja. 
Inst. sawimi, | sobojt. 
Dat. | sé, | hé, hoi, | οἷ, sibi, | sis, saw, sebje, si. 
Gen. | sé, | hé, hoi, | οὗ, sui, | seina, | sawens, | sebe. 
Loe. sawlje, | sebje. 
Remarks. 


I. The Sanscrit wants a substantive pronoun of the third person. 
That it originally possessed one, however, appears evident from the tes- 
timony of its European sister tongues, and especially from the circum- 
stance that in Zend λέ and ἠοῖ, and in Pracrit sé, were employed as the 
genitive and dative of the third person for all genders. The theme of 
this-pronoun in Sanscrit must have been sva, lengthened afterward to 
své, like mé from ma, and tvé from tva. 

Il. The existing form sva has the force of a possessive, and is used 
not only in the meaning of “his,” but also of “mine” and ‘ thine.” 
With this sva-s the Doric σφός connects itself, while σφεῖς, σφί-σι, in 
the plural is to be traced to a theme in ὁ, as σφι. ‘The apparent affinity 
between it and the dual of the pronoun of the second person is merely 
accidental. In the latter the o comes from an earlier Tt, whereas in the 
pronoun of the third person it is a part of the primitive form. 

III. In οὗ, oi, &, for σφοῦ, choi, σφέ, the last of which old forms has 
alone remained, and in which forms the Φ takes the place of the digam- 
ma σοῦ, &c., the ¢, as the representative of the digamma, necessarily 
disappears after the conversion of the o into an aspirate. 

IV. The Gothic in like manner throws out a Ὁ, and says sei-na, si-s, 
si-k, for svei-na, svi-s, svi-k. The Lithuanian and Slavonic follow in 


PRONOUNS. 253 


this pronoun the analogy of the second person, and distinguish it from 
the latter by the initial s for ¢. They also, like the Latin, Greek, and 
German, dispense with the nominative, since they use the pronoun re~ 
flexively ; and they employ the singular instead of the plural. 


Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 


I. The stem ta (feminine ta) signifies in Sanscrit “he,” “ this one,” 
“that one.” The Zend-form is identical, except that the middle mutes 
often take the place of the tenwes; as, for example, in the accusative 
singular masculine, where for ¢é@m we have dem, or, more frequently, dim. 
In Greek and German this pronoun has supplied the place of an article, 
a part of speech that is wanting in Sanscrit and Zend, as in Latin, Lith- 
uanian, and Slavonic. 

I. The stems το, Gothic tha; feminine τᾶ, τη, Gothic thd, correspond 
to the Sanscrit-Zend ¢a and ta, with which the Lithuanian demonstrative 
stem fa, in the nominative masculine tas, feminine ἐά, is completely 
identical. The Latin has no demonstrative pronoun from a similar stem 
which it employs by itself, if we except certain adverbial accusative- 
forms, as twm, tune (like hunc}, tam, tan-dem, tam-en, and certain deriv- 
atives from such a pronominal source; as, for example, éalzs, tantus, 
tot, totidem, toties, totus, &c. A demonstrative, however, of the form 
here referred to appears in the compound zste, and is declined with it, 
the first part of the compound, namely, zs, being an old unchangeable 
nominative masculine, the case-sign of which, as if unconscious of its 
origin, remains also in the oblique cases; as, istzws for ejustius, &c. 

III. In the nominative singular masculine and feminine the Sanscrit 
and, in surprising accordance with it, the Gothic, substitute an s for the ¢, 
which in Zend becomes an h, and in Greek the rough breathing. Thus 
we have in Sanscrit sa, sd, tat; in Gothic, sa, sé, thata; in Zend, ho, 
ha, tat, and in Greek, ὁ, ‘a, to (the Doric ἃ for 7). The early Latin em-. 
ployed a form in the accusative closely connected with the primitive stem ; 
namely, swm for ewm, and sam for eam, and used also sapsa as a nomi- 
native for sa-ipsa. There are remains of the old s-form also in the Gieek 
adverbs σήμερον and σῆτες, though here, since these compounds express 
an accusative, not a nominative meaning, the Attic τήμερον, τῆτες are 
more in unison with the Sanscrit usage, a being the general theme, and 
sa only that of the nominative. It is an anomaly in Greek when the as- 
pirate takes the place of the ¢-sound in the nominative plural also, as οὗ, 
ai. The Doric form is much more accurate, τοί, ταί, and harmonizes 
with the usage of the sister tongues. 


NG 


' 254 PRONOUNS. 


General Observations on the other Pronouns. 


I. The change from a tenuis to a middle mute has already been re- 
ferred to, and must again be mentioned as playing a very important part 
in comparative philology. Thus, for example, ὅδε is not compounded 
of 6 and dé, as is generally supposed, but the latter part of the word is 
evidently to be traced to the demonstrative stem 76, the vowel changing 
from o to ε, as in the vocative of the o-stem, and also in such accusatives 
as μέ, σέ, ἕ, &c. Inthe word ode, therefore, both parts of the compound 
are of similar origin, and we are reminded of the doubling of the pronoun 
in Sanscrit, Latin, and other tongues; as, y6 yas, “ quicunque ;” yan 
yam, ““ quemcunque ;” and in Latin, guisquis, quidquid, sese, &c. 

II. The principle alluded to in the preceding paragraph is farther il- 
lustrated by the Sanscrit neuter forms 2-dam, “ this,” and a-das, ‘ that,” 
where the d takes the place of ¢, just as in the Latin 7-dem, qui-dam, 
&c., the syllables dam, das, &c., being all traceable to the demonstrative. 
Examples of a similar kind occur in the Latin dum, dem-wm, don-ec, 
den-ique, &c. The adjective totus, on the other hand, retains the ¢ un- 
altered, and its primitive meaning evidently is, ‘this and this,” i. e., 
this and the other half, or the ‘‘ whole.” 

III. The pronominal i-stem, consisting merely of a simple vowel, ex- 
presses in Greek and Latin the meaning “he,” but in Sanscrit and Zend 
“this one.” In the two latter languages it has no declension of its own, 
but has only left behind certain adverbs, such as, itas, ‘‘ from here,” 
“from there ;”’ tha, ‘‘ so’? (compare the Latin zta), &c. We have also 
from the same pronominal root ὁ the derivatives itara-s, ‘‘ the other” 
(whose accusative zlera-m reminds us at once of the Latin zterwm), zd- 
risa, “such,” &c. The Latin zs enlarges its theme in many cases by 
means of a u or an 0, in feminines by an a; the ἢ also is converted into 
an 6, especially before vowels ; hence, as from the verbal root ἡ come eo 
and eunt, in opposition to 2s, it, umus, ites, bam, &c., so from our pro- 
nominal root come eum, €0, eorum, eos, and the feminines ea, ee, eam, 
earum. ‘To the primitive i-type there belong merely zs, 2d, the old forms 
im, ibus, the genitive and dative e-jus and e-2, and the locative 27. 

IV. The stem of the relative pronoun in Sanscrit and Zend is ya, fem- 
inine γᾶ. The Greek ὅς, #, 6, converts the initial y into an aspirate, a 
change that often occurs ; as in ὑμεῖς, for yushmé; ἄζω, from yag, ““ ἴο 
revere,” ἄς." 

V. The interrogative stem in Sanscrit, Zend, and Lithuanian is KA, 
from which came the Greek interrogative stem KO. This latter was 
preserved by the Ionic dialect, but was converted in the others, from 
the ease with which gutturals and labials are interchanged, into ΠΟ. 


PRONOUNS. 255 


The actual declension, however, of this KO or IIO was superseded by 
τίς, and we have therefore remaining of it only certain adverbs and de- 
rivatives ; as, κότε, πότε; κῶς, TOC; κότερον, πότερον (compare the 
Sanscrit kataras, “ which of the two’’); κόσος, πόσος ; κοῖος, ποῖος ; 
all which point clearly enough to the existence, at one period, of such a 
form as κός, «7, KO. This interrogative stem affords a basis, also, for 
those cases of the Latin interrogative and relative which belong to the 
second declension, namely, guod (compare the Zend kat), quo, and, in 
the plural, guz, quorum, guos. The neuter plural gue deviates from an- 
alogy, and ought to be qua. It is possible, however, that this gue may 
be the remains of an old dual, subsequently received as a plural, since 
it agrees precisely with the Sanscrit ké. The Latin feminine has, in its 
different cases, a Sanscrit-Zend feminine stem for its basis, namely, kd, 
and hence we compare guam with the Sanscrit kam; quarum with kd- 
sam; quas with kas. 

VI. The Gothic changes the & of the interrogative stem to an A, and 
as the gutturals are fond of uniting in this language with a v, it places 
this last-mentioned letter after the h, making thus HVA out of KA, and 
HVO out of ka. The Latin, like the Gothic, loves to place a euphonic 
τ after the gutturals, and hence the Latin QVO corresponds to HVA, in 
its departure from the Sanscrit KA; and so also aqVa agrees with the 
Gothic ahva, ‘‘a river,” just as ang Vis is related to the Sanscrit ahi-s, 
“Ca snake,” and the Greek ἔχις. 

VII. The interrogative stem kz also occurs in Sanserit, from which 
there appear to have been formed, in this same language, kvé, and, before 
the vocal letters, kid. This reminds us at once of the Latin forms quis 
and guid. That there existed at one time, in Sanscrit, a masculine 
nominative kis, analogous to the Latin quis, is proved conclusively by 
the compound forms makzs and nakis, which appear in the Vedas, and 
with the latter of which we may compare the Latin nequis. 

VIII. The Latin hic appears, notwithstanding its difference of mean- 
ing, to be derived from the same parent-source as guis and gui. It has 
the same peculiarity of declension, hu-jus like cu-jus, huic like οι, and, 
besides, the nominative plural neuter shows a strong analogy to the cor- 
responding part in guzs and gui, namely, gue. The final ὁ in hic appears 
to be shortened from ce, which remains in hicce (more correctly hice), 
and is analogous to que, pe, quam, and pram, in quis-que, quip-pe, quis- 
quam, quis-piam, all which terminations are nothing more than different 
forms of the Latin gue. And as these terminations, on being appended 
as suffixes to the interrogative stem, change its meaning and part with 
the interrogation, the same thing operates in hic. The earlier form ap- 
pears to have been cic, ca@c, coc, and traces of the initial ¢ still remain in 


256 PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. 


ci-s, ci-tra, just as in ul-cra we have the remains of the opposite pronoun 
ule (olle), deprived of its last syllable. 


Pronominal Adverbs. 


I. Locative adverbs are formed in Sanscrit by the suffix tra, which 
connects itself immediately with the theme; as, a-tra, “here ;” ta-tra, 
“there 1 ku-tra, ‘‘ where ?”’ &c. To this same source are the Latin ad- 
verbs ci-tra, ul-tra, to be assigned. Locative pronominal adverbs are 
formed also in Zend by the suffix dha, which reminds us at once of the 

oes Ξ # 
Greek termination Ya, in ἔνϑα, ἐνταῦϑα, &c. 

II. In Sanserit, by means of the suffix tas, adverbs are formed not only 
from pronominal stems, but also from substantives and adjectives, and 
these adverbs denote the removal from one place to another; sometimes, 
also, they take the place of the ablative. Analogous to this, in some re- 
spect, is the Latin termination tus in celi-tus, “from heaven ;” divini- 
tus, fundi-tus, &c. The final s appears to have changed to r in 2g7-tur, 
and the first part of the word connecting itself with the Sanscrit cha, 
“here,” we have for the primitive meaning of igitur, ‘‘ from here,” i. e., 
“on these grounds,” or “therefore.” 

III. In Sanscrit the termination tas is sometimes converted into dhas, 
from which last come the Greek ϑὲν and the Slavonic du. Thus, 


Sanscrit. Greek. Slavonic. 
ku-dhas, πό-ϑεν, ot-ki-du. 
ta-dhas, τό-ϑεν, οἱ-ἰ- αἴ. 
ya-dhas, ὅ-ϑεν, ja-dt-sche. 


IV. The locative adverbs hic, illic, istic, were originally datives, of 
whose primitive form we have a trace remaining in rurt. The enclitic 
c being added to fz (changed from huz), alli, and istz, converted them into 
adverbs, and at the same time distinguished them from datives. 

V. Adverbs of time are formed in Sanscrit by the suffix da; as, kad, 
“when ;” tadda, “then ;” ya-dd, ‘‘at which time,” &c. The Greek ter- 
mination τὲ, in similar adverbs, appears to be analogous to this; as, 
πότε, τότε, OTE, &c., and we may also find a trace of the Sanscrit termi- 
nation in the Latin quan-do. 


Verb. 


I. One system of personal terminations belongs to all Sanscrit verbs, 
and the differences of conjugation which are distinguished by gramma- 
rians consists in the changes which the verbal roots undergo. The fol- 
lowing is an example displaying the terminations of the present tense, 
as they are subjoined to the verbal root ἐμ, “to strike,” in Latin tundo. 


1. Prichard’s Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations, Ὁ. 94, seq. 


VERB. OL 


1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 
Sing. Tudami, Tudasi, Tudati. 
Dual. Tudavas, Tudathas, Tudatas, 
Plur. Tudamas, Tudatha, Tudanti. 


II. This verb belongs to those classes of roots which insert a vowel a 
between the theme and the personal endings. Others subjoin these end- 
ings immediately. The personal endings alone are as follows: 


1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 
Sing. -ml, -sl, -ti. 
Dual. -vas, -thas, -tas. 
Plur. -mas, -tha, -antl. 


III. The same terminations belong to the future tenses as to the pres- 
ent; but those tenses which have the augment prefixed to the verb have 
the personal endings, as in Greek, in a more contracted form. The fol- 
lowing is the first preterit of the verb ¢udamz, corresponding closely to 
the Greek imperfect : 


1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 
Sing. Atudam, Atidas, Atudat. 
Dual. Atudava, Atudatam, Atudatam. 
Plur. Atudama, Atudata, Atudan. 


IV. There is another form of the indicative tenses in the active voice, 
namely, that of the reduplicated preterit, formed by rules nearly the 
same as those of the perfect in Greek verbs. The reduplicated preterit 
of the verb ἐμά or tudami is as follows, and will remind us at once of the 
Latin tutudi. 


lst Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 
Sing. Tutodda, Tutoditha, Tutdda. 
Dual. Tutudiva, Tutudathus, Tutudatus. 
Plur. Tutudima, Tutiida, Tutudus. 


V. The following examples are from another verb, lagami, ‘to say,” 
with the corresponding forms of the Greek verb λέγω following immedi- 


ately after. 


PRESENT. 

1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 
Sing. Lagami, ὶ Lagasi, Lagiti, 

λέγω, λέγεις, λέγει. 
Dual. ~ Lagavas, , Lagathas, , Jagatas, ὶ 

a ΟΣ AE λέγετον, λέγετον. 
Plur. Lagamas, ὶ Lagatha, ὶ Laginti, 

λέγομεν, λέγετε, λέγοντι, ἱ 

Doric. 


Y2 


258 VERB. — 


AUGMENTED PRETERIT. 


Ist Person. 2d Person. 
Sing. Alagam, ᾿ Alagas, , 
ἔλεγον, ἔλεγες, 
Dual. Alagava, Alagitam, , 
aig wean ἐλέγετον, 
Plur. Alagdma, ὶ ΑἸαρᾶία, 
ἐλέγομεν, ἐλέγετε, 
ΒΕΡΟΡΙΙΟΑΤΕΡ ῬΕΚΕΊΤΒΕΙΤ. 
lst Person. 2d Person. 
Sing. Lalaga, ὶ Lalagitha, , 
8 λέλεχα, λέλεχας, 
Dual. Lalagiva, ὶ Lalagithus, ὶ 
a ΜΈ ria λελέχατον, 
Plur. Lalagima, Lalaga, ὶ 
λελέχαμεν, λελέχατε, 
Potential Mood. 
PRESENT. 
Ist Person. 2d Person. 
Sing. Lageam, Lage, 
λέγοιμι, λέγοις, 
Plur. Lagema, ὶ Lagete, 
λέγοιμεν, λέγοιτε, 
IMPERATIVE. 
2d Per. 3d Per. 2d Per. 
Sing. Laga, , Lagatu, Plur. Lagata, ὶ 
λέγε, λεγέτω. λέγετε, 


3d Person. 
Alagat, , 
ἔλεγε. 
Alagatam, 
ἐλεγέτην. } 
poe 
ἔλεγον. 


3d Person. 
Laliga, 
λέλεχε. } 
Lalagitus, 
λελέχατον. ὶ 
Lalagus, ὶ 
λελέχασι. 


3d Person. 
Laget, ᾿ 
λεγοι. 
Lageyuh, ᾿ 


λέγοιεν. 


3d Per. 
Lagantu, 


λεγόντων, 


Altic, &c. 


VI. The Sanscrit infinitive is preserved in the first supine of the Latin 
verb ; as, palitum, ‘alitum ;” sanitum, “ cinctum” (old form “ cingi- 


tum’’), 


VII. The present participle of the masculine gender is closely analo- 


gous to that of the Greek and Latin ; as, 


Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. 
Lagan, Lagatah, Lagate, Lagantam, 
Sing. λέγων, λέγοντος, ᾿ λέγοντι, ὁ λέγοντα, 
legens,) legentis, legenti, legentem, 
NN. and A. Gen. Dat. 
Lagantas, Lagatam, Lagadbiah, 
Plur. λέγοντες, λέγόντων, ἰ λέγουσι, ἰ 
legentes, legentium, legentibus, 


Abi. 


Lagati, 
legente. 
Abl. 


Lagatsu, 


legentibus. 


VERB. 259 


VIII. The present participle of the middle and passive voices is also 
nearly the same in Sanscrit and Greek ; as, 


Lagamanas, Lagamanah, ὶ Lagamanam, ὶ 
λεγόμενος, λεγομένη, λεγόμενον. 
And the Sanscrit past participle has been preserved in Latin; as, 
Lagatas, Lagatah, Lagatam, ὲ 
legatus, legata, legatum. 


Verb Asmt, “ I am,” and its cognates. 


PRESENT. 
1. In Sanscrit. 
lst Per. 2d Per. 3d Per. 
Sing. asm, asi, asti. 
Plur. smah or ᾿ stha, santl. 
smus, 


2. In Greek (old forms). 


Sing. ἐμμί, ἐσσί, ἐστί. 
Plur. εἰμές, ἐστέ, ἐντί. 
3. In Latin. 

Sing. esum or , es, est. 

sum, 
Plur. sumus, estis, sunt. 
4. In Persian. 
Sing. am, ly, est. 
Plur. im, id, end. 


5. In Slavonian. 
Sing. yesm’, yesl, yest. 
Plur. yesmi, yeste, sut’ for jesut’. 


6. In Lithuanian. 


Sing. esmi, essi, esti. 
Plur. esme, este, esti. 
7. In Gothic. 

Sing. im, is, ist. 
Plur. siyum, siyuth, sind. 
Remarks.' 


I. It is at once evident that all these are slight modifications of the ἡ 
same element, conjugated by means of the same suffixes. The variation 


1. Prichard’s Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations, p. 164. 


260 VERB. 


between the different languages does not exceed such as exists between 
proximate dialects of the same speech. 

II. The imperfect tense is not to be traced with so much regularity. 
It is in Sanscrit as follows : 


Sing. asam, asis, asit. 
Plur. asma, asta, asan. 


In Latin, esam was probably the old form of eram, since s was often 
changed into r, and esam would regularly form essem in the subjunctive, 
which is actually found. Thus, 


Sing. esam, esas, esat. 
‘ . 
Plur. esamus, esatis, esant. 


ΠῚ. The second form of the verb, in the arrangement adopted by the 
Sanscrit grammarians, is the potential. The potential form of the verb 
asmi bears a strong analogy to the old potential szem in Latin, and also 
to the Gothic potential. Thus we have, 


Singular. 
Sanscrit. syam, syas, syat. 
Latin. siem, sies, siet. 
Gothic. siyan,! siyais, siyat. 
Plural. 

Sanscrit. syama, syata, syus. 
Latin. siemus, sietis, sient. 
Gothic. siyaima, slyaith, siyaina. 


IV. It may be observed that all these words have lost the initial vowel 
a@ or é, and that, if it were restored, the preceding forms would bear a 
near analogy to ἔσαιμι, which, though not extant, would be a regular de- 
rivative from ἔσομαι. 

V. The Sanscrit verb asmi has no future, but it has been conjectured, 
with great probability, that syami, the adjunct by which a future tense 
is formed in attributive verbs, is, in fact, only the obsolete future of the 
verb asm. A fact strongly favouring this hypothesis is, that a tense of 
this verb exists in Sanscrit, and is recognised as such, which is only used 
in forming the preterperfect tense of certain verbs. “Asa, dsitha, asa, 
is termed the third preterit or aorist of asmi. It is joined with karayam, 
from the verb karomi, “ facio,” “ creo,” and forms kadrayamasa, “‘ fecit,” 
“ creavit.”” 

VI. There is only one other tense of the verb asmi, which is the im- 
perative. It is as follows : 


1. Erroneously considered by Hickes a future tense. 


VERB. 261 


Sing. asani, aidhi, astu, 
Plur. asanya, sta, santu. 


Compare astu with ἔστω, esto; sta with ἐστέ, este, and santu with sunto. 
The second person aidhi bears a strong analogy to some of the modifi- 
cations of the verb substantive in Celtic. ’ 

VII. There is also in Sanscrit the verb bhavami, from the root bhu, 
allied to the old Latin verb fwo, and in the sense of orirt, nasci. With 
this may be compared the Greek φύω, and the verb ¢o be in English, to- 
gether with the Celtic bydh, the Russian udu, and the Persian budemt. 
The Sanscrit has preserved the whole of bhavami, whereas the cognate 
verbs are defective in most other tongues. 


Remarks on the Endings of Verbs. 
First Person. 

I. The characteristic of the first person, in its original shape, is m in 
Sanscrit as well for the plural as the singular. In the first person dual, 
however, this m changes to a v. 

II. The full expression of the ending of the first person singular, in 
the active voice, is mz, and this is found in all Sanscrit verbs without 
distinction. In Greek, however, the number of verbs in μὲ is compara- 
tively small, being only about 200. The rest of the Greek verbs have 
entirely suppressed this ending, and their final ὠ, as well as the Latin ὁ 
of all conjugations, answers to the Sanscrit ὦ, which ὦ, in such forms as 
bodh-G-mi, tud-d-mi, &c., belongs neither to the root nor the personal 
ending, but characterizes merely the class to which the verb belongs. 
When this consists of a short a, or of a syllable ending in a, this a is length- 
ened before m and v if a vowel follow, and hence we have bodh-a-mz, 
bodh-d-vas, bodh-d-mas, but bodh-a-si, bodh-a-ti, bod-a-nti, &c. 

III. The Greek takes no part in this lengthening of the vowel, but 
gives τέρπ-ο-μεν as corresponding to the Sanscrit tarp-d-mas. In the 
singular, however, the form τέρπ-ω-μι, answering to ¢arp-d-mt, may per- 
haps have existed ; and, if so, it is very probable that the w became short- 
ened in the passive and middle voices by reason of the greater stress that 
was laid on the ending of the verb. 

IV. The passive and middle ending in jaz clearly shows that all verbs 
in Greek had originally μὲ as the termination of the first person active, 
for wat arises from μὲ, just as oat, ται, νται, do from σι, τί, ντί, and no 
τέρπομαι could ever have come into the language except from a τέρπωμε 
Or τέρπομι. 

V. We have, in what has just been said, a remarkable confirmation of 
the fact that the different members of the great family of Janguages mu- 


262 VERB. 


tually illustrate and complete each other, since the richest of them have 
not reached us in a perfect state. While the ending jaz still remains 
firm in the modern Greek passive, the corresponding Sanscrit form lay 
already in ruins at the early period when the Vedas were composed ; 
while, on the other hand, Homer employs but seldom the form in wc, 
out of which have arisen his numerous present and future forms in jaz, 
although it is universal in Sanscrit, and is even employed at the present 
day in many Lithuanian verbs ; such as esmi, “I am;” dumi, “1 give ;” 
eum, “I go;” démi, ‘I place,” &c. 

VI. It has been already remarked, that those tenses of the Sanscrit 
which have the augment prefixed to the verb have the personal endings, 
as in Greek, in a more contracted form. With these the ending mi be- 
comes merely m, and this curtailed termination changes in Greek, by the 
laws of euphony, tov. Thus we may compare the Sanscrit atarp-a-m 
with the Greek ἔτερπ-ο-ν ; adada-m with édidw-v ; and ada-m with ἔδω-ν. 
So, again, dad-yam is analogous to διδο-ίην, and dé-yam to δο-ίην. In 
the first aorist active the Greek has lost entirely the characteristic of the 
person ; as, ἔδειξα, whereas in Sanscrit we have adiksam. ‘The earlier 
form ἔδειξαν, of the first person, appears to have come from a still older 
one, ἔδειξαμ, as is indicated by the first aorist middle, édevSau-nv. 

VII. The Latin, on the other hand, shows a strong attachment to the 
ending in m; as, amabam, amem, amarem, &c., all which point to the 
existence, at one period of the language, of verbs in mi. ‘Traces of the 
m termination in the present tense are still found in swm and inguam, 
the original forms of which were, undoubtedly, swmz and inquami. 

VIII. As regards the origin of the ending for the first person, it may 
be remarked that mz is, in all probability, weakened from ma, which lat- 
ter form is, in Sanscrit and Zend, the theme of the oblique cases of the 
personal pronoun. Hence the syllable m?, in dadd-mi, bears the same 
analogy to ma that the ὁ in cz, in the termination of the Latin twbi-cin, 
does to the a in the true form of the root, can, from cano. 'The change 
from mi to m is a still farther weakening, and would seem to have been 
occasioned by the stress of the voice, laid, in pronouncing, upon the aug- 
ment or initial syllable. 

IX. The Sanscrit ending mas, in the first person plural, connects itself 
at once with the Latin mus; as, ama-mus, amaba-mus, &c., and also 
with the old Greek termination μὲς, for μὲν ; as, φέρο-μες, δίδο-μες, ἵστα- 
usc, for φέρο-μεν, δίδο-μεν ; ἵστα-μεν. ‘This plural ending in mas 15 
equivalent to m-as, where m indicates the pronominal stem, and as the 
plural ending. 

X. In the dual the Sanscrit vas becomes va in the augmented tenses, 
in analogy with the plural endings mas and ma. This », in the dual, is 


VERB. 263 


a softening from m, and the change must have taken place at an early 
period, since the same peculiarity in the dual ending may be traced in 
the Gothic, Slavonic, and Lithuanian. 


Second Person. 


I. The Sanscrit pronominal stem tva or tve assumes different forms in 
its combination with verbal themes. The ¢ either remains unaltered, or 
else becomes th or dh; or, like the Greek ov, is converted into an s. 
The v, moreover, either remains or is dropped ; while the a is retained 
unaltered, or is weakened to 2, or else entirely disappears. ‘The pronom- 
inal form appears fullest in the middle voice, since this part of the verb 
loves the weightier endings, and therefore avoids, more than any other, the 
curtailing of the pronouns. 

II. The full ending of the second person present of the dual is thas, 
and in the plural tha. But there are strong reasons for believing that 
the second person plural originally ended in thas, and that from this arose 
the dual ending thas ; and, farther, that in the course of time thas of the 
plural dropped its s, and thas of the dual its long vowel. On the suppo- 
sition that the second person plural ended originally in thas, we can 
readily see the analogy of the Latin ts, as well as the correctness of 
Thiersch’s remark in relation to the hiatus, namely, that for the ending 
τε in Homer, in the second person plural, we ought to read τες, from the 
analogy of μες for μὲν in the first person. 

III. The Lithuanian has preserved the ending sz of the second person 
singular, in common with the Greek, only in the substantive verb, where 
es-si and the Doric éc-ci show clearly their common lineage. In the case 
of other verbs, however, the two languages part company, the Lithuanian 
everywhere retaining the 1 but parting with the s, the Greek pursuing a 
directly opposite course. The Latin and Gothic agree with the Greek. 
Hence we may compare the Lithuanian dud’-2 with the Sanscrit dada-s?, 
the Slavonic da-si, the Greek δίδω-ς, the Latin da-s, the Gothic vigz-s. 
With regard to Greek verbs in ὦ, it would seem that the ¢ of σι, after 
having been dropped, has gone back and united itself to the preceding 
syllable ; and as, for example, yevérecpa comes from yeverépia, and μέ- 
Aawa from μελάνια, μείζων from μεζίων, χείρων from χερίων, ἀμείνων 
from ἀμενίων, so also τέρπ-ει-ς is formed from τέρπ-ε- σι, corresponding 
to the Sanscrit ¢arp-a-s?. 

IV. We find also in Sanscrit two other endings of the second person, 
dhi and tha, the former appearing in the imperative, the latter in the re- 
duplicated preterit. The first of these, namely, dhz, reminds us of the 
termination 9 in Greek imperatives; as, ἔστϑι, κέκραχ-ϑι, ἄνωχ-ϑι, 
φά-ϑι, &c. The second presents, at first view, a striking analogy to 


264 ; VERB. 


the Greek ternzination a, but it is in reality a deceptive one, since ϑ' on 
other occasions corresponds to the Sanscrit dh, and arises from the influ- 
ence of the preceding o, just as, in the passive and middle, all the active 
personal endings in τ become ὃ by the influence of the o preceding. 

V. The Sanscrit tha will remind us then of the Greek @a, although 
these two terminations are not in fact identical, since the Greek 3a comes 
from dha, and the d has been converted into a & by the influence of a 
preceding o, just as the r of the active personal endings is converted 
into in the passive and middle by the insertion of σι The o of the 
active voice, however, belongs to the root, and hence we must divide as 
follows: ἦσ-ϑα, οἷσ-ϑα (for oid-Ya). 

VI. In Latin the termination sé corresponds to the Sanscrit ending 
tha, the a being weakened to an 1, and an s being inserted before the ἐν, 
the aspirate also disappearing. Thus we may compare the following : 

/ 


Latin. Sanscrit. 
dedi-sta, dadi-tha. 
Steti-sti, tasthi-tha. 
momord-isti, mamard-i-tha. 
tutud-isti, tutod-i-tha. 


Third Person. 


I. The pronominal stem ta has, after the analogy of the first and sec- 
ond persons, weakened its vowel to an ὁ in the unaugmented tenses, and 
in the augmented ones has laid it aside entirely. The ¢, however, in 
Sanscrit and Zend, undergoes, the termination ws excepted, no change 
whatever, whereas the ¢ of the second person becomes, as we have just 
seen, t, th, dh, or s. The Greek, on the contrary, retains the 7 of the 
third person only in the substantive verb ἐστί, Sanscrit astz, and on other ἡ 
occasions either has oz, as in δίδωσι, or €t, as in τέρπει. 

II. The form δίδωσι resembles more the Sanscrit second person dadd- 
si than the third person daddti, and it is only distinguished from its own 
second person δίδως by the latter dropping the z. ‘That originally, how- 
ever, even in the ὦ conjugation, the third person singular ended in τί, 
is proved by the middle and passive ending Taz, since τέρπεται bears the 
same relation to tép7-e-re that δίδοται does to δίδωτι. The form rép- 
set, in fact, arises from the rejection of 7, just as τίθει comes from τίς 
Gert, δίδοι from δίδοθι, κέρᾳ from κέρατι, οἴκοι from οἴκοθι, &c. 

III. In the augmented tenses, on the other hand, the Greek lays aside 
entirely the T sound, and agrees in this with the Pracrit, the Gothic, and 
Slavonic ; whereas the Latin retains the ¢ throughout the verb, and in 
this, as in many other instances, displays far more of an Indian character 
than the Greek. 


VERB. 265 


IV. For the purpose of making the plural, an 2 is inserted before the 
pronominal characteristic. After this x the Gothic places the middle 
mute d, where other languages have the tenuis ¢. Hence we may com- 
pare the Gothic sind with the Sanscrit santi, the Zend hentz, the Latin 
sunt, and the old Greek form (0) evri. 

V. The Sanscrit always inserts an a before an 71, unless an a already 
exist there, from the verbal class or radical syllable. Hence we have 
tarp-a-nti, like τέρπ-ο-ντι ; tisht-a-nti, like ior-a-vt1, ὅς. The Greek 
Got, from ἀντί, in such forms as δεικνύ-ασι, ἴ-ασι, τιθέ-ασι, διδό-ασι, &c., 
finds here a remarkable support, since it is hardly possible to suppose 
that these were merely accidental anomalies. For, even if such forms 
as τιθέαντι, διδόαντι, ἴαντι, δεικνύαντι, remain at the present day in 
none of the Greek dialects, still there can be no doubt but that the a@ 15 
lengthened in order to supply the place of the rejected v, and that oz is 
put for τέ, as everywhere in the third person. 

VI. Some Sanscrit verbs, on account of the weighttof the reduplication 
which they receive in what are called the special tenses, endeavour to 
lighten their ending, and therefore throw out πὶ from the third person 
plural, shortening, at the same time, a longa in the root. Hence we have 
dada-ti, ‘‘ they give ;” gahati, “they leave.” There can be no doubt but 
that, in the earlier state of the language, these forms were dada-nti, ga- 
ha-nt2, and that, therefore, the Doric διδό-ντι, τιθέ-ντι, &c., give us the 
primitive forms of the Greek tongue. 

VII. The Sanscrit verbs, moreover, not merely those of the reduplicated 
class, but those also of the second conjugation, corresponding to the Greek 
verbs in μὲ, throw away, in the middle voice, the πὶ from the third person 
plural, in order to give more stress to the personal ending. Thus we 
have cim-até for cim-anté. This change has very much the appearance 
of having taken place after the separation of the different tribes of the hu- 
man family from their common home. ‘The Greek, for example, preserves 
the old form, and retains the nasal letter as a badge of the plural, with 
still more firmness in the middle and passive than in the active, giving 
not only τέρπ-ο-νται for the Sanscrit tarp-a-nte, but also δίδ-ο-νται, τίθε- 
νται, for the Sanscrit dadaté, gahaté, &c. The Greek, however, has 
found, by another process, the means of lightening the too great weight 
of the middle ending, by employing merely vtaz where we would natu- 
rally look for avraz ; saying, for example, δείκνυ-νται, and not δεικνύ- 
avrat, although δείκνύ-ασι would lead us to expect this latter form. 

VIII. The rejection of a from such a form as δείκνυ-(α)νταῖι, is like 
the dropping of 7 from the optative, where, on account of the weight of 
the personal ending, the passive and middle voices form from διδοίην of 
the active, not διδοιήμην, but διδοίμην. The Ionic dialect, however, 

Aa 


266 VERB. 


has in the third person plural sacrificed the » to the a, and in this respect 
harmonizes closely with the Sanscrit. Hence we have αταῖ in Ionic, 
formed from avraz, as in Sanscrit até from anté. 

IX. The Slavonic changes the nasal in many of its verbs to a short τ) 
and this τι, coalescing with a preceding vowel, forms ou or %, so that ve- 
2titj, from vezontj, is surprisingly like the Greek ἔχουσι, from ἔχονσι for 
ἔχοντι. ‘The Bohemian wezau, on the other hand, has preserved the 
old a of the Sanscrit vah-a-nti and Gothic vig-a-nd, which in the Latin 
vehunt becomes a u, through the influence of the nasal, in opposition to 
the 2 of the other persons (vehis, vehit, &c.). 

X. In the augmented tenses the final vowel in néz or anti disappears, just 
as it does from @2, δῖ, mz of the singular; and with this vowel the person- 
al characteristic ¢ also disappears, in accordance with a law of euphony, 
which forbids the union of two consonants at the end of a word. The 
Greek, which cannot endure a final τ, goes on a step farther than the 
Sanscrit, and removes the 7 from the third person singular also. Hence 
we have évep7-e answering to atarp-a-t, and, where the resemblance is still 
more clearly shown, ἔτερπ-ο-ν agreeing with atarp-a-n (for atarp-a-nt). 
The Greek aorists, however, which make ἂν in the third person plural, 
agree better with the Sanscrit form, since the sibilant has preserved the 
a from being converted into 0. Thus we have ἔδειξ-αν, corresponding to 
the Sanserit adikshan. 

XI. Inthe unaugmented tenses the Sanscrit terminates the dual in tas; 
in the augmented ones, in dm. The former of these corresponds to the 
Greek tov ; as, τέρπ-ε-τον, Sanscrit tarp-a-tas. The other ending, tam, 
has divided itself in Greek into the two terminations τὴν and τῶν, of 
which the first is the more prevalent one, while the latter is confined to 
the imperative. Hence we have ἐτερπ-έ- τὴν, corresponding to atarp-a- 
tam; ἐδεικ-σά-την to adik-sha-tam; but τερπ-ἔ-των to tarp-a-tam. 
Hence it follows that the distinction between τὸν on the one hand, and 
τῆν, Tov on the other, in the dual number, is of very early origin, and 
is not, as Buttmann supposes, a later formation of the prose language. 
Four places occur in Homer, it is true, where τὸν takes the place of τῆν, 
but in three of these it is occasioned by the metre, and the fourth is, 
therefore, only a solitary instance. The same remark will apply to the 
augment, which is not to be viewed merely as a later addition because 
it is sometimes suppressed in Homer, since it is common, in fact, to both 
the Greek and the Sanscrit. 


VERB. 267 


Remarks on the Passive and Middle Endings. 


I. The passive and middle endings distinguish themselves from those 
of the active by a greater degree of fulness, though the mode of forming 
them is not the same in all the sister tongues. 

II. The Sanscrit, Zend, and Greek agree in lengthening out a final z, 
in the unaugmented tenses, by the insertion of an a, and form, therefore, 
μαι out of jut, σαι out of σι, ταί out of τι, and in the plural vraz out of 
ντι. Inthe Sanscrit and Zend the vowels a andz then coalesce into an é, 
which answers to the Greek au. 

III. The Gothic parts with the ὁ out of the diphthong ai, and has, 
therefore, in the third person, da for daz; in the second, za (euphonic for 
sa) for zaz; and in the third person plural, nda for ndai. ‘The first 
person singular and the first and second persons plural are lost, and were 
supplied by the third. 

IV. The Sanscrit and Zend, in both the unaugmented and the aug- 
mented tenses, parted with the pronominal consonant of the first person 
singular, and along with it have also lost the a of the verb-class in words 
of the first conjugation. Hence we find bddé for béd-d-mé. Compare 
the following : 


SANSCRIT. ZEND. GREEK. Goruic. 
1. S. dhar-é, bair-é, φέρ-ο-μαι, Ἡ ΟΥ ΚΟ, Alaa 
2.8. bhar-a-sé, bar-a-hé, φέρ-ε-σαι (φέρ-ει) bair-a-za. 
9. S. bhar-a-té, bar-at-té, φέρ-ε-ται, bair-a-da. 
4. P. bhar-a-nté, bar-ai-nté, φέρ-ο-νται, baw-a-nda. 


V. In the augmented tenses the concluding diphthong ai loses, in 
Sanscrit and Zend, the vowel 1, like the Gothic in the unaugmented ones, 
and the a which remains appears in Greek as an 0. Hence we have 
égép-e-To answering to abhar-a-ta in Sanscrit and bar-a-ta in Zend ; and 
in the plural ἐφέρ-ο-ντο answering to abhar-a-nta in Sanscrit and bar-a- 
nta in Zend. 

VI. In the second person singular of the augmented tenses, the San- 
scrit has thds where we would expect to find sa; as, abhod-a-thas. 
That there was, however, an ending in sa also, is proved by the Greek 
ἐδίδο-σο, as opposed to édido-ro, and likewise by ha in Zend, which ap- 
pears in places where we would expect sa in Sanscrit, the h in Zend 
being here substituted for s. 

VII. The ending thas, of which we have spoken in the preceding par- 
agraph, affords a curious theme for discussion. It connects itself very 
evidently with the active ending tha, of which mention has already been 
made, and is, no doubt, derived from it by lengthening the vowel and 
appending the sibilant, which would seem to have been added for the 


268 . VERB. 


_ purpose of indicating the second person. Now, if this be so, either the 
first or the second of the personal indications imbodied in ¢ha-s must have 
been used to designate the individual on whom the action is exerted or 
for whose advantage it is performed, a meaning inseparably connected 
with the middle voice. Hence, in the Sanscrit adat-thd-s, ‘thou gavest 
to thyself” (i. e., thou didst take), either ἐλ stands for “thou,” and 5 
indicates “to thyself,” or vice versa. If we allow this, and if in the 
Greek first person the v of the ending μὴν (Doric μᾶν) be organic, that 
is, not a later unmeaning appendage, but an expressive element bequeathed 
by the earliest periods of the language, then ἐδιδόμην properly signifies, 
“1 gaye to myself,” whether it be that the subjective relation is expressed 
by μὴ (ua) or by the vy. To complete the analogy, we may take for the 
third person the ending ¢a-t found in the Vedas, and where the person 
is doubly expressed. Regarding this remarkable ending as a middle one, 
we have the same resemblance between it and the Greek ending ΤῸ as in 
the case of tepm-é-Tw and larp-a-tat, ἐδίδω and adadat, &c.; and, to make 
the case still stronger, we may call in the aid of the Bantian inscription, 
where the old Oscan imperatives end in a d, as licitu-d for liceto, estu-d for 
esto y all which would tend to show that the primitive form of the Greek 
ending to was Tor, and that the final + was rejected for euphony. The 
Sanscrit- Veda ending ¢a¢t will express the action of the third person upon 
himself, like the other endings in the case of the first and second persons. 

VIII. The first person plural in Sanscrit ends in mahé, but in Zend 
it terminates in maidhé, from which latter comes evidently the Greek 
ending μεθα, which drops the ὁ like the Gothic forms. 

IX. The second person dual ends, in the unaugmented tenses, in athé, 
the third in até. In the augmented tenses, on the other hand, the second 
person ends in dtham, the third in dfém. There is every reason to sup- 
pose, however, that these endings were originally tathé and tate, tathém 
and talém. ‘The initial syllable ta became o in Greek, and the follow- 
ing ὁ was converted into an aspirate through the influence ofthe o. Hence 
arose in this latter language such forms as δίδο-σ-θον, ἐδίδο-σ-θον, &c. 

X. In the Latin verb, the final r of the passive voice would appear to 
owe its origin to the reflexive pronoun, and to have been changed from s 
by a favourite principle of conversion. In those persons which end with 
a consonant, ἃ connecting vowel was necessary, and the w was brought 
in, probably through the influence of the liquid; as in amatur, amantur. 
The imperative forms amato-r and amanto-r require no connecting vowel. 
In amamur the s of amamus disappears before the reflexive, and the 
more readily as it does not express any personal indication. In amer, 
on the other hand, the personal characteristic itself is given up, since 
amemr could not stand, and amemur was required in the plural for ame- 


VERB. 269 


musr. In amaris, ameris, &c., we have either a metathesis for amasir, 
&c., or else the personal characteristic s could not withstand the strong 
inclination to become an 7 between two vowels; and this having taken 
place, the retlexive preserved unaltered its original s. In the imperative 
amare the reflexive has preserved its own vowel, and if we change r back 
again to s, we have in se the accusative of the simple pronoun. So, also, 
the old infinitive amarver is nothing more than amare-er by metathesis for 
amare-re (i. €., amare-se). 

XI. The form amamini deviates from all analogy, as will readily be 
perceived, and presents no small degree of difficulty. It is probable that 
amamini is the nominative plural masculine of a passive participle, and 
was joined to estis, so that amamini stood originally for amamuni estis, 
as in Greek we have τετυμμένοι εἰσί. The Latin suffix is -minu-s, and 
corresponds to the Greek -uevoc and the Sanscrit -mana-s. Now when 
this participle, forced, as it were, out of its ordinary path, changed to 
amamini from amaminus, this amamini, so employed in the second per- 
son plural, appears to have remained in that person as a kind of unalter- 
able form, and to have been regarded, in the ordinary usage of the Latin 
tongue, as having a verbal termination. ‘The consequence was, that the 
substantive verb was dropped, and amamini became employed for both 
genders. In support of the opinion that amamenus was originally a pas- 
sive participle, we tnay cite the forms alumnus and Vertumnus, which 
are both evidently of participial origin. So, also, terminus, ‘‘ what is 
stepped over ;” femina, ‘‘she that bears” (middle participle), the root 
being fé, whence we have fetus, fetura, and fecundus ; and, finally, gem- 
ini for genimi, ‘they who are born at the same time.” 

XII. But how are we to explain the imperative amaminor? Is the r 
identical with that in amor, amator, amantor? The answer must be in 
the negative, since to express the passive or reflexive meaning here by 
appending a pronoun would be unnecessary, as the participial suffix has 
this employment. The best way is to seek for a plural case-ending in 
amaminor, as we did in amamini. Now it happens, luckily enough, 
that the Eugubian inscriptions supply us with what we want, for we 
there find βιαίου for subacti, screhitor for scripti. This plural ending 
in or agrees very well with the Sanscrit as (a--as) and Gothic os, where- 
as the Latin ὁ has forced its way in from the pronominal declension. 
Still farther, the nominative singular of the second declension masculine, 
in the Umbrian dialect, ended in ὁ, and we still find orto for ortus, and 
subatu for subatus. Now it is very remarkable that we find, in the re- 
mains of early Latinity, imperatives singular ending in mino ; as, famino 
in Festus, and prefamino in Cato. We have also fruimino in an in- 


scription given by Gruter, “7s eum agrum nei habeto nei fruimino.” 
Y2 


270 VERB. 


Here fruimio indicates the third person, a circumstance which tends 
very clearly to prove it a participle that may be applied to either person. 

We have now reached the limit which we had proposed to ourselves 
in the prosecution of the present inquiry, and cannot but entertain the 
hope that the result will prove satisfactory to every one who will bestow 
upon the subject his candid attention. The analogies existing through- 
out the Indo-Germanic chain of languages are not the mere results of 
accident. To assert this would be the height of absurdity. They prove, 
on the contrary, the affiliation that exists between all these individual 
tongues, as well as their common’ descent from one parent source, what- 
ever this source may have been, or in whatever region of the globe it 
may have been prevalent. 


THE END. 


First Latin Lessons, containing 
the most important Parts of the 
Grammar of the Latin Language, 
together with appropriate Exer- 
cises in the translating and wri- 
ting of Latin, for the Use of Be- 
ginners. 12mo. cae 

First Greek Lessons, containing 
the most important Parts of the 
Grammar of the Greek Language, 
together with appropriate Exer- 
cises in the translating and wn- 
ting of Greek, for the Use of Be- 
ginners. 12mo. 

A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK Lan- 
GUAGE, for the Use of Schools and 
Colleges. 12mo. 

A System or GREEK Prosopy AND 
Metres, for the Use of Schools 
and Colleges; together with the 
Choral Scanning of the Prome- 
theus Vinctus of Adschylus, and 


With Portraits on steel. 


ΧΈΝΟΡΗΟΝ. (Anabasis, translated 
by E. Spelman, Esq., Cyrope- 
dia, by the Hon. M. A. Cooper.) 

Tuer OraTIons or DEMOSTHENES. 
Translated by Thomas Leland. 

Sattust. Translated by William 
Rose, M.A. With Improvements. 

Cassar. Translated by William 
Duncan. With a Portrait. 

Cicero. The Orations translated 
by Duncan, the Offices by Cock- 
man, and the Cato and Lezlius by 
Melmoth. With a Portrait. 

Vireit. The Eclogues translated 
by Wrangham, the Georgics by 
Sotheby, and the A‘neid by Dry- 
den. Portrait. 

AEscuy.us. Translated by the Rev. 
R. Potter, A.M. 

SopHocies. Translated by Thom- 
as Francklin, D.D. Portrait. 
Evuriripes. ‘Translated by the 
Rev. R. Potter, A.M. Portrait. 
Ovin. Translated by Dryden, Pope, 

Congreve, Addison, and others. 

Horace. ‘Translated by Philip 
Francis, D.D. With an Appen- 
dix, containing translations of va- 
rious Odes, &c. And 


Bound uniformly, but each work sold separately. 


CLASSICAL WORKS 
PUBLISHED BY HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW-YORK. 


ANTHON?S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS. 


The following works, already published, may be regarded as specimens of the whole 
_ series, which will consist of about thirty volumes. 


the Ajax and C&dipus Tyrannus 
of Sophocles; to which are ap- 
pended Remarks on the Indo-Ger- 
manic Analogies. 12mo. 
SALLUST’s JUGURTHINE WAR AND 
ConsPIRACY OF CATALINE, with 
an Englsh Commentary, and 
Geographical and Historical In- 
dexes. Sixth Edition, corrected 
and enlarged. 12mo. Portrait. 
Czesar’s COMMENTARIES ON THE 
ἀλη War; withthe first Book 
of the Greek Paraphrase ; with 
English Notes, critical and ex- 
planatory, Plans of Battles, Sei- 
ges, &c., and Historical, Geo- 
graphical, and Archeological In- 
dexes, Map, Portrait, &c. 12mo. 
SELECT ORATIONS OF CICERO, with 
an English Commentary, and His- 
torical, Geographical, and Legal 
Indexes. 12mo. Witha Portrait. 


warner 


CLASSICAL LIBRARY. 


Puzprus. With the Appendix of 
Gudius. Translated by Christo- 
pher Smart, A.M. Portrait. 

TuucipipEs. Translated by Wil- 
liam Smith, A.M. Portrait. 

Livy. Translated by George Ba- 
ker, A.M. With a Portrait. 

Heroporus. ‘Translated by the 
Rev. William Beloe. Portrait. 

Homer. Translated by Alexander 
Pope, Esq. With a Portrait. 

Juvenau. ‘Translated by Charles 
Badham, M.D, F.R.S. New Ed- 
ition. To which are added, the 
SaTIRES oF PERSEUS. 

Pinpar. ‘Translated by the Rev. 
C. A. Wheelwright. And 

ANACREON. Translated by Thomas 
Bourne, Esq. 

Piutarcn’s Lives. Translated 
from the original Greek, with 
Notes, critical and historical, and 
a Life of Plutarch. By John 
Langhorne, D.D., and William 
Langhorne, A.M. A new Edition. 

A Lire or WasHinctTon. In Latin 
Prose. By Francis Glass, A.M., 
of Ohio. Edited by J. N. Rey- 
nolds. 12mo. Portrait. 


eng) Ry ok 
Co a 
ited δ . 


ἌΝ eee 
oh Soy 


Rane a ὴ 


᾿ 
| 


᾿ 
aul 
1] 
4 
[ 


University of California 
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
Return this material to the library 
from which it was borrowed. 


REBELS 16799 
YAN 2 1 i999 


VIR I 


Ἂ 
4 AC iV ny “᾿ 1 2000 


MAR 2 4.2000 


EE TD 


1158.0 


UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 


πὰ 


rt 


hay thnk deg 


γόνα ἐμ εν eet 


+75 


(stoke 


rand 
Yet, 


ee eee 
a ας στ ο- 


